Jinx: Between A Squeeze🤝 And A Crack ⛓️‍💥 – part 2

Please support the authors by reading Manhwas on the official websites. This is where you can read the ManhwaJinx  But be aware that the Manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. Here is the link of the table of contents about JinxHere is the link where you can find the table of contents of analyzed Manhwas. Here are the links, if you are interested in the first work from Mingwa, BJ Alex,  and the 2 previous essays about Jinx  The Secrets Behind The Floors and Between A Squeeze And A Crack – part 1

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining Manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

The Power of Voice

In the first part of this essay, I lingered on two gestures that never fully entered language: the squeeze of a hand (chapter 87), and the destruction of black glass under Baek Junmin’s foot. (chapter 87) Both moments operate under pressure, yet they belong to radically different economies. One gathers force inward to protect, contain, and care. The other expels force outward to fracture, dominate, and erase. The biggest difference is not intensity, but direction—and whether the other is held, or destroyed.

What remained implicit, however, was something more unsettling. In both cases, movement begins with voice.

In the bed scene, the sequence is precise. The champion whispers first. (chapter 87) He asks for strength and luck (chapter 87). Kim Dan answers with a gesture, the offered hand accompanied with a wish: (chapter 87). Only then does the squeeze occur. Words initiate connection; the body confirms it. Speech and gesture align. Pressure becomes care.

In the other scene, words are also present (chapter 87) —but they are refused. Baek Junmin is denied any possibility of reply—no space to answer, to justify himself, or even to speak back. (chapter 87) The screen interposed between them (chapter 87) functions as both a physical and symbolic barrier: it delivers judgment without permitting response. Deprived of dialogue, Junmin is pushed out of language altogether. What remains available to him is not speech, but the body. His answer therefore does not come in words, but through the hand (chapter 87) and then through the foot. (chapter 87) Not as dialogue, but as rupture.

Read this way, the attack on the television screen becomes fully intelligible. (chapter 87) The violence is not misdirected; it is precisely directed at the medium that silences him. The screen is the site of exclusion, (chapter 87) the object that speaks at him while preventing him from speaking back. Striking it is not an attempt to destroy an image, but to break through a barrier—to replace blocked language with immediate, corporeal force.

And now, my avid readers comprehend the illustration for Between a Squeeze and a Crack The champion’s voice represents a turning point. The title displays this difference. In both moments, the champion’s voice carries weight. What changes is not the force of the words, but the space in which they fall—and whether anyone is willing, or able, to answer them.

Part II begins at the moment when this difference becomes irreversible.

An Invisible Revolution: The Rising of the Dragon

Something changes in episode 87. And that shift does not begin with shouting, provocation, or scandal. It begins with voice seeking alignment.

Before the interview (chapter 87), before the challenge (chapter 87), the champion turns around. (chapter 87) He looks—not at the crowd, not at the institution, but at Kim Dan. The gaze matters. It establishes a circuit. Like a phone call finally answered, it places both on the same wavelength. Only then does the question come. (chapter 87) Here again, language and body are aligned. (chapter 87) Kim Dan answers—first with a nod, then with words. The response is clear, immediate, and embodied. And what follows is decisive: the champion raises his arm. (chapter 87)

He does not wait for the referee. He does not wait for the jury. He does not wait for the organization.

This gesture is easy to overlook. It is not aggressive. It is not loud. Yet it is quietly revolutionary. When contrasted with his previous matches (chapter 15) (chapter 40) (chapter 51), its meaning sharpens. For the first time, Kim Dan no longer occupies the position of fan or witness. He functions as judge and jury. 😮 And the champion acts accordingly. He declares himself the winner. (chapter 87)

Authority shifts before exposure occurs.

This is the missing step. Validation has already taken place. (chapter 87) Legitimacy is no longer awaited; it has been secured within the relationship itself. What follows is not a request for recognition, but its declaration. (chapter 87) Doc Dan is the one turning Joo Jaekyung into a champion, into the Emperor. And I doubt, MFC noticed this revolutionary gesture.

Therefore it is not surprising that shortly after the champion takes the microphone. (chapter 87) Joo Jaekyung is no longer a puppet or zombie, but a man with a heart and voice.

And the microphone is not incidental. By taking it, the dragon deliberately secures visibility, recording, and irreversibility. But more importantly, he seizes narrative control. (chapter 87)

The microphone is the institution’s tool. (chapter 46) It regulates turn-taking, determines who may speak, in what order, and under which framing. As long as it remains in the moderator’s hand, speech is mediated, filtered, and contextualized. Questions lead; answers follow. Meaning circulates vertically.

By removing the microphone from that circuit, the champion disarms the moderator. (chapter 87) The interview collapses. What remains is not dialogue, but unilateral address. This is why the moderator’s only possible response is an apology. (chapter 87) He no longer moderates; he reacts. He cannot redirect the statement, soften it, or translate it into spectacle. He can only acknowledge that something has escaped containment. The apology is not moral—it is procedural. It marks the moment the institution loses authorship.

What was once private and contained now enters public time without mediation. The champion is no longer being narrated (chapter 57); he is narrating. He does not answer a question (chapter 87) —he establishes a position. (chapter 87) And because this occurs live, the statement cannot be re-sequenced, reframed, or quietly absorbed later. In this moment, authority shifts again—not from fighter to organization, but away from the organization entirely. The champion speaks, as if MFC and CSPP were already secondary. The conflict no longer belongs to the apparatus that stages it. Wait a minute… CSPP? What is that?

This logo only caught my attention in the latest episode. However, it was already present in the beginning, but barely visible. (chapter 14) Yet, CSPP appears more and more insistently (chapter 87), even in the cage (chapter 87), contrary to before. (chapter 15) Either you only see the C or the name is placed out of the frame. (chapter 40) Yet it remains unexplained. What does it stand for in the world of Jinx? A sponsor? A broadcaster? The story never defines it explicitly—and that absence matters. What goes unnamed is often what exercises the most power. I will elaborate about it further.

Exposure, then, is not the cause of rupture. It is its consequence. The rupture occurs earlier, at the moment the champion looks for doc Dan’s gaze and opinion. That’s when the narration changes hands. Thus he raised his arm. What was once private and contained now risks exposure. (chapter 87) Hence the behavior of the wolf is filmed. At the same time, doc Dan appears much closer to the spotlight and the camera. Thus I deduce that in the future, doc Dan is about to enter into the spotlight. Some Jinx-philes are already speculating that his face could have been noticed by the cameraman and as such by the institution MFC or the antagonists.

This matters because the system surrounding him—MFC, CSPP, broadcast commentary, and the managerial logic embodied by Park Namwook (chapter 36) —depends on mediation. Delay. Scoring. Interpretation. The quiet redistribution of meaning after the fact. As long as nothing is said outright (chapter 69), control remains possible. Once speech becomes public, control becomes fragile.

The live broadcast sharpens this rupture. (chapter 87) Live means witnessed. And once witnessed, meaning no longer belongs to a single institution. It circulates among viewers: patients at the hospice (chapter 87), people in the seaside town, a public that exists before commentary can shape it.

Even the visuals insist on this distinction. When red, green, and white are mixed (chapter 87), they neutralize one another. The result is a muted, earthy tone—balance achieved through cancellation. That palette dominates the opening of the episode. It signals containment and fragile harmony. (chapter 87)

Baek Junmin’s shoe tells a different story. (chapter 87) The same colors appear, but they do not blend. They exist side by side, unresolved. Rage, greed, jealousy, emptiness—none neutralize the others. In chromatic terms, this is not balance but erosion. Because red and green are complementary opposites, their refusal to merge points not toward power, but toward self-destruction.

So now the question is no longer why Joo Jaekyung spoke. His speech was anticipated. In fact, it was partially scripted. The system expected resentment, accusation, even open hostility toward Baek Junmin—and in that sense, the champion’s words remained within the frame that had been imagined for him. His anger was legible, manageable, and therefore harmless.

The failure lies elsewhere. What happens when speech is anticipated—but its emotional and physical consequences are not? What happens when words fail to remain governable once they enter circulation? When images detach from their managers? When words no longer stabilize power, but instead generate rupture and conflict?

Part II addresses these questions sequentially: first through the fight and its language, then through the broadcast and mediation, and finally through the asymmetry of responses it produces.

Between a squeeze and a crack lies the instant when pressure stops circulating quietly and begins to transform the field itself. This part of the essay is about that instant—and about what happens when containment gives way to exposure.

The Fight as Language: Technique, Tempo, and Control

Before the speech, before the microphone, before the question that pretends to offer a choice, there is the fight itself. (chapter 87) And the fight already answers the questions the system hopes to postpone. What we see in the cage is not merely a contest of strength, but a clash of communicative regimes. How one fights here is inseparable from how one speaks, evades, provokes, or withholds.

Arnaud Gabriel’s strategy is immediately legible. He does not seek resolution; he seeks accumulation. (chapter 87) His movement privileges distance, tempo (chapter 87) and visibility. That way he gives the impression that he is superior to the former champion. The middle kick appears not as a finishing tool (chapter 87), but as an instrument of disruption—enough to score, enough to interrupt rhythm, never enough to end the exchange. The rest of his offense follows the same logic: repeated punches to the face (chapter 87), the hands, the shoulder. Targets chosen not for collapse, but for points. Not to silence the opponent, but to keep him talking through damage. The choice of targets is not arbitrary. The hands and the shoulder are not neutral zones. They are sites of vulnerability that presuppose knowledge. Arnaud Gabriel does not fight, as if he were discovering his opponent in real time; he fights as if he were acting on prior information. (chapter 82) He anticipated a diminished MMA fighter at the end of his career who would train at the hotel gym. His punches repeatedly return to the same areas—not to finish, but to aggravate. Not to silence, but to extract fatigue.

This matters because these are not weaknesses produced inside the cage alone. (chapter 87) The shoulder carries the memory of surgery and recovery. The hands mediate both offense and defense; exhausting them degrades reach, timing, and confidence. And breathlessness (chapter 82)—noticed earlier during training—signals something even more fragile: limits that are physiological, not tactical.

What the fight reveals, then, is a second layer of mediation. Gabriel’s strategy appears reactive, but it is in fact anticipatory. (chapter 87) It aligns disturbingly well with what had already circulated outside the match: commentary about tension, exhaustion, time away from competition. Whether through media narratives, observation, or informal channels of intelligence, the opponent’s body has already been translated into information.

This confirms something the system prefers not to name. In Jinx, fighters do not enter the cage as blank presences. They arrive already annotated. (chapter 47) Already discussed. Already framed. Gabriel’s reliance on point accumulation is inseparable from this logic. (chapter 87) He does not need to dominate the body; he needs to activate its known limits and let the scoring apparatus do the rest.

Seen this way, the fight mirrors the economy of speech that surrounds it. Information circulates before confrontation. Weakness is spoken elsewhere, then reenacted physically. The opponent is not answered directly; he is managed.

Against this backdrop, Joo Jaekyung’s refusal to continue circulating (chapter 87) —his decision to close distance, to counter decisively, to end the exchange rather than prolong it—appears less like impatience than resistance. He does not correct the narrative. He interrupts it.

This is important. Gabriel’s fight is structured around being seen. He “circles”, he lands, he retreats. He performs control without assuming responsibility for outcome. The commentators name it explicitly: (chapter 87) if he sticks to this strategy, he can rack up points and win by decision. Victory here does not come from transformation, but from endurance within the rules. It is a fight designed to be judged, mediated, interpreted later.

Under this logic, victory does not belong to the fighter who transforms the exchange, but to the institution that interprets it. This is not new. In episode 47, Park Namwook (chapter 47) articulates the same principle explicitly: not a knockout, not a decisive end, but a strategy that stretches time, drains energy, and leaves judgment in the hands of referees and juries. (chapter 51) The fight is no longer about what happens between bodies, but about who controls evaluation. And that’s how they could rig the match between Baek Junmin and Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 51) without ever appearing fraudulent.

By encouraging endurance, point accumulation, and delayed resolution, authority shifts away from the fighters and toward referees and juries. Decisiveness becomes a liability. Ambiguity becomes profitable. Read in this light, the director’s remark about young fighters lacking fighting spirit and being arrogant (chapter 70) acquires a different meaning. What he condemns as arrogance is not a moral failure, but a structural adaptation. These fighters have learned that they do not need to finish fights with a knockout. They only need to prolong them—to survive them—because the system will finish the sentence for them. Therefore, the moderator’s commentary during the match introducing the new Korean fighter takes on a clearer function. (chapter 71) He frames the rookie as someone “waiting for the right timing,” subtly suggesting a coming knockout rather than prolonged survival. The language is important: it reassures the audience that decisiveness still exists within the system, that power is merely deferred—not absent.

But this is precisely where the narration fails. The moderator’s interpretation is not an analysis of what is happening in the cage; it is a reassurance directed outward, toward spectators who still expect resolution. (chapter 71) The director is not persuaded. Hwang Byungchul reads the situation differently. He recognizes stiffness, fear, and overreliance on structure—not composure, not strategy. Where the moderator sees patience, the director sees hesitation. Where commentary insists on strategy, experience detects rigidity and lack of instincts.

This discrepancy matters. It exposes the gap between institutional narration and embodied knowledge. Commentary works to preserve belief in the system’s fairness and coherence; the director’s reaction reveals how deeply fighters have been trained to survive judgment rather than risk transformation. The moderator speaks to maintain the illusion of control. The director sees through it because he understands what a fighter looks like when he is no longer fighting to win, but to last.

Read this way, Arnaud Gabriel is not an anomaly but a template. His method externalizes power. By avoiding resolution, he transfers authority away from the cage and into the system that counts, frames, and decides. The longer the match, the greater this discretion becomes.

Under this light, the absence of strategic advisors for the match in Paris is no oversight. (chapter 81) It is an assumption: that the outcome no longer requires athletic intervention. The champion is treated as a finished product, a celebrity whose role is to endure visibility, not to alter the terms of the fight itself.

And this is precisely how Arnaud Gabriel behaves outside (chapter 82) and inside the cage. (chapter 87) Publicly, he is courteous. Measured. Even complimentary. (chapter 82) His mockery arrives only after contact has been broken—after the bell, after the exchange, after safety has been restored. (chapter 82) He remarks, not as confrontation, but as commentary. Like his fighting style, his speech avoids commitment. It is designed to sting without escalating, to destabilize without consequence. Gabriel never needs to raise his voice because the system will finish his sentence for him. His confidence does not announce itself; it is delegated. He hides arrogance and cynicism behind smiles (chapter 82), gentle and polite gestures, and tactical distance— away from the spotlight, away from overt confrontation. His restraint is not humility, but alignment. He performs civility so that judgment, narration, and authority can be outsourced to the institution. That’s why for him, fighting is strongly intertwined with fun and he sees himself more as a star than as an athlete. He is definitely influenced by MFC. Hence we can say that his suit mirrors his mind-set. Gabriel’s suit does not soften his presence; it disciplines it. The patterned fabric signals rigidity rather than elegance—structure over fluidity. It mirrors his fighting style: calibrated, rule-bound, resistant to improvisation. Nothing about his appearance invites rupture. Everything is designed to hold form.

Baek Junmin operates according to the same economy, even if his temperament is different.

Like Gabriel, he relies on intermediaries. (chapter 52) He lets others speak, provoke, circulate images, manage money, create pressure. (chapter 54) His power does not come from direct address, but from displacement. When he does appear, it is rarely to argue. (chapter 49) It is to smirk, to whisper, to apply pressure obliquely. In both cases, the logic is identical: control is preserved by never being fully present.

What distinguishes Joo Jaekyung in this fight is that he refuses this grammar. (chapter 87)

In the first round, his so-called inability to land a hit is not simply frustration or decline. (chapter 87) It is more observation. He allows the opponent to speak first—to reveal the structure of the exchange. (chapter 87) Gabriel runs, scores points, performs mastery. The system recognizes this as competence. (chapter 87) But competence is not the same as authority. The main lead was simply waiting for the right time.

The shift comes with the back kick. (chapter 87)

A back kick is not a display technique. It is a counter. It requires timing, proximity, and commitment. It is thrown not to accumulate points, but to end conversation. (chapter 87) When it lands, it collapses distance. It forces the opponent inward. And crucially, it targets the center of the body—not the face that earns applause, but the core that sustains movement.

What the kick takes away is not balance alone, but breath. (chapter 87) This matters. Breath is what allows speech, rhythm, and continuity. By striking the abdomen, Joo Jaekyung does not silence Arnaud Gabriel symbolically; he silences him physiologically. The cough is not incidental. It is the visible sign of a system failure. The “eagle”—the aerial, circling, point-accumulating fighter—cannot stay aloft once the diaphragm collapses. Flight gives way to gravity.

The follow-up matters even more. After the back kick, Joo Jaekyung closes in (chapter 87) and delivers an uppercut. (chapter 87) This is not escalation; it is completion. Where Gabriel sought to keep the fight open, Joo Jaekyung compresses it. He refuses the long exchange. He refuses circulation. He refuses to wait for judgment. His strategy is not to be evaluated later, but to be undeniable now.

The back kick strips Arnaud Gabriel of breath. (chapter 87) The uppercut strips him of orientation. (chapter 87)

Once the diaphragm collapses, Gabriel is no longer capable of regulating posture or timing. The uppercut intervenes at precisely that moment—not to add force, but to resolve imbalance. It lifts a body that can no longer stabilize itself and interrupts any attempt at recovery. What follows is not resistance, but collapse. The eagle does not land; it falls. Arms and legs fail at once, and with them the capacity to stay airborne. (chapter 87) This is not silence imposed from outside, but silence produced by gravity. Once the body crashes, breath cannot return, and speech has nowhere to perch.

This distinction matters. Gabriel’s entire mode of fighting—and speaking—depends on continuity: light contact (chapter 87), controlled retreat, smiling commentary, damage spread thin enough to remain narratable. From my perspective, pain, for him, has always been something deferred (spread across rounds), translated (into points, commentary, statistics) and mediated (by rules, referees, judges, replay). (chapter 87) But the uppercut ends that translation. Crucially, it is Joo Jaekyung who calls this strike a “tap.” (chapter 87)

The word matters. By naming the uppercut this way, the champion reframes violence from the inside. He is not minimizing the impact; he is exposing a hierarchy of force. What appears decisive to the audience is, for him, secondary. The real rupture has already occurred with the loss of breath, with the back kick (chapter 87). Compared to that, the uppercut is merely punctuation.

This inversion reveals how far he has moved beyond a point-based or spectacle-driven economy of fighting. The strike that looks spectacular is not the one that matters most. The decisive action is the one that interrupts breath, rhythm, and continuity — the one that makes speech, posture, and recovery impossible.

After it lands, Gabriel does not speak. He does not smile. He does not reframe. He remains grounded, silent, and exposed. (chapter 87) This is why the moment feels disproportionate. It is not simply that Gabriel is hurt; it is that he appears unprepared for pain that interrupts language rather than ornamenting it.

The protagonist’s fighting style mirrors his communicative behavior exactly: alignment. (chapter 87)

Where Gabriel and Baek Junmin rely on deferral, Joo Jaekyung insists on alignment. Where they speak around conflict (chapter 74) (chapter 82) (chapter 87), he speaks into it. Where their power depends on systems that can reinterpret outcomes, his depends on moments that resist reinterpretation. It looks as though the athlete has internalized surprise as a mode of operation. (chapter 87) Not surprise as chaos, but as interruption. Each decisive movement arrives before it can be absorbed by the system—before it can be scored, reframed, or deferred to later interpretation. The opponent is caught off-balance, but so is the moderator, whose script assumes predictability. Surprise here is not a tactic for winning exchanges; it is a tactic for breaking mediation.

This is why the moderator’s question is not accidental. It is an attempt to pull the champion back into a familiar structure: (chapter 87) Two options. Two lanes. A controlled fork in the road. The equivalent of Gabriel’s point-scoring strategy translated into language. But the fight has already shown us why this will fail despite the appearances

Joo Jaekyung has no interest in winning by decision—whether athletic or rhetorical. He does not want to be interpreted. He wants to be answered. (chapter 87)

Seen this way, the fight is not a prelude to the speech. It is its proof. The jinx mattered because it did not merely weaken the champion’s body; it rendered him structurally mute. (chapter 2) While the jinx held, action could still occur, but speech could not carry consequence. Words dissipated, were deferred, or were absorbed by systems designed to neutralize them. Powerlessness expressed itself as speechlessness.

What breaks in episode 87 is not luck, but that condition. The jinx no longer governs his relation to outcome. And the clearest sign of that release is not victory, but articulation. (chapter 87) He can now act in ways that resist reinterpretation—and speak in ways that cannot be postponed.

Surprise becomes possible, only once the jinx loses its grip. While cursed, every move was anticipated, rerouted, or explained away. Once uncursed, the champion no longer needs permission, timing, or validation from the system. (chapter 87) His actions arrive before meaning can be reassigned. His words arrive where no answer is prepared. In this sense, episode 87 marks the moment Joo Jaekyung becomes fluent in his own discipline. Not merely competent, not merely dominant, but articulate. His movements surprise (chapter 87) because they are no longer designed to be legible in advance. They are not bids for approval; they are declarations.

Where Arnaud Gabriel’s fighting style depends on being read, scored, and explained—on allowing the system to finish his sentence—Joo Jaekyung’s now depends on interruption. Each movement cuts across expectation. Each decision arrives before mediation can begin. Surprise is no longer an accident; it is his mode of expression. That’s how it dawned on me why he won this match so quickly after his first night with doc Dan (chapter 5) which had surprised his manager Park Namwook. (chapter 5)

The system believes it still governs outcomes because it confuses movement with control. Gabriel moves. Baek Junmin circulates. But neither transforms the field. Joo Jaekyung does. First with his body. Soon with his voice.

And once speech enters the same register as the back kick (chapter 87) —direct, unmediated, irreversible—there will be no neutral ground left to retreat to. (chapter 87)

Commentary as Control: When Mediation Rewrites the Fight

Before the microphone is seized (chapter 87), the fight has already been partially rewritten. Not by the fighters, but by the voice that accompanies them.

The moderator’s narration does not describe the fight; it scripts how the fight should be seen. (chapter 87) Here, the man praises the French sportsman while omitting the action from the Korean athlete. This distinction matters. Commentary during the fight in Paris is not a neutral layer added after the fact. It intervenes in real time, assigning meaning, value, and legitimacy to movements as they occur. What counts as action, what counts as damage, and what counts as dominance are not decided solely by bodies in motion, but by the language that frames them.

A telling discrepancy appears early. Joo Jaekyung advances and throws a punch. (chapter 87) Visually, contact is registered: the onomatopoeia “TAP” marks the moment. Something happens. And yet the moderator declares, unequivocally: “Joo can’t land a single hit.” The issue is not that the blow lacks force; it is that it is rendered nonexistent. Contact is reclassified as absence.

By contrast, when Arnaud Gabriel touches (chapter 87) — repeatedly, often against guard or shoulder— those same gestures are narrated as accumulation. (chapter 87) Circling becomes “control.” Light strikes become “points.” Endurance becomes strategy. The same physical economy is not evaluated differently; it is counted differently. (chapter 87)

This asymmetry is systematic. Gabriel’s movements are framed as strong and intelligent, even when they produce no decisive effect. The thing is that Joo Jaekyung can withstand such punches. He has long internalized to use his body as shield. Besides, his movements, when they do not immediately collapse the opponent, are either omitted or framed as failure. (chapter 87) The moderator does not ask whether Joo is absorbing damage; he announces that Joo is being outmaneuvered. He does not note that Joo remains squared, grounded, and facing his opponent; he insists that Gabriel is “running circles around him.” (chapter 87)

What emerges is not analysis, but instruction. The commentary teaches the audience what to recognize as skill and what to dismiss as noise. It does not reflect the fight; it pre-interprets it, guiding perception toward a point-based, decision-oriented outcome. Victory, under this narration, is not something seized—it is something awarded later.

This is why the strategy attributed to Gabriel fits so cleanly within the system. His fight is designed to be judged. He circles, touches, retreats. He avoids moments that resist reinterpretation. He never needs to raise his voice or force a conclusion, because the system will finish his sentence for him. Commentary, jury, and scoring will translate minimal impact into legitimacy. Joo Jaekyung, by contrast, does not fight to be translated. He absorbs, advances, closes distance. His guard is not praised as strength and resilience but dismissed as passivity. (chapter 87) His contact is not evaluated but erased. The narration does not merely favor Gabriel; it prepares the conditions under which Gabriel’s approach can win without ever having to end the fight.

Seen this way, the fight is not merely athletic. It is already political. The moderator’s voice functions as an invisible hand on the scale, redefining what counts as action before the judges ever speak. It was already palpable during the match between the main lead and the Shotgun, but now it becomes more obvious.

This is the context in which the later intervention must be read. When Joo Jaekyung takes the microphone (chapter 87), he is not interrupting a fair narrative. He is reclaiming authorship from a system that has already begun to speak over his body.

Moderation as Deflection: The Interview as a Managed Choice

By the time the microphone appears, the fight is already over—but control over its meaning is not. (chapter 87) This is where the moderator enters the cage and becomes visible. His intervention is not neutral, and it is not merely journalistic. It is managerial.

The structure of his question reveals this immediately. He does not ask one question, then wait. He asks two at once: how the champion feels and whether he has words for Baek Junmin. This is not conversational clumsiness; it is a framing device. The champion is placed in front of a forced alternative: personal affect or rivalry hype. Either answer keeps the discourse safely within the register of sport. Both options redirect attention forward—toward the next match—rather than backward, toward responsibility.

This is a classic diversionary tactic. By introducing Baek Junmin at this precise moment, the moderator collapses multiple narratives into one convenient axis: fighter versus fighter. Institutional involvement disappears. The CEO of MFC disappears. Any irregularity becomes merely interpersonal tension. The interview is designed not to elicit truth, but to channel attention.

That this is happening on a live broadcast matters. The moderator is not improvising; he is containing risk in real time.

Who Is Watching—and Why That Matters

But what the moderator miscalculates is not the champion’s temperament, but his audience.

This match is not being watched only by fans or analysts. It is being watched by patients at the hospice. (chapter 87) It is being watched by staff. It is being watched by Hwang Byungchul—someone who knows the champion not as a brand, but as a body, a history, and a visitor and former patient of that very place. These viewers are not consuming spectacle; they are witnessing continuity. They know the fighter as a person, and I suppose, it is the same for the inhabitants of the seaside town.

For them, Joo Jaekyung’s presence is not abstract. It is personal. They are watching because of him, not because of the event itself. The dragon is not just a celebrity for them, but someone who once occupied the same space they do now. This shifts the interpretive frame entirely. They are not primed to receive hype or promotional narrative. They are primed to notice discontinuity—moments where what is said no longer matches what they know of the body, the risk, and the cost.

The moderator speaks as if he is guiding interpretation. (chapter 87) But live broadcast does not guarantee interpretive obedience. It only guarantees exposure. For the inhabitants and patients of the hospice, authority does not circulate through the microphone. It circulates through familiarity. They have no relationship with the moderator—no shared past, no shared vulnerability. With the champion, they do. His words carry weight precisely because they are grounded in recognition, not mediation. When he speaks, he is not framing the event for them; he is interrupting the frame itself. That’s why I believe not “motherfucker” will catch their attention, rather the other statement “playing dirty”. (chapter 87)

The Champion’s Speech as Refusal of Explanation

This is where the champion’s response becomes decisive—not because of what it clarifies, but because of what it refuses to clarify. (chapter 87) Contrary to the moderator’s method, Joo Jaekyung does not explain. He does not narrate. He does not contextualize. He speaks about a stunt. A trick. He names the existence of manipulation without supplying its mechanism.

This is not accidental. It is the inverse of commentary logic. Where the moderator’s role is to tell viewers how to see what just happened, the champion’s declaration does the opposite: it destabilizes perception. It introduces doubt without closure. It forces questions instead of answers. The speech functions less as accusation than as riddle. Let’s not forget that for that tie which was turned into a defeat, many people were involved: the MFC security guards, the intervention of doctors, the corruption of the jury, referee and moderator and the switched spray (its fabrication…).

This is precisely what the moderator and MFC did not anticipate.

Had the champion named the trick explicitly—had he described the spray (chapter 69) , the switching, the method—the institution could have responded. Clarifications could be issued. Liability could be managed. But by speaking elliptically, by pointing to manipulation without anatomizing it, the champion places the burden of interpretation onto the audience. And MFC can not deny the existence of an incident in the locker room.

And that audience includes people who already trust the main lead, his strength and his selflessness. (chapter 62) They are not close enough to trust the system blindly.

Why This Speech Is Dangerous to the System

For viewers in the seaside town, the declaration invites curiosity. For hospice patients, it resonates with lived vulnerability. For Hwang Byungchul, it can also activate memory (chapter 87) — of past matches, past compromises, past blindness. He is not being told what to think. He is being prompted to remember the suspension which he thought, his pupil deserved. (chapter 57)

This is the opposite of what moderation is designed to do. The moderator attempts to redirect attention toward Baek Junmin and the future. (chapter 87) There will be a match soon. The champion pulls it backward, toward unresolved causality. The moderator offers a spectacle that can be consumed. The champion offers a fracture that must be examined.

This is why the subsequent apology for profanity is so revealing. It is the only response available. Language has slipped beyond containment, so the institution retreats to formality. Civility replaces substance. That way, the athlete can be criticized for his language. He doesn’t appear as refined or proper. The reality is that he portrayed Baek Junmin as a cheater.

The Larger Diversion at Work

Seen in this light, the behavior of the CEO and the woman in red becomes legible. By foregrounding the incident in the States (chapter 69), by allowing attention to cluster around foreign misconduct (chapter 69) and public embarrassment (chapter 69), they redirect scrutiny away from the quieter, more actionable crime: the switched spray and the rigging of the game. Scandal abroad is survivable. Manipulation at home is not.

The champion’s speech threatens this balance. Not because it exposes everything, but because it exposes enough. (chapter 87) It disrupts the economy of managed ignorance. It creates a situation in which silence no longer stabilizes meaning. The incident is no longer buried, it is gradually coming to the surface,

The moderator was not asking two harmless questions. In reality, he was offering a script. And for the first time, the champion declined to read from it. Hence he insulted the actual champion.(chapter 87)

The Most Dangerous Word

The danger is not the profanity. It is what the profanity makes available.

When Joo Jaekyung says (chapter 87), he is not losing control. He is actually speaking on doc Dan’s behalf, as he has long recognized how the incident with the switched spray affected his lover. Hence he had pushed for further investigation later. He is more than just refusing the moderator’s script and naming his opponent directly, outside institutional mediation. The word does not function as an insult alone; it functions as a key.

Once spoken on live broadcast, it authorizes a shift in narrative terrain—from the fight to the past.

In a system that already treats Joo Jaekyung as a celebrity rather than an athlete (for more read my analysis “The Secrets Behind The Floors “], language is no longer evaluated for meaning but for usability. The insult “motherfucker” becomes extractable evidence. It invites biography. Not training history, but origins.

Raised by a single father who was not only violent, but also a drug-addict, a gambler and a mobster. Police records. (chapter 74) Early incidents reframed as character. Let’s not forget that he was stigmatized as a thug by the members from Team Black too. (chapter 47) Nothing new needs to be invented. Only reassembled. They know about the dragon’s past, because they brought Baek Junmin, someone who resented the celebrity for his wealth and fame.

This is how reputations are dismantled without contradiction. A scandal could finish his career, thus the manager silenced the incident with Choi Heesung’s fake injury. (chapter 31) The system does not deny the champion’s words ; it reclassifies them. What was a refusal of manipulation becomes “anger issues.” What was naming becomes “acting out.”

The word “motherfucker” is especially volatile because it summons the mother into the narrative. Her return—whether literal or discursive—does not need to accuse the champion. (chapter 72) It only needs to repeat an already accepted story: abandonment as necessity, violence as justification, disappearance as victimhood. A story the system knows how to circulate. And Hwang Byungchul never questioned her decision so far.

In that configuration, the champion’s speech is no longer debated. It is overwritten.

This is why the insult matters. Not because it is crude, but because it cannot be neutralized without reopening the past. The curse does not expose Joo Jaekyung. It gives the system permission to try. And this is the cost of refusing the script. However, what the schemers fail to recognize is that the champion is no longer influenced by the past and his origins. He received his absolution from the director Hwang Byungchul: (chapter 78) Secondly, Kim Dan is now able to distinguish the past from the present. Finally, thanks to doc Dan (chapter 62), he did so many good deeds in the seaside town that the inhabitants and the patients from the hospice won’t accept such accusations. I believe that such people won’t see “motherfucker” as a problem at all, they will rather see it as a part of his role after the match. What will remain in their mind is rather the accusation and riddle he voiced: the stunt Baek Junmin played.

CSPP and the Economy of Broadcast

What ultimately exposes the fragility of the system in episode 87 is not the champion’s aggression, but the infrastructure that was supposed to absorb it. The live broadcast does not merely transmit the fight; it reorganizes responsibility. And this is where CSPP becomes impossible to ignore. (chapter

CSPP is not presented as a television channel. The fight in the States was explicitly sold on PPV (chapter 87), which already tells us that CSPP does not function as a simple broadcaster. My idea is that CSPP operates as an intermediary apparatus: a company that packages events, sells broadcasting rights, coordinates visibility, and transforms violence into consumable spectacle. In other words, CSPP does not show fights; it produces events. This explicates why CSPP was present right from the start (chapter 14), but barely visible. But the moment it caught my attention in Paris, I realized that its increasing visibility displays the success of MFC as company. Observe that when the champion faced Randy Booker, the weight-in took place on the same day than the fight and in the arena, not at a prestigious hotel like in Paris. Here, the champion held a conference many days before the weight-in, and the latter took place the night before the match with Arnaud Gabriel. Secondly, you can observe the success of MFC through the banners. In Busan, the website of MFC was posed in the background next to CSPP. (chapter 14) In Seoul, when the star faced his old rival, there is no website on the banner (chapter 50), only MFC and CSPP. But in Paris, it is now totally different. (chapter 87) Thanks to CSPP, I noticed Joo Jaekyung’s true role. He is the one who made MMA fighting and MFC so popular! He is a trendsetter. He is indeed making history! And since CSPP and MFC are strongly connected to each other, it implies that CSPP as an organization is earning more and more money as well.

This is consistent with how the logo appears gradually in the narrative. In Paris, CSPP is omnipresent in the cage (chapter 87), on the banner, and on the stage and probably in promotional material , yet remains narratively undefined. That absence is not accidental. CSPP functions precisely where definition would impose accountability. It sits between MFC, sponsors, pharmaceutical interests (chapter 48), and distribution platforms, insulating each layer from direct responsibility. If something goes wrong, blame can always be displaced sideways.

CSPP and the Architecture of Visibility

CSPP enters the narrative quietly, but never innocently. Its function is not to comment on fights, nor to judge them. According to my observations and deductions, CSPP controls something more fundamental: when, how, and for whom events become visible. It is not a television channel. It does not merely broadcast. It packages, licenses, and distributes attention. And this becomes clear once we follow the timing.

Early revelations about Joo Jaekyung—his injury (chapter 35), his suspension (chapter 52), the causes for his defeat —usually surface in the evening or late at night (chapter 54). They circulate when attention is thin, fragmented, and easily exhausted. These disclosures are technically public, yet functionally muted. They exist without witnesses who can gather, discuss, or respond collectively.

As MMA gains popularity within the story, this pattern shifts. News about Joo Jaekyung begins to appear during the day. (chapter 57) (chapter 70) His matches are scheduled at hours accessible even to a Korean hospital (chapter 41) or hospice patients. (chapter 87) This is not coincidence. The schedule itself signals that Joo Jaekyung has become a ratings anchor—a figure around whom time is organized. He is no longer merely an athlete; he structures attention. Seen in this light, the late-night scheduling of the Korean rookie’s fight (chapter 71) becomes intelligible. It is not a mark of anticipation, but of expendability. The match is placed where attention is thinnest, where failure or success carries minimal consequence. By contrast, Joo Jaekyung’s fights are positioned to be seen. The asymmetry exposes how dependent MFC’s visibility economy is on him—not as a competitor, but as the primary organizer of audience attention.

This is precisely when CSPP becomes more visible.

CSPP’s logos multiply as control becomes more precarious. Its presence in the cage, on banners, and in broadcast framing (stage) increases not because it is expanding, but because it needs to be seen owning the frame. Visibility here is defensive. The more unstable meaning becomes, the more insistently CSPP marks the space as regulated, licensed, and sanctioned.

The contrast with Baek Junmin is instructive. His early fights are difficult to trace. Kim Dan cannot find information online. (chapter 47) His presence circulates through curated highlights and controlled conference footage rather than open broadcast. (chapter 47) His rise is engineered through selective visibility. (chapter 47) Weak opponents are chosen. (chapter 47) His image is inflated before he ever faces Joo Jaekyung. CSPP does not need to expose him fully; it needs only to prepare recognition. However, CSPP is an official company, they can not control rumors among fighters. (chapter 47) Thus the manager suggested this to his boss just before: (chapter 46) By mentioning the existence of spies, he incited the main lead to keep his distance from the doctor and the members so that the rumors about the underground fighting wouldn’t reach his ears.

This explains the asymmetry in scheduling as well. When defeat is anticipated for Joo Jaekyung—Busan (chapter 14), the United States, Paris—the fights are placed in high-visibility slots. Loss must be witnessed. Decline must be shared. By contrast, the fight between Baek Junmin and Joo Jaekyung takes place in the morning (chapter 49), a time of dispersed attention, private viewing, and reduced collective response. Visibility is not maximized; it is managed. (chapter 49) CSPP’s role, then, is not neutral mediation. It is temporal governance. It decides when exposure becomes dangerous and when it becomes profitable. It does not silence events; it times them.

This also clarifies why Baek Junmin’s championship appears so late, almost as an afterthought. (chapter 77) Once Joo Jaekyung does not contest the loss of his title—once he does not sue, demand more investigation, or interrupt the administrative process— MFC and CSPP no longer need to justify anything. Delay becomes normalization. Silence becomes confirmation.

What CSPP ultimately sells is not fights, but legitimacy through circulation. As long as conflicts remain within the frame of scheduled events (chapter 87), licensed images, and mediated commentary, the system holds. But the moment violence spills into spaces CSPP cannot package—off-camera, unsanctioned, criminal—the entire structure becomes vulnerable.

This is why Baek Junmin’s trajectory (chapter 87) is dangerous not only for MFC, but for CSPP itself. If his connections to the underworld surface, CSPP is no longer a distributor of sport, but a conduit for illicit spectacle. Contracts dissolve not because violence occurred, but because violence escaped framing.

CSPP thrives on controlled exposure. What it cannot survive is uncontrollable visibility. And by focusing on this aspect, it dawned on me that CSPP could have footage of the fight in Seoul. This distinction clarifies an earlier anomaly that otherwise remains unresolved: the Seoul fight.

Joo Jaekyung was injured, when he entered the scene. (chapter 49) Under normal medical protocol, this should have stopped the fight immediately. (chapter 41) No athlete should perform when injured. Yet MFC Medical remains silent, the staff simply treats the wound. The bout proceeds. Only later—after attention has shifted, after consequences have begun to circulate—does the same medical authority step forward to issue disciplinary sanctions and a suspension (chapter 52).

The reversal is telling. Medical authority here does not operate preventively, but retroactively. It does not protect the athlete at the moment of risk; it activates only once visibility becomes dangerous. This explains why a trick was played at the health center. It was to divert attention from their own complicity.

Seen through the logic of CSPP, this makes sense. If CSPP governs circulation, then footage of the Seoul fight does not disappear—it is archived. The problem is not the absence of evidence, but its containment. (chapter 52) There were cameras in the arena. What cannot be allowed to surface is proof of foreknowledge: that an injured athlete was permitted to fight under institutional supervision. Thus it raises the question if the match in the morning was broadcast on TV.

This explains the sudden relocation of scandal to the health center. By staging conflict there, the system launders responsibility. (chapter 52) Structural complicity is translated into an individualized incident. What occurred in the cage is no longer the issue; what occurred afterward becomes the narrative.

In this light, the suspension is not punishment. (chapter 52) It is a containment mechanism. It freezes exposure, recenters authority in bureaucratic procedure, and prevents uncontrolled questions from forming. CSPP’s role is not to deny visibility, but to delay and reroute it until meaning can be safely absorbed.

What emerges is not a conspiracy, but a pattern: intervention follows visibility, not injury. Authority responds to exposure, not to risk. CSPP is the mechanism that makes this inversion sustainable—until visibility escapes its frame.

What the system fails to recognize at this point is that the champion’s speech (chapter 87) and Baek Junmin’s reaction belong to the same event, even though they unfold in different spaces. (chapter 87) Joo Jaekyung speaks publicly, but sparingly. He does not explain. He does not accuse in detail. He names only enough to destabilize the frame: a “stunt,” “playing dirty,” a past match that no longer sits quietly in memory. His words are not designed to persuade; they are designed to unanswered. Joo Jaekyung doesn’t care about his rival’s opinion or innocence. The words remain unresolved. They enter broadcast time without closure.

CSPP and MFC attempt to absorb this rupture by doing what it always does: redirecting attention, normalizing tone, apologizing for profanity, and re-centering the narrative on rivalry and future spectacle. (chapter 87) From the perspective of the institution, the danger has been defused. The spotlight has been shifted back to Baek Junmin. The next fight is already being imagined.

But this is precisely where the miscalculation occurs. First, Baek Junmin hears something entirely different. What reaches him is not the insult, but the accusation. Not “motherfucker,” but “stunt.” (chapter 87) Not provocation, but exposure. This explains his reaction at the office. He destroys the television. And he does not prepare for a rematch, but for retaliation. But why is he so angry? He receives the words as theft. What reaches him is not the insult, but the suggestion that his victory—already fragile, already mediated—has been publicly reclassified. The words “stunt” and “playing dirty” do not accuse him in detail; they do something worse. They strip legitimacy. In his mind, he had finally achieved his goal: prove his superiority to Joo Jaekyung and live in the spotlight. (chapter 87) In a single sentence, the match is no longer remembered as a win, but as something tainted. He understands that the spotlight is no longer safe. Like mentioned before, he chooses to show his true self: a criminal. If the logic of broadcast begins to question tricks rather than celebrate rivalry, then CSPP becomes vulnerable. An underworld connection, once exposed, does not merely threaten a fighter; it threatens contracts, rights deals, and legitimacy.

This logic is not unprecedented. It echoes the historical trajectory of PRIDE Fighting Championships [which I had mentioned in a different essay Unsung Hero : Rescues in the Shadow], whose spectacular rise was inseparable from television exposure—and whose collapse followed once the connection between broadcast, organized crime, and event production could no longer be contained. In that case as well, violence was not the problem. What proved fatal was uncontrollable visibility. Once media circulation exposed what had previously been managed behind the scenes, legitimacy evaporated faster than contracts could protect it.

The parallel sharpens what is at stake in Jinx. MFC’s vulnerability does not lie in brutality, nor even in corruption, but in its dependence on televised containment. As long as speech, images, and outcomes remain governable, the system holds. Once television ceases to stabilize meaning—once it begins to expose rather than frame—power unravels from the inside.

Seen in this light, the danger is not that combat sports are violent, but that they are visible. And visibility, once it escapes its managers, has a history of collapsing institutions that believed spectacle would always protect them.

This is why CSPP and MFC become powerless in that moment. Thus the TV screen gets destroyed. CSPP and MFC can apologize for profanity, but it cannot erase the doubt now attached to Baek Junmin’s title, as the incident with the switched spray has been recognized by MFC and even treated by MFC medical. To conclude, the damage is semantic, not procedural.

The destruction of the television is therefore not rage at insult, but rage at loss of ownership over meaning. (chapter 87) Baek Junmin understands that what was taken from him is not a belt, but the story that made the belt matter. He has been repositioned—from winner to suspected cheater—without trial, without rebuttal, and without recourse.

From his perspective, the system has failed him. The apparatus that once guaranteed controlled visibility has allowed a sentence to circulate that cannot be neutralized. He has followed the rules of managed ascent, only to discover that a single, unscripted utterance can undo it.

This is the precise moment where institutional miscalculation becomes personal. And it is this perceived injustice—being robbed in full view—that makes Choi Gilseok’s permissive “by all means” possible. (chapter 87)

This is where CSPP’s position becomes the most precarious of all. If Baek Junmin’s ties to illegal fighting or organized crime surface publicly, CSPP is the first entity that cannot claim ignorance. It is the company that sold the event, packaged the narrative, and guaranteed its legitimacy. Unlike MFC, which can hide behind sport governance, or individual managers who can be scapegoated, CSPP’s value depends entirely on credibility. Once that credibility collapses, so do its partnerships.

Seen this way, Baek Junmin is not the mastermind of the schemes. He is their residual container. He absorbs the consequences of financial losses (chapter 46) that began elsewhere—losses already acknowledged when Choi Gilseok brought him into the system in the first place.

This is the deeper irony. The live broadcast was meant to neutralize confrontation by redirecting it. Instead, it amplifies instability. Words that were supposed to fuel hype begin to corrode trust. Visibility, once an asset, becomes a threat.

Conclusion: When Speech Breaks the Frame

The failure examined in this part does not lie in miscommunication, provocation, or loss of discipline. It lies in miscalculation. The system anticipates speech—but only as performance. It anticipates words that can be framed, apologized for, redirected, or folded back into rivalry and spectacle. What it does not anticipate are the consequences of speech once it escapes those circuits. The patients of Light of Hope and the inhabitants from the seaside town will definitely side with the athlete.

What happens, then, when speech is anticipated but not governable?

The fight provides the first answer. (chapter 87) Technique becomes language. Point accumulation, endurance, and delay reflect a world in which outcomes are meant to be evaluated rather than decided. Within this economy, decisiveness is a liability, and ambiguity is profitable. Joo Jaekyung’s refusal to prolong exchange—his choice to interrupt rather than circulate—marks the first rupture. The fight is no longer a prelude to speech; it becomes its proof. (chapter 87) The jinx that once rendered him powerless and speechless dissolves as he finds a language that cannot be scored.

The broadcast provides the second answer. (chapter 87) CSPP does not fail because it broadcasts the moment, but because it cannot contain what follows. Live transmission turns control into exposure. Apologies manage tone, not meaning. Scheduling governs attention, not interpretation. Once words enter circulation without mediation, images detach from their managers. Visibility ceases to stabilize power and begins to redistribute it.

The responses provide the final answer. Institutional calm persists. Procedures continue. But elsewhere, the effects are immediate and bodily. Baek Junmin experiences not insult, but dispossession. (chapter 87) His reaction reveals the asymmetry at the heart of the system: speech that appears harmless within spectacle can devastate outside it. A single unresolved sentence is enough to fracture legitimacy that took years to assemble. Neither MFC nor CSPP witness his outburst. Secondly, by grabbing the microphone, Joo Jaekyung is little by little taking control of the narrative, but more importantly he is choosing the timing! (chapter 87) So far, he only spoke in front of people during a conference or after a match. He could never choose the topic either. (chapter 30) This implies that he won’t remain passive and silent like in the past, relying on structure and institutions (Entertainment agency…) and accepting to become a scapegoat. (chapter 54)

Taken together, these moments show that power in Jinx does not collapse because truth is revealed. It destabilizes because meaning can no longer be timed, framed, or absorbed. (chapter 87) Once speech escapes governance, it does not clarify—it unsettles. It does not resolve conflict—it displaces it.

Part II has traced this shift step by step: from fight to broadcast, from mediation to rupture. What emerges is not the triumph of a voice, but the exposure of a system that depended on voices remaining manageable. Between a squeeze and a crack lies the instant when pressure stops circulating quietly and begins to alter the field itself. This is the moment when containment gives way to consequence—and when power, finally, has to reckon with what it can no longer control.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Hot 🌶️ Sparks 🎇, Feverish 🌡️ Reality (part 1)

Introduction — Dream, Magic, or Something Else?

Many Jinx-lovers were genuinely happy watching how the champion interacted with Doc Dan during that night. He was caring (chapter 86), gentle, attentive (chapter 86) — asking questions instead of imposing answers (chapter 64). For Joo Jaekyung’s unconditional stans (and I count myself among them), such an attitude (chapter 86) can easily be read as proof that the protagonist’s good heart has always been existent, but it was barely visible. Compared to earlier chapters, the contrast is now undeniable. And yet, I would like to pause you right there.

Because focusing solely on the champion’s behavior risks missing the most decisive movement of this night. Joo Jaekyung’s transformation did not begin in episode 86. Long before that, he had already started changing — sometimes suddenly (chapter 61), sometimes awkwardly (chapter 80), sometimes inconsistently (chapter 79), but unmistakably . (chapter 83) Tenderness, concern, even a certain form of devotion had appeared earlier (chapter 40), albeit in ways that were often overlooked, (chapter 18) misunderstood or poorly timed. This night (chapter 86) does not initiate his metamorphosis.

So what, then, makes it feel so different?

When confronted with a night filled with stars (chapter 86), sparks (chapter 86), and softness, many Jinx-philes might instinctively describe it as magical. The imagery invites such a reading. After all, we have seen similar nights before. The night in the States shimmered with illusion (chapter 39); words were spoken, confessions made — only to dissolve with memory. (chapter 41) The penthouse night echoed A Midsummer Night’s Dream (chapter 44), suspended between intoxication and desire, intense yet fragile. Both nights felt unreal, and both were later reframed as mistakes (chapter 41) — moments to be erased rather than carried forward. (chapter 45). This raises an essential question. Is episode 86 (chapter 86) a renewal of those nights? Another dream layered over the past? A repetition disguised as healing? Or, on the contrary, is this the first night that resists enchantment altogether?

This question matters because in Jinx, nights are never judged by themselves. Their true meaning is revealed afterward — in the morning (chapter 4), in the return of light (chapter 66), in what remains once the sparks fade. A dream dissolves with daylight. Reality does not.

This is why it would be misleading to read episode 86 primarily as evidence of the champion’s improved behavior. Such a perspective encloses the night within its warmth and risks mistaking tenderness (chapter 86) for final transformation. The real shift occurs elsewhere — more quietly, and perhaps more unsettlingly. To grasp the nature of this night, we must follow more importantly the doctor and his interaction with his fated partner.

What changes here is not only what Joo Jaekyung does, but how Kim Dan perceives (chapter 86), processes, and responds to it. How he hesitates (chapter 86), reflects, and allows himself to reconsider what this moment can mean — and what it can lead to. (chapter 86) It is through this inner recalibration that we can begin to determine whether this night belongs to the realm of dream, repetition, or reality. Only by tracing the doctor’s perception can we understand what truly starts flowing here.

To approach this question, the analysis will move through several successive angles. It will begin with the symbolic and mythological references that frame episode 86, before turning to earlier nights that echo visually or emotionally within it. From there, attention will shift to forms of communication, considering how speech, silence, and gesture are arranged across these scenes. The analysis will then examine repeated actions and how their placement within the narrative differs from one moment to another. Only with such a progression can the nature of this night be reconsidered.

From Solar Heat to Electric Current

Many Jinx-lovers instinctively read episode 86 as a romantic turning point because the night looks “magical”: stars (chapter 86), sparks, that strange shimmer that seems to hang in the air (chapter 86). Why? It was, as if their dream had come true. However, is it correct? Is it not wishful thinking? What if this night is not magical at all? What if its true signature is not enchantment, but electricity—a current that interrupts, tests, and resets? 😮

To grasp this, we must first return to the symbolic regime that used to govern the champion’s presence. In earlier chapters (think of the awe and distance around chapters 40–41 and again later), Joo Jaekyung often appears as a solar figure (chapter 40) in Kim Dan’s perception: overwhelming, radiant, dominant, a heat-source that does not negotiate. (chapter 41) The sun can be admired, feared, and endured—but it cannot be questioned. (chapter 58) It simply shines, and the one who stands in its light adapts. This explicates why the physical therapist would choose silence and submission over communication. (chapter 48)

The Invisible Energy

Nevertheless, the excursion in episode 83 and 84 begins to dismantle this solar grammar, though at the time, its meaning is easy to miss. (chapter 83)

The shift away from solar symbolism does not announce itself loudly. It is embedded in the setting itself, almost too obvious to be noticed. An amusement park functions entirely on electricity. (chapter 83) Every ride, every light, every scream suspended in midair depends on current: motors accelerating and braking, circuits opening and closing, energy stored, released, and cut off. (chapter 83) Roller coasters do not move by heat, charisma, or sheer physical force; they move because electricity flows through them. The Viking ship swings (chapter 83) because current allows it to swing. The Ferris wheel ascends (chapter 83) because circuits hold — and descends because they release.

And yet, precisely because this energy is expected, it becomes invisible.

Neither the characters nor most Jinx-philes initially register electricity as a symbol. It is too familiar, too infrastructural. Electricity does all the work, but it remains background noise. This invisibility is not accidental. Unlike the sun — which imposes itself visually, hierarchically, almost tyrannically — electricity operates silently, relationally, conditionally. It does not dominate the scene; it enables it. It exists only as long as connections hold.

When Electricity Fails

This distinction matters, because electricity only becomes perceptible when it fails. (chapter 84)

The Ferris wheel breakdown in episode 84 is therefore not a minor technical inconvenience but a crucial narrative rupture. The moment the current cuts out, movement stops. Height becomes dangerous. Time suspends. Panic enters the frame. The announcement that “the earlier technical issues have been resolved” (chapter 84) explicitly names what had previously gone unspoken: the rides function only because current flows. When it disappears, the illusion of effortless motion collapses.

And it is precisely at this moment — when artificial motion halts — that Joo Jaekyung becomes active in an unexpected way. (chapter 84) The Ferris wheel has stopped. The current is gone. The carefully regulated system that lifted, rotated, and sustained them is no longer in control. Yet movement does not disappear entirely. It mutates. When the champion shifts his weight, grips the structure, reacts instinctively, the cabin begins to shake. Panels emphasize instability: creak, swish, ack. The motion is no longer generated by electricity but by the body itself.

This moment is crucial. The shaking exposes a hierarchy reversal. Human strength now surpasses mechanical control. The ride no longer dictates sensation; the occupant does. And this excess of physical force — uncontrolled, unmediated — becomes unsettling rather than triumphant. Kim Dan immediately responds by asking him to sit down, to stop moving, to restore balance. Stillness, not action, becomes the condition for safety.

From Motion to Speech

What follows is telling. Deprived of the park’s mechanical rhythm, Joo Jaekyung does not compensate by acting more. He compensates by speaking. (chapter 84) Stranded above ground, stripped of the park’s mechanical rhythm, he apologizes. (chapter 84) Not theatrically, not performatively, but awkwardly, haltingly. His body exposes his discomfort (chapter 84) and fears. He avoids the doctor’s gaze, crosses his arms (chapter 84) or squeezes his arm (chapter 84). The cessation of electrical motion coincides with a shift in his own mode of action. Where the park depended on current to keep things moving, he now moves without it. The absence of electricity forces something else to surface: responsibility, attention, presence. Additionally, this sequence anticipates what will later unfold more fully. Proactivity is no longer expressed through force or motion, but through articulation. Words stand for action and have weight. The champion’s future action is announced here, quietly: he will no longer push forward by shaking the structure. He will move by sharing thought, by naming feeling, by allowing himself to be affected.

The interruption of electricity does not merely stop the ride. It forces a change in how agency is exercised. Under this new light, my avid readers can grasp the true life lesson the athlete received at the amusement park, the importance of communication and attentiveness.

As a first conclusion, the amusement park juxtaposes two forms of energy: mechanical electricity and human vitality. The first is regulated, automated, predictable — until it fails. The second is volatile, embodied, responsive. When the Ferris wheel stops, the mechanical system collapses, and a different kind of current emerges: emotional, relational, biological.

Yet, only in retrospect does this moment reveal its deeper logic. I am quite certain my followers are wondering how I came to pay attention to electricity which led to new observations and interpretations. It is related to the “electrical night” in the hotel!

Electricity and Sex

What strikes immediately in episode 86 is not tenderness, nor explicit care, nor even novelty of behavior — but density. The night is saturated with sparks (chapter 86), (chapter 86) jolts, sudden contractions of the body (chapter 86). Kim Dan is repeatedly shown convulsing, gasping, losing linear thought, and it is the same for the MMA fighter. Panels insist on interruption: jolt, tingle, broken breath, aborted sentences. The doctor’s body behaves as if struck, especially in this image. (chapter 86) It is at this point that a phrase surfaced in my mind — instinctively, almost involuntarily. A phrase we use in French when something intangible yet decisive occurs between two people: Le courant passe. Literally, the current passes. Idiomatic meaning: they are on the same wavelength, something connects, communication flows. However, here, the current is not the product of civilization, but of nature. Two people interacting with each other. And it is precisely because of the unusually high frequency of sparks and jolts in the illustrations that a belated realization imposes itself: nature, too, produces electricity — through storms, through thunder.

Joo Jaekyung’s Day and the Thunder

This raises a necessary question: where was the thunder before, as Jinx is working like a kaleidoscope?

One might be tempted to point to episode 69. (chapter 69) A storm was announced back then. And yet, upon closer inspection, no thunder was ever shown there. There was tension, there was excess, there were dark clouds (chapter 69) — but there was no strike, no discharge, no interruption. The imagery remained continuous, fluid, enclosed within the logic of escalation rather than rupture.

The thunder appears in the amusement park. 😮 One detail initially seems insignificant, almost too mundane to merit attention: the day itself.

The excursion in episodes 83–84 takes place on a Thursday. At first glance, this appears to be nothing more than a scheduling detail. And yet, Thursday is not a neutral day. Linguistically and mythologically, it carries a charge. Thursday is Thor’s day. This latent mythology quietly materializes through two objects, the drakkar (Viking boat) (chapter 83) and the hammer (chapter 83). In Roman terms, Thursday corresponds to dies Iovis — Jupiter’s day — the god of thunder. Both gods are strongly connected to thunder and as such current.

The narrative does not underline this fact. It does not name the god, invoke mythology, or frame the excursion as symbolic. The reference remains dormant. But dormancy is not absence. It is latency. This is where the symbolism stops being latent and becomes functional.

The reference to Thor and Jupiter (which was already palpable in earlier episodes -chapter 67-; for more read my analysis Star-crossed lovers 🌕) is not decorative mythology; it introduces a dual model of power that the narrative begins to test on Joo Jaekyung himself. Thor (chapter 83) is the son: impulsive, embodied, excessive, a god who discharges energy through impact. Jupiter, by contrast, is the father (chapter 83): regulating, sovereign, stabilizing, the god who governs the sky rather than striking it. Thunder belongs to both, but it manifests differently depending on position in the lineage. What matters is not which god the champion “is,” but that he oscillates between them. This oscillation becomes legible through the hammer.

The hammer game appears after the champion’s moment of physical discomfort and jealousy. (chapter 83). Before striking anything, he is already unwell: angry overstimulated and complaining, visually reduced to a childlike register. This matters. The hammer does not create excess — it receives it. (chapter 83) It offers a sanctioned outlet for surplus energy that has nowhere else to go. However, contrary to the past, the physical therapist becomes the beneficiary of the athlete’s greed and jealousy. He receives a teddy bear. The hamster doesn’t witness the punching incident, he only sees the result: care and affection. (chapter 83)

Unlike boxing, unlike punching a sandbag (chapter 34), the hammer gesture is not confrontational, for the machine is immobile. There is no opponent. (chapter 83) The arm rises and comes down. The movement is vertical, not horizontal. It does not engage another body; it obliterates resistance. This is not combat but discharge.

In that moment, Joo Jaekyung performs Thor. Not metaphorically, but structurally. He channels excess into a single, downward strike. The absurd score — 999 — is not triumph; it is overload. (chapter 83) Too much energy released at once. The system registers it, but cannot contain it. This means, the record won’t be registered and as such “remembered”. In fact what mattered here was the prize, the teddy bear, and restored self-esteem of the athlete. He could offer a present to doc Dan which the latter accepted without any resistance. (chapter 83) The pink heart indicates the presence of affection and gratitude. And crucially, this act restores balance. After the hammer, the champion is no longer visibly overwhelmed. He has expelled what needed to leave. This shows that the champion is learning to manage his jealousy differently.

This prepares the next transition. Once the excess is discharged, he can shift position. The childlike Thor-state gives way to something else: regulation, provision, containment. This is where Jupiter enters — not as domination, but as adaptive authority. The same character who was dazed now intervenes calmly, mediates interaction, hands over the teddy bear, anticipates need. Son and father coexist not as contradiction, but as sequence.

This duality is essential for what follows. Because thunder is not continuous like the sun. It interrupts. It breaks a state, resets a system, and allows a new configuration to emerge. That is its narrative function here. This means that the athlete’s attitude can no longer be generalized, as such reproaches or description wouldn’t reflect reality. But let’s return our attention to the thunder causing a short circuit and reset.

The Ferris wheel breakdown completes the logic. When electricity fails, mechanical motion stops. When motion stops, the champion’s bodily excess becomes dangerous. When excess becomes dangerous, restraint is required. And when restraint is required, speech replaces force. The apology does not come despite the breakdown, but because of it. The system has been reset. This is why the amusement park is not merely foreshadowing but training.

The champion learns, physically and symbolically, that energy must circulate differently depending on context. Sometimes it must be discharged. Sometimes it must be restrained. (chapter 86) Sometimes it must be transmitted through words rather than bodies. This is not moral growth; it is adaptive intelligence.

Doc Dan and the Thunder

And this is precisely what reappears in episode 86. (chapter 86)

There, thunder returns — no longer as mechanical failure, but as biological event. The sparks and jolts saturating the panels are not just erotic embellishment. They reproduce the same logic of interruption and reset as well. Kim Dan’s body reacts as if struck by current. Thought fragments. Linear continuity breaks. “I can’t think straight” is not poetic confusion; it is systemic overload. I would even say, we are witnessing a short circuit which can only lead to a reset.

A thunderstorm does not persuade. It forces a reboot. In other words, this night stands under the sign of reality despite the sparks. Electricity is real and even natural.

The crucial difference is that this time, the current does not come from machines, nor from spectacle, nor from a game. It emerges between two bodies. This is why le courant passe becomes more than metaphor. The current does not dominate; it circulates. It requires two terminals. It only exists because both are present and conductive. And now, you comprehend why the champion was attentive (chapter 86) and asked questions to his sex partner. The current stands for communication. (chapter 86) Therefore it is not surprising that doc Dan starts looking at his fated lover. Imagine what it means for the athlete, when the “hamster” is staring at him, though he is a little embarrassed. Finally, he is truly looking at him. The champion loves his gaze. And now, you comprehend why the “wolf” listened to the “cute hamster” and stopped leaving marks.

In this sense, the hammer returns one last time — transformed. (chapter 86)

What struck metal in the amusement park now strikes the psyche. Not as violence, not as domination, but as reset. The phallus functions here exactly as the hammer did earlier: a tool of discharge that interrupts an old state and makes a new configuration possible. The result is not surrender, not illusion, but recalibration. Joo Jaekyung is once again releasing his “energy” (chapter 85), but this time, its nature has changed. It is no longer jealousy or anger, but love and desire. Hence the current is not colored in red, but white and pink. (chapter 86) It is not a flame like here , but a thunder and as such it is still restrained and regulated.

This is why episode 86 does not feel “magical”, once the structure is visible. Magic enchants without consequence. Thunder alters systems. After a strike, nothing resumes exactly as before.

And that is the point.

The champion is no longer a sun that burns from a distance. He has become a figure capable of switching modes — son and father, Thor and Jupiter, discharge and containment. And Kim Dan, having undergone the reset, is no longer operating on inherited assumptions (chapter 86) or second-hand data. New information must now be gathered. New meanings must be negotiated. Because Joo Jaekyung acts differently (son-father), the doctor is incited to discuss with his fated lover and not to generalize. He is pushed to become curious about the main lead and even adapt himself in the end.

The system has rebooted. What follows will not be repetition — because the thunder forced a reset. What follows will be movement and reciprocity — because current has begun to pass from one side to the other and the reverse. A new circle has been created.

Dream Nights and Drugged Time: Why Chapters 39 and 44 Could Not Last

If episode 86 confronts us with electricity as reset, then we must return to the earlier nights that failed — not because desire was absent, but because time itself was compromised.

Many Jinx-lovers remember the night in the States (chapter 39) and the penthouse night (chapter 44) as emotionally charged, intense, even pivotal. Confessions were made. Bodies responded. Vulnerability appeared to surface. And yet, both nights collapsed almost immediately afterward. What was felt (chapter 44) did not endure. What was said did not bind. What was shared did not accumulate into change.

Why?

The simplest answer would be to blame the champion’s behavior. But this explanation is insufficient — and, in fact, misleading. The deeper issue is not ethical failure alone, but structural impossibility. These nights were built on illusion. And illusion, by definition, cannot sustain time.

Let us begin with the night in the States.

In chapter 39, Kim Dan experiences desire (chapter 39), arousal, and emotional exposure under the influence of a drugged beverage. His body reacts strongly, almost violently. His speech loosens. He confesses. (chapter 39) He voices feelings that he has never dared to articulate consciously. Many readers interpreted this moment as a breakthrough — the first time the doctor allowed himself to want.

And yet, the morning after reveals the fatal flaw: he does not remember. (chapter 40)

Memory loss is not a narrative convenience here. It is the core of the scene’s meaning. Without memory, desire cannot transform into intention. Without intention, intimacy cannot become choice. What remains is sensation without authorship.

In other words, the confession existed — but outside time.

The body spoke, but the self could not claim it. The night produced intensity, not continuity. More importantly, it denied Kim Dan the possibility of return. Because he did not remember, he could not revisit the moment, reinterpret it, or choose it anew. Desire occurred — but never became decision. The night passed through him without granting him authorship. At the same time, Joo Jaekyung made sure with his joke (chapter 41) that doc Dan shouldn’t remember that night. This remark left a deep wound on doc Dan’s soul and mind, thus he hoped not to look like a fool in episode 86. (chapter 86) In this panel, we should glimpse a reference to the night in the States as well, and not just to the night in the penthouse.

The intensity of that night is why the champion’s later obsession with recreating that night is so telling. (chapter 64) Deep down, he hoped that such a night had been real. That’s why he asked shortly after their return about this particular night. (chapter 41) The event floats, unmoored, like a dream recalled only by one participant. I would even add, the amnesia from the doctor even afflicted a wound on the main lead. This explains why in Paris, he keeps asking doc Dan if the later is well and is not suffering from a fever. (chapter 86) He wants to ensure that his fated lover won’t forget this night. He is doing everything to avoid a repetition from that “dream or fake night”, where the physical therapist acted as the perfect lover, but forgot it. However, observe that here, the champion is touching doc Dan’s forehead, a sign that he is making sure that doc Dan is not “lying” by coercion or submission. At the same time, such a gesture reinforces my interpretation: thanks to the “thunder”, heat is generated. “Le courant passe” (the current passes) through physical contact, that’s how they create intimacy and understanding.

The penthouse night in chapter 44 follows a similar structure, though its emotional register differs.

Here, it is Joo Jaekyung who is intoxicated. (chapter 44) The setting is elevated, luxurious, almost theatrical. The doctor is brought into a space of power that is not his own. (chapter 44) By acting that way, the athlete created a false impression of himself, as if he was still rational and clear-minded. Again, desire unfolds. (chapter 44) (chapter 44) Again, closeness occurs. And again, the aftermath reveals the same fracture.

The champion does not remember fully (chapter 45) and later wants to even forget it. (chapter 45) Why? It is because contrary to the night in the States, the MMA fighter left traces on doc Dan’s body (chapter 45) and he can not deny his own involvement and actions. Hence the doctor is left alone. Only he can recall this “dream”. (chapter 44) But memory alone is not power. Remembering without the other’s participation transforms recollection into isolation. Kim Dan cannot confront, confirm, or renegotiate what happened, exactly like the champion did in the past. Meaning freezes instead of evolving. Striking is that he came to associate feelings with addiction. (chapter 46) No wonder why later doc Dan had no problem to reject the athlete. And for him, the next morning became a cruel reality, even a nightmare. It wounded doc Dan’s heart and soul so much that he learned the following lesson: to not get deceived by impressions. Hence in Paris, Doc Dan tries to explain the change of the champion’s attitude with drunkenness. (chapter 86)

What matters is not simply abandonment, but asymmetry of consciousness. While Joo Jaekyung remembers the night in the States, the other remembers the night in the penthouse: (chapter 44) One participant is altered. The other must carry the weight of meaning alone. The night does not end in shared reflection, but in silence and absence.

In both cases, the problem is not sex. It is not even exploitation or ignorance— though both are present. The problem is that time cannot flow forward from these nights.

Why? Because drugs suspend causality.

Under intoxication, actions do not generate obligation. Words do not demand response. Feelings do not require follow-up. The night becomes sealed — intense within itself, but cut off from before and after. This is why these encounters feel dreamlike in retrospect. Not romantic dreams, but dissociative ones.

And Jinx insists on this reading visually.

In both chapters, speech is unstable. (chapter 44) Words blur, vanish, or are forgotten. Even gestures go unnoticed: a kiss, an embrace or a patting. Memory fractures. The morning after is defined not by continuity but by confusion. The body has moved forward, but the narrative has not.

This logic culminates in the fireworks scene of chapter 84 (chapter 84)

Fireworks are often read as romance. But here, they function as warning. Fireworks illuminate the sky briefly, brilliantly — and then disappear. They leave no trace. And crucially, during this display, words are literally blurred. (chapter 84) Speech bubbles lose clarity. Confessions are obscured. The reader is denied access to meaning. Fireworks, like drugs, produce intensity without duration.

This is the crucial distinction that Part I prepared us for: heat versus current. Heat lingers. It can smother. It can burn. But it does not require connection. Current, by contrast, only exists if two points remain linked.

Chapters 39 and 44 are nights of heat. Bodies respond. Desire flares. But no circuit closes. No loop remains intact long enough for time to resume. This is why these nights are doomed — not morally, but structurally.

And this brings us to a crucial observation that many readers overlook.

In both of these earlier nights, questions are absent.

No one asks: “Are you okay?” (chapter 39) (chapter 44) It was as if these nights could only exist under altered states — as if clarity on either side would have made them impossible.
No one asks: “Do you remember?”
No one asks: “Why are you doing it?” “What does that mean to you?”

Speech exists, but it is not dialogic. It does not seek the other’s subjectivity. It spills, confesses, demands, judges or disappears. But it does not circulate. This is why, despite their intensity, these nights do not move the story forward. They collapse inward.

Episode 86, by contrast, will confront us with something radically different: a night that asks questions. (chapter 86)

But before we get there, we must acknowledge what these dream-nights leave behind.

They teach Kim Dan that desire is dangerous when it appears without agency. That closeness can dissolve overnight. That bodily truth does not guarantee recognition or even knowledge. And perhaps most importantly: that remembering alone is a burden. (chapter 86) This is why, when electricity returns in episode 86, it does not revive heat. It interrupts it. (chapter 86) That’s the reason why the athlete stops for a moment and asks doc Dan, if he needs a break. (chapter 86) This question is important because doc Dan admits his confusion and ignorance. He confesses to himself that he “knows nothing” not only about himself, but also about his fated lover. (chapter 86) The night is no longer sealed. It is permeable. Time resumes. (chapter 86) This signifies that thanks to the “champion’s thunder”, doc Dan was able to leave the vicious circle of “depression”. At the same time, such a confession implies that doc Dan’s present is no longer determined by the past and prejudices. And that is precisely why it matters.

From Drugged Time to Embodied Presence

If the earlier nights failed because time itself was compromised, then the question that naturally follows is this: what allows time to resume?

Chapters 39 and 44 taught us that intensity alone is not enough. Desire flared, bodies responded, confessions surfaced — and yet nothing endured. Not because feeling was false, but because consciousness was fractured. Words existed, but they did not circulate. Memory existed, but it was asymmetrical. Each night collapsed into silence the moment it ended.

Episode 86 emerges precisely at this fault line.

At first glance, it might seem quieter. Less dramatic. Less overtly confessional. And yet, this apparent restraint is deceptive. What changes here is not the presence of desire, but the medium through which meaning passes. What circulates between them in this night is not nostalgia, not projection, not even hope — but presence.

The sparks that punctuate episode 86 are not metaphorical excess. (chapter 86) They function as temporal markers. A spark exists only now. It has no duration. It cannot be stored, recalled, or anticipated. It appears — and vanishes. In this sense, electricity becomes the perfect visual language for the present moment itself.

Unlike heat, which lingers and can smother, current demands simultaneity. It requires two points to be active at the same time. The moment one withdraws, the circuit breaks. Sparks therefore signify not passion remembered or desired, but attention shared. This is why the night in episode 86 feels radically different from earlier encounters. At the end of episode 86, Kim Dan is no longer trapped in the past — replaying humiliation, abandonment or knowledge (as such arrogance). Nor is he projecting into the future at the end — fearing consequences, punishment, or loss. (chapter 86) For once, his thought does not spiral backward or forward. It halts. He decides to follow his heart again. (chapter 86)

The phrase carpe diem applies here not as romantic indulgence, but as psychological fact. To seize the day is not to ignore reality; it is to suspend temporal distortion. (chapter 86) In this night, neither character is reliving an old wound nor rehearsing a future defense. They are not remembering a dream. They are not trying to recreate one. They are simply there.

Electricity makes this visible. The body jolts. Thought fragments. Linear narration breaks. But unlike the drugged nights, this fragmentation does not produce amnesia. It produces grounding. Kim Dan’s repeated confusion — “I can’t think straight” — is not dissociation. (chapter 86) It is the absence of rumination.

This is what distinguishes presence from illusion. Illusion detaches the body from time. Presence anchors the body in time.

The sparks, then, do not represent chaos, rather emancipation and liberation. (chapter 86) Therefore the “hamster” can not control his voice and body. The sparks represent contact without temporal displacement. Both characters inhabit the same instant, without substitution, without rehearsal, without erasure. The present is no longer something to escape or survive. It becomes something that can be shared. That’s the reason why the two main leads are talking to each other.

And this is precisely why meaning finally begins to circulate.

If the first part (From Solar Heat to Electric Current) and second part ( Dream Nights and drugged time) traced how electricity replaces heat, and how illusion breaks time, then the next part turns to the most unsettling shift of all: the disappearance of words — and the emergence of the kiss as language.

No Words, But a Kiss: When Communication Changes Form

One of the most striking features of my illustration for episode 86 is the near absence of visible speech bubbles — even when Joo Jaekyung is clearly speaking. His mouth is open, his body leans in, his posture is attentive, and yet language is visually de-emphasized. Words are present, but they no longer dominate the frame.

By contrast, the star with the cut-off speech bubble appears elsewhere — suspended, incomplete. Language has not disappeared; it has lost its authority. It exists, but it is no longer imposed, no longer unilateral, no longer protected by distance.

This visual shift matters. (chapter 86) In earlier chapters, words often preceded erasure: confessions spoken under intoxication (chapter 10), statements blurred by drugs (chapter 43), sentences remembered by only one side. (chapter 39) Language functioned as exposure without continuity. Here, the narrative refuses that pattern. (chapter 86) It withholds verbal dominance so that something else can emerge. Kim Dan’s answer does not come in words. It comes as a kiss. (chapter 86) This gesture must not be misread as avoidance (silencing) or impulsivity. It is neither silence born of fear nor surrender to sensation. It is embodied communication — a mode forged by a history in which words were unsafe, unreliable, or followed by disappearance. The kiss articulates what cannot yet be stabilized in language without being lost again.

It says: I am here. And more importantly: I accept this moment. Not the future. Not the consequences. The present. But this action catches the MMA fighter by surprise, as in the athlete’s mind, Doc Dan has never initiated a kiss before except in the States, but the doctor doesn’t remember it. At the same time, it is clear that the athlete has not been confronted by his own amnesia concerning the night of his birthday: doc Dan had kissed him there too, thus the celebrity had been able to make doc Dan smile (chapter 44) and even laugh…. if only he could remember that night…

Crucially, this act in episode 86 (chapter 86) cannot be neutralized by Joo Jaekyung’s habitual reflexes — the “it’s nothing” (chapter 79), the “never mind”, (chapter 84) or it is a mistake, the easy erasure that once dissolved meaning after the fact. The kiss interrupts that mechanism. It produces a pause that cannot be talked over. It forces reflection. (chapter 86) Joo Jaekyung will have to ponder on the signification of such a kiss.

For the first time, meaning does not vanish once contact is made.

The kiss therefore marks a decisive transformation in how communication functions between them. Words are not rejected; they are postponed. Language is no longer the condition for intimacy, but its consequence. What circulates first is presence.

And this is why the kiss belongs structurally to the logic of current introduced earlier. Current does not explain itself. It passes — or it does not. It requires proximity, consent, and mutual contact. Once established, it cannot be undone by denial. Hence the champion reciprocates the gesture. (chapter 86) He is even kissing with open eyes, as though he desired not forget this wonderful night. In episode 86, communication no longer seeks to protect itself through speech. It risks itself through embodiment. And that risk, precisely because it is accepted rather than anticipated, changes everything.

First Conclusion — When Conditions Change

With the symbolic framework established, the earlier nights revisited, and the forms of communication closely examined, the analysis has already progressed far enough to reconsider the nature of the night in episode 86.

By moving through these successive angles — from mythological and elemental references, to nights compromised by illusion, to the transformation of how meaning is exchanged — one point becomes clear: this night is not just defined by intensity, tenderness, or redemption. It is also defined by changed conditions.

When electricity replaces heat (chapter 86), power ceases to be unilateral and becomes relational (sky and earth). Thunder does not linger or dominate; it strikes, interrupts, and resets. The champion is no longer read as a solar figure imposing force from above, but as a conductor within a circuit that requires reciprocity.

When the earlier nights are reexamined, their failure appears not as emotional insufficiency but as structural impossibility. Desire existed, but time could not flow. Drugs suspended causality, fractured memory, and sealed each encounter inside itself. What remained were dream-nights — vivid, intense, and ultimately unsustainable. Yet, they left wounds. (chapter 86) At the same time, it becomes clear that this moment in Paris embodies the convergence of two memories and two nights which helps them to recreate a new night marked by desires and communication. So this night will generate new memories and push them to redefine their relationship.

Finally, when attention shifts to communication itself, episode 86 reveals a decisive reconfiguration. (chapter 86) Meaning no longer relies on speech that can be blurred, forgotten, or denied. It circulates through presence. The kiss interrupts fear without abolishing clarity. Kim Dan does not forget the future; he accepts the risk of setting it aside. For the first time, current passes while both remain conscious, present, and aware.

One image quietly condenses this transformation. (chapter 86)

Kim Dan almost sits on Joo Jaekyung’s lap. (chapter 86) Earlier in the narrative, this posture belonged to another body. (chapter 19) The grandmother’s lap structured Kim Dan’s understanding of safety, endurance, and knowledge. Sitting there meant being held — but also being taught how to survive through sacrifice, silence, and self-effacement. That worldview sustained him, but it also confined him.

In episode 86, the posture is almost repeated — but the figure has changed.

This is not a romantic substitution. It is a symbolic shift. The body that now supports Kim Dan does not transmit inherited rules or fixed certainties. It asks questions. It pauses. It waits for response. He is actually more sitting between his legs or on his arms. In this moment, Kim Dan is no longer receiving knowledge about how to endure the world; he is participating in how to inhabit it.

From this point, a first answer to the guiding question emerges.

Episode 86 is neither illusion nor culmination. It does not redeem the past, nor does it erase it. It alters the framework within which meaning can circulate. Time resumes not because wounds have healed, but because they are no longer governing the present by default.

What remains unresolved — and what now demands further attention — is what follows from this shift.

If communication has changed form, how does unpredictability change meaning? If presence has been established, how does recognition operate without erasing the past? And if two nights once marked by failure now converge within the same moment, what does that convergence produce?

These questions open the next stage of the analysis.

The following sections will therefore turn away from possibility and toward consequence: how agency is reclaimed, how repetition acquires new ethical weight, and how two previously incompatible trajectories finally begin to add rather than cancel each other out.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Sweetest 🍭 Downfall 🧴🪮Ever

Notice: Right now, I am quite overwhelmed with work (grading papers, staff meetings etc), hence I can only write one essay after each episode.

Introduction – Where it begins

I have to admit that I had not anticipated a smut-scene in episode 85. On the other hand, it makes sense, for it is the night before the match, it is jinx-time. At the same time, their physical reunion (chapter 85) represents the positive reflection of this night (chapter 58) (chapter 58) (chapter 58), when the physical therapist chose to give up on the athlete and stop listening to his heart. Here, I am not only referring to the numerical symmetry but also to the doctor’s shifting vision of Joo Jaekyung.

In both episodes 58 and 85 (chapter 85), Jaekyung appears with a towel around his neck. This simple object evokes water and sweat, but in Jinx, these elements are never neutral. They are tied to one of the champion’s earliest traumas: the humiliation of being called “dirty” (chapter 75) and “smelly” as a child. This is why Jaekyung learned to perfuse his body with cologne after every shower (chapter 75) and why physical proximity has always carried the risk of shame. Hence he kept people at arms length. In chapter 40, when he rescued Kim Dan from the security guards, he kept his distance (chapter 40) — he had not yet showered, for the towel on his shoulders was stained with blood. Mingwa was indirectly referring to the champion’s psychological wounds. (chapter 40) It was, as if the fear of smelling “wrong,” of being perceived as contaminated, was still dictating his movements. Hence he could only claim doc Dan as one of his own, but not as his “physical therapist” or even “family”. And interesting is that doc Dan copied his attitude. In the hallway, he maintained a certain distance from the athlete. (chapter 40)

But in Paris, the presence of that same towel (chapter 85) suggests something very different. He has just stepped out of the shower, which means he is clean, his hair hanging down, still wet. (chapter 85) This striking detail is that he clearly left in a hurry: contrary to all earlier scenes where he sprayed himself with cologne (chapter 40) the moment he dried off (chapter 75), here he has not perfumed himself at all. (chapter 85) His hair is unstyled, his scent unmasked — and yet he approaches Dan without hesitation. He even kisses him. The item that once symbolized rejection now signifies trust: without fragrance, he is certain that doc Dan will not call him “dirty,” will not recoil, will not shame him. What once provoked distance becomes an unexpected bridge, revealing that Jaekyung is finally letting someone remain close, when he feels most vulnerable. The night in Paris does not simply suggest a return of desire; it announces the return of hope (chapter 85) and trust — and perhaps even the moment when Dan chooses, for the first time, to be honest with his own body and heart.

And yet — hidden beneath the sensual reunion and the echo of that earlier night — something else begins to unravel. Something softer, sweeter, far more dangerous for a man who once prided himself on standing above everyone else. For the first time, we witness the champion’s downfall — not a collapse of strength or dignity, but the collapse of the walls he spent years building. A downfall so gentle that it goes almost unnoticed, except by the one person who has always watched him closely: Doc Dan. (chapter 85)

After all, it takes a certain kind of irony for a man called “the Emperor” to experience his most significant fall at the very moment he carries someone else to bed (chapter 85) — fulfilling, without knowing it, a secret wish the physical therapist has harbored since childhood (chapter 61) [I will elaborate it further later]. And perhaps this is why the moment feels so disarming: because the downfall is not tragic but tender, not humiliating but intimate. Sweet, even.

But to understand why this ‘downfall’ is the sweetest one Joo Jaekyung has ever lived, we must first return to the moment it truly began — not in the bedroom, but hours earlier at the dinner table (chapter 85), when a single careless comment shattered the champion’s composure and revealed just how fragile his newfound hope really was.

The First Tremors

What caught my notice is that the physical therapist is the only one wearing the jacket with Joo Jaekyung on it! (chapter 85) In contrast, both Park Namwook and coach Jeong Yosep wear generic MFC T-shirts. (chapter 85) Mingwa is not simply dressing characters — she is revealing loyalties. The manager and coach are aligned with the institution MFC; Dan alone is aligned with the man, Joo Jaekyung. This quiet visual contrast already hints at the emotional imbalance that will unfold in the next few panels.

The first tremor begins at the dinner table, where the manager suddenly brings the physical therapist back to reality. (chapter 85) Dan is lost in his thoughts — anticipating the night ahead with the champion — and has barely touched his food. Park Namwook notices this. One might think, such a remark displays the manager’s concern for the main lead’s well-being. However, the manager adds that the other members of the team are all almost finished. With such a remark, it becomes clear that the manager is urging the protagonist to finish his plate. Although Park Namwook addresses Dan as if showing concern, the content of his remark betrays his true priority: not Dan’s well-being, but the team’s schedule. By pointing out that ‘the rest of us are almost finished,’ he urges Dan to keep pace, treating him as staff who had to follow the group rather than someone with personal needs. As you can sense, schedule is essential for the manager. However, because doc Dan couldn’t reveal the true reason behind his behavior, he gives an excuse for his lack of appetite. (chapter 85) He merely says he feels “a little queasy.” The irony is striking. In English, queasy is not a neutral word: it suggests nausea, a churning stomach, a sensation often associated with disgust or repulsion. And although Dan’s discomfort has nothing to do with Jaekyung, the word itself carries an emotional weight the champion is highly sensitive to. It brushes against an old, unhealed wound — the childhood humiliation of being called “dirty,” “smelly,” or somehow “wrong.” But doc Dan was not telling the truth, this explains why the main lead refused the medication from the manager right away. (chapter 85) As you can see, the first disturbance comes from Park Namwook. But this doesn’t end here.
He questions the physical therapist — not the fighter — and asks whether he is nervous about tomorrow’s match. The question is innocent, but its implications are not. By speaking to Dan rather than to Jaekyung, Park is unconsciously revealing his neglect toward his boss and champion. Secondly, with this remark “That’s understandable, since it’s been a while for you”, he reminds the champion of two things which have been tormenting him: not only the last match with Baek Junmin and Doc Dan’s vanishing, but also their night together before the Baek Junmin match, when Dan left after sex without looking back. (chapter 53) The manager’s words bring Joo Jaekyung back to reality and its uncomfortable truth that Dan’s presence now is still bound to a contract — temporary, contingent, never fully his. In other words, with his remarks, Park Namwook is reopening old wounds which shows his total blindness and lack of finesse and of empathy. He treats the last match, as if nothing bad had happened. The incident with the switched spray is simply erased.

Thus Jaekyung’s reaction is immediate: his mouth tightens in visible dissatisfaction. (chapter 85) It is a controlled expression, not a loss of composure, but it reveals irritation and intense gaze — the kind that arises when a sensitive subject is touched too directly. Park’s comment awakens a memory whose meaning has changed: back then, he accepted Dan (chapter 53) leaving without thinking; now, after Dan vanished from his life entirely, that earlier departure feels like a sign he failed to read. Park’s question brushes against this bruise, and Jaekyung’s lips reflect the discomfort.

As for the second tremor, it does not come from Park Namwook. It comes from Potato. (chapter 85) The younger fighter suddenly bursts into panic, declaring how nervous he would be in Jaekyung’s place, how his heart would be pounding out of his chest. His outburst is sincere, naïve, and completely focused on the champion — he never once considers Dan’s feelings. Yet these words strike deeper than he intends. At the mention of a pounding heart, Jaekyung’s eyes lift upward in a brief, involuntary movement. It is the smallest gesture, but it exposes everything he wishes to hide. Because his heart is pounding — but not for the match. It is because of doc Dan!

Potato unknowingly names the very thing Jaekyung is trying to keep steady: the nervousness and anticipation of the night ahead, the fear that history might repeat itself, and the desire that has been building for a long time. Unlike Park’s comment, which triggered irritation, Potato’s words hit the emotional center. This upward glance is the second tremor, the moment the façade slips just a little too far. Surrounded by people who see everything except the truth, Jaekyung reaches for the one thing he can control. He taps his phone and, in full view of the table, sends a message to Dan: (chapter 85) “Come to my room at 11.”

It looks like dominance, but it is driven by something far more fragile: (chapter 85) the need for reassurance, the wish to rewrite the pattern of the past, the quiet hope that Dan will not leave him again — not tonight and not afterwards.

This is where the Emperor’s downfall begins: with a tightened mouth, an upward glance, and a message sent to steady a heart that refuses to stay calm.

The Long Wait

If the dinner scene revealed the cracks in the champion’s composure, it also exposed something equally revealing about the manager. For Park Namwook, the real opponent is not Arnaud Gabriel — it is time. This explicates why the manager announces their departure at 7.00 am sharp, though the Emperor’s match is at noon. (chapter 85) Schedules are his armor, punctuality his hiding place. Whenever something threatens to slip beyond control, he retreats behind procedure.

This is why he suddenly takes an interest in Dan’s appetite. (chapter 85) His comment about the untouched plate is not born of concern; it is born of urgency. The faster Dan finishes, the sooner the table can be dismissed, and the sooner Park Namwook can send the champion to his room under the comfortable pretext of “rest.” (chapter 85) For him, “rest” is not a recommendation —
it is a containment strategy. This explains why the manager is not looking at the Emperor, when he tells him: “Jaekyung, go to bed early tonight, okay?”. Why? Because he doesn’t want a discussion. If he avoids eye contact, Jaekyung cannot object — the instruction is meant to be received, not answered. He is expecting obedience, nothing more. Therefore it is not surprising that the manager smiles (chapter 85), as soon as the athlete stands up right after his recommendation and announces he is now returning to his room.

Once Jaekyung is hidden behind a hotel door, quiet and unmonitored, nothing can be blamed on the manager anymore. If the champion sleeps poorly? Not his fault. If he feels sick? Not his fault. If emotions become volatile? Certainly not his fault. He will always be able to say: “I told him to go to bed early.”

What he wants is not Jaekyung’s well-being. What he wants is a clean conscience. But we have another example for his flaw. (chapter 85) A day and night without complications. A scenario in which no one can accuse him of negligence, if something goes wrong tomorrow. And Mingwa already exposed this flaw only seconds earlier. When Dan finally gives an excuse for his lack of appetite — “I’m feeling a bit queasy…” — the manager immediately reframes it as Dan’s recurring personal weakness: “It’s too bad you have trouble eating whenever we go abroad…” (chapter 85) With this single sentence, he erases the actual causes of Dan’s digestive problems — the fact that the therapist had been mistreated, overworked, stressed, ignored, even drugged during their last trip to the States. None of that exists in Park Namwook’s mind. In his version of reality, Dan’s discomfort is an inconvenience, not a symptom of mistreatment.

And here, his solution reveals everything: he immediately offers medication. Not help. Not care. Not attention. He treats doc Dan the same way than Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 54)

A pill — the fastest way to silence discomfort without having to see it. “Too bad” is not sympathy (chapter 85); it is avoidance. It exposes a man who does not want to be burdened by emotions, who cannot hold another person’s vulnerability without trying to shut it down. To him, Dan’s nausea is a logistical issue, not a sign of human distress.

Park Namwook’s flaw is not malice. His flaw is cowardice toward feelings — his own and those of others.
And this flaw will matter the next morning, when the Emperor and/or the doctor do not appear at 7:00 a.m. sharp, and the manager finally discovers that schedules offer no protection against the consequences of neglect.

But let’s return our attention to the manager’s recommendation to the champion: (chapter 85) He reacts with almost visible relief, when the champion stands up from the table. (chapter 85) He has no idea about the text message — no suspicion of anything planned for later. He sees only what benefits him: Jaekyung leaving on his own. Perfect. The fighter is out of sight, out of reach, and most importantly, out of his responsibility.

He doesn’t ask where Jaekyung is going. He doesn’t check if he’s alright. He doesn’t wonder whether something is wrong. He simply lets him go.

But this is exactly where the real question begins — a question the manager can never ask, only Jinx-philes: If Jaekyung returns to his room so early… what does he actually do until 11 pm?

What makes the evening in Paris so striking is the contradiction between time and behavior.
From the moment Joo Jaekyung sends the text at 7:02 p.m (chapter 85) and leaves the table shortly after, until the doctor knocks on his door at 11:00 p.m (if we assume that he went there at 11 pm)., almost four hours pass. (chapter 85) In theory, this is the perfect window to do what he used to do in the States (chapter 38) and Korea (chapter 48) before a big fight: watch his opponent’s videos, study their habits, rehearse counters. If we only looked at the clock, we might assume he spent the evening thinking about Arnaud Gabriel.

But the narrative context says the opposite.

Just before he leaves the table, Jaekyung has been hit by two painful reminders (chapter 85) linked to doc Dan, not Arnaud Gabriel. First, through Park Namwook’s question and tone, he is dragged back to the night before the Baek Junmin match — the night when sex with Dan was followed by distance, and then by disappearance after the fight. Second, Dan’s “queasy” excuse scratches an old wound: the fear of being perceived as disgusting or unwanted. Both moments are about abandonment and rejection, not competition. It is right after this double sting that he sends the message. In that instant, his thoughts are circling only one point: will Dan come to accept me, or will he pull away again?

That is the emotional seed of the long wait. This explains why they are on the bed, the athlete complained: (chapter 85) He had to restrain himself due to doc Dan. (chapter 85) From 7:02 onward, the question is no longer “How do I beat Gabriel?” but “How do I win doc Dan’s heart?” The clock from 7:02 to 11:00 p.m. stops being a “training window” and becomes an emotional countdown. He is no longer the champion preparing for an opponent—he is the man hoping not to be abandoned again. This is why the later scene at the door feels so contradictory: when Dan finally arrives, Jaekyung behaves like someone who couldn’t wait. (chapter 85) He opens the door and immediately grabs him inside (chapter 85), cutting off any possibility of hesitation. The way he drags him over the threshold, presses him against the wall (chapter 85), kisses him, lifts him (chapter 85) and carries him to the bed — all of that oozes urgency. Hence he doesn’t place his lover delicately on the bed, he rather pushes him down, thus we have the sound PLOP: (chapter 85) This is not the controlled, casual emperor of old; it is someone who has been holding back for hours and refuses to risk even a second in which Dan might change his mind.

And yet, visually, we know he has just finished showering. (chapter 85) His hair is still down and wet; the towel is still around his neck. That detail destroys the idea of a carefully structured pre-match evening. If he truly wanted a calm, professional night, he had four hours to shower, dry his hair, apply cologne, and settle. Instead, he postpones the shower so long that he is still damp when he opens the door.

In other words, he waited until the very last minute to get ready. This creates a striking contrast: he had four hours, yet he looks as though he prepared in a hurry. So what exactly did he do during this lapse of time? 😮

This is what every Jinx-lover should wonder. And given Jaekyung’s personality — his directness, his physicality, his awkwardness with emotional communication — a new hypothesis imposes itself. He did not study Gabriel. He studied how to please doc Dan. I am suspecting that he might have watched porno for that matter. Don’t forget this scene on the beach: (chapter 65) and the comment of the champion in front of this movie: (chapter 29) Moreover, I consider this scene (chapter 85) as a new version of Choi Heesung’s advice: Doc Dan just needs to sit back and enjoy!! (chapter 31) Joo Jaekyung is now doing everything, as deep down he wants to become the perfect lover! And how had I described the night in the States? Back then, the hamster Dan had become the champion’s perfect lover, especially because he had kissed his face, hugged him and confessed to him. (chapter 39) But if his fear to lose doc Dan was so huge, why did he ask him to come so late then? (chapter 85) It is the same hour than in the States. (chapter 38) One might reply that the athlete desired to maintain appearances and as such to hide his suffering and anxiety. In other words, he was hiding his emotions behind routine, Jinx-sex would always start at 11 pm. However, this idea is not entirely satisfying because once doc Dan was in his room, the fighter was no longer hiding his emotions and desires. (chapter 85) That’s the reason why I am suspecting another cause for this time 11 pm. In my opinion, it is related to the athlete’s traumas: the physical abuse from his father (chapter 72), when the latter would return late from his “work” and the death of his father (chapter 73).

After the painful reminders at the table — the allusion to the Junmin night and Dan’s “queasy” excuse that scratched an old wound — his entire focus shifted. He could no longer risk repeating the dynamics of the past. In his mind, the only way to ensure that Dan would not disappear again was to do better, physically, in the one domain where he feels competent. So it is not far-fetched to imagine him watching tutorials or videos, searching for techniques, guidance, or advice he never received from anyone. He has one mentor in intimacy, Cheolmin, but the latter has only appeared once. No model to imitate. No words for tenderness. But he can learn through action, through practice, through imitation. And suddenly, this would explain everything that happens later.

It explains why, once doc Dan stands at his door, he behaves with such urgency. He grabs him immediately, pulls him inside, presses him against the wall while holding his face tenderly (chapter 85), kisses him with a force that has been building for hours. He had been so absorbed — so busy learning, rehearsing, imagining — that he realized only late that it was almost time for Dan to arrive. The rushed shower is not laziness; it is evidence that his preparation was of another kind altogether.

And then Dan appears. And this alone must have boosted Jaekyung’s ego in a way nothing else could. (chapter 85) Because doc Dan could have refused. He could have used his queasiness as an excuse, could have stayed in his room, could have claimed exhaustion. Instead, he obeyed the request — a request sent by someone who had hurt him deeply in the past. Doc Dan’s arrival is proof that he is not rejecting him. Proof that the night is real. Proof that the attempt to do better might actually matter. At the same time, doc Dan couldn’t miss the true meaning behind this text sent in front of others: the athlete’s anxiety and suffering. (chapter 85) This explains why his worried gaze followed his fated partner. (chapter 85) In other words, the text had a different meaning. It was not an order, but rather a wish…and it had nothing to do with his match against Arnaud Gabriel. During that night, Joo Jaekyung is not seeing a surrogate fighter in front of him or a sex toy, but his real partner, his future boyfriend. This means, this night stands in opposition to the one in the penthouse: (chapter 53) He is gradually moving on from his belief and jinx, he is even now prioritizing his love life over work!! If Park Namwook knew, he would get so shocked and scared… he would yell at him for causing a mess, for neglecting his “work”.

Under this light, it becomes comprehensible why Jaekyung takes his time for the first time. (chapter 85) This is why he touches Dan’s face instead of flipping him over.
This is why he kisses slowly, repeatedly, almost reverently. He knows that doc Dan likes nipple foreplay.
This is why he carries him in his arms (chapter 85) instead of carrying him over his shoulder. And this is why he suddenly engages in a new kind of foreplay — licking Dan’s leg (chapter 85) and anus (chapter 85) — something he has never done before. This does not come from instinct. It comes from intention. It comes from effort. It comes from learning. He is indeed showering doc Dan with love and tenderness, therefore it is not surprising that the “hamster” is moved sensually and emotionally. Exactly like during the Summer Night’s Dream, he is reaching nirvana, hence Jinx-philes are constantly seeing stars,. (chapter 85)

In short, the four hours did not shape his body for the match. They shaped his behavior for doc Dan.

The long lapse of time reveals a man who was not preparing for Arnaud Gabriel at all — but preparing for the one person whose opinion governs his heart. And when that person actually stands at his door, the tension of those hours condenses into the urgency of his welcome, the care of his touch, and the new tenderness of his actions. Everything in that moment — from the haste of his shower to the way he drags Dan inside — points toward a single truth: something fundamental in Joo Jaekyung has shifted.

And this brings us to the real meaning of the essay’s title.

The Truth Behind The Title

Many readers, seeing The Sweetest Downfall Ever , might assume that the downfall refers to Joo Jaekyung’s current behavior: his neglect of sleep in favor of desire, his single-minded focus on sex the night before the match, his impulsive decision to carry doc Dan to bed (chapter 85), or even the looming risk of professional failure. Others might think the downfall describes Dan’s new physical position — head lowered, body lifted (chapter 85) — or the emotional slip that comes with resurfacing feelings: the therapist losing distance, falling back into intimacy. All of these readings sound plausible at first glance. (chapter 85) But the truth behind the title is far simpler, far more literal, and yet far more symbolic.

The downfall begins with his hair. For the first time, he is letting his hair down. (chapter 85) This visual shift, subtle yet radical, is the origin of the title.

And under this light, the meaning behind my illustration becomes clearer. This is why I chose pink “hair” for the background — not merely as decoration, but as a visual clue. The color evokes warmth, softness, and vulnerability: the emotional terrain Jaekyung steps into the moment gravity pulls his hair out of its rigid form. But why is this detail meaningful?

Because the idiom “to let your hair down” carries centuries of emotional and cultural weight.

When we read this historical meaning through the lens of Mingwa’s imagery, Jaekyung’s hair becomes more than a style choice. It becomes a confession. (chapter 85)

Letting his hair down means dropping the persona. Letting his hair down means allowing himself freedom.
Letting his hair down means entering intimacy — not performance.

It is the visual act of stepping away from the rigid social restraints imposed by MFC, public expectations, masculinity, and even trauma. And with this understanding, the transition becomes effortless:

For years, Joo Jaekyung’s hair has signified his status. (chapter 85) Styled up, hardened with gel (chapter 30) , perfectly arranged — it is the crown of the Emperor, the symbol of his control, his discipline, and the myth that MFC sells:
Joo Jaekyung, the untouchable. Joo Jaekyung, the brand. Joo Jaekyung, the man who never bends. (chapter 82) When the hair stands, the image stands.

But in Paris, for the first time, the hair falls. (chapter 85)

Even before chapter 85, Mingwa prepares the audience for this silent rebellion. Two days before the match, he wears a cap (chapter 85) — but not the way adults or professionals usually do.
He tilts it up, exposing his entire face. Teenagers wear their caps like this: loose, careless, unguarded, more concerned with comfort than appearance. And suddenly, Jaekyung looks younger — not in age, but in spirit. His gaze is no longer shadowed by the bill. It is fully visible, open, almost soft.

Then comes the wolf-ear headband at the amusement park (chapte 85), a gesture that would have been unthinkable for the Emperor of MFC. It is ridiculous, childish, playful — and he wears it anyway. Not for the crowd, not for the cameras, but because Dan asked him to wear one too. So he placed it on his head. It is the second stage of the downfall: the moment where he stops caring about the star image that has governed him for years. The moment where he allows himself to be seen as something other than a fighter. The wolf ears, like the tilted cap, signal a shift toward youthfulness, toward softness, toward an identity unshaped by branding. And yet, both items share something important: they still control the hair.

The cap hides it. The headband frames it. In both cases, the hair remains managed, held in place, contained.
This means that the “rejuvenation” we observe in these scenes is still superficial — a flirtation with freedom rather than freedom itself. (chapter 85) The cap and wolf ears make him look younger, even boyish, but they do not dismantle the structure around him. They soften the edges of the Emperor, but they do not dissolve the crown.

He looks more approachable, but not yet vulnerable. He looks less like a weapon, but not yet like a man. He looks playful, but not yet liberated. However, when he is seen with his hair down (chapter 85), he looks exactly like the little boy in the picture: (chapter 71) So doc Dan could recognize the little boy in the athlete, the more he sees the protagonist with his hair down. Furthermore, I noticed that contrary to season 1, Doc Dan has now more memories of the “wolf” facing him. (chapter 85) In the past, he would more look at him from behind: (chapter 35) (chapter 35) Seeing his face reflects not only the increasing care for each other, but also the improving communication between them.

And this is also the moment where the narrative contrast becomes striking. While Joo Jaekyung’s appearance is drifting backward toward youth, Arnaud Gabriel’s beard makes him look older, (chapter 85) more mature, more “masculine” in the traditional sense. This explicates why the stylists had to dress him up. (chapter 82) Yet such an intervention did more than prepare him for the cameras — it tightened the restrictions around his own image, reducing the fighter’s rights over how he appears to the world. With the suit, he appeared older and more powerful. The French fighter leans into age, while the Korean champion leans into youth — a symbolic inversion that reinforces the central tension in the Paris arc: Gabriel performs adulthood; Jaekyung rediscovers the adolescence he never lived. (chapter 85) But just as Jaekyung begins to slip into these youthful, softer identities, MFC reasserts control.

But MFC has its own ritual of restoration. At the photo shoot, the stylists immediately return him to form: (chapter 85) hair up, face polished, a look engineered for posters and rankings. He becomes once again the Emperor — the man who must appear older, sharper, more intimidating, more manufactured.

And this is exactly why the next transformation hits so hard. When Dan arrives at 11 p.m., Joo Jaekyung opens the door with his hair down, still dripping slightly from a rushed shower. This is not the Emperor. This is not the brand. This is not the legend presented in MFC 317. (chapter 79) This is the boy from the childhood photograph.

The hair-down Jaekyung is younger, wilder, softer (chapter 85) — someone who belongs not to MFC but to himself. Someone capable of affection. Someone whose emotions sit close to the skin. Someone who has stopped pretending. He is able to smile genuinely.

“Letting one’s hair down” is an idiom meaning to stop performing, to stop controlling oneself, to finally relax into authenticity. As you can see, Mingwa uses the concept (letting one’s hair down”) literally and metaphorically at once. The physical gesture (his hair falling) expresses the emotional one (his defenses lowering).

And suddenly, the birthday illustration released earlier this year makes sense. In the rain, with his hair heavy and unstyled, his gaze dark and sensual, Jaekyung appears nothing like the commanding emperor. He looks free — freed by weather, freed by desire, freed from roles. It was foreshadowing, not just fanservice. It announces the end of the « jinx » in reality.

Which brings us to the second reason “downfall” is the perfect word. “Downfall” often describes the collapse of status — the fall of kings, the ruin of reputations. And here, too, the meaning applies. Because by letting his hair down, Joo Jaekyung risks the downfall of the very myth that protects him.

He is neglecting his work. He is prioritizing Dan over rest. He is engaging in a long, indulgent foreplay the night before his comeback match — a foreplay so attentive and sensual that Dan wonders what changed. This is not the Emperor. This is a man who is slowly abandoning the throne.

And Mingwa multiplies the symbolic echoes:

  • Downfall as rain:
    Heavy rain makes hair fall, obscures vision, exposes vulnerability.
    It is no coincidence that the birthday art shows him wet — nature brings him down to earth.
  • Downfall as emotional collapse:
    His confrontation with memories at dinner destabilizes him.
    His desire for Dan overwhelms him.
    His anxiety about losing Dan drives him.
  • Downfall as public risk:
    If he wins and hugs Dan in front of cameras out of gratitude and affection — a real possibility given his new softness — he could expose their bond publicly.
    This would be the ultimate downfall of the Emperor image:
    the revelation that he is not a remote titan but a man in love.
  • Downfall as liberation:
    The fall from the Emperor’s pedestal is not a tragedy.
    It is freedom.

And this is where the meaning circles back to sweetness. However, this also signifies that he is escaping the control of MFC and as such he represents a source of danger for the organization.

When Jaekyung whispers, “Why the fuck do you taste so sweet today?” he is not describing Dan. (chapter 85) He is describing himself. His sweetness is the taste of freedom — freedom from performance, freedom from control, freedom from MFC, freedom from fear. He is enjoying this moment. Dan tastes sweet because Jaekyung is finally tasting the life he never allowed himself to want.

So the “downfall” of the title is not the fall of a champion.

It is the fall of a mask. A downfall so soft that it feels like surrender, so intimate that it feels like seduction, and so liberating that it becomes — unmistakably — sweet. Because the moment Jaekyung lets his hair down, he becomes someone who can fall in love. And perhaps someone who can finally be loved in return.

And now, you are probably thinking, this is it! But no… because we have the long wait the next morning!

Room 1704: The Number of Unscheduled Freedom

While the night in Paris reveals how quietly the Emperor has begun to fall, the true test of his transformation arrives the next morning. If letting his hair down marks the softening of his identity, what happens next exposes something even more subversive: Joo Jaekyung begins to let go of time itself. Because in Paris, time belongs not to MFC, not to Park Namwook, and not to the match — but to room 1704, (chapter 85) the one place where schedules dissolve, rituals are forgotten, and the fighter finally sleeps like someone who no longer needs to brace for survival.

Room 1704 is not just a hotel room; it is the numerical mirror of Jaekyung’s internal shift. It reduces to the number 12, and this detail offers a far deeper layer of meaning than coincidence. Twelve is the number of completeness. It marks the end of one cycle and the threshold of another. In numerology, it unites the energy of new beginnings (1) with the harmony of partnership (2) to form the creative expansion of 3. This blending transforms 12 into a symbol of spiritual awakening and divine order — a moment where the earthly and the transcendent briefly touch. It is no accident that the number appears in so many foundational structures: twelve months shaping the year, twelve zodiac signs forming the cosmic wheel, twelve tribes anchoring a nation, twelve apostles guiding the birth of a new faith. Across cultures, twelve signifies not closure, but transition: the release of what binds and the emergence of a new form.

Seen through this lens, room 1704 becomes the perfect setting for the champion’s inner shift. He does not simply enter a hotel room; he steps into a symbolic space where an old identity completes itself and a new one quietly begins. Twelve encourages letting go, surrendering rigidity, and allowing transformation to unfold. And this is precisely what happens that night. In room 1704, Joo Jaekyung lets his hair down, lets his guard fall, lets Dan remain close, and lets go — without yet realizing it — of the rituals and defenses that once defined him. The number that governs the room marks the moment where the Emperor’s earthly order dissolves, making space for an awakening shaped not by hierarchy or discipline, but by intimacy and partnership.

And the room itself reinforces this symbolism. Above the couch hangs a painting (chapter 85) The image is dreamlike: there are white horses with wings, a Pegasus-like creatures and angels. Their outlines are soft, almost blurred, as if painted in the air rather than on canvas. This is no random hotel decoration. A Pegasus traditionally symbolizes deliverance from earthly burdens, escape from oppression, and ascension into a higher realm; angels, of course, signify protection, guidance, and spiritual renewal. Together they transform the couch area into a symbolic threshold: the boundary between the profane world (MFC, schedules, fear, trauma) and a space touched by something gentler, freer, almost sacred.

The Pegasus-and-angel painting above the couch does more than sanctify room 1704—it also illuminates something that has quietly shaped Dan’s entire emotional life: his relationship to the couch itself. (chapter 21) The image of winged rescue and divine protection hangs over the very piece of furniture that, throughout the series, has functioned as Dan’s private sanctuary. This is not incidental. In Jinx, the couch is tied to his deepest memories of care and abandonment, and Mingwa activates this symbolism each time Dan gravitates to it.

Why did Dan’s nightmare of abandonment strike precisely, when he fell asleep on the couch? (chapter 21) Why does he consistently feel safer on the couch than in a bed? (chapter 29) Why, after the second swimming lesson, did he refuse to return to the bed (chapter 81), even though he was exhausted? Why does he place the teddy bear (chapter 84) —his last substitute for lost parental affection—on the couch and not on the bed? And finally, why has he always harbored the secret wish to be carried to bed, as confessed through his memory in chapter 61? (chapter 61)

The answers converge: the couch is Dan’s liminal space, the threshold between being left behind and being held, between cold reality and the remnants of tenderness he once knew. Note that there is no couch in the halmoni’s house. (chapter 10) Secondly, at no moment, we ever witness the grandmother carrying the little boy to bed. Either she is rocking him to sleep outside the house (chapter 47) or he is already in the bed. We never see her bringing him to bed.

Thus I came to develop the following theory. In childhood, before everything collapsed, the couch was the place where doc Dan waited for his parents to return from work—the place where he sometimes fell asleep with his teddy bear, only to be lifted and carried to bed by someone who loved him. It was brief, fragile, but it became etched into him as the last ritual of genuine care, before the world turned harsh. This would explain why he has internalized such gestures: (chapter 44), (chapter 44) traces from parents. And now, you comprehend why the hamster could never truly rest in the bed. The couch is therefore not an adult preference; it is a trauma imprint. Resting there feels safe because beds—large, empty, abandoned spaces—became reminders of whoever no longer carried him. Hence it is no longer surprising that he woke up, when he sensed the vanishing of warmth. (chapter 21)

This is why Dan puts the teddy bear on the couch (chapter 84): the bear stands in for a lost comforting presence. It also represents the main lead, Joo Jaekyung. The latter is gradually reentering in the physical therapist’s heart and life. Therefore it is not surprising that there, he squeezes the hand of the toy. It is also why Doc Dan curls around it like a child who deep down hopes to be chosen, lifted, and held. And it is why, even as an adult, his body still whispers the same yearning: someone, please carry me to bed again.

Placed in this context, the painting above the couch in room 1704 becomes profound. The winged horses represent rescue; the angels represent guardianship. They hover above the very place where Dan’s old wound meets the possibility of healing. And on this particular night, the symbolism is fulfilled: the man he once feared, the man who once hurt him, becomes the one who finally lifts him —not to discard him, not to dominate him, but to carry him to bed with the gentleness he has been unconsciously longing for since childhood. Under this new perspective, it becomes comprehensible why doc Dan often never realized that the athlete had often fulfilled his wish (chapter 29, chapter 40, chapter 65, chapter 68, chapter 79)

The couch, the painting, the number 1704—all align to mark this night as a turning point. A moment where old scripts collapse, where Dan’s abandonment narrative begins to loosen, and where Joo Jaekyung unknowingly steps into the role that no one has fulfilled since Dan was small: the one who does not leave him sleeping alone, but brings him into warmth.

And this is precisely what the number 1704 suggests. Reduced to 12, it carries the connotations of completion, awakening, divine order, the closing of one cycle and the opening of another. The Pegasus and angels above the couch echo that meaning visually: a silent promise that something in this room will lift rather than trap, heal rather than wound.

It is striking, too, that the imagery concerns flight—wings, ascension, rising above earthly weight. (chapter 85) For Joo Jaekyung, whose entire identity has been built on gravity, discipline, and the hardness of the body, this painting becomes an unconscious prelude to what he is about to do emotionally: let go, descend from the Emperor’s pedestal, and allow himself to be vulnerable. For Dan, the angels evoke the comfort and innocence he lost in childhood, the tenderness he has been deprived of for years. The painting therefore mirrors both men: the fighter who needs freedom, and the healer who needs protection.

Placed above the couch, it becomes the room’s spiritual anchor. It blesses the space without the characters realizing it. It reframes the night not as moral failure but as transformation. In this light, the “downfall” in the title is not the collapse of a champion — it is the completion of a cycle. A descent that is also a rising. A falling-away that creates room for renewal. Twelve crowns the night not with the end of something, but with the birth of something sweeter. Observe that around the painting, the pattern on the wall looks similar to snow flakes. It’s no coincidence… a synonym for “home”. A visual whisper that what happens here is not corruption but ascension and even “Nirvana”. That’s why I have the feeling that both or one of them might not wake up on time.

The first sign that room 1704 operates under new rules appears through a small but powerful object: the Do Not Disturb sign. (chapter 85)

For years, nothing in Jaekyung’s life has been allowed to interrupt the routine designed to keep him winning. His schedule is a fortress — wake up early, drink milk, shower and perfume, style hair, prepare body, prepare mind. Every minute is accounted for. Every ritual restores the Emperor identity. No step can be skipped.

But the moment Dan enters room 1704, the fortress cracks. The DND sign goes up. This implies that Joo Jaekyung might be able to sleep better and longer after this “hot night”.

And this tiny act holds enormous consequences. Park Namwook’s entire identity as manager is built on timing. He hides behind schedules the way Jaekyung once hid behind performance. (chapter 85) His mantra — 7:00 AM sharp — is not about concern. It is about control. If he arrives very early with his star, he believes that he has done his job. It is now MFC and Joo Jaekyung’s responsibility to decide about the match. Striking is that in the States, doc Dan woke up at 10. 26 am (chapter 85) and he was still able to arrive on time in the arena. (chapter 40) For me, it is a clue that the manager would always request to meet around 7.00 am, when the match was at noon. But what should do the athlete do during all this time? He can only get nervous and feel pressured.

This is where the true problem begins. A fighter scheduled to rise at dawn for a noon match is being set up to fail. The human body performs best roughly four or five hours after waking; having a good breakfast, for a match at midday, the ideal waking time would be closer to 8:30 or 9:00. Yet Park Namwook forces the entire team into a rhythm that has nothing to do with physiology and everything to do with his own fear of unpredictability. In other words, he is not managing an athlete — he is managing his anxiety.

The timing is disastrous for someone like Joo Jaekyung, whose insomnia is a recurring wound in the story. Sleep is the one ressource the Emperor chronically lacks, and the one thing he finally has a chance to experience now that doc Dan is beside him. (chapter 81) I noticed that in different scenes from season 2, the athlete started waking up later and even after doc Dan. (chapter 66) But the manager’s rigid schedule threatens even that. An early morning summons drains the fighter’s cortisol reserves before the match has even begun, creating a long, empty corridor of waiting — a period where tension, anxiety, fatigue, and irritation ferment in the body. Instead of resting, centering, and preparing, the champion would spend hours fighting against the clock imposed on him.

And this, ironically, is precisely what Park Namwook wants: a day without surprises, without emotional complications, without having to shoulder responsibility if something goes wrong. By bringing the team down to the lobby at a painfully early hour (chapter 85), he can tell himself that he has done everything correctly. From the moment they arrive, the rest is “not his problem.” His scheduling is a shield — not for Jaekyung, but for himself.

This reveals a harsh truth about his management style. He values predictability over performance, procedure over well-being, optics over actual athletic needs. And because he interprets punctuality as competence, he assumes that an early arrival protects him from blame. Whether the star sleeps well, eats well, or preserves his mental focus does not matter. What matters is that the boxes are checked, the appearance of order is maintained, and the responsibility is successfully transferred upward.

But what happens if the Emperor does not appear at 7:00 AM? (chapter 85) What happens if the room 1704 — with its quietly glowing DND sign — refuses to open?

Suddenly the carefully constructed ritual collapses. The manager may be standing in front of the door early in the morning, but the DND sign renders him powerless. He cannot knock insistently, he cannot demand entry or yell, and he certainly cannot ask hotel staff to open the door or to call the athlete. Any attempt to violate a guest’s privacy would not only break hotel policy — it could lead to a lawsuit, a breach-of-contract scandal, or even an international incident involving their star athlete. One angry complaint from Joo Jaekyung could cost the hotel its reputation, and one misstep from Park Namwook could cost him his career. And because he knows the champion had been drinking after the “loss” (chapter 54) , he might even jump to the wrong conclusion: that Jaekyung drank again — this time behind his back. (chapter 82) The irony is striking. Two days before the match, it was Park Namwook who overindulged with the others, yet he may now project that same carelessness onto the athlete. In his mind, the DND sign does not simply mean “rest”; it becomes a warning signal, a possible confirmation of the irresponsibility he fears but has never actually witnessed. Thus I can already imagine him panicking.

And this is exactly what terrifies him: there is no legal or professional ground on which he can force the champion to obey the schedule he imposed. For once, he cannot hide behind authority. He cannot produce documents or procedures to justify intervention. He cannot shift responsibility to MFC.

He is trapped in a situation where doing nothing is dangerous, and acting is even worse. One might object and say that he can still call the two protagonists. However, the doctor didn’t bring his cellphone to the room. (chapter 85) Secondly, it is possible that the athlete’s cellphone runs out of battery, especially if he watched so many videos the night before. However, if the staff knows about the DND, the manager can not ask the desk to call Joo Jaekyung either.

But the most destabilizing element of all is that he cannot even determine whom to blame — the physical therapist who may have encouraged the fighter to rest longer, or the champion who dared to let doc Dan sleep past the artificial boundaries the manager set in place or even slept longer by inadvertence. Another important aspect is the text from the champion. (chapter 85) Here, it is not written 11.00 pm, so the message could be read as 11.00 am. So this message could be read like this. He wanted to rest till 11.00 am. This could represent an evidence that champion chose to act behind Park Namwook’s back and trust Doc Dan more than Park Namwook.

The hierarchy reverses itself in an instant: the Emperor is untouchable, and the manager is the one who risks punishment.

For the first time, Park Namwook may have to confront the truth he has avoided for years: that his role as manager is ornamental, that he has never truly controlled the Emperor’s time, and that his authority dissolves the moment the athlete chooses to prioritize his own needs or his lover’s needs.

In that paralysis, old coping strategies return. He may blame Dan for keeping the champion awake. He may blame the champion for irresponsibility. He may fear that the match will suffer and that this failure, unlike all the others, will reflect poorly on him. One thing is sure: the manager can not leave the hotel without the wolf, and the latter will refuse to leave doc Dan behind either. As you can see, this night stands under the sign of “partnership” and the manager is now excluded.

However, inside room 1704, none of this external pressure exists. Because of the painting, I deduce that this room stands for intemporality. It was, as if time had stopped flowing. For the first time in years, Joo Jaekyung sleeps without fear. Without nightmares. Without counting breaths. Without bracing for violence. Without packing his trauma into the muscles of his back. Why? Because Dan is there. Not touching him — simply present. The presence alone rewrites the body’s memory.

And here lies the narrative genius: if Dan wakes first, he will instinctively protect that peace. He knows how vital rest is. He knows how Jaekyung has struggled to breathe, to sleep, to function. He knows the psychological cost of insomnia. He may silence alarms, block the manager from entering, or simply remain beside him until Jaekyung wakes naturally.

Which sets up the coming conflict:

If Jaekyung wakes late — later than the 7:00 AM schedule —he will not have enough time for his rituals.

  • No milk to ground him
  • No cold shower to reset his body
  • No perfume to cover the phantom scent of childhood shame
  • No hair styling to reinstall the Emperor crown

But none of this would matter, as long as doc Dan accepts him like that. However, it is clear that the fight will take place no matter what, as this match will be shown on TV! How do I know this? A match scheduled at noon on a Saturday is not designed for a French television audience — it is one of the least convenient viewing times for locals. But it aligns perfectly with broadcast windows in Korea and the United States, which means the bout is already plugged into international programming. In other words, the machinery is running. Cameras will roll, sponsors will expect coverage, and the event cannot be canceled simply because the champion oversleeps. The celebrity can arrive late, for he brings money. Joo Jaekyung will walk into the arena not as the branded champion, but as the man from room 1704 (chapter 85), a man who slept deeply, whose hair still remembers being down, whose body still carries Dan’s warmth. And this is the true downfall: He risks entering a match not as the Emperor, but as himself. And such a transformation could make people realize how young the “MMA fighter” is in the end. At the same time, his late arrival could create the illusion that the Emperor is not mentally and physically ready for a fight so that Arnaud Gabriel underestimates his opponent.

But here’s the irony — this may be the very thing that makes him stronger. Room 1704 becomes the space where the champion’s trauma evaporates, where instinct replaces ritual, where softness replaces armor. If he oversleeps, it means he felt safe — an emotional victory far more significant than a title defense.

For Park Namwook, however, oversleeping is a managerial nightmare. It is disorder. It is unpredictability. It is autonomy — the one thing he cannot manage. And when he stands before the DND sign, powerless, he may finally realize that his control and authority were always an illusion. He is not the boss or the owner of the gym. The Emperor no longer belongs to schedules, rituals, or institutions. He belongs to the one person behind that door. And that would be doc Dan who overlooked everything in Paris: his food (chapter 82), his look (chapter 82), his free time and took care of the champion’s emotional needs. In Paris, the « hamster » became the champion’s manager de facto, the unofficial right-hand. That’s why if they are late and they need a scapegoat, the manager can blame the physical therapist for the « delay », he would always come late to appointments (chapter 17: meeting the doctor) and to the fights (Busan, in the States).

Room 1704 is not the site of a downfall. It is the site of awakening.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Words 🎆The Firework 🎆 Stole 🥷 (second version)

Finally a Love Confession?

Among all the scenes in Jinx, none has ignited more speculation than the moment inside the Ferris wheel cabin—those few seconds when Joo Jaekyung’s lips move (chapter 84), the fireworks erupt, and Kim Dan turns his head too late. (chapter 84) Readers have replayed the blurred panel again and again, straining to decipher the muffled shapes of his mouth. Some are convinced that this is the confession, the moment the wolf finally says aloud what his body has been whispering for months. One Jinx-phile, @4992cb even insisted she had cracked the code: five syllables, just enough to match the Korean 좋아해 김단 (jo-a-hae Kim Dan)—“I like you, Kim Dan.”

And truthfully, the scene encourages such a reading. Fireworks often accompany love confessions in East Asian media (chapter 84) —especially Japanese summer festivals where boys and girls, dressed in yukata, confess beneath crackling skies. Fireworks symbolize joy, romance, fleeting courage. It is no wonder many readers assumed that Mingwa was drawing on this cultural grammar: purple night sky, glowing lights, two lonely figures suspended above the world. A confession seems almost inevitable. And if it truly was a love declaration, then the champion’s refusal to repeat himself (chapter 84) would make perfect narrative sense—confession lost, moment gone, courage spent.

But before we accept the romantic surface, we must pause. Something about the staging feels off—deliberately off. Why would Mingwa construct a confession that the receiver cannot hear? (chapter 84) Why give Kim Dan the long-awaited moment he has yearned for, only to snatch it away with the noise of exploding light? Yes, despite his words, Kim Dan still had the hope to be loved by the athlete. Hence he kept thinking about the athlete’s motivations for his “stay and care at the seaside town”. (chapter 62) (chapter 77) Why does Joo Jaekyung speak exactly when the fireworks begin, as if choosing the one moment when he is guaranteed to be drowned out? (chapter 84) And most importantly: what emotion pushed him to open his mouth in the first place? (chapter 84) Was he truly confessing love—or was he trying to verbalize something far more raw, far more primitive, far more difficult?

Before we can decode the stolen syllables, we need to examine the entire machinery around this moment: the champion’s posture, the lighting, the soundscape, the timing, and the emotional triggers accumulated over previous chapters. Only then can we begin to understand what he tried to say, and why the author ensured that Kim Dan—the boy who has always longed to be chosen—could not hear it.

The Mechanics of a Stolen Confession

Everything about the Ferris wheel cabin — the positioning, the posture, the lighting — undermines the idea that Joo Jaekyung was intentionally directing his words toward Kim Dan. The mechanics of his body say more than the bubble ever could. To begin with, Jaekyung is not fully facing Kim Dan when he begins to speak. (chapter 84) How do we know this? His body tells the truth before any words do: his torso is angled half-way toward the window and half-way toward Kim Dan, caught between desire and retreat. His arms remain crossed — a classic defensive posture — as if he is bracing himself against the very feelings he is trying to verbalize. This is not the stance of someone delivering a confident love confession; it is the posture of a man attempting something dangerous, something he is afraid to expose.

Only his head turns slightly toward Kim Dan, a diagonal tilt rather than a direct orientation. (chapter 84) It signals hesitation, testing the water, not a deliberate act of addressing someone face-to-face. And the light confirms this: the violet firework glow still falls on the same side of his face as in the previous panel, proving that he did not rotate his body or head enough to truly face Kim Dan while speaking. (chapter 84) He remains more oriented toward the window, toward the blur of lights outside — toward a safer, less intimate direction.

This halfway posture makes everything clear: Jaekyung is speaking from a place of longing mixed with fear, practicing honesty without yet daring to look directly at the person who provokes it. It is because as soon as his fated partner asks him to repeat, he turns slightly his head away, to the window. (chapter 84) When someone truly wants to be understood, they turn instinctively toward the listener. But when Jaekyung turns away, he is not refusing vulnerability — he is choosing fear. Turning his head toward the window is an instinctive retreat into the only safety he knows: distance.

This is crucial: he begins to speak while refusing to meet the therapist’s gaze. (chapter 84) The words escape sideways — literally.

Then comes the second mechanical detail: timing. He opens his mouth precisely at the moment the fireworks erupt. Deep down, he knows the noise will drown his voice. This is not accidental. It mirrors episodes 76(chapter 76) and 79 (chapter 79), where he “speaks” only when the other man cannot truly hear him. At the hostel, the mumbling was barely audible: yet according to my observation and deduction, doc Dan seems to have caught something. as later we discover this scene from the champion’s memory: (chapter 77) He already knew that the athlete was standing next to him. However, observe that this vision focused on the doctor’s gaze was accompanied with silence. This means, doc Dan acted, as if he had heard nothing. So if he heard, what did the physical therapist catch exactly in the kitchen? “I lost…”, but it was devoid of any context. Doc Dan had no idea what the director Hwang Byungchul had advised to his former student. (chapter 75) He could not know that “I lost” referred to something far more intimate: Jaekyung losing control over his own emotional detachment, he was totally vulnerable in front of doc Dan. His heart was stronger than his “mind and fists”. Naturally, if Kim Dan interpreted the phrase at all, he would connect it to the only “loss” he understood: the tie with Baek Junmin. A humiliating defeat. A source of shame. This misinterpretation perfectly explains why in the cabin, the hamster immediately assumes that the champion is once again determined to regain his title: (chapter 84) He is taking the champion’s words at face-value. (chapter 77) He trusts the explanation Jaekyung himself gave under the tree. And here lies the deeper revelation: Kim Dan’s misunderstanding exposes the true meaning of the tree confession. Why did Jaekyung suddenly accept the match? Why frame it entirely in terms of “I need you for these two fights”?

Because work was the only safe language he had left for reconnecting with the therapist. He could not say, “Please stay with me.” He could not say, “I don’t want to lose you.” So he said the only thing he believed he was allowed to say:
“I need you for my return match… and my title match.”

It is a substitution — a mask — a plea disguised as practicality. (chapter 84) A deadline designed to keep Kim Dan close without revealing the depth of the emotional dependency underneath. Finally, before we even analyze posture or timing, we must acknowledge the ghost that is sitting inside the cabin with them — Jaekyung’s own admission of dishonesty. Just minutes earlier, the narrative revealed again a thought he had never dared to voice aloud: (chapter 84) This line is essential, because it exposes the truth behind every failed confession that came before it: Jaekyung did not rekindle with doc Dan with honesty. His first instinct was deception (lie by omission), not vulnerability. Keeping Kim Dan near him mattered more than telling him the truth. So his “love” was still more influenced by possessiveness.

And that is precisely why his apology in the cabin lands with such weight. (chapter 84) For the first time, he admits wrongdoing without deflecting, without rage, without pride. This apology is not strategic; it is confessional. A tone we have never heard from him before. It is no coincidence that just before, he employed this expression: (chapter 84) This is the language of surrender — not to defeat, but to vulnerability and selflessness. The champion who once insisted on keeping Kim Dan “one way or another” (chapter 84) now articulates the opposite impulse: the willingness to release him, to give him a choice. (chapter 84) Kim Dan can actually never forgive him. He is giving up, on his possessive love — the possessiveness that fueled all his earlier attempts to hold onto Dan through contracts, pressure, intimidation, manipulations or work-related obligations.

Here, his grip loosens. Here, his desire is no longer expressed as ownership, but as remorse. And this shift matters profoundly for the blurred confession. (chapter 84) By apologizing, Jaekyung crosses a threshold he has never crossed before: he speaks without power, without defense, without dominance.
For the first time, he tells Kim Dan something that is not a command, not a justification, not an excuse — but a truth about himself. Yet this emotional shift, as liberating as it is, does not make him ready to say “I love you” or even “I like you” in a clean, intentional, adult way. In fact, the opposite is true. When guilt falls away, he does not step into romantic maturity — he reverts to emotional childhood. This explicates why later he felt so embarrassed on his bed, hiding his face under the pillow. (chapter 84) Thus for me, in the cabin the champion became, for a moment, the boy with no mother’s gaze, no father’s protection, no safe place to rest. He must have said something cheesy, something a young person would say. Purity returns before experience does. Honesty returns before articulation. And in that moment inside the cabin, Mingwa makes a decisive artistic choice: we do not see Jaekyung’s eyes. (chapter 84) The panel hides them completely — not out of convenience, but out of protection. It is as if the author herself shields the wolf’s vulnerability from the reader, granting him a moment of privacy at the precise instant he attempts something emotionally dangerous.

Just as in episodes 76 and 79, his words are not fully directed at Kim Dan. They are spoken near him, not to him.
They slip out sideways — half internal, half external — the verbal equivalent of a heartbeat too quiet to be called speech. In other words, what happens inside the cabin is not the flowering of romantic eloquence. It is the first trembling attempt of someone who has never been loved to express the only version of love he knows: instinctive, needy, unpolished, raw.

This is why he cannot possibly be saying a line as adult and structured as “I love you” or even “I like you.”
Such sentences require three things he does not possess yet:

  1. A sense that he himself is lovable → he does not. Hence he still views himself as nonredeemable and as a burden.
  2. A sense that Kim Dan feels the same → he has no proof. Besides, doc Dan keeps avoiding his gaze, feels uncomfortable in front of him. He is not speaking his mind. He keeps reminding him of their limited contract.
  3. A sense of equality in the relationship → they are not there yet. Joo Jaekyung feels now inferior with all his sins and wrongdoings. Due to his last words, it becomes clear that he is not expecting something in return.

What he can say at this stage — and what fits the emotional mechanics of the scene — is something far younger, far simpler, far more primal, like for example “Stay with me” or “I want to kiss you ” or “I want to hold you”…

These are not love declarations. They are the vocabulary of a neglected child whose first experience of safety has finally returned — and who now fears losing it more than anything else.

And crucially, this would explain everything about the staging:

  • why he chooses fireworks (the sound protects him from being truly heard),
  • why his body angles away (he speaks sideways, not directly),
  • why his voice is blurred (because the reader is not meant to hear it yet),
  • why he panics when Kim Dan asks him to repeat,
  • why he instantly retracts with “Never mind.”

A man confessing love does not recoil. A child confessing need always does. It is also why the author hides the line. Not because it is a grand romantic confession, but because it is too emotionally naked, too immature, too early, too cheesy. A sentence like “I wish to …”, whispered by a man who has never held anyone without ownership, is more intimate than any polished “I love you.”

And Mingwa knows it. The confession is blurred not because it declares love, but because it reveals Jaekyung’s inexperience with love. He can finally be honest — but he cannot yet be articulate.

He can reach — but he cannot yet claim. He is pure — but not ready. Hence later, he is seen wearing a white t-shirt for the first time. (chapter 84) This pigment stands for innocence, purity, new beginnings and even equity.

That is why the fireworks stole the words. (chapter 84) Because they were not yet meant to be received, only meant to be released. The fireworks allow him to finally attempt a more honest sentence, but in conditions where it cannot reach its target.
Noise replaces courage.
Light replaces eye contact.
Fear replaces clarity.
A man who has only just begun to tell the truth about his wrongdoing cannot yet tell the full truth of his love.
His apology creates the emotional opening — but it also exposes how unprepared he is to verbalize the feelings that have been building silently for 84 chapters. So far, he has never verbalized his desires and emotions, hence he kissed doc Dan right away in the swimming pool. (chapter 81) Yet this is also the limit of what he can say.

But let’s return our attention to the scene in the penthouse (chapter 79), which is similar to the scene in the kitchen and at the amusement park. Though the star was once again mumbling, this time Doc Dan reacted to his words. However, Jinx-philes can sense a divergence between the other two scenes (chapter 76) (chapter 84). It is because doc Dan was looking at him this time: (chapter 79) Thus he could see the athlete’s mouth moving and hear sound. Nevertheless, observe that the moment the wolf reached to the doctor’s words, he bowed his head and looked down. From this (chapter 79) to this (chapter 79) As you can sense, he fears his lover’s gaze, a new version of this situation: (chapter 79) However, he doesn’t fear coldness, but ridicule and mockery, the father’s gaze: (chapter 73) Under this light, people can grasp why Joo Jaekyung was not facing doc Dan directly in the cabin. To conclude, the mechanism is identical, but amplified. (chapter 84) Instead of mumbling, he lets the fireworks perform the silencing. It is not that the environment interrupts him; it is that he chooses a moment when interruption is guaranteed. However, one detail caught my attention: he’s getting physically closer to Doc Dan!! The distance is getting reduced. It was, as if he was practicing how to confess his affection. And so far, he never used the words « I love you ». (Chapter 44) (chapter 76) At the same time, Jinx-philes can detect the existence of another common denominator: the physical therapist’s gaze.

The Spark behind the Wolf’s Confession

To understand the blurred sentence — the words the firework stole — we must first shift our attention away from language entirely and back to what truly matters in this scene: vision. What drives Joo Jaekyung to the brink of confession in chapter 84 is not romance, nor timing, nor even the apology he had just managed to deliver. It is Kim Dan’s gaze. (chapter 84) He is moved by such a pure gaze, full of awe.

The panel makes this undeniable. Before speaking, the champion is watching the therapist’s face illuminated by fireworks, softened into wonder. (chapter 84) This is not the gaze of a caretaker, nor a tired worker, nor a subordinate fulfilling a duty. It is the open, trusting gaze of a child witnessing beauty. And for Joo Jaekyung, that gaze is both intoxicating and devastating.

The champion has lived his entire life without soft eyes directed at him. His mother, always drawn from behind, is eyeless — a woman who never truly saw him. (chapter 73) Besides, the head of her position is indicating that she was not looking at her son, the boy was hiding his face from Joo Jaewoong and his mother. Then his father mocked him, degraded him, and used resemblance as an insult: (chapter 73) Moreover, Hwang Byungchul reduced him to a lineage of failure or talent, not a person deserving recognition. He constantly compared him to his father (chapter 74) or his mother (a poor but good mother), he was not seen for whom he was: a child, a boy. Jinx consistently links sight with recognition, and recognition with love. (chapter 53) Jaekyung has never been granted either. (Chapter 45) Thus when he got upset with the present, he indirectly expressed the wish to be « looked at ». Moreover, in his visions or memories, this is what he keeps seeing: (chapter 54) (chapter 75) Doc Dan’s gaze!

This is what makes the locker-room scene in chapter 51 so crucial. Kim Dan looks at him with shock, vulnerability, and a plea: (chapter 51) And for the first time, Jaekyung freezes. (chapter 51) His breath catches; his eyes widen. It is the moment he realizes his mistake. He never thought that doc Dan had been trusting him. That moment marks the first rupture in his emotional armor, not only because it hurt, but because it revealed. He realizes with terror that he wants to be seen by Kim Dan, but when he faced such a gaze, he could only feel guilty and bad. Thus it is not surprising that later, his nightmare let transpire his guilty conscience. (chapter 54) He is the one who made his fated partner cry. No wonder why he first tried to find a new toy, he felt uncomfortable.

In the Ferris wheel cabin of chapter 84, he encounters his fated partner’s gaze again — (chapter 84) but now it is purified, childlike, unguarded. Kim Dan glows under the fireworks, mesmerized by beauty instead of violence, by wonder instead of fear. And Jaekyung wants — desperately — for that softness to be directed at him. Not at his victories. Not at his muscles. Not at the persona he built to survive. But at the man beneath all of it. A man worthy of admiration, affection, safety. A man who could be held, kept, loved. That’s why I wondered for a while if Joo Jaekyung had not copied Arnaud Gabriel’s flirt (chapter 82), as the champion has always used his surroundings as a source of inspiration. (Chapter 29) It would also fit with 5 syllabes in Korean. And it would be cheesy too. Yet, I have my doubts about this theory which I will explain further below. Nevertheless, one thing is sure. The champion loves the doctor’s eyes and they have the power to move not only his heart but also his mouth. He is encouraged to verbalize his emotions.

This is the true trigger of the confession. Not desire in the adult sense, and certainly not a strategic “I like you” or “I love you,” but a longing to be seen — and therefore, to be wanted. Every wound in Jaekyung’s life is tied to vision: the eyeless mother who vanished, the father who asked whether she would even want to live with him if she saw what he had become, the locker-room moment that shattered his self-perception. All of this returns when he sees Kim Dan’s shining eyes reflecting the fireworks.

He wants those eyes turned toward him with love. Not gratitude. Not dependence. Not fear. Love. What he wants most
and what he fears most come from the same place: Kim Dan’s gaze. (chapter 84) The gaze under the fireworks triggers emotions in him. Thus he blurted out something. But for me, he does not know how to say “I love you.” He cannot even say “I like you.” Those sentences belong to someone who has matured emotionally — someone who can identify feelings properly, but so far he keeps saying: “to stay by his side” and his « affection declarations » were all linked to negativity.. Thus my idea was that Joo Jaekyung could have said this: “I want to hold you!” (안고 싶어 너). Let’s not forget that so far, the champion had never expressed such a longing before; a warm embrace. He would always follow his instincts: (chapter 4) (chapter 43) (chapter 69) The hug represents a metaphor for “staying by his side, for home and to be seen”. Moreover, in French embrasser can mean kiss and hug. And strangely, I noticed that the protagonists were never looking at each other during an embrace. (chapter 44) And let’s not forget that such a gesture is strongly intertwined with “childhood”. (chapter 65) It is for “babies”. No wonder why he retracted immediately.

To conclude, the words that escape him in the dark — too soft to be caught, swallowed by the firework’s explosion — become the linguistic equivalent of reaching toward warmth without daring to touch it. The sentence he forms must fit his emotional stage: childlike, inexperienced, driven by instinct rather than maturity. It must reflect longing, not possession; desire, not declaration. And it must match the blurred outline of five syllables we see in the panel. (chapter 84) 안고 싶어 너: I want to hold/hug you!

The Secret behind the Blurred Words

And now, you are wondering what other secret could be hidden behind these words. It is related to the physical therapist him. Why did Mingwa, the goddess of “narrative fate”, ensure that doc Dan couldn’t hear the athlete’s words? (chapter 84) First, recall that in the previous parallel scenes (76 and 79), doc Dan is portrayed as someone who doesn’t hear Jaekyung’s confessions. But as I argued earlier, we must question whether this is truly the case — especially the one in episode 76. The panel arrangement suggests that something was heard, but not acknowledged. Then during the fireworks, he does not say, “I couldn’t hear what you said.”
He says: “I didn’t catch that.” “Catch” implies arms, grasping, holding — the very things stolen from him as a child.

And then comes the detail that betrays everything: the small drop on his cheek. A sign of discomfort… and something deeper: recognition. The drop on his face was not present before. (chapter 84) For me, everything points to the same conclusion: doc Dan might have heard something — but he cannot yet allow himself to process it.
This denial explains his expression in the shower at the hotel: (chapter 84) Here, the doctor looks sad and wounded. His eyes are unfocused — he is not seeing the present. The water running down his eyelashes gives the impression of tears, even though he is not crying. His gaze is distant, fixed on something internal. His mouth looks tense, almost trembling. The mouth especially is a clue: Kim Dan’s emotions always gather there when something from the past resurfaces.This is the expression of someone thrown into an involuntary flashback. He is inside a memory. This explicates why this scene is similar to the champion’s shower after the latter had met Baek Junmin: (chapter 49) (chapter 49) Both scenes show a man pulled violently into a buried memory. Thus, my assumption is simple: the champion said something that pierced straight into Kim Dan’s oldest wound and brought his trauma to the surface. And this brings me to my next observation. Inside the cabin, there are not two people — there are three: the champion, the therapist, and the Teddy Bear. (chapter 84) Furthermore, we have a window. We have a phone (dead, but present). We have a childlike toy — symbol of stolen innocence. (chapter 84) And now, look again at episode 19: (chapter 19) A window with no view. Three figures: halmoni, the boy, and the phone placed between them like a knife. And the sound structure is identical, but reversed:
silence – sound – silence in episode 19
vs
sound – silence – sound in episode 84, as the Teddy Bear is a silent “witness”. In both scenes, something is stolen.
In both scenes, a child loses something he cannot name. Thus, what Jaekyung said must have resembled the emotional tone — if not the wording — of the words spoken over the phone on that catastrophic day.

This explains why Kim Dan ends the scene wearing black instead of white. (chapter 84) It is not a fashion choice. It marks the moment when innocence collapses and the past reopens.

And now compare the cabin (chapter 84) with the memory that precedes the parents’ disappearance. You will notice the huge difference: the overwhelming silence inside the house. The halmoni sits beside the phone. She must have heard everything. She must have heard the child as well, if the latter spoke She holds him tightly by the shoulder — as if trying to support him. (Chapter 19) To conclude, she knew something was happening. This recollection represents a repressed memory, and so far doc Dan has always avoided to face his biggest fear: his abandonment issues and the loss of his “parents”. (chapter 56) In other words, wearing black is more than just a change of personality or mourning. It becomes the color of mystery, the beginning of descent into truth. (chapter 84) However, observe that doc Dan is holding, even squeezing the teddy bear’s hand, a sign that he is rekindling with his lost childhood. We are getting closer to the revelation behind the photograph — the day doc Dan has never willingly shown to Joo Jaekyung.

(chapter 19). Observe that in the penthouse, doc Dan has never placed the frame (chapter 79) on the night table.

And what is the other denominator between episode 19 and the amusement park?

Theft.
Stolen childhood.
Stolen confession.
Stolen clarity. (chapter 84)

Exactly like in the cabin, (chapter 19) the words on the phone are inaudible. And now, you comprehend why I came to link the athlete’s blurred words to embrace and longing, as the grandmother’s embrace couldn’t diminish or erase the child’s pain. Finally, Jinx-philes can detect another pattern, the absence of gaze. Not only the boy can not see the person on the phone, but also the characters are turning their back to the readers which reinforces the mystery surrounding the conversation and the reactions of the listeners.

Now, connect it with the lost teddy bear (chapter 21) and (chapter 47). Dan once had toys — proof that once, someone loved him enough to give him gifts which contrasts to the wolf’s childhood. (chapter 84) Every time innocence is ripped away, a teddy bear disappears from the story.

So what if Jaekyung’s whispered sentence — a gift of raw affection — triggered the memory of another gift? What if the words under the fireworks echoed the tone of something said just before Dan’s world collapsed?

If this is the case, then doc Dan did not miss the confession entirely. (chapter 84) He remembered something far more painful. It is important, because by remembering his past, he can regain his own identity and get stronger mentally and emotionally. The scene in the cabin represents the positive version of the locker room, which signifies the return of “trust”. That’s why I am more than ever convinced that something at the weight-in (chapter 82) will happen linked to the protagonists’ past (recent and childhood). Let’s not forget that doc Dan still has no idea what Joo Jaekyung went through after his departure: the slap, the drinking, the headache and the indifference of Team Black, just like the athlete has no idea about the blacklisting and bullying in the physical therapist’s past. (chapter 84) So by wearing black, doc Dan indicates that he is gradually becoming responsible for Team Blackand Joo Jaekyung the athlete. (chapter 84) They should realize that their life is not so different from each other, in fact they share the same pain and trauma.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Love 💘 is in the Air 🌬️🎶(part 1)

When Air Becomes Emotion

There are chapters in Jinx that feel like pauses in the storm, moments when the story seems to inhale before beating again. Chapter 83 is one of them. At first glance, it resembles a “date”: the two men wear complementary headbands — white and black, (chapter 83) mirroring the contrast of their clothes and their personalities — and the champion even leans in to lick a smear of ice cream from the therapist’s finger, an image so intimate that any passerby would mistake them for lovers. And yet, not quite. The physical therapist approaches the outing as part of his job, a therapeutic break meant to soothe his patient’s nerves (chapter 83), while the athlete approaches the day with a far more personal hope. He stages the rides strategically, intending to appear strong and reliable so that his companion might grow frightened and instinctively reach for him (chapter 83) — just as he once did in the swimming pool. (chapter 80) Beneath the surface, what looks like a date is a carefully orchestrated attempt to recreate closeness without naming it. To conclude, whereas the episode flirts with the aesthetics of a date, the intentions behind it remain mismatched, unspoken, and unresolved. It is not an official date, yet it does not behave like a simple work-related excursion either, and we as readers are left suspended in that tantalizing in-between space — as if the very moment were hanging weightless above the ground, waiting for someone to name what it truly is.

As we follow them through the amusement park, we sense something shifting. The air itself seems to vibrate (chapter 83), charged with a warmth that seasoned Jinxphiles will recognize immediately: a tension between joy and tension, duty and desire, wind and water. And then we see him — the usually anxious physical therapist — smiling with his eyes closed, arms raised, as if offering himself to the sky and joining his “companions”, the clouds. In this panel, his hands — so often clenched, overworked, or trembling from exhaustion, fear or anger — are finally resting, suspended in a gesture of pure lightness and ease.

This moment is more than simple amusement; it is a brief liberation from the weight he has carried for years. For the first time, the man who usually survives on caution allows himself to rise, to laugh, to surrender to the wind. He appears almost weightless — as if something inside him has quietly unclenched. And as I watched this unexpected lightness unfold, something else surfaced just as naturally: a melody. Soft at first, almost accidental. It felt as though the chapter itself were humming in the background — John Paul Young’s Love Is in the Air.

Its melody, repetitive and gently rising, mirrors the slow ascent of the Ferris wheel: a circular motion that builds toward a quiet crescendo. And what might strike you — almost instinctively — is how naturally the lyrics seem to align with the chapter’s emotional beats, as if each verse echoed a panel.

— suddenly these lines become more than a melody. They become a key to understanding what neither the fighter nor the therapist dares to say aloud. (chapter 83) The song becomes more than a soundtrack; it becomes an interpretive key, guiding us through the protagonists’ unspoken emotions and shadowed hesitations.

At the same time, chapter 83 mirrors earlier moments of their story—especially the opening episode and the charged night-and-morning sequence of chapters 44 (chapter 44) and 45, where desire blurred into illusion and (chapter 45) reality collided with unspoken longing. The tension between dream (chapter 83) and waking life, quietly present in the lyrics themselves, resurfaces at the park amusement as well — though its meaning will become clearer as we look deeper. In season 1, the boundaries between the celebrity fighter and his therapist were blurred in ways neither of them understood: professional on the surface, intimate in practice, yet undefined in essence. Physical closeness existed, but emotional clarity did not. Now, in the bright openness of this amusement-park afternoon and evening, we are invited to look again. What exactly is their relationship here? A supervised rest day? A moment of companionship? The first fragile step toward something tenderer that neither man is ready to articulate?

And if their bond no longer fits the categories imposed by their roles, then we are left with the question that rises with them into the purple sky: What is love—when the line between duty and desire dissolves into the air itself?

Dan — “Love is in the air, everywhere I look around”

The first verse of the song insists on perception — on looking, hearing, sensing the presence of love in the world before one dares to name it. And this is precisely what happens to the physical therapist in chapter 83. When he sees a child running toward a mascot for a hug (chapter 83) or a family laughing together (chapter 83), something in him shifts so quietly that one might miss it at first glance: he smiles. (chapter 83) Not out of politeness, not to reassure someone else, not through exhaustion or habit. He smiles because he witnesses joy — and for once, it does not make him feel smaller. It does not activate the reflexes of deprivation or fear that shaped his life from childhood to early adulthood. On the other hand, the smile he gives in that moment is not radiant, not wide, not unguarded. It is a grin, a restrained upward curve that reveals both warmth and hesitation. His joy is present — unmistakably so — but it is still contained, as if his body has not yet learned how to express happiness without caution. This small, hesitant grin shows us a man who is beginning to open, yet still holds himself back, afraid of wanting too much.

And what makes this expression so striking is what it lacks. There is no envy in his eyes. No longing to trade places with the laughing family. No bitterness. No “why not me?” His gaze does not grab at the happiness he sees; it simply receives it. This absence is meaningful. For someone who grew up experiencing loss, scarcity, and emotional withholding, joy witnessed in others often triggers one of two reactions:

  • greed (“I want that, too.”)
  • hurt (“Why can’t I have that?”)

But Dan feels neither. He simply watches and grins — shyly, lightly, almost apologetically — as if happiness is something he is allowed to observe but not yet to claim. The expression reflects the quiet discipline of someone who has spent years dampening his own desires so he wouldn’t be disappointed. His joy is limited, yes, but also genuine. It is the joy of someone who is relearning safety through the world around him, step by delicate step.

And this is precisely why the grin matters. It shows that his emotional defenses are beginning to loosen, but not collapse. He allows the warmth of the scenery to touch him, without reaching out for more. He permits himself to feel — but in moderation, in the smallest possible dose that won’t frighten him. It is, therefore, the perfect visual embodiment of the song’s opening line:

because for the first time, he is looking around with the capacity to notice, even if he still doesn’t dare to hope.

Back in episode 1, the world was something he endured: every sound (chapter 1) reminded him of responsibility , every sight (chapter 1) pulled him back to duty or scarcity. Happiness belonged to others; he lived on the margins, always working, always surviving. But here, in the brightness of the amusement park (chapter 83), his gaze is finally unshackled. He looks outward and takes in the warmth of strangers’ affection without translating it into loss or longing. (chapter 83) Like described above, he is neither envious nor resentful. Instead, he experiences a fragile form of joy — not through himself, but through others. It is indirect happiness, a borrowed ray of light, but it is still happiness.

This scene reveals a subtle but profound transformation: the world no longer feels hostile. For a child who grew up believing that everything — security, love, parents — could vanish without warning or bring pain, the outside world was always tinged with danger. Now, for the first time, it becomes a landscape where he feels safe (chapter 83), though an accident could actually occur there. This contrasts so much to his thoughts in episode 1. (chapter 1) The amusement park becomes a place in which love exists openly, visibly, harmlessly. The lyrics capture this awakening beautifully: “And I don’t know if I’m being foolish… but it’s something that I must believe in.” (chapter 83) This is exactly what his smile expresses. He has no proof that love could include him. No certainty that he deserves it. No assurance that daring to hope won’t lead to disappointment. And yet, he believes — not because someone reassures him, but because his own senses finally give him permission.

When he smiles at the child or the family, he is not imagining himself in their place, nor projecting himself into some idealized domestic future. He simply lets the warm air settle in his chest. Happiness exists. It exists near him. It exists without punishing him. And if it exists, then perhaps — perhaps — he is not excluded from it forever. This is the first real beat of hope, the quiet reawakening of a heart that has spent too long underwater. The therapist who once sank in the pool out of fear now rises through the air of the amusement park simply by witnessing life unfold around him. His joy does not come from the ride; it initially comes from seeing love in the air, exactly as the song describes.

Yet this joy remains delicate, tentative — the kind that sits quietly at the edge of his lips. His smile is not wide or unguarded; it is a small, restrained grin, (chapter 83) a gesture that reveals how carefully he still manages his own emotions. For a man who learned early in life to minimize his desires to avoid disappointment, this gentle openness is already a form of courage. And then something unexpected happens.

Dan — “Love is in the air, In the risin’ of the sun


The moment he realizes that the fighter (chapter 83) — the man who seems invincible and superior in every domain — has never been to an amusement park, a spark ignites inside him. (chapter 83) His heart, which moments earlier beat quietly in observation, begins to race with excitement. For the first time, he is equal to the athlete. At the same time, for the first time, he is the one with experience or power. 😲 How so? For the first time, age becomes real (chapter 83): the physical therapist is twenty-nine, the athlete twenty-six.

Dan’s seniority — long irrelevant, long suppressed — begins to surface, not through conscious thought, but through instinct. He does not step forward because he is older; he steps forward because, for once, he knows something the fighter does not: his own desires. His body moves before his mind names the change. His voice lifts before he understands. (chapter 83) He suddenly steps into a role he has never been allowed to inhabit before: that of the knowledgeable one, the guide, the hyung.

And this moment exposes a quiet truth about his past that the story had always hinted at: he has never been allowed to inhabit his age. (chapter 78) Dan’s lifetime of passivity did not come from lack of intelligence or lack of will; it came from conditioning. He was raised by a guardian who loved him, yes, but who also unintentionally infantilized him. He was not allowed to question her words and decisions. His grandmother, who was not just older but twice his senior in authority, experience, and certainty, occupied every position of knowledge in his life. She decided what was dangerous, what was sensible, what was allowed, and what was forbidden. Her worldview dominated so completely that Dan’s own judgment never had room to form. His grandmother’s authority was absolute — not malicious, but unquestioned — and Dan learned very early that his role in the household was not to decide but to obey.

The clearest illustration appears in Chapter 7, when she panics about the money he could spend for her treatment and immediately demands: (chapter 7) As if a twenty-nine-year-old man — a working professional — were incapable of making a responsible financial decision. Dan’s “Of course not!” is instinctive, defensive, almost childlike, exposing the emotional hierarchy between them. In her eyes, he is not an adult with agency, but a boy who must be corrected, cautioned, overridden.

And yet — paradoxically — he was forced to become an adult far too early which the grandmother acknowledges. (chapter 65) However, observe that here, she feigns ignorance, she doesn’t know the origins of this metamorphosis. On the other hand, it is clear that she is well aware of the cause. He worked to support them both. He paid the hospital bills. He negotiated the debts. He shouldered the responsibility of survival.

And the greatest irony? The debt is in his name. (chapter 17) Legally, financially, the burden is his. But emotionally, symbolically, he was never allowed to own that responsibility; it was neither recognized nor validated. Instead, his grandmother continued to treat him as a child incapable of navigating the world on his own — even though he was the one saving them both.

This contradiction shaped him: He learned duty without authority, responsibility without recognition, adulthood without autonomy. He was taught to carry the weight of the world but never the permission to decide how to carry it. And now, we finally comprehend why the physical therapist remained so passive throughout Season 2. By giving him choices (chapter 77) and asking for his opinion (chapter 83), Joo Jaekyung is liberating his fated partner.

And this is precisely why the moment in Chapter 83 hits so deeply. (chapter 83) For the first time, he is not the silent follower but the one who leads. For the first time, his taste and desire matter.
For the first time, he is allowed to choose — where to walk, what to try, how to spend the day.

And in that instant, something long-suppressed rises to the surface: the part of him that was never permitted to grow up. His racing heart is not just excitement; it is the awakening of a self that had been dormant for years — the self who finally, quietly, steps into the light. As if echoing John Paul Young’s quiet promise,
“Love is in the air, in the risin’ of the sun,”
something inside him rises too — a self long buried under duty and financial strain. Chapter 83 unfolds beneath the sun, but its emotional lighting belongs to him: not chronological morning, but the symbolic morning of a man finally waking up. We see this most clearly in the moment he blushes and murmurs: (chapter 83). His face, half in shadow and half in light, appears as though it is gradually emerging from darkness. It feels like dawn breaking across his features — the soft illumination of newfound boldness, desire, and possibility. Even if the scene takes place in the afternoon, his face carries the light of morning, the brightness of a heart beginning to beat for itself. (chapter 83) And this is why his heart speeds up. Why he blushes. Why he suddenly moves with purpose. Why he becomes the guide: “I’ll be your guide today!”

This is not merely excitement. It is the first time his joy has weight and his seniority has meaning. It is the first time he can lead without fear. It is the first time he can offer joy rather than labor. In this fleeting, luminous moment, the therapist steps into the adulthood he earned long ago — not out of duty, but out of freedom. And paradoxically, by stepping into adulthood, he is finally allowed to reclaim something he was robbed of: childhood. Thus he receives a huge Teddy Bear from the athlete. (chapter 83) The toy from his childhood had vanished, probably thrown away because it had lost its role and doc Dan had no longer the time to play. At the same time, we should question ourselves who had offered it to doc Dan. (chapter 47)

The man who had to shoulder debts, bills, and survival before he even finished school now gets to experience what ordinary children take for granted — wearing a headband, tasting ice cream, pointing excitedly toward the next ride.
His joy is not childish; it is restorative. It is the healing of a stage of life he never truly lived. And with every shift of light and fresh air, a new part of Dan awakens — his agency, his boldness, his playfulness, even his shy but stubborn desires. (chapter 83) And this awakening has another consequence: for the first time, money disappears as a source of fear.

Dan, who used to feel uncomfortable in front of presents or at the slightest expense, suddenly moves with ease. (chapter 83) He accepts the fighter’s generosity without guilt (chapter 83), yet offers his own in return — buying the drinks, fetching the ice cream, participating in the flow of giving rather than shrinking from it. (chapter 83) No one questions cost; no one frames affection as financial burden. This reciprocity is gentle, natural, unspoken. It stands in stark contrast to Heesung (chapter 32), who immediately reduced generosity to calculation. He implied that doc Dan couldn’t afford it. His smile was a lure; his kindness, a transaction.

But with Jaekyung, Dan is not a debtor or a burden. Money stops being a battlefield. He is simply someone who can say yes and accept a huge Teddy Bear. (chapter 83) In fact, he loves the “gift”. He is someone who can offer something back (the drink, but also concerns (chapter 83) Someone who can choose.

Here, in the sunlit corners of the amusement park, the therapist is no longer the boy (chapter 65) who was forced into adulthood nor the adult who was treated like a child. He is finally both: (chapter 83) That’s the reason why Mingwa placed a boy with his father between the couple in this image. At the same time, she also insinuated that Joo Jaekyung was acting not only as a father, but also as a “boy”. That’s why love is in the air… they come to accept their true self. The two protagonists are both adults and kids!
Now, doc Dan is free enough to play and enjoy the rides (chapter 83), and respected enough to lead. And in that rare space, something long dormant begins to bloom, the return of the little boy’s innocence and smile! (chapter 83) “Love is in the air, In the whisper of the trees” Keep in mind that according to my interpretation, the tree embodies the physical therapist.

Just two people sharing the cost of a shared day — naturally, effortlessly, without negotiation. It is a small detail, but it signals a tectonic emotional shift: he no longer sees himself as someone who must earn affection through restraint, sacrifice, or poverty. He no longer sees himself as a burden!

Joo Jaekyung — “Love is in the air, in the thunder of the sea”

If Dan awakens in air, Jaekyung is pulled, almost violently, toward water. (chapter 83) The second half of the verse — “in the thunder of the sea” — finds its embodiment not in waves or ocean spray, but in a wooden flying boat swinging high above an amusement park. (chapter 83) It is here, of all places, that the façade of the undefeated champion bends, flickers, and reveals the frightened boy hiding beneath the man. (chapter 83)

At first, the athlete walks through the park with a confidence bordering on theatrical. He speaks like someone who knows the rules of amusement rides (chapter 83), although the knowledge is borrowed, second-hand, quoted from “the guys at the gym.” He buys cute headbands (chapter 83), pays for almost everything (chapter 83), selects a giant teddy bear as a prize. He tries to perform adulthood, to appear experienced, reliable, worldly — the one who leads. That’s why his reaction after the ride on the boat resembles a lot to the father: scared of rides (chapter 83) And yet this performance is delicate. One touch is all it takes to fracture it. (chapter 83) Because the truth is that Jaekyung, too, is both an adult and a child. Thus the author used many “chibi” in this chapter: (chapter 83) He is the man who finances the day, but also the boy who has never stepped inside an amusement park. (chapter 83) He is the warrior who never loses, but also the boy who becomes jealous of a rollercoaster because it made Dan smile. (chapter 83) He is the emperor of the ring, but also the boy whose innocence was stolen far too early through neglect, violence, and trauma.

This duality surfaces even during the ride moves. (chapter 83) When he sees Dan laughing with the wind in his hair, he is first moved. (chapter 83) For the first time, he truly notices the doctor’s joy and happiness. However, later his thoughts tighten into a childish pout: (chapter 83) The jealousy is not malicious — it is heartbreakingly sincere. It belongs to someone who has never been the source of gentle affection. Someone who has always been valued for power, not warmth. Someone whose earliest memories taught him that attention comes only when he performs. What he fails to notice that he is still behind the doctor’s happiness. How so? It is because he was the one who had suggested this trip!!

But let’s return our attention to the boat, the ride who combines water and air. The great athlete — the dragon of the cage, the man who terrifies opponents simply by standing in front of them — folds inward like a frightened child. (chapter 83) As the ride swings, his fingers clamp around the safety bar, his head drops, his breathing stutters, and his posture collapses into defensive instinct. The motion is too familiar. Too close to something his body remembers even when his mind tries to forget. One might think, it is related to his fear of fall. However, it is only partially true. His dizziness on the flying boat is not simply fear of a ride, nor the comedic reversal of roles between the fearless champion and the timid therapist. It is the physical echo of a lifetime of trauma — the kind the body never forgets.

A fighter’s training does not harden the vestibular system; it punishes it. Years of repeated blows (chapter 72)— even those that fall short of a diagnosable concussion — accumulate inside the inner ear like invisible fractures. The system responsible for balance, spatial orientation, and visual stabilization becomes worn, over-calibrated to impact but under-prepared for fluctuation. A man can be conditioned to withstand punches that would floor an ordinary person, yet still falter when the world tilts beneath him.

This is exactly what we witness on the flying boat. Jaekyung turns pale long before the motion becomes violent. His breathing shifts. His body stiffens. He clings to the safety bar not out of embarrassment, but because his senses are betraying him. These are classic signs of vestibular sensitivity — the lightheadedness, the nausea triggered by visual motion, the momentary whiteouts where vision loses stability, the delayed recovery after sudden shifts in height. Boxers experience it. Wrestlers experience it. MMA fighters live with it. But Jaekyung’s case carries a sharper edge.

Because his vulnerability is not merely the byproduct of sport.

It carries the ghost of childhood instability — the disorientation of being struck by someone who should have protected him, the instinctive bracing for impact, the nights when the world spun not from amusement but from fear. (chapter 72) The body he trained into steel was built upon a nervous system shaped by violence. Let’s not forget that before his father died, the latter hit his head with a bottle once again. (chapter 73) Finally, he started fighting at such a young age, (chapter 72), actually boxing at such a young age is limited to non-contact activities like footwork drills, shadowboxing, jump rope, basic strength & coordination, bag work with very light gloves. So there is no sparring, no head contact. (chapter 72)

It can survive force, but unpredictability — the rocking of a boat, the sudden drop of a height — awakens old alarms he never learned to silence. And now, you comprehend why Mingwa placed this panel just before they got on the boat! (chapter 83) This is what his father should have done in the past.

This is why the flying boat becomes his “thunder of the sea.” Not a thrill. A warning.

While Dan rises with the air (chapter 83) — light, joyful, awakened — Jaekyung is dragged back toward the element he once drowned in. His dizziness is the somatic memory of a boy who learned to endure chaos by stillness, who now finds himself unable to breathe when the world refuses to stay still.

And yet, even after this destabilizing moment, the athlete refuses to give up (chapter 83), thus they try other rides. It is important, because it implies that Joo Jaekyung is gradually leaving the water! This explicates why later something extraordinary happens. (chapter 83) He opens one eye — just one — and in that tiny gesture, the entire emotional axis of the chapter tilts. It is not the instinct of a fighter checking his surroundings; it is the instinct of a man searching for someone. The flying boat lurches beneath him, the air rushing past in violent arcs, yet all his focus narrows to a single point of stillness: Kim Dan.
(chapter 83) This moment mirrors Dan’s earlier “sunrise” panel, but in reverse. Where Dan’s face emerged from shadow into light, Jaekyung’s eye emerges from strain into clarity.
Where Dan stepped into awakening, Jaekyung clings to consciousness, seeking an anchor.

And that is why this panel is so quietly devastating. He does not open his eye to judge the ride or assess danger;
he opens it to find the lightness he cannot produce within himself, due to the guilt he is carrying in himself.

He is pale, dizzy, destabilized — the seat rocks like a wave he cannot fight — and instinctively, his gaze reaches outward for the one thing that steadies him. And there he sees it:

Dan smiling. Dan at ease. Dan radiant in the wind. (chapter 83)

It hits him like a beam of sunlight breaking through nausea, fear, and vertigo. (chapter 83) In the song’s language, this is his “rising of the sun” moment — not because he feels lightness, but because he perceives it in someone else. The warmth he cannot generate becomes visible in the face of the man beside him.

For Dan, love rises like morning.
For Jaekyung, love enters like light through a crack — a single opened eye.

And in that sliver of brightness, he breathes again. It is a pure parallel to the song’s line — “Love is in the air, everywhere I look around” — because that is exactly what he does: he looks around, and his gaze lands on Dan. The doctor’s smile becomes the only stable point in the shifting world. Jaekyung’s competitiveness, his jealousy of the rollercoaster, his greed for Dan’s smile — all of it collapses into something softer once his body falters.

For the first time, he allows himself to rely on someone else. To conclude, the ride — with its water-like arcs and unpredictable shifts — becomes a symbolic reenactment of the environment that shaped him. This is the song’s “thunder of the sea”: violent motion, destabilizing memory, fear disguised as nausea.

Yet despite his struggle, something remarkable awakens. Joo Jaekyung is still enjoying his time with his fated partner. Thus he wished to stay longer there. (chapter 83) It is because he enjoys listening to doc Dan. He enjoys his voice and words. This is not the internal voice of a fighter; it is the voice of someone falling in love without yet understanding how strong his feelings are.

He is too dizzy to perform adulthood, too overwhelmed to hide behind rank or reputation. The fragility he has always repressed leaks through every line of his body — and for the first time, he lets it. Thus he follows his heart and wins a huge teddy bear and buys headbands.

To conclude, the flying boat marks the moment (chapter 83),when Joo Jaekyung is stripped of his armor. The amusement park returns him to something raw, trembling, unfinished. But instead of shame, there is warmth. Instead of anger, there is gratitude. (chapter 83) Instead of retreat, there is reaching — a quiet but unmistakable reaching toward the man beside him. The problem is that he is still too scared to voice his thoughts in front of the physical therapist.

This represents another step of Jaekyung’s transformation: the shift from solitary dragon to partner, from survivor to someone who longs to be understood. And here, the parallel with his earlier metaphor becomes striking.
Back in Chapter 29, he described challengers as hyenas nipping at his heels , (chapter 29) a swarm of predators waiting for him to slow down. His career was an ocean of teeth and waves — constant motion, constant danger. Thus I detected a progression. In episode 69, he jumped onto the boat (chapter 69), then at the amusement park, the boat was in the air (chapter 83) Thus I deduce that the boat is “the last wave” he rides.

Once it stops, his world no longer moves with the violence of water. When he ascends the Ferris wheel (chapter 83), he rises into air — the first air he has breathed without fear.

He leaves the sea behind. He leaves the waves of fighters behind. He leaves the ocean of survival behind. Therefore I am sensing that the athlete is about to change his career and path. He will stop acting as a fighter only. That moment of ascent — quiet, suspended, pink-lit — is the moment he finally becomes what he was always meant to be: not prey chased across waves, not a beast trapped in turbulence, but a dragon lifting into the sky.

And the first breath of that ascent — the first hint of air entering lungs long constrained — begins beside Dan, in a gently swinging gondola at sunset.

The two men meet there in the subtle overlap between air and sea —
between awakening and unraveling,
between lightness and instability,
between childhood and adulthood.

The whisper of the trees meets the thunder of the sea.
And the love that neither can yet name floats quietly between them.

The Ferris Wheel — Where Dream and Reality Finally Meet

The emotional architecture of Chapter 83 only reveals its full depth when placed beside the earlier night-and-morning dyad of Chapters 44 and 45. Those chapters form a pair of opposites: a false dream (chapter 44) followed by a false dawn. Chapter 44 unfolds in artificial night — neon (chapter 44) and night lamp (chapter 44) — a landscape where nothing is stable and nothing is truly felt. Jaekyung is drunk, his consciousness slipping in and out of awareness; Dan, overwhelmed and inexperienced (when it comes to relationship), projects meaning onto a moment that cannot hold it. He wishes time would “stand still,” but he is wishing against reality. The entire scene is built on one-sided desire. The intimacy is sensory, not emotional. Dan longs to “get to know” (chapter 44) someone who is not present, rather drunk. But getting to know someone means communication. It is precisely the illusion captured in the song’s confession: I don’t know if I’m just dreaming… I don’t know if I see it true… And he wasn’t seeing it true; he was dreaming alone.

Then comes Chapter 45 — cruel daylight, harsh and flat, the sun stripped of warmth. (chapter 45) Morning light becomes a scalpel. There is no magic left, no gentleness, no room for misunderstanding. Jaekyung’s bluntness (chapter 45) annihilates the illusion Dan had constructed the night before. This is not heartbreak; it is disenchantment, the almost physical pain of realizing a moment meant nothing to the other person involved. Chapter 44 was the dream, and Chapter 45 was its punishment. Together they show a relationship out of sync, two people whose desires never touch at the same time. One wishes for home and attention, while the other has no idea that he is loved. So far, he has never heard this: “I love you”. One tries to reach out emotionally, while the other remains absent. However, when they are both lucid, none of them are totally honest, as they are self confused. Thus they are in two different worlds.

Chapter 83 is the first time those worlds merge. Hence we have the purple sky! (chapter 83) This scene confirmed my previous interpretation about the symbolism of the blue/golden hour.

Everything that failed in Chapters 44 and 45 is repaired — not by repetition, but by transformation. (chapter 83) The setting is no longer artificial night nor cold morning. It is true daylight — warm, golden, forgiving. Both men are fully conscious. Both are vulnerable. Both are honest. Both are sober. And for the first time, both want the same thing at the same time. This mutuality is the quiet miracle that turns an ordinary Ferris wheel cabin into a sacred emotional space. When Dan looks toward the horizon and murmurs, (chapter 83), the wolf thinks, with disarming sincerity, he is thankful toward the physical therapist. ” The wish that destroyed them in Chapter 44 now binds them together in Chapter 83. Suspended high in the sky, they share the same breath, the same light, the same fragile desire. This is where John Paul Young’s lyrics finally find their home: And I don’t know if I’m being foolish… don’t know if I’m being wise… but it’s something that I must believe in… and it’s there when I look in your eyes. And now it is the champion’s turn to become brave and confess his feelings to doc Dan, but like it was just revealed: Joo Jaekyung refused to repeat his confession! (chapter 83)

And the Ferris wheel forces them to talk to each other and face that truth. Unlike that night when Jaekyung could simply roll over and fall asleep, or that morning when Dan could retreat into silence, the Ferris wheel offers no escape route. They are trapped together — enclosed, elevated, suspended. Neither can walk away. (chapter 45) Neither can pretend not to feel. Neither can avoid the other’s gaze. They must see each other as they are, in that moment. And miraculously, neither flinches. There is no denial, no deflection, no cruelty. Only two men who finally dare to look. Whereas Chapter 44 let them hide behind darkness and drunkenness, and Chapter 45 forced them into cold exposure, Chapter 83 holds them in a gentle, suspended in-between: the space where dream and reality finally meet.

And Mingwa gives this moment a witness (chapter 83) — the enormous Teddy Bear Jaekyung won earlier that day. In the cramped Ferris wheel cabin, the bear sits with them, silent and soft, absorbing every unspoken emotion. It becomes the guardian of the day’s truth, the counterweight to the night of Chapter 44. Nothing from this moment can be denied, rewritten, or dismissed as drunken illusion. The bear remembers. It carries the warmth of Dan’s rediscovered childhood, the soreness of Jaekyung’s fear on the boat, the sweetness of their awkwardness, the courage of their mutual wish. Later, when Dan sees the bear again, he will remember not the fear of falling, not the dizziness, not the awkwardness — but the moment Jaekyung looked at him and apologized to him. Hence later the doctor is seen looking at his present (chapter 84) and holding the bear’s hand. (chapter 84) The bear contains the view, the sunset, the air, the honesty — everything that neither of them can run away from now.

This is why the Ferris wheel scene is more than a romantic interlude; it is a structural correction of the narrative wound created in Chapters 44 and 45. It does not repeat the night. It redeems it. It heals the morning. It merges the suspended magic of Chapter 44 with the daylight honesty of Chapter 45 — but only because both are willing, present, open. For the first time, their timing aligns. For the first time, neither is dreaming alone. For the first time, love is truly in the air, not as fantasy nor delusion, but as a shared, breathing reality. But wait… in episode 84, there is no “I like you,” no dramatic declaration, no romance in words. So it looks like my association was wrong. (chapter 84) Instead, what rises between them is something quieter and far more intimate: penance. The fighter does not confess love; he confesses his faults. He does not offer desire; he offers regret. In Jinx, this is the deeper beginning of love, because an apology centers the other person’s pain rather than one’s own feelings. Then Jaekyung admits he was wrong, he gives Dan something far more valuable than a confession — he gives recognition. The hamster has rights, he can express his thoughts and feelings.

This is why the air in the cabin feels charged despite the lack of explicit emotion. Love appears not as a statement but as a change in behavior, a cessation of superiority, a willingness to repair what was broken. For the first time, they meet on equal ground: the athlete stripped of his dominance, the therapist freed from his habitual submission. Neither plays a role; both simply exist honestly in the same small space. They are both humans.

And in this suspended moment, John Paul Young’s refrain drifts quietly into the scene—not as music, but as meaning. Because what unfolds in the cabin is exactly the tension the song names:

Both men stand at that threshold. Dan is wise enough to hope again, hence he is holding the teddy bear’s hand (chapter 84), but foolish enough to remain cautious and remain silent. (chapter 84)

Jaekyung is foolish enough not repeat his words (chapter 84) (chapter 84), but wise enough to regret immediately. (chapter 84) He is also wise enough to care deeply and repair instead of demand. Thus his apology feels so genuine.

Their intimacy is not built on certainty but on uncertainty bravely shared. Not on declarations, but on communication—hesitant, imperfect, but real. Not on fantasy, but on the courage to face each other without hiding. And that’s the common point between these two places in the air (chapter 45) (chapter 84) (chapter 84) Both men are not brave enough to confess their true feelings to their fated partner. Hence both came to regret their actions. (chapter 46) (chapter 46) The champion also played “dumb”. Thus the pillow got punched later. (chapter 84) He shouldn’t have thrown away his “feelings”. So by rubbing the hand of the toy, doc Dan is gradually expressing the return of “his greed and hope”.

The Ferris wheel becomes the place where foolishness and wisdom merge, where vulnerability replaces power, and where air itself begins to carry the shape of a future neither of them can yet name…but both can finally feel.

I was almost finished, when chapter 84 got released. Hence I could enrich the last part.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Watery Point 🔵 Of No Return ⤵️

Water and Power

Two years ago, I published the analysis At the crossroads: between 🤍, 💙, and ❤️‍🔥 and it has become the most read essay on my blog. [27.3 K views] It traced Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan’s first day off together—the fateful swim in chapters 27-28 —when Joo Jaekyung’s apparent selfishness became the catalyst for Kim Dan’s first spiritual awakening. There, the water served as both mirror and baptism: a liquid threshold through which the doctor began to accept sexuality not as sin or submission, but as part of being alive. I had compared the athlete to a dragon holding his yeouiju. The pool stood for motion, rebirth, and the courage to breathe underwater—to trust one’s body rather than deny it.

Though the grandmother was never mentioned, I had sensed her ghostly presence in the grandson’s thoughts and actions. In her youth, the ocean looked beautiful to her (chapter 53), yet she kept her distance. Observe that she only talked about one time experience. She sensed its danger and built her life on the solid ground of caution, duty, and control. In other words, she belongs to the world of the shore (chapter 53) —the solid, the measurable, the safe. Her fascination with the sea’s beauty reveals the limits of her perception: she judges by what is visible, by surface calm and reflected light. The ocean entrances her precisely because she refuses to imagine what lies beneath. For her, beauty is something to be looked at, not entered. Depth implies risk; darkness suggests loss of control.

That is why she keeps her distance. She fears what cannot be seen or accounted for — the unseen currents, the hidden life beneath the glittering skin of water. Her faith is built on appearances, not intuition; on the stability of the shore, not the movement of the tide. Thus I deduce that she never learned to swim. To her, entering the water would mean surrendering control, accepting fluidity, and admitting the existence of life below the surface. This means, swimming would expose the falsehood of her philosophy. That’s why I come to the following deduction that to her, swimming was unnecessary; one simply had to stay on land and hope never to fall in. But the pool, unlike the ocean, demanded a choice: enter, move, the pleasure of being below the surface (chapter 28) and learn that not everything can be postponed or entrusted to someone else. Water, in this sense, rejects fatalism. It calls for motion, for risk, for personal responsibility.

What the grandmother built on faith in others was quietly undone by breath and muscle. (chapter 80) And that intuition resurfaced and was confirmed in episode 80, when another day off brings the couple back to the pool. This time, the doctor steps into the water willingly. (chapter 80) He is no longer the man waiting to be rescued; he is the man learning how to swim. The champion’s words (chapter 80) distill the new doctrine: don’t wait for salvation (chapter 80), create your own buoyancy. Between the first swim (chapter 27) and this second lies the true point of no return—where superficial judgment turns into reflection, dependency into self-trust (chapter 80) and the rejection of powerlessness, (chapter 80), and fear of closeness (chapter 28) into the first stirrings of love (chapter 80).

Shin Okja’s private religion was one of delegation: wait for the right person, the right moment, the right help to come. That’s why she never got the chance to return to the ocean. (chapter 53) Safety lay in patience and dependence. Even when she later spoke with the champion by the sea, she avoided mentioning the ocean —as if to deny that any movement beyond her control could exist.

(chapter 65)

One might argue that I am overinterpreting, since the grandmother’s presence seems unrelated to the swimming pool and tied instead to her graduation gift—the gray hoodie. (chapter 80) Yet her absence from the pool scene is precisely what reveals her theology of avoidance. The pool was never her domain because her life revolves around work, not pleasure. She has no notion of rest without guilt, no concept of joy detached from utility. For her, swimming would appear frivolous—something “unnecessary” as long as one stays on solid ground. Jinx-philes should keep in mind that she never gave such a task to Joo Jaekyung. Her instructions to him were always practical, delegating care outward: take him back to Seoul, bring him to a big hospital and make sure he’s safe. (chapter 65) When she sees them together, her first reaction is not pride or relief but mild reproach— doc Dan should have left already. (chapter 78) The subtext is unmistakable: she expected obedience, efficiency, not attachment. Furthermore, her final instruction—“Make sure you see a doctor regularly” (chapter 78) sounds like ordinary concern, yet it hides her familiar logic of blame. It is as if she were implying that Joo Jaekyung has failed to fulfill her favor because Kim Dan has resisted care. In her eyes, the grandson is still the one responsible for trouble; the athlete’s role remains that of the dependable proxy who must “fix” him. What makes this moment striking is her tone of urgency, so unlike her habitual fatalism. The woman who once repeated “I’m the same as always” (chapter 65) suddenly speaks as though time is running out. (chapter 78) Her words, however, do not signal newfound insight—they only reinforce her desire to keep control, to ensure that someone else continues her mission of delegated care.

But what she interprets as negligence is actually independence. The champion is no longer following her religion of work and duty; he is inventing a new one based on choice (chapter 77), respect and care. What she calls delay is, in truth, meditation and transformation.

Presents: The Gray Hoodie and the Lady

If the grandmother’s religion was built on work, the gray hoodie was its sacred relic. (chapter 80) It was her graduation gift, yet it had nothing to do with his new profession or status. In contrast, the first episode already shows Kim Dan in a blue therapist’s uniform, name tag neatly pinned — a garment he must have purchased himself. (chapter 1) Traditionally, a graduation present helps the recipient embark on a career — like for example, a watch, a suit, or even a briefcase — symbols of adult entry into the job market. By offering him a hoodie instead, she unconsciously devalued her grandson’s professional worth. The garment belongs to the domestic sphere, not the workplace; it wraps him in comfort rather than readiness. In a moment meant to celebrate his arrival into public life, she reinscribes him into the private one — the house, the caretaker role, the obedient child. He doesn’t look like someone who went to university.

The gesture, whether she intended it or not, tells him that his identity has no market value beyond her recognition. The gift affirms warmth but denies competence; it soothes rather than equips. In addition, the grandmother’s choice of a hoodie exposes her lack of investment in that future. Her pride ended at the diploma; what came next was his responsibility. (chapter 47) There was no curiosity about his career, no acknowledgment of his competence—only the quiet satisfaction that through her endurance, she had produced a “doctor.” In the graduation photo, she even wears the mortarboard herself, smiling with the pride of someone who believes the diploma justifies a lifetime of sacrifice. Her grandson’s success confirms her own virtue; his “adulthood” validates her survival. This question to the athlete exposes her lack of interests in his profession: (chapter 65)

But her act of giving, like her act of living, was book-keeping disguised as affection. (chapter 41) While dying, she reduces love to an equation of productivity: “Dan, it’s important to give back as much as you take.” The verb do anchors her worldview — love must be measurable, visible, earned through action. To do good by someone means to labor for them, not to rest beside them. What caught my attention is that neither doctor (chapter 27) nor the champion employs the expression “vacation” or “break”. (chapter 80) Why? It is because they never experienced a break. We have to envision that the “hamster” must have followed his grandmother, when he was not busy studying or working. Both main leads never experienced a real vacation. They say a day off, as if the day itself didn’t really exist, as if it were a temporary pause between “real” time. In their inherited logic, only work gives time its value; everything else evaporates. The grandmother’s way of loving has turned rest into an absence, something unworthy of being named. However, observe that there’s a gradual change in doc Dan’s vocabulary: (chapter 80) The problem is that for the hamster, only the athlete is worthy of getting his rest. It still doesn’t belong to his world.

Shin Okja’s universe contains no category for leisure, play, or shared time; such things produce nothing, and what produces nothing has no value. Even when she worries — “You haven’t eaten?” (chapter 5) the focus remains mechanical. Eating is fuel; sleep is maintenance. But rest, in the sense of surrender, stillness, or joy, is foreign to her lexicon.

Her self-image as a tireless worker (chapter 47) is, in truth, a legend she wrote about herself. When Kim Dan recalls that “she’s never had a day’s rest,” the statement reveals more about his belief than about her reality. The woman who claimed endless labor also knew the comfort of “weekends” (chapter 30) — she watched The Fine Line, the very drama that made Choi Heesung famous. The detail seems trivial, yet it exposes everything: she had leisure (chapter 30), she simply refused to call it that. Watching television was permitted because it was passive, solitary, and could be rationalized as recuperation, not pleasure. In contrast, genuine rest — time shared, chosen, or joyful — never existed in her vocabulary. What she denied was not the existence of rest but the act of resting with him. She kept her downtime to herself, as if peace were a private possession. For her, love meant providing, not accompanying. Yet true care requires presence — sharing is caring, as the saying goes. [For more read this essay: Sharing is caring ] To share one’s time is to acknowledge another person’s worth beyond utility. Shin Okja never did that; she offered comfort but withheld companionship.This is why Kim Dan later struggles to accept that Joo Jaekyung is willing to spend his own time on him — the champion does what the grandmother never did: he makes room for him in his rest. His attempt is to make the main lead smile, to make him happy.

Her statement in chapter 65 — (chapter 65) displays that she perceives her grandson’s exhaustion not as suffering but as malfunction, as if the human were a device that could be recalibrated through work and pills. That’s why her favors revolves about living conditions, but not about his “happiness”. Perhaps she genuinely hoped that the drugs and the stability of a “regular job” with the champion would realign him, as though routine alone could fix what grief and deprivation had unbalanced.

What she never imagines, however, is that balance might emerge not from regulation but from relationship — not from control, but from the unpredictable rhythm of living. Thus the readers can hear or sense the heart racing of the protagonists.

But let’s return our attention to the grandmother. Because she keeps an account, affection becomes another form of work, and gratitude a form of repayment. She cannot imagine love that simply exists — it must be done. Every gesture had to be accounted for and eventually entered into the invisible ledger of “what I’ve done for you.” For her, a gift was never spontaneous; it was a transactional record. It had to suggest effort without truly requiring it—so she could later recall it as proof of trouble taken. But why is she doing this? Ultimately, Shin Okja’s greatest flaw is not cruelty but distrust. She never truly believes her grandson can stand on his own. She fears that he might take the wrong path. (chapter 65) Her constant bookkeeping—every favor tallied, every gift framed as trouble—betrays a hidden fear: that if she stops keeping score, she will lose him. Rather than grant him autonomy, she entrusts him to another caretaker. Sending him to the champion is not an act of faith but of resignation, a way to offload responsibility while maintaining the illusion of control.

When she “went out of her way,” she made sure the phrase itself became part of the gift. The author let transpire this philosophy in two events. In an earlier memory, the child Kim Dan watches his grandmother return home from the cold night (chapter 11), scarf tied under her chin, carrying a single sweet bun. She doesn’t need to say she “went out of her way”—her action already proclaims it. The effort is the gift. (chapter 11) That simple walk to the store becomes a moral event, proof of affection through fatigue. (chapter 11) Even the smallest purchase is framed as sacrifice. The sweet bread itself—a cheap red bean bun—is less nourishment than testimony: “Look what I endured for you.” If he had followed her, he would have seen that it didn’t take so much effort and money to buy the “present”. Finally, he had to share the sweet bread with his grandmother.

This moment sets the pattern for her entire philosophy of giving. Love must be earned through trouble; care must leave a trace of effort. The gesture matters more than the joy it brings. In her world, affection is always accompanied by labor, and gratitude becomes indistinguishable from guilt.This pattern repeats across her life. To “go out of one’s way” (chapter 80) becomes both proof of care and a claim for repayment. Hence she went to school or university for the ceremonies. However, such an action stands for social tradition and normality. She gives little, but ensures it feels heavy. Each offering, no matter how modest, is wrapped in the language of fatigue and obligation. The child, in turn, learns that to be loved is to feel guilty, and to receive is to incur debt.

The hoodie later inherits this same emotional script. It’s the adult version of the birthday bun: humble, practical, and accompanied by invisible conditions. Both are gifts that measure sacrifice, not joy. When she says she “went through so much” to raise him, she isn’t lying—she is testifying, recording her hardship in fabric and flour. However, pay attention to the picture from the hamster’s memory: (chapter 47) Where is the gray hoodie? That day, he only received a bouquet of flowers. Its absence in the photo is revealing. A gray hoodie would have looked out of place beside formal suits and robes; it would have exposed her thrift. The omission is both aesthetic and psychological: she hides the evidence of small-minded practicality beneath the spectacle of maternal pride. What was invisible at the ceremony later re-emerges in episode 80 (chapter 80), and with it, the emotional economy she built.

It is not far-fetched to imagine that the hoodie came paired with a favor or transaction (chapter 53) —perhaps the signing of the loan. “You’re a doctor now; you’ll pay it off quickly.” (chapter 80) In her eyes, generosity always justified expectation. The flowers were for display; the hoodie was the contract.

That’s why her gifts always come from the same palette: dull, neutral, gray. Even the birthday sequence is bathed in that dim, ochre light where warmth looks like exhaustion. The gray hoodie continues this chromatic philosophy—safety without brightness, affection without ease.

This explains why the hoodie feels less like a present and more like a receipt. At the same time, it denies him “adulthood” too. A sweater, not a suit; warmth, not celebration. Its comfort masked her emotional distance and her disinterest in his career. She gave him something to wear at home—a garment of rest that forbids real rest—because her world allowed no leisure without guilt.

Her sense of time mirrored that logic. She lived oriented toward the past (chapter 65) and the future (chapter 78), rarely the present. Hence she shows no real joy about their visit before their departure. Life for her was a chain of recollections and predictions: what she had done (chapter 65), what he would one day repay (chapter 47). The present moment existed only as a bridge between past sacrifice and future obligation. The embrace is conditional — a rehearsal for independence, not tenderness. In that instant, love is already an investment waiting for return. The teddy bear pressed between them, once a symbol of innocence and comfort, becomes collateral in this emotional economy: the pledge that he will someday “grow up,” earn, and pay back the care that raised him. Even at the graduation, she treated the day not as fulfillment but as record keeping. (chapter 47) The bouquet of flowers visible in the picture served as public proof of pride, while the hoodie—cheap, colorless, and private—belonged to the closed economy of obligation.

The scarf later mirrors this same logic, but in reverse. (chapter 41) When Dan gifts his grandmother an expensive scarf, he hides its true price — “I got it for a bargain” — repeating her own pattern of disguised generosity. She sees through the lie, teasing him for “spoiling” her, yet she accepts the luxury without feeling guilty. The scarf becomes her version of the hoodie: a fabric trophy of moral worth. But its later disappearance is revealing. In season two, she wears it (chapter 56) shortly after her arrival at the hospice, never again. When she greets Joo Jaekyung, the scarf is gone (chapter 61). Why? One might reply that the scarf lost its value, especially since she is living next to the director’s room. I doubt that such men would pay attention to such an object. Another possibility is that she fears its brightness might betray her neglect, for the champion has lived with her grandson for a while. How could she display silk while her grandson owns almost nothing? (chapter 80) The missing scarf thus exposes both her superficiality and exaggerated generosity. Her affection, like her pride, is short-lived — decorative rather than enduring. Should Heesung ever visit her, (chapter 30) one can easily imagine the scarf’s reappearance: the fabric of self-deception, ready to flatter, to perform, to erase guilt under the sheen of respectability. She already acted like a fan girl in front of the celebrity. (chapter 61)

The pattern of her giving finds its quiet conclusion in episode 80. When Kim Dan rediscovers the hoodie, his first smile fades into silence. (chapter 80) The gesture that once symbolized love now feels like pain and loss. The signification of the gift has changed. What once wrapped him in safety now weighs like absence — the fabric retains the shape of someone who is about to vanish. His silence is not understanding but hurt, a wordless awareness that affection can curdle into memory. The audience, not the character, perceives that with the grandmother’s approaching death, her ledger is about to close. The gray fabric, once proof of her sacrifice, will lose its moral weight; her “gesture” will expire with her. Yet Kim Dan may not yet realize that this very ending could one day free him. The book-keeping dies with the bookkeeper.

This moment also reveals why he remains wary of other people’s gifts. (chapter 31) When Heesung offers flowers “to get closer,” Kim Dan’s face mirrors the same unease: affection presented as transaction, intimacy disguised as generosity. What the actor calls closeness, the doctor feels as imbalance — the same emotional distance that Shin Okja’s presents once produced. Her gifts, meant to bind, isolated him instead; they built a hierarchy where gratitude replaced equality. Each present widened the gap between giver and receiver. To be cared for was to be indebted.

From this upbringing stems Kim Dan’s reflexive equation:

Each time someone offers him something, he instinctively feels burdens (chapter 31) and tries to refuse it. (chapter 31) (chapter 80) “You don’t have to go through all this trouble.” The line is not modesty but defense. To him, receiving kindness creates imbalance. His grandmother’s “help” was always instrumental; every act of support came attached to sacrifice: “I went through so much for you.” The hoodie thus becomes a moral anchor, a fabric reminder that love must always be earned and repaid.

Guilt as Love Language.

Because of this, Kim Dan experiences love only through fatigue and suffering. He feels cared for when someone worries (chapter 67), loses sleep, or pays a price. He interprets Joo Jaekyung’s concern as “trouble,” Heesung’s gifts as “too much.” In his mind, affection is inseparable from cost:

If you love me, you must pay for it. And if I accept your love, I’m guilty.

Caretaker Identity and Self-Erasure


To escape that guilt, he lives as a helper. (chapter 80) “I’ll stay in the background.” His self-worth depends on not burdening others. His words let transpire that he has never been Shin Okja’s first priority in the end. The hoodie reinforces that psychology—it is not a professional outfit like a suit or briefcase would have been, but a teenager’s garment, meant for the domestic space rather than the adult world. It literally arrests his growth, keeping him in the house and under her logic. Thus it is not surprising that after receiving his diploma, he still took part-time jobs.

Gifts as Triggers of Anxiety

When others try to give him something—Heesung’s flowers, Jaekyung’s wardrobe—his first instinct is panic. “What do I do? It’s all so expensive.” He expects a hidden price: affection, submission, repayment. Every gesture of generosity recalls the old bargain with his grandmother.

Repetition Compulsion

He repeats the same dynamic with new authority figures. With Heesung, he suspects every gift hides control. With Joo Jaekyung, he accepts care only to reduce someone else’s burden. When the champion lies—“These brands sent the wrong size; I was going to throw them out anyway”—Kim Dan hears not kindness but necessity. Refusing would mean waste, and he has long internalized that nothing must ever be wasted. So he accepts—not out of entitlement, but as an act of thrift, a way to help the giver by taking what is “useless.”

And yet, through this misreading, something begins to shift. The logic of guilt quietly bends toward mutual release. Jaekyung sheds excess; Dan sheds shame. The exchange of clothes becomes an exchange of burdens.

Gray: The Color of Suspension.

The hoodie’s color captures the entire tragedy of their old world. Gray is neither black nor white—it refuses decision, blending work and rest, love and obligation. It is the color of compromise, of deferred joy, of life half-lived. Gray also carries another meaning beyond monotony. It fuses black and white — two opposites that, when mixed, erase each other’s clarity. The hoodie’s color therefore reflects the fused identity of grandmother and grandson: their lives blended until he became her shadow. Her pride shone only through his dimness. To live in gray meant to live as her reflection — never as himself. The color embodies both her dominance and his self-erasure. When Kim Dan finds it again in episode 80, his first smile fades into silence. (chapter 80) The object that once expressed care and promised safety now mirrors grief. The gray fabric absorbs the light around him, turning into the shade of everything unspoken between love and duty.

The hoodie, once a symbol of endurance, now becomes a relic of a world where love meant survival. To wear it again would be to stay in that twilight. To put it away is to risk color, to learn to live in the present tense.

The Wardrobe: Undoing the Gray Religion

If the gray hoodie was the relic of Shin Okja’s work-based faith, Joo Jaekyung’s wardrobe (chapter 80) is the site of its quiet destruction. His act of giving reverses every law the grandmother ever taught. First, he does not “go out of his way.” The clothes are delivered effortlessly, without fanfare or moral accounting. (chapter 80) There is no speech about sacrifice, no self-congratulation. (chapter 80) By erasing the gesture of “effort,” he removes the emotional price tag that once accompanied every gift.

Second, he tells a deliberate lie: that he did not spend a dime, that the brands sent the wrong sizes. This white lie has healing power. It dismantles the logic of debt that rules Kim Dan’s psyche. (chapter 80) If the grandmother’s motto was “I went through so much for you,” the champion’s is “It’s no big deal.” Generosity becomes invisible, unburdened, and therefore trustworthy.

Third, he offers not one item but an entire range. (chapter 80) The row of garments invites choice — a concept absent from Shin Okja’s universe, where love came in single doses and with strings attached. Here, the doctor is asked to select what he likes, to exercise taste, to inhabit preference. The abundance of options grants him agency, dignity, and the right to refuse.

Fourth, note the nature of the clothes: they are not sportswear. (chapter 80) These are professional garments — coats, shirts, and slacks suitable for the workplace, not the gym. They restore the image his grandmother’s hoodie had erased. In offering these, Joo Jaekyung is not only dressing him but reframing his social identity: from dependent to equal, from housebound caretaker to visible professional. This means that they are bringing him into the adult world. Yet this also creates a paradox — wearing such refined clothes will attract attention, making it impossible for Kim Dan to “stay in the background.” (chapter 80) They will incite him to voice more his thoughts, to become stronger as a responsible physical therapist. The wardrobe, like a mirror, forces him into presence. This means that he is losing his identity as “ghost”, which was how the halmoni was perceived by the athlete. (chapter 22)

Symbolically, the location intensifies the gesture: the clothes are placed inside the champion’s own wardrobe. (chapter 80) The two now share a domestic and symbolic space. What once separated their worlds — fame, class, gendered roles — begins to dissolve thread by thread. The actor Choi Heesung’s remark, that gifts can “bring people closer,” (chapter 30) becomes unexpectedly true here. The wardrobe bridges the distance that the grandmother’s gifts had always created.

When the champion remarks, (chapter 80) he implies that these items would just go to waste. Therefore he completes the reversal. Waste, once the grandmother’s greatest fear, becomes the vehicle of grace. By claiming the clothes are “leftovers,” he removes their monetary and moral value; they are no longer costly. In accepting them, Kim Dan does not incur debt — he prevents waste. (chapter 80) This is why his hesitant and embarrassed gratitude, framed against a background of dissolving gray waves, feels so transformative. The air behind him ripples as if washing away the residue of his old faith.

The striped blue-and-white shirt he finally chooses carries its own quiet symbolism. (chapter 80) Yet unlike gray — the color of fusion and loss of identity — these shades remain distinct. They do not blend but alternate, acknowledging the coexistence of two identities: the doctor and the man, the caregiver and the self. In contrast to the grandmother’s world, where love meant absorption and sameness, Joo Jaekyung’s gesture affirms difference. The champion does not swallow him; he gives him space.

At the same time, the stripes hint at the complexity of Kim Dan’s inner life. Beneath his apparent passivity lies rhythm, variation, and resilience — qualities long suppressed by duty and guilt. The pattern becomes a visual metaphor for the layered texture of his heart.

By filling the wardrobe with clothes of different colors, the champion quite literally brings light and time back into Kim Dan’s life. The new hues break the monotony of gray (chapter 80); they mark the passing of days, the return of seasons, the rediscovery that not every morning has to look the same. Variety itself becomes a form of freedom. When the wolf once complained that all his shirts looked identical, he was unknowingly naming what both of them lacked: differentiation, spontaneity, change. Through this act, he restores color not only to the doctor’s wardrobe but to his emotional world — a quiet resurrection through fabric.

Finally, the celebrity’s next gesture — teaching him how to swim — extends this transformation. If the grandmother’s graduation gift (the hoodie) kept him grounded and homebound, neglecting his future and career, the champion’s “lesson” propels him toward movement and autonomy. (chapter 80) Swimming means survival without the shore; it is the art of staying afloat without a hand to hold. In this sense, Joo Jaekyung’s care points forward, not backward. He offers not protection but potential, not memory but future.

The wardrobe, then, is not a storage space but a threshold — between debt and desire, between inherited caution and chosen freedom. And now, you comprehend why the doctor chose to seek refuge and support, when he feared to sink. (chapter 80) The “hamster” had instinctively turned to the only person who had ever offered him help without cost.

In reaching for the champion, he does not regress into dependence; he reaches toward a new form of trust, one that no longer confuses care with control. To let himself be held is not to return to childhood, but to unlearn fear. The act of seeking support becomes the first stroke of a new swimmer — hesitant, but free.

This scene also recalls the image of the Korean dragon and its yeouiju — the luminous, wish-granting jewel said to contain both wisdom and life energy. The dragon’s power is not innate; it is completed and elevated by the jewel. Without the yeouiju, it cannot ascend to the heavens — strength without meaning, force without direction.

When Kim Dan finally pulls Joo Jaekyung into his arms (chapter 80), the myth reverses. The dragon—once feared, untouchable, wrapped in rage and solitude—is suddenly embraced by the very being he once believed too fragile for his world. The power dynamic inverts: the human shelters the beast.

In that gesture, the legend of the Korean dragon and its yeouiju gains a new form. The jewel is no longer an external object of desire, but a state of being—mutual recognition. By holding the dragon, Kim Dan becomes the hand that completes the circle, allowing power to flow again. The yeouiju exists between them, not in either of them: it is the bond itself.

For the champion, who has long carried the invisible scar of disgust— (chapter 75) —this embrace is nothing short of salvation. The man who once fought to wash off shame through endless training now finds himself accepted in his unguarded state. He doesn’t need to mask his trauma with perfume (chapter 75), the imagined smell, or cleanse his skin of battle; he is held and, therefore, purified. Through Dan’s arms, he rediscovers his value and humanity—the dragon touched and not destroyed. He is worth of being embraced, even if he is already so old!

This reversal has immense symbolic power. The yeouiju is no longer something the dragon must seize; it is something that recognizes him back. (chapter 80) When Kim Dan holds him, the light of that jewel shines from within the dragon himself. Power and tenderness, once enemies, coexist in the same body.

For Kim Dan, this act also signals a new allegiance. He is no longer in service of duty or debt—no longer the caretaker bound to an old creed of sacrifice. By choosing to embrace Joo Jaekyung, he chooses his friend, not his “master.” He decides who is worthy of his trust, and in doing so, reclaims his agency.

The dragon, embraced rather than worshiped, rises stronger. The yeouiju—the bond, the shared heartbeat—no longer lies at the peak of a mythic mountain but glows quietly between two exhausted men who have stopped running from touch.

The gray world — the realm of thrift, debt, and book-keeping — dissolves into color and movement. Blue and white ripple through the water, reflecting not fusion but harmony. For the first time, love does not demand payment; it breathes.

Arc 8 – The point of no return

The shape of the 8 itself evokes both the infinity loop and the closed circuit: two halves endlessly reflecting each other, each incomplete without the other’s motion. It is the symbol of reciprocity, but also of a threshold — the moment when balance can no longer be postponed. Once complete, the loop allows no intrusion — it admits no third. The number’s symmetry carries both union and exclusion: whatever falls outside its rhythm disappears.

This is the geometry of Jinx’s emotional world in Arc 8. The loop that once included a third observer — the grandmother’s watchful eye, the manager’s interference, the actor’s rivalry and resent — now folds inward, leaving no aperture for control. The form itself performs the story’s evolution: dependency becomes reciprocity; triangulation dissolves into dual motion. And now, you comprehend why Mingwa included a new outburst of the wolf’s jealousy. (chapter 79) This is one part of the new circle. Jealousy is the residue of imbalance — the echo of the 7 within the 8. In the numerology of Jinx, the 7-chapters, like for example episode 7 (chapter 7), episode 18, where the champion had sex because of this statement (chapter 18),episode 34 with Choi Heesung (chapter 34) or episode 52, where the former members of Team Black and expressed their disdain and jealousy toward the main lead (chapter 52)

But Arc 8 changes the equation. For the first time, both protagonists risk loss because they have something — and someone — to lose. The return of jealousy is therefore not regression but proof of attachment and the occasion to improve their personality (chapter 79), the final test before the circle closes for good.

Eight is the reversal digit, where hidden motives come to light and attachments are tested. Between 7 (chapter 47) and 8 lies that invisible hinge: the death of the old economy of love and the birth of a new one.

Thus, Arc 8 becomes the arena of triangular pressure. The grandmother’s possessive nostalgia (she sees herself as the mother, doc Dan as the boy and the champion as her surrogate husband) (chapter 78) mirrors Park Namwook’s managerial anxiety (chapter 61) and Heesung’s residual rivalry and resent. Each acts as a different face of control: the woman binds through guilt, the manager through hierarchy acting as the owner of the athlete’s time, the actor through charm and deceptions. Together they form the triad that tries to reopen the circle closed in the pool. Let’s not forget that the athlete chose to take a day off on his own accord (chapter 80), but he had just returned to the gym. It is no longer the same training and routine.

Park Namwook in particular represents the system that resists intimacy. His “interference” is not random but defensive: he fears that Jaekyung’s change and his attachment to the physical therapist (the promise to teach the doctor to swim implies that he will focus on other things than MMA) will unbalance the professional order. In the symbolic arithmetic of the story, he inherits the number 7 — the unstable, the one who can no longer maintain symmetry.

Jealousy, then, becomes not corruption but purification. It exposes what still belongs to duty and what belongs to choice. Through these frictions, Kim Dan is compelled to speak for himself, to claim the very agency his grandmother once withheld. It makes the protagonists to perceive people in a different light and move away from their self-loathing, passivity and silence.

When he does, the circle of the 8 stabilizes at last. The old triangle — grandmother, doctor, and debt — gives way to the new one: champion, doctor, and trust. In the Arc 8, the color gray finally meets its antidote: blue. 💙What was once the hue of exhaustion and suspended time becomes the pulse of renewal. The blue heart 💙, which first appeared in my earlier essay At the Crossroad, returns here as the emotional compass of both men.

In Jinx, the white heart with the gray hoodie belongs to the past — to the grandmother’s logic of duty, guilt, and caution. Blue, by contrast, is the color of water, movement, and breath. It signals the capacity to feel without measuring, to give without debt. When Kim Dan accepts the new clothes, he does not merely change garments; he crosses from the gray zone of survival into the blue realm of relation. His heart, long muted by obligation, begins to circulate again.

The blue heart marks this point of no return: once it beats, neither man can retreat into solitude. Its rhythm unites the wolf and the hamster in a shared tempo — one that excludes the third, but not the world. For the first time, affection no longer obeys the law of bookkeeping. It flows.

The ocean, once feared and distant, now extends inward, beating quietly beneath their joined silhouettes. The gray relic of the past lies folded away, and in its place, something transparent begins: a friendship that breathes like water — uncounted, unowned, and alive.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: This has to change 🌬️🌀🍃

Chapter 79 proved my previous interpretation correct: the number 9 announces the end of a circle. (chapter 79) However, let me ask you this. What kind of circle ends in episode 79? Moreover, how is this ending different from the past? Interesting is that episode 79 of Jinx doesn’t end with conflict, but with an awakening. For the first time, Joo Jaekyung does not rise to fight, command, or perform — he wakes up to a realization: “This can’t go on.” In the Korean version, his words carry an unusual clarity. It is not fate that changes, but choice. The champion, who once lived as if enslaved by habit and haunted by ghosts, now chooses transformation. The circle that has defined his life — power, silence, guilt, and repression — finally begins to close.

The decision is quiet but monumental: he will no longer live in a cycle of fear and self-loathing. (chapter 79) Until now, Jaekyung has moved through life as if carrying a curse — the belief that he is unworthy of care and love. (chapter 78) Every match, every order, every touch was an act of penance. Yet, in this episode, that belief dissolves. What vanishes in chapter 79 is not his strength, but the compulsion to suffer for it. Through the unconscious confession from Doc Dan, the wolf discovers that despite his wrongdoings, he is not hated by the “hamster”. (chapter 79)The words carry the same emotional weight as (chapter 39) from the magical night in the States. Both moments unfold in half-darkness, both break through inhibition, and both blur the line between consciousness and surrender. The verbal difference hides a deeper sameness: (chapter 79) is not remorse alone — it is an act of love, an instinctive reaching-out toward the other’s pain.

Mingwa mirrors the composition of these two scenes to stress their equivalence. The parted lips, the contrast between the heavy breath and the mumbling, the closeness of skin — all visual echoes that turn guilt into a language of tenderness. In chapter 39, the confession was drug-induced, raw and unfiltered, but afterward Jaekyung dismissed it with a laugh: (chapter 41) What could have been a moment of truth was repressed through mockery. His body language was betraying him: his closed arms reveal that he was on the defensive. By trivializing love, he protected himself from suffering and as such from facing his own capacity for harm. Behind the joke hid an immense self-loathing: to accept the confession as real would have required believing himself worthy of it. To trust himself…. he is not a loser, a nobody!

Chapter 79 reverses that denial. This time, the athlete cannot turn away or make light of what he hears. (chapter 79) The doctor’s voice — faint, sleep-bound, and sincere — forces him to listen. The “mistake” returns, transformed into absolution. Where laughter once erased meaning, silence now restores it. The champion finally grasps that Dan’s words, whether “I love you” or “I’m sorry,” spring from the same place: care that persists despite injury.

This is why the “blue night” cannot be read as accident or madness. It is revelation. The wolf sees, perhaps for the first time, that he can be forgiven — that love, for Dan, includes compassion for his flaws. The “I’m sorry” becomes the mirror image of the earlier “I love you,” not a repetition but a correction. What Jaekyung once labeled a mistake now stands as proof of connection, as if fate itself were rewriting the joke into a prayer.

The End of a Circle

Each chapter ending in nine has marked emotional completion: chapter 9’s first gesture of care (chapter 9), 29’s confession on the couch (chapter 29), 69’s first expression of feelings in the dark (chapter 69). In chapter 79, the circle closes once more. The night’s palette tells the story — deep blue softens into violet (chapter 64) (chapter 79), the color born from the fusion of blue (Dan’s sorrow) and red (Jaekyung’s intensity). For the first time, in the penthouse the color of their relationship is not pain but balance. And now, you comprehend why in the hallway, the purple had almost vanished: (chapter 79) The light purple – lavender that once filled their world turns (chapter 66) (chapter 79) fades into the cold blue of the night. The light shifts — not toward warmth, but toward fragility. The purple, symbol of fusion, nearly disappears, leaving behind the dominant blue of isolation and fear. (chapter 79) This chromatic regression visualizes what happens next: in the hallway, both men are still haunted by their separate pain. Dan, drawn by the pull of despair and self-loathing, almost falls over the railing. Jaekyung, still guided by fear, rushes to catch him. (chapter 79)

The blue in this scene is not mere sadness — it is the residue of old wounds resurfacing. It unites them through pain rather than peace, yet this unity marks the turning point. The absence of purple is what propels the wolf to make a decision: he is about to drop his routine and as such his past believes, like for example, his life is still his first priority or he is just a shackle. He realizes that color — the life and warmth in Dan — is fading. (chapter 79) To restore it, he will have to speak, to act, and ultimately, to smile again.

What truly ends here is the Emperor’s old language. The vocabulary of orders — (chapter 79) gives way to the silent recognition of fear. When the champion admits, (chapter 79), it is a confession disguised as complaint. For the first time, he voiced his dependency and vulnerability more clearly, as his body language is no longer expressing hesitation and shyness. Imagine that so far, he had lived following the principle of “self-reliance”. Yet when Dan asks, “What?” the champion retreats: (chapter 79) His feelings collapse into the void between words. Above them, the spiral chandelier glows — the perfect symbol of their unfinished circle. His unspoken fear hangs suspended, waiting to be voiced because of someone else’s actions: the doctor’s grin (chapter 79) and fall (chapter 79) That retreat exposes a deeper fear — not of rejection, but of mockery. The man who once endured his father’s contempt and smirks (chapter 54) still equates vulnerability with humiliation. (chapter 73) In the past, every sign of weakness was punished or laughed at; even longing arrived through ridicule. Hence the “grinning” Dan of his nightmare (chapter 79) should be perceived as a distorted echo of the father’s cruel smile. And now, Jinx-philes can grasp why the wolf woke up from this “dream”. (chapter 79) The vision forces him to confront the origin of his shame. He realizes, instinctively, that the real Kim Dan would never smile at his pain — and through that recognition, he begins to separate present from past. He has already experienced a silent, but warm gaze (chapter 77) from his fated partner after admitting his defeat: (chapter 76)

In silencing or voicing his fear, Jaekyung crosses the boundary between guilt and growth. He is no longer haunted by his father’s accusations like “you’re just trash” or (chapter 73) but by a new, fragile dread: the possibility of losing the one person who would never say it. What vanishes in episode 79 is not his strength, but the belief that to need someone is to be weak.

That completion arrives at night. In his sleep, Kim Dan murmurs, (chapter 79) The two halves of their dialogue finally meet: the fear Jaekyung silenced finds its answer in the apology Dan utters unconsciously. One speaks awake but retracts; the other speaks asleep but reveals. The night itself becomes their interpreter — turning “nothing” into meaning.

Until now, Jaekyung’s remorse had lived without a voice. (chapter 78) He has long recognized his wrongdoings — the pressure, the harshness, the selfishness (chapter 76) — but guilt without self-forgiveness remains sterile. What is the point of apologizing to someone when you cannot forgive yourself? His silence, then, is not arrogance but self-condemnation. Beneath his strength lies a man who believes that no apology can redeem him, because no one ever offered him one first. His father’s mockery, his coach’s reproaches (chapter 74) and expectations, his mother’s betrayal (chapter 74), his manager’s slap at the hospital (chapter 52) — none of them ever voiced regret and said “I’m sorry.”

Fighting became his substitute for repentance. (chapter 73) Every punch was an act of self-erasure, every victory a brief anesthesia against the echo of his own self-loathing and regrets. He mistook exhaustion for atonement. But when Kim Dan whispers (chapter 79) in his sleep, something shifts. The word that once chained him to guilt now sounds different — tender, not accusatory. For the first time, he experiences apology as care, not as confession.

That is why this night matters. It teaches the champion what he was never taught: that forgiveness is not granted by punishment, but by connection and communication. Through Kim Dan’s unconscious words, he senses that he can be forgiven — that love does not vanish because of fault. He is still accepted despite his wrongdoings, not because he hides them. For the first time, Joo Jaekyung begins to believe that being loved and being imperfect can coexist. And in that fragile belief, change truly begins.

The Fall of the Angel

The dream of the wolf is not punishment — it is confession. It becomes the space where Jaekyung’s unconscious dares to speak what he hides from waking life. (chapter 79) His vision of Kim Dan’s false grin is not a taunt from the other (chapter 79), but a message from within: You shouldn’t have hidden your fear. You should have trusted me. What appears as irony is, in truth, the echo of a moment that had once wounded him — the doctor’s trembling question, (chapter 51) The dream revives that unspoken answer, revealing that what Jaekyung perceived as danger was, in fact, an offer of trust. In trying to protect himself from mockery, he denied the very connection that could have saved him. The dream reconstructs the very morning he had dismissed his vulnerability (chapter 79)— the breakfast scene (chapter 79) , the casual (chapter 79) By replaying it in this distorted form, his mind stages a confrontation with his own denial.

The wolf’s remorse takes the shape of fear. In his dream, Jaekyung finally admits that he cannot bear to lose the one person who makes him feel human (chapter 79) — yet even there, his confession is shadowed by dread. (chapter 79) The grin that startles him awake is his own projection of unhappiness and shame, the echo of the mockery he once received from his father. But the truth beneath it is different: his soul is telling him that vulnerability is not ridicule, that he must stop silencing himself.

The resemblance between dream and reality is deliberate. The kitchen reappears, the same domestic warmth, the same silence. The unconscious replays what the conscious has failed to complete — the moment he turned away instead of speaking his fear aloud. His body wakes before his mind does, moving instinctively toward redemption. When he finds Kim Dan by the railing (chapter 79), it is as if he is saving not only his partner but the part of himself that used to give up. He was living like a ghost denying his own emotions.

A few days before, the champion had called Dan’s drowning “an accident.” (chapter 78) That word revealed his blindness — the refusal to acknowledge pain that does not announce itself through wounds. The new incident at the railing shatters that illusion. It was never an accident, but the expression of mental illness (chapter 79) Both events spring from the same silent cry for help, the same exhaustion he once ignored. This time, he sees it for what it is: suffering, not weakness. The shock of recognition becomes his wake-up call — not to fight harder, but to understand deeper. The problem is that so far the champion never had a true companion, hence he has not learned how to share thoughts and emotions to others. This explicates why doc Dan is actually the one initiating the conversation. (chapter 77) (chapter 80) Each time, the physical therapist shows concerns for the athlete’s well-being. He perceives this change of behavior as the expression of unwell-being.

Symbolically, the near fall (chapter 80) represents the danger of repeating inherited unhappiness and despair — the impulse toward surrender that has haunted the doctor. Both the ocean (chapter 69), and the balcony (chapter 79) embody the same impulse — escape — yet they reveal two distinct forms of suffocation. In the sea, Kim Dan moves toward the element that promises oblivion through absorption: water swallows, erases boundaries, and offers rest through dissolution. It is the drowning of exhaustion, of someone who wishes to return to the womb of stillness. On the balcony, however, the element shifts to air — the emptiness between life and death. Falling from a high place is the asphyxiation: the lungs collapse not by immersion but by void. Both gestures — walking into the waves and leaning over the railing — spring from the same inner logic: the unbearable weight of pain and expectation. But if water and air unite, they create clouds (chapter 38) — the very image that defines Kim Dan’s being. The clouds on his phone screen are not incidental; they reflect his essence. A cloud has no home, no fixed form, forever moving, dissolving, reforming — just like the doctor’s life, endlessly displaced and redefined by others’ expectations. Clouds embody both dream and danger: they promise transcendence but conceal the storm. Besides, a cloud can fall as rain, return to the ocean, or vanish into the sky — an image of the soul that oscillates between grounding and escape.

As soon as I made this connection, I couldn’t help myself thinking of the painting in the background of chapter 37: (chapter 37) Behind the champion, the Golden Gate Bridge stands as a silent witness — a place where many have ended their lives by leaping into the void between air and water. The bridge fuses both symbols: it is where drowning and falling meet. Moreover, the bridge embodies the connection of two worlds. This backdrop, unnoticed by the protagonists themselves, prefigures the later arcs. Joo Jaekyung is the one standing between the bridge and the physical therapist. It was, as if the author was already announcing the huge depression doc Dan would face in the future. At the same time, I came to wonder if the unconscious suicidal attempts from Doc Dan were actually revealing the biggest secret in his life: the suicide of his parents and their death could be linked to a bridge. Striking is that while the members of Team Black were partying (chapter 37), death was standing behind the celebrity and this reminded me of the champion’s last genuine smile (chapter 73) before he discovered Joo Jaewoong’s corpse. The bridge thus becomes a metaphor for invisible grief: joy and pain occurring simultaneously, one masking the other. And keep in mind that according to my theory, the picture of Dan with his grandmother is hiding a tragedy. This would explain why doc Dan is so obsessed with this picture: (chapter 47) The smiles here are hiding the past reality.

But let’s return our attention to the champion’s vision in episode 79. In that same duality (water/air) lies salvation. (chapter 79) The dream that wakes Jaekyung is not a nightmare but a revelation. He senses that the smirk is not the reality, but also the mask hiding misery. The greeting from the smiling Dan (chapter 79) — so unlike his real, exhausted self — is a vision of peace, of love unburdened by fear, while this grin exposes the truth. The dream, the realm of clouds, becomes a stage where the wolf shows and learns tenderness. The dream’s fear and indirect self-reproach (chapter 79) becomes action; remorse (chapter 79) turns into rescue.

That’s how I noticed that so far, the champion never greeted his room mate with a good morning and smile in the morning. (chapter 41) In other words, the dream is giving him clues as well how to behave: not only greeting, but also talking. What caught my attention is that during their two last breakfasts together (chapter 68), they didn’t talk at all (chapter 79) which contrasts to the star’s vision.

In the dream, he had fallen to his knees — a gesture of humility and unspoken remorse. Yet in reality, the fall takes a gentler form. (chapter 79) He does not kneel; he sits, his body settling softly against the floor as he catches Dan in his arms. The man once associated with dominance becomes a cushion, a pillow, a living anchor. His strength, once used to impose weight, now exists to absorb it. The fall is not toward repentance through pain, but toward tenderness through stillness.

This inversion transforms descent into grounding. The wolf who once incited Dan to kneel (chapter 11) now becomes the one who receives the collapse. (chapter 79) His body — no longer an instrument of violence — turns into safety itself. In that moment, he is neither fighter nor emperor, but a quiet surface where another can rest. The fall that once signified defeat now marks awakening: the champion’s muscles, built for battle, finally serve their true purpose — to hold, not to harm; to bear, to protect, not to break.

The Mercy Of The False Saint

That’s how I detected another pattern. Kim Dan’s speech is tethered to touch — every genuine confession or plea emerges only when he is held. Physical contact functions as emotional permission: the body grants what words alone cannot. His first “I love you” (chapter 39) escapes him in an embrace; his (chapter 66) (chapter 66) trembles out against Jaekyung’s chest; his (chapter 79) is whispered while clinging to the same body. Even as a child (chapter 57), he could only confide while being physically comforted. The grandmother’s embrace in chapter 57 becomes the prototype of this pattern — the last instance of safety tied to voice. Yet, crucially, that embrace was conditional and silencing. She soothed him but redirected his pain: (chapter 57) Instead of validating his pain and terrible experience, she absorbed it into her own narrative of endurance. The physical comfort coexisted with emotional invalidation — he was held but not heard.

And this interpretation (the touch is triggering the doctor’s desire for communication) got even corroborated by the latest episode. (chapter 80) The moment the star was holding doc Dan’s hands, the latter started voicing more his emotions (fears, displeasure). (chapter 80) When Jaekyung takes his hands in the swimming pool, the gesture revives this primal language of reassurance. For the first time, the touch is neither coercive nor desperate; it’s sustaining. The handhold reverses the earlier dynamic — instead of silencing him, it gives him permission to speak. Furthermore, the champion is pointing out that he can rely on two things, the champion’s hands and the kickboard belt. This stands in opposition to the fake promise of Shin Okja. (chapter 57) (chapter 57) In other words, he is inciting the doctor to trust himself more and become independent. (chapter 80) (chapter 80) The champion’s words — “If you ever end up in the water, you can come back to shore as long as you know how to swim” — stand in quiet but radical opposition to the grandmother’s old reassurance: “You still have me.”
Both statements aim to comfort, yet they embody two entirely different philosophies of love. Shin Okja’s version of care was possession and control disguised as protection. Her “You still have me” offers solace by denying reality — her own mortality and it erased the boy’s suffering and loss and his capacity to cope. It promises stability but at the cost of autonomy: he is safe only through her. Love, in her logic, means dependence. Jaekyung’s line, by contrast, offers trust instead of control. (chapter 80) His comfort does not deny danger — he acknowledges the possibility of falling into the water — but he links survival to skill, not assistance and dependency. His statement affirms Dan’s agency: he can save himself. Once he can swim, he is strong enough. Where the grandmother sought to replace the absent parents (chapter 65), the champion seeks to restore the missing confidence.

This is why the swimming lesson in chapter 80 carries so much symbolic weight. It is not only about overcoming fear of water, but about learning to float between love and self-sufficiency. (chapter 80) He just needs to learn and trust his own body and skills. For the first time, someone tells Kim Dan that he doesn’t need to cling to live. The wolf’s hands do not promise eternal rescue; they teach assurance and confidence.

Through this opposition, Mingwa traces the transformation of care in Jinx: from the grandmother’s pitying dependency to Jaekyung’s empowering faith. The very moment the wolf steadies his trembling fingers, the doctor begins to voice his worries and fears, words that previously only surfaced through sleepwalking or half-conscious murmurs. That’s why I believe that this embrace (chapter 80) in the swimming pool carries transformative potential. It is not merely a gesture of survival, but an initiation into honesty. Surrounded by water, both men are stripped of pretense. And observe that Joo Jaekyung is not rejecting the physical embrace (chapter 80) contrary to the past. (chapter 28) (chapter 69) The wolf, who once relied on dominance and silence, is now allowing his fated partner to hug him. (chapter 80) He accepts his vulnerability and struggles. In the swimming pool, the athlete is also learning to reassure instead of command. Dan, who has long associated touch with consolation and suppression, begins to experience it as safety and trust.

In that moment, their bodies speak what their words still resist: trust me. (chapter 80) The embrace might become the very impulse that pushes them toward verbal honesty — toward saying what they have long hidden. For Dan, it means learning to voice his needs and desires without shame; for Jaekyung, it means acknowledging his feelings without fear of losing control or strength.

But let’s return our attention to the physical therapist’s childhood. (chapter 57) Dan came later to associate love with contradiction: touch equals permission to speak, yet speaking never brings resolution. His psyche learned that disclosure leads nowhere — the listener (the grandmother) offers affection, not change. That’s the reason why he came to suppress his thoughts and emotions and project onto his grandmother. Her way of dealing with pain was denial, rooted in her own fear of trouble and probably social judgment. From my point of view, it is related to the secrecy surrounding the family’s past.

Furthermore, for the hamster, the embrace is more than comfort — it is survival. (chapter 21) From childhood onward, being held becomes the only assurance that the world still contains care. When he woke crying and was taken into his grandmother’s arms (chapter 21), the patting gesture did not merely quiet his fear; it taught him that consolation requires contact. Yet this early lesson carried a hidden cost: it trained him to associate peace with submission and silence, and affection with dependency. Therefore the swimming lesson contains another important life lesson: it is about choice! Joo Jaekyung wants to be “chosen” by the physical therapist, hence he wants to conquer his heart. (chapter 80) That’s the reason why he can not change doc Dan’s heart and mind with the new clothes. For that, he needs to reveal his “weakness” to the physical therapist.

When the puppy died, Dan instinctively tried to recreate that lost safety. (chapter 59) His hand resting on Boksoon’s fur repeats the same motion — the pat once given to him, now returned to another being in pain. What he offers the animal is precisely what he has always longed for: warmth without judgment, touch without condition.

This explains why every later confession — “I love you,” “Don’t leave me,” “I’m sorry” — is born inside an embrace. Speech emerges only when his body feels that safety again. Yet, until now, the wolf’s touch has never been a true confession. The wolf initially held him through instinct (chapter 4), not intention: a reflex of possession, not communication. As time passed on, it changed, yet in the bathtub (chapter 68), Dan fell asleep against him so that he could never experience the athlete’s care (chapter 68); in the morning, Jaekyung acted as though nothing had happened. Then on the dock, Joo Jaekyung expressed his relief (chapter 69), yet he never explained the reason behind his behavior. Besides, he removed himself from Doc Dan very quickly. There was no continuity between touch and word, no bridge from body to heart. The embrace between them was marked by silence.

Only now, in the night of chapter 79, does that change. (chapter 79) The embrace that once silenced finally begins to speak. Dan’s trembling body against Jaekyung’s chest reactivates all those buried associations — fear, need, longing — but this time, the silence is attentive. The champion listens. The gesture that once merely soothed now confesses.

When Shin Okja finally apologizes (chapter 53), she frames her guilt in terms of debt, not grief. What she cannot say is: “I’m sorry your parents are gone, and I buried the truth.” Her compassion never touches the core wound. Instead, she redirects her remorse into pity (chapter 65), a safer, one-sided emotion that keeps her in control. Pity allows her to appear virtuous while avoiding responsibility. It transforms shared pain into hierarchy: she the giver, he the grateful recipient.

This emotional economy defines Kim Dan’s childhood. He was loved through guilt, not through recognition. Every tender gesture — the pat on the head (chapter 57), the hug after bullying — carries the unspoken message: “You’re unfortunate, but you still have me.” That is not empathy; as she is not showing any sign of distress and pain. In my eyes, it is containment. It keeps the child dependent, silent, and bound by gratitude.

Hence, her confession to the celebrity (chapter 65) reveal the same mechanism. The focus remains on her heart, her pain, her goodness, not on his loss. She centers herself within his tragedy. Pity becomes a mask for unacknowledged guilt — perhaps linked to the parents’ disappearance or to choices she justified under social pressure. Her “mercy” is, in truth, a way to maintain her moral purity at the cost of his emotional autonomy.

Through this lens, it becomes clear why Dan needs reciprocal touch to speak. Pity silenced him; touch, when offered without pity, finally frees his voice. This is why the doctor’s embrace in episode 79 marks such a decisive turning point: it is the first time doc Dan is holding someone and that person is taking his words and pain seriously. The champion does not silence or reinterpret what he hears; he simply receives it. For the first time, Dan’s trembling voice is met not with pity, denial, or instruction — but with presence. (chapter 79)

Finally, this moment also exposes Jaekyung’s awakening. Until now, he had followed the grandmother’s advice as if it were gospel: (chapter 65); “bring him to a big hospital so that he can take pills” (chapter 65) (chapter 65) He trusted her words and advises. I would even add that he believed that compliance equaled real care. Yet the night by the balcony teaches him otherwise. (chapter 79) Despite doing everything the “saintly” grandmother prescribed, Dan is still suffering. The illusion collapses: her mercy never healed, it merely concealed. Interesting is that she never brought up to the athlete the doctor’s loss of weight in front of the ocean. Yet, she had noticed it. (chapter 57). Everything evolved around his lack of sleep and his dependency on her. (chapter 65) However, in episode 79, for the first time, the champion notices it. (chapter 79) It is important because very early on, the doctor Cheolmin had already detected his malnutrition: (chapter 13) In other words, the physical therapist’s depression and eating disorder were already existent before meeting the “wolf”. And what did the mysterious friend tell to the “wolf”? He shouldn’t wait out of fear that he might regret it later! (chapter 13) As you can see, “sorry” is the link between the two doctors and the celebrity.

Thus, the “wolf” realizes that love cannot be delegated to duty. (chapter 79) What Dan needs is not obedience to the old woman’s script, but presence, dialogue, and trust. The champion must now do what she never did — look at pain without denial, listen without pity, and finally speak from the heart. This means that after that night, the wolf will gradually change not only his vocabulary, but also his tone and gestures. His metamorphosis will be complete with the birth of the kind and sweet Joo Jaekyung! (chapter 21) Imagine that I had written this part before the release of episode 80!

The secret behind doc Dan’s room

Another detail caught my attention in episode 79 which was confirmed with the publication of episode 80. Doc Dan’s bedroom has always been associated with illness and as such rest! (chapter 21) (chapter 29) (chapter 61) Hence it is no coincidence that while sleeping in his own bedroom, the physical therapist had a relapse. (chapter 79) Because the champion had come to the conclusion that his own bedchamber was linked to sex (chapter 78) and as such “wrongdoings”, the next day, he must have suggested to doc Dan to sleep together in his bed. This explicates why both main leads are sleeping in doc Dan’s bedroom at the end of episode 78: (chapter 78) This shows that the star is listening more and more to his fated partner (chapter 78) And though he had another “accident”, the former is never bringing it up to doc Dan. There’s no blame or accusation. The athlete is keeping these accidents as secrets. However, pay attention that he is making sure that doc Dan is resting. (chapter 80) Notice that he joined him later, acting as if they had not shared the same bed. Gradually, the champion is giving back doc Dan’s freedom and privacy. He is guiding him to take care better of himself by using his own words. (chapter 27) Striking is that the champion always chose the left side of the bed (chapter 79), while he came to sleep much better, when he slept on the other side of the bed: (chapter 66) Thus I deduce that doc Dan is destined to take over his grandmother’s position in the bed: (chapter 21) And this observation seems to be validated by chapter 80. (chapter 80) The star was sitting on the right side of the bed while watching his sleeping partner. Why? It is because he can see his face. But by lying on the left side, doc Dan came to turn his back to him. (chapter 78) But if they switch places, the wolf should be able to watch his partner’s face. And now, pay attention to the way Mingwa placed the new embrace in the swimming pool: (chapter 80) Doc Dan is placed on the left side…. and that’s where the heart is placed. Doc Dan’s racing heart is displaying not only the revival of his repressed affection for the champion, but also his desire to live. He is not truly suicidal, as all his attempts were unconscious choices.

The second “accident”

I have to admit that after reading this image (chapter 78), it was clear to me that the doctor would make a new suicidal attempt during his sleep walking. I was already anticipating him to go to the rooftop, thus the new incident didn’t catch me by surprise. Yet, chapter 79 gave us an important clue about doc Dan’s dissociative state (sleepwalking). They were all triggered: (chapter 79) Because of the champion’s cold gaze, doc Dan felt rejected and even hated. (chapter 79) He had the impression that he wouldn’t meet his “expectations”. Observe the parallels between the champion’s dream (chapter 79) and the doctor’s reply in front of Shin Okja: (chapter 57) We have the doctor’s fake smile which is strongly linked to rejection (chapter 57) and expectations. And what is the other common denominator? His self-loathing and immense guilt. He has the feeling that he is not lovable. In my opinion, doc Dan is suffering because no one is listening to him at all. So far, they all projected their own thoughts onto him. The reality is that doc Dan already had a hard time before moving to the seaside town, (chapter 11) yet she failed to notice it or refused to face his struggles, as they were related to their poverty.

Because he lived alone for a long time without any physical touch (chapter 5), he lost his voice and became a ghost. It is no coincidence that in this scene, doc Dan was silent despite the caress. He was avoiding any topic that could trouble his grandmother. He accepted to remain a little boy in her eyes. But thanks to the wolf, doc Dan is learning to become strong and independent so that he can decide about his life. The swimming lesson is pushing him to overcome his abandonment issues.

The Songs of Change

While I was on my way to visit my son ( a 6 hours trip), I listened to an old CD from French singer Jean-Louis Aubert entitled Ideal Standard. While listening to the music, three songs — “On vit d’amour,” “On aime comme on a été aimé,” and “Parle-moi” caught my attention. They reminded me a lot of the main couple.

If the previous night (chapter 79) marked the end of a circle, then the next day announces a new rhythm — one that no longer follows the tempo of fighting or guilt, but of tenderness. These 3 songs form a hidden soundtrack to this transformation. They mirror, with startling precision, the inner journey of the champion and his fated companion.

1. “On vit d’amour” — Living on Love

On vit d’amour / Et d’eau fraîche / On vit d’amour, de rien du tout…
We live on love and fresh water / We live on love, on almost nothing at all.

On vit d’amour FrenchWe live on Love English
On vit d’amour
Dans le regard des autres
On vit d’amour
Dans le mien et le votre
On vit d’amour
Quand il n’y a plus d’eau fraiche

On vit d’amour
Tout au fond de la dèche

Laisse le briller
Éclairer
Laisse le venir
Laisse le aller

Car on vit d’amour
On vit d’amour
Sous le bong et les pluies

On vit d’amour
Dans la boue et la suie
On vit d’amour
Jusqu’au bout de la nuit

Laisse le briller
Éclairer
Laisse le venir
Laisse le aller
Laisse lui vivre sa vie d’amour
Car on vit d’amour
On vit d’amour

Je mens, j’aime tant ta main


On vit d’amour
Et je bois à ta bouche
On vit d’amour
On vit d’amour
Toujours

Laisse le briller
Éclairer
Laisse le venir
Laisse le aller
Laisse à l’amour sa liberté

On vit d’amour
On vit d’amour
On vit d’amour
On en vivra
Toujours (2*)

Laisse le briller
Éclairer
Laisse le venir
Laisse le aller
Laisse lui vivre sa vie d’amour
We live on love
In the eyes of others
We live on love
In mine and in yours
We live on love
When there’s no more fresh water
We live on love
At the very depth of poverty
Let it shine,
Let it light,
Let it come,
Let it go.
For we live on love,
We live on love
Under the bong and the rain,
We live on love
In the mud and the soot,
We live on love
All the way through the night.
Let it shine,
Let it light,
Let it come,
Let it go,
Let it live its own life of love,
For we live on love,
We live on love.
I lie — I so love your hand,
We live on love,
And I drink from your mouth,
We live on love,
We live on love,
Forever.
Let it shine,
Let it light,
Let it come,
Let it go,
Let love have its freedom.
(We
Live on love, we
Live on love, we
Live on love,
And we’ll live on it
Forever.)

This refrain captures the quiet revelation at the heart of Jinx: love is sustenance.
Until now, Jaekyung has lived on adrenaline, duty, and pride — mistaking physical dominance for vitality. His meals with Dan were about nutrition (chapter 79), not communion; his affection, an extension of performance (chapter 79). Yet as the doctor grows thinner and more exhausted, the wolf begins to understand what “starvation” truly means. (chapter 79) Dan’s body becomes a metaphor for their shared deficiency — not of food, but of warmth. Although the athlete’s actions were all well-meant, he failed to touch doc Dan’s heart due to the way he spoke to his loved one: (chapter 79)

In On vit d’amour, Aubert contrasts material survival with emotional survival. “We live on love and almost nothing” rejects the capitalist or competitive logic that defines Jaekyung’s world (MFC, rankings, contracts). The line speaks instead to the simplicity of presence — the kind of nourishment that Dan quietly provides through care, routine, and wordless understanding. No wonder why the athlete failed to move doc Dan’s heart by offering so many clothes in episode 80.

This song thus signals the first shift: Jaekyung begins to eat differently — not just at the table, but emotionally. The wolf who once devoured life is gradually learning to taste it through love.

2. “On aime comme on a été aimé” — We Love as We Have Been Loved

On aime comme on a été aimé We love as we have been loved. English translation
On n’invente pas un sentiment
Les baisers donnent l’alphabet
L’amour nous griffe
Ouvre ses plaies
L’amour nous soigne
L’amour nous fait
On aime comme on a été aimé

C’est cela qui nous fait courir
De reproduire et faire grandir
Ce qui nous a été donné
Sans jamais pouvoir en parler
On aime comme on a été aimé

C’est dans les mains de nos parents
C’est dans les coeurs de nos amants
Regard aimé, regard aimant
C’est le plus clair de notre temps
Le plus obscur de nos tourments
On n’apprend pas un sentiment
Même si on veut faire autrement
On aime comme on a été aimé

On dit les chiens n’font pas des chats
Et que l’on est que c’qu’on connait
Qu’on désire ce qu’on n’connait pas
Un autre chien, un autre chat
On aime comme on a été aimé

Toutes ces secondes de tendresse
Dérobées à  l’emporte-pièce
Toutes les claques, les maladresses
Pour que ça dure, pour que ça cesse
On aime comme on a été aimé

C’est dans les mains de nos parents
C’est dans les bras de nos amants
C’est dans les yeux de nos enfants
C’est le plus clair de notre temps
Le plus obscur de nos tourements
On n’invente pas un sentiment
Même si on veut faire autrement
On aime comme on a été aimé

Et j’aime comme tu m’as aimé
We don’t invent a feeling.
Kisses give us the alphabet.
Love scratches us,
Opens its wounds,
Love heals us,
Love makes us.
We love as we have been loved.

That’s what makes us run —
To reproduce and to grow
What was once given to us,
Without ever being able to speak of it.
We love as we have been loved.

It’s in the hands of our parents,
It’s in the hearts of our lovers.
A loved gaze, a loving gaze —
It’s the clearest part of our days,
The darkest part of our torment.
You don’t learn a feeling,
Even when you want to do otherwise.
We love as we have been loved.

They say dogs don’t make cats,
And that we are only what we know,
That we desire what we do not know —
Another dog, another cat.
We love as we have been loved.

All those fleeting seconds of tenderness,
Stolen in haste,
All the slaps, all the clumsy gestures —
So that it lasts, or so that it ends.
We love as we have been loved.

It’s in the hands of our parents,
It’s in the arms of our lovers,
It’s in the eyes of our children.
It’s the clearest part of our days,
The darkest part of our torment.
We don’t invent a feeling,
Even when we want to do otherwise.
We love as we have been loved.

And I love as you have loved me.

On aime comme on a été aimé / On hait comme on a été haï…
We love as we have been loved / We hate as we have been hated.

This lyric exposes the chain both men must break. The author’s line suggests that love is not spontaneous but inherited — modeled through wounds and care. In his childhood, Jaekyung learned rather hatred and misguided affection as domination, silence, lies and endurance, while Dan learned it as sacrifice and appeasement in his grandmother’s care. Both were taught that affection or recognition was not free — through obedience, perfection, or pain.

Throughout Jinx, each reenacts the love they received: the champion demands submission, the therapist offers self-effacement. Yet chapter 79 introduces a turning point — they begin to unlearn this inheritance. (chapter 79) The unconscious apology “I’m sorry, Mr. Joo” is not submission; it is vulnerability freely given. The wolf’s fears in his sleep are not weakness (chapter 79); they are an echo of the love and tenderness he never received.

In this sense, Aubert’s line becomes prophetic: to love differently, they must be loved differently first. This means that b spending time with each other, they will learn how to love each other properly. This is the essence of growth: transforming the very grammar of intimacy they once feared. The story becomes a re-education of the heart — the rewriting of emotional syntax. And episode 80 is the perfect illustration for this change. In love we can make mistakes, but it is important to detect them and learn from them.

3. “Parle-moi” — Talk to Me

Parle-moi, parle-moi de toi / Qu’est-ce que tu veux, qui tu es, où tu vas…
Talk to me, talk to me about yourself / What do you want, who are you, where are you going…

Parle-moi, parle-moi de nous / Tous les deux, qu’est-ce qu’on veut, qu’est-ce qu’on fout…
Talk to me, talk to me about us / The two of us, what do we want, what are we doing…

Parle-moi Talk to Me
Parle-moi
Ce qui nous vient
Nous vient de loi
Ce qui nous tient
Jamais ne nous appartient vraiment

Ce qui nous tue
Gagné, perdu
Ce qu’on a cru
On en a perdu la vue vraiment

Parle-moi, parle-moi de toi
Qu’est-ce tu veux, qui tu es
Où tu vas

Parle-moi, parle-moi de toi
Qu’est-ce tu dis, fais entendre
Ta voix

Ce qu’on nous vend
Ce qu’on nous prend
Mais qu’est-ce qui nous prend
On dirait qu’on a plus l’ temps
A rien
Perdu de vue
Perdu tout court
Peau tendre, coeur pur
On dirait qu’on a plus l’ goût
A rien

Parle-moi, parle-moi de toi
Parle-moi de tes doutes de tes choix
Parle-moi, parle-moi de toi
Qu’est-ce tu dis, plus fort
J’entends pas
Parle-moi de toi

Alors parle-moi, parle-moi de nous
Tous les deux, qu’est-ce qu’on veut
Qu’est-ce qu’on fout
Parle-moi, parle-moi de nous
Avec toi j’irai n’importe où
Parle-moi de toi
What comes to us
Comes from afar.
What holds us
Never truly belongs to us.

What kills us —
Won or lost,
What we once believed —
We’ve truly lost sight of it.

Talk to me, talk to me about you.
What do you want, who are you,
Where are you going?

Talk to me, talk to me about you.
What do you say?
Let me hear your voice.

What they sell us,
What they take from us —
But what’s gotten into us?
It feels like we no longer
Have time for anything.
Lost from sight,
Lost altogether —
Tender skin, pure heart.
It feels like we no longer
Have the taste for anything.

Talk to me, talk to me about you.
Talk to me about your doubts, your choices.
Talk to me, talk to me about you.
What are you saying? Louder —
I can’t hear you.
Talk to me about you.

So talk to me, talk to me about us —
The two of us, what do we want,
What are we doing?
Talk to me, talk to me about us.
With you, I’d go anywhere.
Talk to me about you.

This is the anthem of the new cycle — the song of conversation.
In the beginning, Jaekyung’s language was pure command: “ (chapter 38) (chapter 79) ,” eat” . (chapter 79) His speech created hierarchy, not connection. Aubert’s plea, “Parle-moi”, reverses this logic: it is a call to dialogue, to mutual self-revelation. It embodies exactly what Jaekyung’s dream anticipates — the moment when he will learn to speak with Dan, not at him.

When, in the vision, Dan smiles and says (chapter 79) the tone has changed entirely. The greeting is not fearful or dutiful; it is gentle, open, normal — the image of domestic peace. The dream thus becomes prophetic: language, once the instrument of control, will become a bridge.

Aubert’s words — “Parle-moi de tes doutes, de tes choix” — invite the very vulnerability Jaekyung has never practiced. The wolf who only barked commands must now learn to whisper doubts. The day he speaks softly — “Parle-moi” — will be the day his transformation is complete. Moreover, observe that his repeated plea, “Parle-moi” (“Talk to me”), moves from singular to plural — from me to us. The pronoun shift is decisive: it marks the passage from individual solitude to the possibility of relationship. As long as the “me” dominates, there is distance; only when they learn to say “us” can love begin to exist as dialogue, not projection.

This last strophe, where me dissolves into nous, mirrors precisely where Jaekyung and Dan now stand. They share space, touch, even breath — but not yet language. They might be sharing the same bed, but they don’t talk really to each other and confide to each other. (chapter 80) So far, the nights were full of gestures, yet empty of conversation. Jaekyung would often command and Dan accept everything. Words, when spoken, were often either wounds or vanished into silence. Thus, Aubert’s refrain becomes prophetic: as long as they do not talk, they cannot become a couple.

The line “Avec toi j’irai n’importe où” (“With you, I’d go anywhere”) contains both promise and condition. It imagines a future that depends on mutual speech. To “go anywhere” is not to flee, but to move together — something the two protagonists have never managed. Their shared journey remains suspended in the present, circling between misunderstanding and longing. The dream in chapter 79 — where Dan finally greets him with a smile and a “Good morning, Mr. Joo” (chapter 79) is the first glimpse of this future tense, a promise that conversation will one day replace command. Strangely, this observation was confirmed the new episode:

For now, the song stands as both prophecy and warning: without dialogue, they remain me and you, parallel solitudes orbiting the same pain. There’s still no “we” between them yet. Only when Jaekyung learns to parler — not shout, not order, but truly speak — will me become us, and their love find a voice strong enough to last.

A Chanson of Renewal

Taken together, the three songs form a triptych of metamorphosis:

  • “On vit d’amour” teaches Jaekyung that love is nourishment and a source of happiness, not distraction.
  • “On aime comme on a été aimé” forces both men to face the ghosts of their past and their abandonment/trust issues so that they can love their partner properly.
  • “Parle-moi” charts the path forward — communication as redemption.

They are not merely songs; they are stages of awakening.
From hunger to empathy, from repetition to reinvention, from silence to speech — Aubert’s lyrics sketch the same arc that Jinx now traces.

If Jaekyung once fought to dominate the world, he now fights to pronounce gentleness correctly. And when he finally dares to speak — not as a champion, but as a man who listens — he will fulfill the promise implicit in Aubert’s refrain:

“Avec toi j’irai n’importe où” — With you, I’d go anywhere.

The biggest wish doc Dan has is to go on a trip and walk through the woods with a loved one. The old circle closes; the new begins — not with a punch, but with a word.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Missed Party 🥳🎉

People might have been wondering why I haven’t published anything after the release of episode 78. My silence is linked to my health. I was sick exactly like Joo Jaekyung. I had to remain in bed for a while. But enough about me.

When Doc Dan returned to Team Black, the fighters were so overjoyed that they immediately proposed to celebrate his comeback with a party. (chapter 78) Their noisy excitement — hugs, wishes, smiles, jokes, even talk of meat — gave the impression of a long-awaited reunion. Yet the suggestion was cut short by Jaekyung, who rejected it like this: (chapter 78) In other words, a party was “missed.” At first glance, this might appear to be an exception, a rare moment of denial in a story otherwise filled with shared rituals. Readers might recall the welcome party (chapter 9) in episode 9, the champion’s birthday dinner (chapter 43) in episode 43, the talk of hospital get-togethers (chapter 61), or the festive tone of fighters after director Choi Gilseok’s victory (chapter 52).

But the closer one looks, the clearer the pattern becomes. The missed party is not an isolated accident; it is the rhythm of Jinx itself. Whenever celebration hovers near — a victory, a birthday, a reunion, even a funeral — someone is not present. In addition, the celebration arrives too early, too late, in the wrong place, or in the wrong form. Jaekyung wins titles, but the gym shares the glory while he remains uncelebrated. (chapter 41) Why did they not organize a party in Seoul to celebrate his victory in the States? Dan devotes himself to work, but his departures are marked by silence (chapter 53) rather than farewell. (chapter 1) The few rituals that do occur — a premature birthday cake, a noisy hug, puppies chasing after a car — (chapter 78) always miss their mark, either hollow in substance or unseen by the very people who should be honored.

The title The Missed Party therefore names more than one canceled occasion. It captures the way the two protagonists move through a world where rituals of belonging are constantly distorted or denied. And in a culture where such celebrations carry deep social weight, the absence is all the more striking. The missed party becomes the haunting motif of their lives: recognition always promised, but never truly given.

The Meaning of Parties in Korea

In Korean culture, parties and team dinners (hoesik) hold a strong ritual function: they create bonds, display hierarchy, and confirm belonging within a group. Farewells, birthdays, and victories are all expected occasions for collective recognition. Yet in Jinx, these moments of celebration are strangely absent or hollow. When Jaekyung wins, his fee doubles, but no feast marks his achievement. Instead, the manager presents the “wolf” as his “trophy”. To conclude, others share in the reflected glory while the champion himself remains excluded, a fighter without a banquet. (Chapter 41) And this absence of recognition and respect is mirrored in the physical therapist’s position. He is not surrounded by the fighters and included by the manager. He is standing on the sideline. It was, as though his good work was not recognized . (Chapter 43) Even the “dragon’s” birthday, supposedly a day of personal celebration, is reduced to an awkward dinner at his expense, with a cake arriving a day too early (chapter 43) or gifts from sponsors and fans he never wanted. (Chapter 41) In Germany, it is considered as a bad omen to celebrate a birthday too soon. Rituals that should affirm intimacy instead expose distance and lack of respect.

A striking contrast appears in chapter 52, when the fighters from King of MMA (chapter 52) gather at the very restaurant used for Jaekyung’s birthday. This time the feast is paid for not by him, but by Choi Gilseok — the rival director who had just won money betting against Jaekyung. The excuse for the banquet is twofold: the humiliation of the champion’s tie and the arrival of new members. Yet the sponsor of the event is absent, his presence felt only through the bill he covers. Unlike the wolf, whose victories go unmarked, Choi Gilseok uses food and drink to project power and buy loyalty. Yet, this celebration with the absent director displays not only hypocrisy, but also resent and jealousy due to the selection of the location. The cruel irony is that Jaekyung’s fall is more celebrated than his rise. (Chapter 52)

This cultural backdrop makes the silences and absences in the Korean Manhwa all the more striking. Parties are repeatedly mentioned but rarely materialize, and when they do, they are strangely hollow. In chapter 61, for instance, a nurse suggests inviting the star to their next hospital get-together. (Chapter 61) The excitement is palpable — “loyalty” and celebrity sparkle in their eyes — but what stands out is the way Dan is erased in the process. They do not invite him; they want access to the famous fighter through him. His role is reduced to a conduit, the man who happens to be “close with Mr. Joo.” The irony is brutal: after two months of work in the hospice, Dan has never once been shown attending such gatherings himself. His own belonging is not on the table. He is used as a bridge to someone else’s fame, while his own exhaustion and lowered gaze silently testify to his exclusion.

But wait — is Dan not also responsible for his isolation? At no moment does he try to be close to them. He avoids their chatter, keeps his distance, and carries himself like someone already half absent. Chapter 56 seems to confirm this impression: even approached by one of the nurses, doc Dan uses work to avoid their company. (chapter 56) However, this is just an illusion. What caught my attention is that the nurses wondered themselves why such a skilled therapist would come to a small-town hospital. (chapter 56) They speak about him, as though he had no reason to stay there, as if he were a stranger passing through. Right from the beginning, he was treated unconsciously as temporary, someone whose presence required explanation rather than welcome. Finally, no party was held for him, no ritual of inclusion was offered. His distance and their detachment mirrored each other, producing the silence that would later define his departure. (chapter 78)

The paradox becomes even clearer when we turn to the star himself. Despite his status as champion, he never receives a proper victory celebration. After each match, we never see a celebration. (chapter 5) It ends either in the car or in the locker room. (chapter 15) The high peak of his celebrated victories takes place at the gym where Park Namwook gather the fighters in front of the Emperor congratulating himself for his “good work” and the spectators for belonging to a winning team. (chapter 41) Yet no feast is held for Jaekyung, no toast to his perseverance. The two men at the center of the achievement are left without ritual acknowledgment, while the institution absorbs the honor. They remain a wolf and a hamster without a feast — fighting, winning, but never celebrated for who they are. And now, you understand why the manager could make such a suggestion at the hospital: (chapter 53) For him, the physical therapists were just tools and as such replaceable.

Even Jaekyung’s birthday party in chapter 43 reveals this paradox. (chapter 43) A birthday, especially in Korea, is typically a family-centered celebration, held at home or among close friends. Yet Jaekyung’s “party” takes place in a restaurant, under Yosep’s casual announcement that they would be having a “dinner party.” (chapter 43) The phrasing itself is odd, almost bureaucratic, as though the event were an obligation rather than a gift. Jaekyung himself had to pay the bill, reversing the usual logic of being celebrated. They even started eating before which is actually a huge violation of social norms. The cake appeared the day before his real birthday, an empty gesture more about timing than sincerity. And while fans and sponsors showered him with gifts throughout the month, Jaekyung revealed that he didn’t want any of them. The ritual forms were there — cake, dinner, presents — but the meaning was absent.

But there is another telling absence: Dan himself was left in the dark about the “surprise.” (chapter 43) The fighters never included him in the planning, as if they feared he might leak the secret. In reality, this exclusion only repeated his deeper past: once again, he was not considered part of the group’s inner circle. Had he been told, he might have brought the card and the gift of his own, softening the sting of Jaekyung’s reaction. (chapter 45) By keeping Dan in the dark about the “surprise,” the fighters created another problem. Their silence pushed him to offer his own present on the same day as the gifts from sponsors and fans — exactly the kind of attention Jaekyung resented. He had already said he did not want those presents, and now Dan’s sincere gesture was placed in the same category, indistinguishable from the flood of unwanted offerings. What could have been a private, meaningful moment was absorbed into the hollow ritual of the group. Hence the champion never got to read his card! (chapter 43) In trying to celebrate, the team only ensured that both Jaekyung and Dan felt more isolated than ever. Instead, his silence reinforced the impression that he was peripheral. Unconsciously, Team Black treated him not as one of their own, but as an outsider to be managed. And even within the celebration, another absence was visible: Potato was missing, and no one seemed to notice. (chapter 43) The party did not affirm Jaekyung’s existence, nor Dan’s place beside him. It only reinforced their shared isolation, hidden under the noise of clapping and cheers.

Thus, Jinx presents us with a paradox: in a culture where parties are essential rituals of belonging, both Dan and Jaekyung remain excluded. They are surrounded by the signs of festivity, but the substance is always missing. Their lives are structured not by recognition but by its absence, not by celebration but by silence.

Dan’s Missed Parties

If the star’s parties are hollow, Dan’s are almost nonexistent. The only party where we see him smiling is his birthday, when he was a little boy. (Chapter 11) One might think, this celebration embodies a perfect birthday party. However, observe the absence of friends. It took place during the night too, a sign that his birthday was not celebrated properly. Everything implies his social exclusion. This made me wonder if this memory represents the only birthday party he ever had with Shin Okja. His life is a sequence of departures without ritual, absences without acknowledgment. Each time he leaves a place of work or community, he slips out like a ghost, denied the closure that parties are meant to provide.

At the hospital in Seoul, where he endured the predatory advances of the director, his dismissal was brutal and final. (Chapter 1) He was not only fired but blacklisted, erased from his profession’s networks. No farewell dinner was organized, no colleagues thanked him for his work, no one marked his departure. (Chapter 1) His stay had been so brief as well. Besides, his absence was engineered to be total, as though he had never existed. The very ritual that should have affirmed his contributions instead became a ritual of erasure.

At the gym, the pattern repeated itself. The spray incident turned him first into a scapegoat. Park Namwook yelled, the fighters remained passive, and even Jaekyung rejected his presence. In the space of a few minutes, Dan was ostracized, his innocence ignored. (Chapter 50) Then later the athlete questioned the physical therapist’s actions and told him this (chapter 51) out of fear and pain, the physical therapist thought, he was fired. Once again, he left in silence, unacknowledged. No one stood up for him, no one tried to reintegrate him, no farewell was offered. (Chapter 53) And keep in mind that according to me, in this scene, the manager already knew the truth. So he had a reason to dismiss a farewell party. The absence of ritual here was particularly cruel: Dan had given his skills and energy to the fighters, but his exit marked him only as disposable.

The hospice, where he briefly found genuine warmth, provided no closure either. When he left for Seoul, the staff were shocked, even saddened — but his departure was so sudden that no send-off was possible. (Chapter 78) Their affection was genuine, but the ritual was missing. Dan slipped away in silence, just as he had at the hospital and the gym. In the panel, what caught my attention is the reaction of the director. He is crying while keeping his distance, a sign that he is the one the most affected by doc Dan’s departure. For me, the author is alluding to the director’s regrets. If only he had treated doc Dan better… only too late, he had recognized that he had become accustomed to his presence. Doc Dan had always been a silent but active listener.

This absence of farewell may stretch back to his earliest traumas. If his parents truly died by suicide, it is possible that Dan never attended their funeral. Poverty, shame, and debt may have erased even that ceremony, leaving him with no closure for the loss of his own family. We can use Joo Jaewoong’s funeral as a source of inspiration. (chapter 74) The silence of his grandmother on this point suggests that even the most basic ritual of mourning was denied him.

The pattern becomes symbolic in the death of the puppy. (Chapter 59) Only Dan and the landlord marked the event with a quiet burial. Since no one knew about it, it left the ritual incomplete. For Dan, the small act was meaningful, but its invisibility to the larger community echoed his own life: recognition always hidden, always partial, never public.

Even in moments that looked like parties, Dan was left on the margins. Jaekyung’s birthday party, with its cake and noisy cheer, contained an intimate truth: Jaekyung’s sudden, raw confession, (chapter 43) This was the real heart of the evening, the only moment where ritual turned into intimacy. And yet even this was missed by Potato, who was absent at that crucial moment, lingering elsewhere with Heesung. The party’s form was there, but its essence — the recognition of Jaekyung’s loneliness and Dan’s importance — was overlooked by the two men at its center due to the presence of alcohol.

Thus, Dan’s life is a chain of missed parties. At the hospital, the gym, the hospice, even at funerals, he departs without recognition. And when celebrations do occur, the essential truth is missed — noticed only by those who are absent, while those present look away.

The Puppies’ Party

Nowhere is the irony sharper than in chapter 78, when the puppies run after the departing car. (Chapter 78) To them, departure is not tragedy but play, a noisy farewell parade. Their barking and chasing become a spontaneous party, a joyous ritual of attachment. (Chapter 78) It is pure, instinctive, and alive. And yet, neither Jaekyung nor Dan sees it. Shut in the car, burdened by urgency, contracts, and exhaustion, they miss the little parade given in their honor.

The contrast is devastating. Humans, with their expectations of formal ritual, repeatedly fail to mark Dan’s contributions. They miss every opportunity to acknowledge him. But the animals, in their innocence, succeed where people fail: they celebrate simply because they care. The puppies recognize bonds better than the humans who claim to love him.

What makes this little parade even more striking is that the puppies do not separate between wolf and hamster. Their joy is directed at both men together, at the bond symbolized by the car’s departure. (Chapter 78) In this sense, the puppies achieve what the humans cannot: they recognize attachment without division, gratitude without debt. Their farewell is not tied to work, contracts, or hierarchy, but to presence itself. (Chapter 78) By running after the car, they express loyalty and responsibility, acknowledging the care they have received. It is the only party in Jinx that includes both protagonists as they are — not as worker and champion, not as scapegoat and boss, but as a pair worth celebrating. Finally, they have no idea that the couple plans to return soon, as they have no notion of time. (Chapter 78) Striking is that here, doc Dan is making a promise to Boksoon and her puppies, but the latter have no idea. Therefore imagine this. On the weekend, the moment the car approaches the landlord’s house, the puppies will recognize them and celebrate their return! And this time, both characters will witness this welcome party: (chapter 78) How can doc Dan not be moved and even smile? Why did the champion reject the landlord’s suggestion (taking a puppy)? He had no time… Having a puppy will not just force him to slow down and take his time, but also attract real and genuine attention from the members of Team Black. (Chapter 78) The animals would even change Joo Jaekyung’s behavior and the fighters’ perception of their hyung. (chapter 78)

The Illusory Reset

When Dan returns to the gym, the fighters smother him with hugs and noisy affection. They beg him not to leave again, propose a welcome party, and act as if everything is back to normal. (Chapter 78) But this “reset” is an illusion. Dan is only contracted for two matches. Interesting is that no one is capable of perceiving the truth, as the main lead’s explanation is ambiguous. (Chapter 78) He doesn’t limit the number of matches, only that he will focus on the “wolf”. So for them, his return is not limited in time. Nevertheless, his paleness and dark circles speak louder than their words: he is exhausted, fragile, still haunted.

The fighters, however, do not see his state. (Chapter 78) They are more worried about another possible departure than about his condition, as though his leaving again would be a greater tragedy than his ongoing suffering. This exposes that the members are not totally oblivious and their reunion is not a repetition of the past. On the other hand, warm words and a noisy welcome are enough for them. They take his generosity for granted, just as they always have. Therefore they ask for his magic hands. (Chapter 78) Their celebration is shallow, a ritual meant to restore their own comfort rather than acknowledge his reality.

Here, the cultural weight of parties in Korea sharpens the irony. Gatherings are strongly intertwined with alcohol (chapter 9), and abstaining from drink often means being excluded from group belonging. Yet Dan, on medication, cannot drink. His doctor’s recommendation makes it impossible for him to participate in such “public” rituals. Even the customary sharing of a huge bowl — a symbol of intimacy and unity — must be avoided. For Jaekyung, who once used alcohol to dull his own struggles, (chapter 54) this becomes another reason to refuse such parties: they risk exposing Dan to temptation and harm. Park Namwook, knowing Jaekyung’s history of drinking, has no interest in promoting such events either. (Chapter 78) Hence the latter has no interest to organize a welcome party and even maintain the ritual with the bowl!! What might appear to others as grumpiness or stinginess is in fact a form of protection.

In contrast, Potato embodies another response. (Chapter 78) Having missed Dan most deeply during his absence, he now wishes to spend as much time as possible with his hyung. His longing shows that no party with Heesung and the landlord — no noisy drinking night — (chapter 58) could fill the hole left by Dan’s departure. But his form of attachment is still caught in the ritual of surface-level affection. What Potato craves is real closeness, hence he keeps hugging the physical therapist, (chapter 78) but what he proposes are the same shallow gestures that miss the truth of Dan’s fragility. The chow chow’s words — “Nothing beats seeing you at the gym” — unintentionally reveal this dependence. On the surface, it is a casual expression of joy and longing. Yet beneath it lies another truth: if the hamster were to leave Team Black for good, the gym would eventually lose all its members. From the start of the story, Dan has embodied teamwork. He is the glue that holds the fighters together, not by authority or charisma, but by care. Without him, unity dissolves into rivalry and noise. The irony is that the fighters sense this truth but cannot articulate it. They attempt to celebrate his return with hugs and the promise of a party, as if rituals could substitute for recognition. In reality, what they crave is not the feast but the fragile cohesion that Dan alone brings.

Striking is that Jaekyung’s refusal of the welcome party is linked to his position as director of the gym. It marks a turning point. Indirectly, he rejects the idea by redirecting the fighters’ attention. He points out their indifference toward him. For the first time, the athlete is voicing his dislike openly, he felt excluded. Due to this combination, the athlete doesn’t realize that he rejected the party, as if he refused to participate in hollow rituals that only disguise exhaustion and perpetuate harm. (Chapter 78) It becomes clear that for the athlete, such parties built on illusion can only harm Dan further. To conclude, thanks to his intervention, he protected the hamster from rituals that mistake noise for acceptance and even care. (chapter 9)

Park Namwook’s position within Team Black also sheds light on the dynamic of missed parties. In earlier chapters, he was the one who orchestrated gatherings (chapter 26), or allowed whether welcome parties or surprise celebrations or pre-match meals (chapter 22). These events were never about genuine recognition but about maintaining power and appearances, boosting morale, or reminding the fighters of their dependence on the team structure he managed. The “surprise” birthday party in chapter 43 bore his fingerprints, (chapter 43) yet he stayed conspicuously absent when the cake was presented, only appearing later at the restaurant. (chapter 43) This absence is revealing: Namwook preferred to avoid direct conflict with Jaekyung’s visible displeasure, leaving the awkward burden of paying and performing to the champion himself to Yosep. In other words, his parties were tools of control, not gifts of belonging. By chapter 78, however, the balance has shifted. (chapter 78) Standing in the back, Namwook watches as Dan returns and is embraced by the fighters. He notices a “different vibe” between the two leads, but fails to grasp what it means. Doc Dan is actually free and has the upper hand in their relationship. Hence he can no longer ask this from doc Dan: (chapter 36) Doc Dan should put up with everything. What he cannot admit is that Dan is no longer replaceable. (chapter 78) Once erased, the therapist now belongs; once central, the manager is now the outsider. Namwook is pushed into the very silence he once imposed on others. The irony is sharpened when Jaekyung openly asserts his authority: (chapter 78) With that, the wolf reclaims his rightful place. In other words, by respecting the hamster, the protagonist is learning to protect his own dignity and interests. (chapter 78) Namwook’s illusion of control dissolves, his “decisions” and rituals losing their force. Even the proposed welcome party collapses in an instant when Jaekyung refuses, proving that Namwook no longer directs the rhythm of the team. The missed party is thus his own as well: the final chance to assert authority through ritual slips away before his eyes, leaving him stranded on the margins of the very world he once managed. And in this reversal lies a striking symmetry: the silence that once excluded Dan now excludes Namwook, completing a cycle of poetic justice. What Dan endured in season one (chapter 41), sidelined and voiceless, is now mirrored in the manager’s quiet erasure.

If Dan’s health were to worsen, the most striking reversal might occur: a match could be cancelled not because of the champion, but because of his therapist. Such a possibility would mark a profound shift in the logic of Team Black. In season one, Jaekyung fought regardless of his condition; his insomnia, shoulder injury, foot injury and depression were ignored, never reasons to stop the machine. Dan was expected to keep patching him up in silence while the show went on. But if a fight were cancelled due to Dan’s weakness, it would confirm his irreplaceable place in the system. The team’s future would depend not only on the fists of the champion but on the presence of the man who heals him. For the wolf, this would be more than logistics: it would be a choice of care over profit, proof that he has reclaimed his authority to protect rather than exploit. And for Namwook, such a cancellation would represent his ultimate defeat. A missed party of the grandest kind — a fight night erased from the calendar — would signal the collapse of his management logic. (chapter 69) Yet unlike all the hollow celebrations that came before, this missed event would finally have meaning. It would not be absence through neglect, but absence as recognition: proof that Dan’s life matters more than ritual, profit, or performance.

The Real Parties They Missed

If there was ever a “real” party in Dan’s life, it was the small gathering by the seaside with Heesung, the landlord, and Potato. (chapter 58) A simple evening of drinking and laughter, it gave him a fleeting taste of inclusion outside the world of gyms and hospitals. Yet even this was flawed: Dan’s health made alcohol dangerous, and Jaekyung never knew of the event. For him, it became another missed party, a moment of warmth hidden from his eyes.

The traces of this seaside evening resurface in chapter 78, when Potato joins the fighters to welcome Dan back. Unlike the others, however, he arrives noticeably later. (chapter 78) This delay suggests a split loyalty: while the team is already celebrating, Potato is likely still tied to Heesung, perhaps even speaking to him on the phone. His tardiness betrays how his heart is pulled in two directions — caught between the actor’s orbit and the gym’s renewed center around Dan. Yet the embrace of the fighter, and his tearful reaction at seeing Dan again, show that his real place lies with Team Black. (chapter 78) The return of Dan shifts Potato’s focus: he no longer has to trail after Heesung, but can make his hyung and his own career a priority once more.

And here lies the seed of conflict. In chapter 59, (chapter 59) Potato had made a promise to treat Dan to a meal if he ever returned, squeezing his hand with the sincerity of a puppy. That promise, innocent as it seemed, carried a hidden trap: in Korea, such “treats” almost always involve alcohol. And he could try to recreate the party on the coast. Potato, unaware of Dan’s medical restrictions, may offer him exactly what he must refuse. Only Jaekyung knows the truth of Dan’s fragile health; only he can act as his shield against such misplaced affection. Secondly, Potato possesses pictures of the puppies (chapter 60), which he took on the day one of them died!

What makes this tension more explosive is the role of Heesung. He alone knows that Jaekyung resorted to drinking after Dan’s departure (chapter 58), and his presence ties alcohol directly to the champion’s vulnerability. At the same time, Potato’s loyalty is beginning to shift. He once orbited Heesung like a hidden lover, but Dan’s return rekindles his attachment to the gym and as such will affect his relationship with the gumiho. (chapter 78) The “puppy” now prefers Dan’s company at the gym to the actor’s beck and call. The small seaside party that once united them may become the fault line that divides them: an invitation, a bottle of soju, a clash between past habits and new priorities. For Jaekyung, it will be the ultimate test — not whether he attends the party, but whether he transforms it into something different, a celebration without alcohol, a ritual of care rather than destruction. As you can see, I am expecting the return of the fox Heesung.

And yet, even beyond the noisy welcomes and the hidden seaside gatherings, the theme of absence reaches into the most intimate farewells. When Dan prepares to leave the hospice, he leans toward his grandmother, seeking an embrace, a moment of warmth that could ease the separation. (chapter 78) But she does not return the gesture, as she might believe that he is just holding her straight. Her arms remain still, her body heavy with silence. Instead she talks, urging her grandson to leave the place as quickly as possible. So she doesn’t enjoy this moment. What should have been a small celebration of love — a hug of recognition, a party for two — dissolves into emptiness. Halmoni, who had always claimed to be his anchor, fails to give him the ritual of belonging he craves. The one gesture that could have affirmed their bond is withheld, turning tenderness into yet another missed ceremony.

Hwang Byungchul mirrors this failure in his own way. (chapter 78) Sitting stiffly in his hospital bed, he waves away any possibility of affection. His body language, arms crossed, his words reduced to commands about training, erase the emotional bond that might have connected him to Jaekyung. Where halmoni’s silence is passive, Byungchul’s is active — he refuses intimacy, replacing it with obligation. For both figures, farewell becomes an empty form, stripped of the recognition that makes partings bearable. In these moments, the absence of a hug, the denial of tenderness, is more devastating than the loudest rejection. It is a party that never begins, a rite of passage left unspoken.

This is crucial, because in Korean culture, embraces are rare, and when they occur, they carry profound weight. To hug someone is to cross into genuine intimacy, to declare loyalty and affection without words. The absence of such a gesture from halmoni and the director therefore marks not just emotional distance but outright exclusion. They cannot — or will not — celebrate Dan or Jaekyung as individuals worthy of deep affection. they only know pity, pride or annoyance. Their failure underlines the story’s central rhythm: the rituals that should affirm identity are constantly missed, postponed, or corrupted.

Placed against these failures, the quiet “parties” between Jaekyung and Dan acquire even greater weight. A home-cooked meal,

(chapter 22) (chapter 13) a breakfast in silence (chapter 68), the embraces in the dark (chapter 66) (the wordless recognition of suffering) — these become the true celebrations of Jinx. They lack alcohol, noise, or spectacle, but they carry sincerity. They reveal that belonging can be built not through grand gestures but through repetition, through the transformation of fleeting kindness into ritual. This implies the existence of conscious and choice. And yet, these moments remain fragile. After their return to the penthouse, there is no shared meal, no laughter, only nostalgia and sadness. (chapter 78) Even Jaekyung is troubled by the reminder that Dan’s stay is temporary, as if the very walls of the penthouse resist turning into a home. (chapter 78) In other words, the wolf’s task is no longer to win battles in the ring but to protect these fragile celebrations — to make Dan feel at home, to turn missed hugs into embraces, missed parties into warm meals, missed gestures into habits of care. Only then can the cycle of exclusion be broken. Only then can “The Missed Party” become, at last, a real one.

Conclusion

Both protagonists are marked by missed celebrations. Dan’s life has been a chain of exclusions: fired without farewell, blamed without defense, departing without closure. Even in death — (if we include the theory of his parents’ vanishing), the puppy’s burial — rituals of belonging were denied. Jaekyung, for his part, wins victories without feasts, carrying glory without intimacy.

The fighters and nurses offer illusory parties, mistaking noise for recognition, affection for change. But the true parties are elsewhere: in the puppies’ joyous run, in the hidden rituals of wolf and hamster [the embrace, (chapter 68), the shared meal (chapter 68) and in the landlord’s quiet kindness (chapter 78). For me, it is no coincidence that the senior followed them to the street and waved at them! (chapter 78) He expressed not only his genuine feelings, but also his longing: he hoped to see them soon. He had come to appreciate their presence which is not related to their work. The Missed Party becomes not a single absence, but the haunting rhythm of the entire narrative: recognition always arriving too late, always seen by the wrong eyes. And perhaps the story’s promise lies here — that one day, the real party will finally be held, not in karaoke bars or gym halls, but in the unbreakable bond of two men who learn what true friendship and belonging mean. This means, the more the champion and his fated partner develop new routines, the more it will affect the gym and as such Park Namwook, which can only feel more and more excluded.

PS: If in the next chapter, the night continues, then I can’t shake the feeling that Joo Jaekyung might pat doc Dan’s head and not yank his hair, like he announced it. (chapter 78)

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: You’re right 👨‍⚖️🤝

My avid readers might have been wondering why I haven’t released a single analysis yet. The reason is simple. I had a lot of stress at school (many staff meetings, school trips to plan etc), hence I had no energy left for Jinx. However, I want to publish one before the release of episode 77. Why? It is because this number is magical.

The release of chapter 77 comes charged with symbolic weight. In numerology, seven resonates with truth and inner searching and as such spiritual awakening; doubled, as in 77, it points to equity and communication — two forces balancing, two voices meeting. It is precisely this symmetry that hovers at the close of chapter 76, when Joo Jaekyung, long defined by victory, utters for the first time: “I lost.” (chapter 76) This admission is no mere reversal of pride. It gestures toward something Jaekyung has never known: an exchange that does not end in domination or silence, but in dialogue. For Kim Dan, too, it marks a turning point. (chapter 76) For the first time, he uses the expression you’re right in front of his fated partner. He seems to concede with this idiom. Yet this apparent submission hides a deeper reversal. By admitting Jaekyung never asked for his help, he redirects the exchange toward his own truth: the loneliness of having no one to care for you. (chapter 76) What unfolds in the kitchen is not a quarrel about porridge but a fragile recognition. Dan’s “You’re right” acknowledges Jaekyung’s perspective without bitterness, while Jaekyung’s “I lost”  (chapter 76) is his clumsy way of saying the same. Both, in their own idiom, admit the other is right — without denying their own truth. And tellingly, they deliver these words without facing each other. The absence of direct confrontation allows something new: not a fractured dialogue, but the first exchange built on respect. The opposite to these “challenges”: (chapter 9) (chapter 45)

Chapter 77 therefore promises not another contest of wills, but a true sharing of thoughts. The future episode, with its doubled sevens, embodies equity and communication: two truths, mirrored, balancing, a new version of the champion’s nightmare: (chapter 76) The kitchen scene closes one cycle and announces another. (chapter 76) What follows is an attempt to untangle why Jaekyung has always spoken in the language of winning and losing, how Dan has always yielded ground with his refrain “you’re right,” and why their exchange over porridge finally reverses the logic. The rest of the essay will trace how this “loss” becomes the champion’s first victory in love.

The Weight of Arguments in the wolf’s Life

Victory and loss — where does such a vocabulary come from? Such a mind-set seems almost natural for an athlete, whose life is measured in wins and defeats, belts and rankings. It is tempting, then, for Jinx-philes to assume it is Jaekyung’s own invention — the stubborn creed of a fighter who admits in chapter 76 that he was “single-minded about winning.” (Chapter 76) In this view, his fixation would be the product of ambition, pride, or ego: the expected cost of survival in a cage where only victory pays.

But that confession, full of sweat and self-loathing, risks being misunderstood if we take it at face value. The truth is revealed in the next panels: he never formed deep connections (chapter 76), because the adults in his life cut them off before they could exist. Winning became his only mode of survival because every formative argument in his youth ended in defeat, and not the kind decided by a referee. With his father, mother, coach, and manager, words never led to recognition — only to insult, silence, utility, or obedience. He learned early that dialogue could not protect him; only victory could. His victories were not chosen freely, but forced into being by guardians who made him feel like a burden, until relationships themselves became burdens.

Joo Jaewoon and laughs

With his father, argument was domination. Every interaction or exchange ended in violence or insult, the cruelest of which was the comparison to his mother:  (chapter 73) He was a loser because of his mother. To lose meant humiliation and rejection; to speak at all meant to invite contempt. The only possible rebuttal was victory — to prove through strength that he was not the pathetic, worthless child his father saw in him. Winning became his sole argument against a man who would never listen, the only way to resist being branded a loser.

This logic crystallized on the morning (dawn) of their last confrontation. Bleeding but defiant, the boy hurled back the father’s words: (chapter 73). It was not just defiance; it was a vow that victory would silence abuse once and for all. When he returned with the trophy, he shouted triumphantly, (chapter 73) ready at last to claim, “I was right.” Yet reality betrayed him. His father’s death denied him the only acknowledgment he had sought. (chapter 73) The words “I was right” died in his throat. He had proved himself, yet there was no one left to recognize it. His own prediction — that his father’s death would mean nothing — proved false. The absence cut deeper than the insults had, leaving Jaekyung not with triumph but with the bitter aftertaste of self-loathing. Victory had silenced his father, but it also silenced the son. He had proved himself, yet there was no one left to hear it. (chapter 74) At the funeral he remained dry-eyed, his face locked in shame (ch. 74). No one saw his guilt, but it consumed him: the one man he needed to hear “I was right” from could no longer answer. At the same time, his smile and laugh were also linked to misery. For Jaekyung, laughter was never the sound of joy, but the echo of mockery and rejection due to the father. Just as tears became tied to betrayal and abandonment through his mother, so too did his father twist laughter into a weapon (chapter 73) — every laugh at his expense reinforcing the verdict that he was weak, pathetic, a loser. In Jaekyung’s childhood vocabulary, neither laughter nor tears could carry warmth. Both were stripped of comfort and redefined as signs of humiliation and pain.

From then on, the champion’s victories were haunted. Each belt raised was a mute confession to a dead man, proof delivered into silence. What looked like arrogance from the outside was in fact self-loathing: every triumph reminded him of the futility of winning arguments when no one was left to listen.

The nameless mother and tears

With his mother, argument was absence disguised as care. Unlike his father, she did not break him with fists or insults but with promises and justifications that placed the burden on him. (chapter 72) To the boy, she was not silent at first: she must have definitely told him to become strong, to endure, to wait. She gave him her number, leaving the illusion that her departure was not abandonment but necessity. Victory and wealth became her conditions for love. That is why he swore over the payphone to work hard (chapter 72) and “make money” so she could return, and why after his father’s death he still hoped for her homecoming. (chapter 74) But when the calls went unanswered, her silence became the sharpest weapon of all. Her eventual reply (chapter 74) confirmed that his effort had never mattered. For the first time, he cried (chapter 74), his tears expressed not just grief but the recognition of betrayal. From then on, tears themselves became equated with loss, weakness, and abandonment. This is why, in the wolf’s nightmare, Dan’s crying form (chapter 76) appears: the sight of tears recalls the moment he unconsciously realized that even his mother’s “you’re right” was a lie. At the same time, those tears function as a mirror. The champion projects onto Dan the very weakness he has always forbidden himself to show. (chapter 76) That’s why they are facing each other. This vision confirmed my previous interpretation, the physical therapist is the athlete’s tender reflection.

Yet the nightmare reveals even more. Notice their positions: Jaekyung faces Dan as though locked in an argument, but the words he utters — “Where are you going?” — strike at the heart of his own abandonment. As a child, he had no right to question his mother’s departure; he could only trust her excuse. Now, in the dream, Dan becomes the mirror of every adult: the father who could not cry, the mother who perhaps cried but still left silently (chapter 76), the boy he once was who longed to weep but had to swallow it down. At the same time, Jaekyung himself occupies the place of the “adult” — (chapter 76) the sinner, the one guilty of causing tears. This double vision displays his self-loathing. Thus I deduce that before meeting doc Dan, in the wolf’s psyche, tears were not simply weakness but hypocrisy, a performance that masks betrayal. How do I come to this interpretation? It is because during their last phone call, the mother shed no tears (chapter 74), she only made requests! (chapter 74) Hence the wolf’s tears were quickly replaced by rage and violence. (chapter 74)

Yet the nightmare does more than replay old pain. (chapter 76) It stages his first fragile attempt at connection. The positioning is crucial: though Jaekyung stands opposite Dan as though in an argument, he shows an interest in his fated partner. He is curious and worried about him. For the boy who once believed strength and silence were the only defenses against humiliation, this hesitant query is revolutionary. He is no longer trying to win, but to reach. Hence he attempts to stop doc Dan from leaving. (chapter 76) His trembling hand upon waking (chapter 76) shows the yearning to be held, comforted, reassured — something he never received from either parent. He is not entirely responsible for the physical therapist’s suffering. And here lies the difference: Dan’s tears are not manipulative or hypocritical , like the ones Jaekyung suspects from his mother, but unfiltered honesty. He expressed his emotions, not just through tears, but also through body language! (chapter 1) He was shaking, he was bowing and asking for forgiveness! Dan embodies a form of vulnerability that is real, legible, and forgiving contrary to the mother. When the teenager heard his mother’s voice after such a long time, the latter never brought up her past action. She never asked him for forgiveness.

In this sense, the nightmare foreshadows Jaekyung’s confession in the kitchen. (chapter 76) By following him and acknowledging Dan’s suffering and sincerity, he begins to dismantle his old associations of tears with betrayal. Facing Dan means facing his inner child: the boy who once begged his mother to return, and who still waits to be told that his effort mattered. In this way, apologizing to Dan becomes a form of apologizing to himself — a step out of self-loathing and into the possibility of communication.

Hwang Byungchul and it’s not too late

If Jaekyung’s father embodied domination and his mother abandonment, Hwang Byungchul represented blindness and passivity disguised as authority. His flaw was not cruelty but compliance: he never questioned the “mothers” in his life — not his own (chapter 74), whose quiet devotion and silence kept the gym alive, nor Jaekyung’s, whose absence he accepted without challenge. (chapter 72) In fact, his own mother’s submission reinforced this flaw: her blind trust in her son, her refusal to question his choices and the boxing world, taught him that authority need not be examined, only endured or seen as trustworthy. For him, hierarchy was unquestionable, and so he perpetuated it. Thus he stands for lack of critical thinking. This is why, with Hwang, the vocabulary of “right” and “wrong” was never about dialogue but about obedience. No wonder why he became so violent at the police station. (chapter 74) Unlike Jaewoon’s domination or the mother’s evasive silence, Hwang cloaked his authority in the language of advice — yet beneath it lay a black-and-white dualism: winners and losers, villains and victims. Thus Joo Jaewoon was blamed for becoming a thug (chapter 74), while the wolf’s mother was a victim. He viewed her as a selfless and caring mother: (chapter 74)And observe how he provoked the main lead. (chapter 74) When Hwang sneers, “What, am I wrong? Come on, answer me!” he is not inviting dialogue — he is staging a trap. The question is rhetorical, a demand for submission. Let’s not forget that he had witnessed the phone call in front of the funeral hall, but back then he had done nothing. And when the boy hesitates (chapter 74), unable to answer, Hwang strikes him in the chest. (chapter 74)and justifies his action behind social norms. (chapter 74) In that instant, he takes the role of judge, referee, and executioner, collapsing “argument” into violence. The very words “Am I wrong?” contain the irony: the coach is less interested in truth than in reasserting his own authority. Silence is treated as guilt, hesitation as defeat.

When Jaekyung bowed to him (chapter 74), he effectively admitted “you’re right” to the coach. Yet this wasn’t simply genuine agreement — it was submission, respect mixed with survival. The director misread it as validation of his worldview. This only reinforced his certainty, encouraging him never to reconsider his role. (chapter 74) When the protagonist finally left, the director could declare with satisfaction: t(chapter 74).

Crucially, his phrasing matters: he does not say “I’m right,” nor does he grant the fighter subjectivity with “you’re right.” Instead, “that’s right” casts Jaekyung himself as the object of judgment — a boy who fits into Hwang’s pre-set narrative of failure. At the same time, this word “that” could be seen as a reference to social norms. The words externalize responsibility: “that” is what defines the relationship between the director and the main lead. They are not a team or a family. The director of the boxing studio was forced to become “responsible” for the teenager, because the police had called him, not because of choice or empathy. He had become his guardian from a moral and social perspective. (chapter 74) The reality was that the old man had never truly become the star’s home and family, which explains why he constantly leaned on other adults, the mother or the father, to provide the guidance he himself refused to give. At the same time, I come to the following deduction: he must have lost his boxing studio, and with its vanishing, the elder was forced to face “reality”: loneliness, sickness and absence of happiness in his life!

And even decades later, his mentality hadn’t changed. Speaking to Dan, he cast the same black-and-white judgment: (chapter 70) Once again, Jaekyung is reduced to “that bastard” — a label, not a person — while Dan is framed as the pitiable victim. The old coot remains the righteous observer, untouched by guilt, protected by a rhetoric that always shifts responsibility elsewhere.

But the champion’s visit changed everything. The boy he once pushed away, the “bastard” he never claimed, still remembered him and returned. (chapter 75) He was happy again, though he initially tried to hide it. We have to envision that before the wolf’s visit, the elder had to face what his own life outside the gym looked like: sickness, solitude, the collapse of the studio that had sustained him and came to resent the main lead. Yet, Joo Jaekyung’s behavior changed everything: (chapter 71) (chapter 71) Only during the champion’s visit, did his words alter.On the rooftop of the hospice, he finally tells Jaekyung: (chapter 75) This shift did not come from wisdom gained in the ring but from loss — the loss of health, the loss of the gym, the loss of illusions — and from Jaekyung’s loyalty, which pierced through his blindness. Interesting is that this time, he doesn’t give the answer to the athlete. He stops thinking “I’m right, you’re wrong”. He treats him as an adult, as a mature and thoughtful person. Through that fidelity, Hwang glimpsed at last what he had denied both himself and Jaekyung for decades: that victory alone cannot sustain a life.

This is where the contrast with Dan becomes stark. Hwang’s “that’s right” (chapter 74) avoids accountability, treating Jaekyung as an object who merely confirms the coach’s worldview. Dan’s later (chapter 76), by contrast, acknowledges the other as a subject. It respects Jaekyung’s perspective without erasing his own. To conclude, the director’s change of attitude signals that—even for the wolf—change is possible. (chapter 76) It is not too late. The question “Am I too late?” is the consequence of Hwang byungchul’s words and it gradually indicates the switch in the champion’s mentality. It is no longer about being right or wrong. However, the nightmare reveals another aspect: the world is not black and white, but grey. (chapter 76) Imagine for one week, the champion has been staying in bed sick and no one paid him a visit and took care of him. Not even doc Dan, who knew that the man was sick… an important detail which he didn’t reveal to his landlord. (chapter 76) Hence he remained silent and avoided his gaze. But like the director showed it, it is never too late: (chapter 76)

The Manager and His Hidden Disability

Park Namwook is often shown eyeless, as the latter are concealed behind his glasses. (chapter 69) Thus my avid readers might jump to the conclusion that his biggest flaw is blindness, similar to the director. Besides, I had often criticized him for his blindness and ignorance. However, this is just a deception. The manager’s real defect is actually his deafness. How so? He does not hear Jaekyung’s words (chapter 17) at all. The verity is that he refuses to listen to his thoughts and emotions (chapter 31) in good (chapter 45) or in bad times. It goes so far, he does not take his silences seriously, and does not register his pain. This explicates why the manager saw in the champion’s silence at the restaurant as an agreement for a new fight! (chapter 69) His role is not to guide or protect, but to extract: money, victories, publicity. (chapter 75) In my opinion, he is fighting against oblivion through the star. This hidden disability explains why the coach can never truly connect with the champion. He listens instead to other voices – the CEO of MFC (chapter 69), the rumors among the directors (chapter 46), the media (chapter 52), the sponsors (chapter 41), the spectators or “authorities”(chapter 36) — and reacts to them, even violently, as in chapter 52, when public criticism painted Jaekyung in a negative light. (chapter 52) The slap was less about Jaekyung’s behavior than about Namwook’s own fear of outside judgment. He was not listening to the man in front of him but to the noise around him. He feared losing control in the end, especially after the athlete’s words let transpire his true position at the gym: (chapter 52) His question is not mere anger. It is a confession of position — an inadvertent acknowledgment that he knows he is the true backbone of the gym. He is the one responsible, the one carrying the burden that Namwook refuses to admit. These words crack the illusion: the fighter is not subordinate, but owner. The gym lives because of him.

Namwook’s reaction is immediate and violent. He slaps Jaekyung, not to correct him, but to silence him. The blow is the physical embodiment of his deafness: he refuses to hear the truth, so he strikes to reassert control. In that moment, Namwook reveals his greatest fear — that the fragile hierarchy could collapse if the fighter’s voice were truly recognized. And this interpretation gets validated right after: he appears as the one dependent on the athlete. (chapter 52) He acted as a child, faked “tears” in order to use empathy to his advantage.

For Namwook, dialogue is irrelevant: he expects obedience, nothing more, similar to the director. However, there’s a difference between them. Hwang Byungchul felt pity for the little boy in the past (chapter 71), hence he tried to help in his own way. On the other hand, Park Namwook shows clearly no sign to be interested in the private life of his boss. He is preferring ignorance over “knowledge and connection”. (chapter 66) Despite the incident, the manager hasn’t changed yet. He clinched onto the past, thinking that everything will be like before, as soon as the athlete enters the ring. He images a return to normality with the next match.

And yet, signs of change creep in. In chapter 66, standing in the silence of his own wardrobe, the star repeats Namwook’s words to himself: (chapter 66) For years, he had accepted his manager’s judgments out of habit, mistaking silence for consent. But here, for the first time, the repetition feels deliberate — not resignation, but reflection (“though”). The phrase becomes a question more than an agreement: is he truly right? He is admitting this out of habit.

By chapter 69, the cracks widen. Driving alone, he clenches the wheel and admits inwardly: (chapter 69) His silence has shifted from obedience to suffocation. The weight of Namwook’s deaf authority is no longer bearable. And yet, even here, his confession is muted, confined to the private space of his car. He is not yet ready to speak the words aloud — not until someone appears who will listen.

Park Namwook’s hidden disability, then, is not that he cannot hear, but that he refuses to. Hence he becomes blind as well because of his greed and vanity. His authority depends on silencing Jaekyung’s voice, keeping him in the role of the commodity who produces money but never speaks truth. The moment that silence is broken, his position collapses. And the wardrobe and the car foreshadow this collapse — places of solitude where Jaekyung begins, at last, to hear himself. And here I feel the need to add another observation: (chapter 48) This scene was observed by Kwak Junbeom, so the latter could have reported it to the coach. If it truly happened, this would expose the coach’s deafness and cowardice. He chose passivity instead of confronting the doctor or the champion. That way, he avoided responsibility. And this brings me to my final conclusion concerning the deaf manager. His main way to contact the celebrity is the cellphone: (chapter 66) It is both his mask and his crutch — a tool for barking orders, never for dialogue. The moment the line goes dead, his authority collapses, for he has no other means of contact. His power depends on Jaekyung’s reception, not his own strength. In truth, the manager’s disability is exposed here: deaf to Jaekyung’s voice, he has trained himself to hear only the ring of a phone. A fragile authority built on silence, ready to crumble the instant Jaekyung decides to switch it off.

Conclusions: The true origins of the champion’s mind-set

From these four figures, Jaekyung inherited a devastating binary. Argument meant violence, silence, utility, or stubbornness and selfishness — never recognition. No wonder why the champion became so selfish. He never had the last word. They were all right, he was always wrong… while the verity is that they all failed him as elders. And beneath the silence grew self-loathing: every failure, every moment of doubt confirmed the voices of his past. If he was not winning, he was worthless. That is why his reflection here (chapter 76) must be read not as pride, but as a desperate shield against annihilation. In other words, in episode 76, the athlete is too harsh on himself, though I am not saying that he is innocent either. He only thought of himself because he had taught to behave that way. He was just mirroring the adults surrounding him who hid their weaknesses and wrongdoings behind “lies, social norms and hierarchy”.

Kim Dan and “You’re right”

Kim Dan’s world mirrors this in reverse. Where Jaekyung was forced to fight for survival, Dan was taught to yield. (chapter 57) With his grandmother and with every authority he encountered — doctors, employers, even predators — he believed unquestioningly that others were right and he was wrong. Hence he trusted others blindly. He was trained to accept decisions made for him or against him. (chapter 70) Thus he accepts criticism with defending his own interest. He was not taught how to fight back or resist or even argue. (chapter 1) He never tried to seek justice. His “you’re right” was not recognition but submission, the language of someone who could not afford to resist. In season one, this made their relationship combustible: Jaekyung spoke only in victory and as such submission, while Dan accepted every loss as natural. He also adopted this mind-set. On the other hand, because their initial interaction was based on a contract, (chapter 6), both were forced to discuss with each other about the “content of the agreement”. That’s where the champion was trained to communciate with the physical therapist. Thanks to the champion, because of this victory/loss mentality, the doctor learned gradually to argue and “reply” with his “boss. However, due to his childhood, he couldn’t totally drop his old principles like for example “saying no”. (chapter 34) To conclude, before their fateful meeting, neither man had learned how to argue as equals. But in the kitchen in front of the stove, this changed: both are right and wrong! (chapter 76)

The Wolf’s Defeat in front of the Hamster

In the kitchen of chapter 76, Jaekyung does the unthinkable. (chapter 76) He lowers his head, leans against the wall, and mumbles words that would once have been inconceivable: “I lost. This is my undisputed defeat.” The phrasing is awkward, almost clumsy — the language of the ring awkwardly transplanted into the language of intimacy. But precisely because it sounds “wrong,” the moment feels real. For the first time, Jaekyung has no script to fall back on.

The body betrays what the words alone cannot carry. His feet are angled awkwardly, as if he does not quite know how to stand in this unfamiliar territory. His ears burn red, the involuntary flush of shyness. His voice is muffled, half-swallowed, the tone of a man who is both embarrassed and afraid. This is not the bold, aggressive fighter who has silenced others with insults or blows. This is Jaekyung stripped bare, caught between self-loathing and vulnerability. This is the child Jaekyung, the “cute cat”.

Self-loathing is essential to this moment. His confession is not a triumphant recognition of Dan’s worth, but a hesitant, guilty murmur: “I lost” is heavy with the weight of “I mistreated you, I don’t deserve you.” (chapter 76) He speaks like someone expecting rejection. Hence he keeps his distance. Yet the very fact that he says it at all signals change. Where once he would have doubled down — by barking an order, by firing Dan, by retreating into silence — he now admits defeat. The vocabulary of winning and losing, inherited from his father and reinforced by every adult in his life, collapses in the presence of Dan’s quiet honesty.

And paradoxically, this “defeat” is liberating. For Jaekyung, losing has always meant humiliation — the sneer of his father, the silence of his mother, the slap of his coach, the deafness of his manager. But here, losing does not bring scorn. It does not end in abandonment. It opens a space for recognition: losing to Dan means acknowledging that his heart has been touched, that someone else’s truth has entered his world and survived. In defeat, he is finally allowed to stop fighting.

This admission comes after a night of trembling restraint (chapter 76), where he literally grasps his own shoulder as though seeking the comfort of an embrace. The champion who once sneered at tears now reveals what he secretly longed for all along: to be reassured, to be held, to be forgiven. His “tap” against the wall is a silent gesture of surrender (chapter 76) — an acknowledgment that he can no longer keep his walls intact. He is now willing to rely on doc Dan exclusively.

The flashbacks frame this shift: (chapter 76). His confession reveals not strength but guilt. Kim Dan’s suffering was the price of his victories, and he knows it. On the other hand, his mea culpa should be relativized, for both were the targets of a plot! (chapter 76) These words expose both responsibility and shame: he had prioritized survival over connection, career over compassion. What boils under his skin is not pride but remorse.

And yet, within this defeat lies recognition: the fragile physical therapist, weak in constitution and endlessly battered by life, possesses a heart larger than his own. “When he not only failed to fulfill that role, but even showed me a weak side to him, it got my blood boiling” (chapter 76). The anger masked envy. Dan’s ability to remain soft, to cry openly, to keep caring despite his own pain — that is a form of strength Jaekyung never had. (chapter 76) The star’s thoughts in the kitchen are actually mirroring the ones in the bathroom: (chapter 68) In the bathtub, he still saw himself as the one in control, with the upper hand… but this is no longer the case in the kitchen. Through the physical therapist, the wolf is learning that even being in a vulnerable state doesn’t mean that this person is powerless. It is just that his “strength” lies elsewhere. In other words, someone struggling can also give comfort to another person in pain.

In front of the stove, (chapter 76) his words to Dan are clumsy and his tone hesitant, but the meaning is clear: this is the clean start of their relationship. He will no longer measure life by wins and losses, but by the courage to stand unguarded before another human being.

Thus the kitchen becomes a battlefield turned sanctuary. (chapter 76) The stove glows, not as an opponent’s spotlight, but as a hearth. The man who could never say “you’re wrong” to his father, mother, or coach finally confesses it in his own way: “I lost.” And in that defeat, Jaekyung discovers what victory in love looks like — not domination, but the freedom to lean, blush, and be weak without fear.

The bed, the table and the champion

If the table in Jaekyung’s childhood home was cluttered with ramen packs and soju bottles — (chapter 72) a place of solitary consumption rather than shared meals, the bed was the place where the little boy would drink his milk. (chapter 72) It is interesting that actually, Doc Dan wanted to bring the porridge to Joo Jaekyung to his bed during that full moon night, thus the latter made the following request: (chapter 76) But the wolf didn’t understand the hamster’s intention and followed his “hyung” to the kitchen. That’s how a misunderstanding was born which is also reflected in this interaction: (chapter 76) Here, what the wolf wanted was not to be a burden to the physical therapist. But he realized right away that his words could be misinterpreted. (chapter 76) However, doc Dan agreed to this, he remained calm. (chapter 76) Yet, the misunderstanding is not totally out of the room. Hence the doctor imagines that he has to leave the place right after the porridge is finished. However, what caught my attention is that in this brief scene, there was no table between them (chapter 76) contrary to the past, in particular in the penthouse. (chapter 41) The latter actually represented a hindrance between them, it marked their relationship: boss and “employee” (servant). Moreover, since the table in the champion’s childhood was linked to one person (the father), it is clear that the champion has never shared a table with someone. And this aspect brings me to my other observation.

The table under Park Namwook’s watch was no better. It was never about eating together as family, but about transactions. (chapter 22) Whether in meetings, weigh-ins, or dinners with the CEO (chapter 69), the table served as the stage for contracts, discipline, and deals. Even in chapter 36, where Namwook barked at him in front of guests, or in chapter 46, where he sat beside him during business discussions, the surface between them was never for intimacy. (chapter 46) It was a place where others dictated terms, while Jaekyung’s silence was mistaken for consent. And now, you comprehend why the two main leads could get closer in front of the stove in the kitchen. This place stands for warmth, care and family. (chapter 76) He lost, because there was no table… there is no contract, silence … this is no longer work, but home!

And this brings to my final observation. You certainly remember how the champion offered the doctor (chapter 13) a meal after his collapse. He refused to bring a meal to the bed, he asked him to join in the dining room and sit at the table. And what did they do there? The champion talked about his career, his fight etc… (chapter 13) the champion has long associated the table to business and not “care”. That’s why it is important for him to remember the significance of the bed in his childhood. It was the place where he could feel comfortable and safe, where he would eat! (chapter 72)

To conclude, the table represents the ultimate emblem of selfishness and deafness: a place where Jaekyung’s words and silences alike carry no weight and he is treated like an object.

Against this backdrop, the kitchen scene in chapter 76 shines with quiet revolt. (chapter 76) There, no table separates him from Dan, no manager is present to misread his silence. Both stand shoulder to shoulder by the stove, and what unfolds is not a deal but an exchange — fragmented, yes, but genuine. The kitchen, unlike the boardroom, is not a place of deafness but of listening, even in misunderstanding. In admitting “I lost,” Jaekyung finally answers an argument not with fists or silence, but with vulnerability. The table collapses, and with it the authority of all those who once claimed to know what was best for him.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Wolf’s 🐺 Ritual in front of the 🐹Tender Mirror 🪞

The Wolf Before the Mirror

After episode 75, many readers felt they finally understood Joo Jaekyung. He spoke of his routines — the glass of milk (chapter 75), the perfume (chapter 75), the nights of sex before a fight (chapter 75). His words seemed like a confession, a key to the riddle of the Night Emperor. But do we truly know him now? Yes and no. Yes, because his testimony reveals patterns we had only noticed before. No, because those patterns are only the ones he decided to share. The tattoos chapter 75) that suddenly appeared on his body (chapter 75), for example, were left unmentioned — proof that silence still surrounds him.

And that silence is the heart of the mystery. Why cling to such gestures at all? (chapter 75) Why fight as though every match were a matter of life and death? Why keep repeating the same acts, long after survival was secured? (chapter 75) What does the jinx truly represent for him — mere superstition, a ritual of control, or something he himself has not yet dared to name? For Jaekyung himself cannot fully explain it. He confesses what he knows — that sex steadies him, that milk soothes him, that perfume sharpens him — but he does not grasp what lies beneath these habits. The origin of the jinx remains hidden, lodged somewhere between memory and trauma, where even he cannot follow. Are these rituals mere superstition, a desperate bid for control? Or are they fragments of something deeper — pieces of a story he has never fully told, even to himself?

This essay does not claim to solve the riddle once and for all. Instead, it traces the wolf’s path step by step: the seed of the jinx in childhood loss, its growth through training and systems, its mask as professional myth, its collapse in illness and insomnia, and the counterforce embodied by Kim Dan — the tender mirror that reflects what Jaekyung has never faced.

The wolf has spoken, but his words only open new questions. To read them closely is not to find closure, but to stand at the edge of the mirror and ask: what truth still hides behind the jinx?

The Birth of the Jinx: From Loser to Survivor

The origins of Joo Jaekyung’s “jinx” cannot be reduced to a single event or ritual .(chapter 75) They are the product of a long chain of humiliations, betrayals, and systemic exploitation, each layering onto the next until a young man’s raw talent was encased in a carapace of compulsions. To understand the jinx is to understand how the protagonist’s life collapsed around the word loser, and how the fighting industry transformed his private shame into public myth.

From the beginning, Jaekyung’s relationship to combat was not framed as “sport” or “discipline” but as survival. (chapter 72) Even before stepping into a professional cage, his life had been a series of trials to prove he was not worthless. (chapter 74) Hunger, poverty, bullying, insults— each branded his body with a language of violence. Among them came his father’s words, spat like a curse: loser. (chapter 73) That insult crystallized everything. The young boy absorbed it as truth, so much so that every later fight would be less about victory and more about silencing that single syllable. (chapter 75)

To conclude, the origins of Joo Jaekyung’s jinx lie in the place where private wounds and public exploitation overlap. It was never simply a superstition, nor only the accumulation of personal rituals. It was born in the crucible of insult, abandonment, and systemic betrayal, until it hardened into a second skin. To grasp the weight of the jinx, one must trace its seed in his childhood, its growth in the system that exploited him, and its crisis in the moment when he first admitted: I can’t take it anymore (chapter 69)

The Five Losses

At first, Joo Jaekyung’s rise seemed unstoppable. He was young, raw, and hungry (chapter 75) — a boy who fought with the desperation of someone who had nothing else. Victory after victory gave him the illusion that he had escaped his father’s shadow. As long as he was winning, he could suppress the pain, bury the insult loser, and silence the memory of that cursed night when his father died and his mother abandoned him. Triumph became his shield, proof that he was not what he had said he was.

But then came the first defeat. (chapter 75)

For most athletes, a loss is a bruise, a chance to recalibrate. For Jaekyung, it was a collapse, That first loss did not just wound his pride — it broke the fragile wall he had built against his past. With the referee’s decision, the ghosts returned. Memories he had forced into silence came rushing back: his father’s drunken rages, the contempt in his voice, the silence of the house after the funeral, the absence of the mother who should have stayed.

Yet the people around him could not see any of this. (chapter 75) To them, a fighter’s struggles had only one explanation: weakness. Park Namwook and the other coach dismissed his losses as nerves (chapter 75), as if the only measure of worth were what happened under the spotlight. They never thought to ask what kind of weight he was carrying, what kind of nights he was surviving before he entered the cage. While the other fighters were well aware of the champion’s insomnia (chapter 75), Park Namwook still has no idea of the champion’s struggles. This shows how disconnected he is from his “boy”.

For the coaches, fighters were not human beings with inner lives. They were “fresh meat,” (chapter 74) bodies to be tested, pushed, and discarded if they broke. Where Jaekyung’s defeat cracked open childhood trauma, they saw only performance failure. What he lived as suffocation and despair (chapter 75), they reduced to cowardice, bad luck or lack of discipline.

It was after that first defeat that the nightmares began. On the eve of every major fight, his father returned in dreams — not as comfort, but as terror. (chapter 75) Shadowed hands stretched over his body, pressing down, suffocating him as he tried to sleep. The man was dead, but still he choked the air from his son. It was, as if the father wanted to bring his son to the afterlife.

In truth, every match had always been a battle for survival. (chapter 75) Even before his first loss, Jaekyung fought like a cornered animal, pouring every ounce of strength into proving he could not be beaten. That’s why he rose so fast. But why? The reason is that all his opponents were reflections of his “father”. (chapter 29) Hence all the challengers have empty eyes and a smirk on their face, just like Joo Jaewoong. (chapter 75) Consequently, his matches always looked like life-and-death struggles. He wasn’t strategizing against a specific fighter; he was exorcising a ghost. That’s why he never refused a challenge. His opponent never mattered. Besides, as long as he could win, it didn’t matter.

But after his first defeat, that survival style began to falter. The stronger his opponents became (chapter 75), the more the cracks showed — and the ghosts of his father and mother made every fight feel like a replay of abandonment and accusation. The five losses (chapter 75) were not just setbacks in his career; they were the repeated reopening of a wound that would never heal. Each one confirmed his father’s curse. Each one reinforced the sense that he was marked, that no matter how high he climbed, he would always be dragged down again.

This is why insomnia became his constant companion. Victories silenced the ghosts temporarily, but the fear of defeat meant he could never rest. (chapter 29) Sleep was dangerous. Night itself was dangerous. To close his eyes was to risk drowning again in his father’s shadow.

The “jinx” was born here, in the space between triumph and terror. Losses triggered his past, victories gave only temporary relief, and the cycle of sleeplessness carved itself into his body. It was not just that he lost five matches — it was that in losing, he discovered he could never truly escape. (chapter 75)

Defeat for Jaekyung was never contained to the ring. It spilled outward, contaminating his sense of self. With no supportive network to reframe failure as growth, he internalized it as destiny. At this point the soil of the jinx had been prepared: shame, hunger, and despair compacted into a single wound.

The Father’s Insult & the Mother’s Abandonment

If the five losses cracked Jaekyung’s present, the deeper fracture had already been carved years earlier — on the night of his father’s death. That final argument sealed itself into his soul like a curse.

The fight began when Jaekyung, cornered by frustration and anger, shouted his desire to leave “this dump of a house.” (chapter 73) To the boy, it was a cry for pain and survival — an instinctive urge to escape despair and criticism. To the father, it was betrayal. Already emasculated by failure and drink, he was reminded of his wife’s discontent, the specter of another abandonment. He lashed out the only way he knew: (chapter 73)

That word — loser — became permanent. When the father died later that night, Jaekyung was left with two unbearable impressions: that his last words had cursed his father to die (chapter 73), and that the man’s final judgment on him would never be undone. Love and hatred, longing and guilt fused in that moment. He loved his father despite the abuse. And yet he would forever wonder if leaving — even just threatening to leave — had killed him. Worse, because death came so suddenly, there was no time left. (chapter 73) The clock had stopped before forgiveness could be spoken, before the boy could say he had not meant it. From that moment on, time itself became his opponent: every match another countdown, every victory an attempt to outrun that night.

The nightmares that began after Jaekyung’s first professional loss are echoes of that night. In them, his father returns, shadowed hands stretching to choke the air from his chest. (chapter 75) The hands around his throat were not only the weight of guilt — the boy regretting words he could never take back. (chapter 75) They were also the expression of longing, the words his father had not spoken that day. Behind the insult ‘loser’ was the wound of a man deserted by his wife (chapter 73), unable to voice his own vulnerability. (chapter 75) In the dream, the silence became hands: both curse and plea, punishment and confession, suffocating the son who could never repair what had been broken. It was as if the father wanted to bring his son to the other side, yet beneath the violence was a plea: “Don’t abandon me, too.”

And here, the mirror appears. Dan unconsciously repeats the father’s gesture (chapter 66) — speaking not with fists or insults but with tears and an embrace. (chapter 66) His sleepwalking reacting to a simple touch (chapter 65), his dissociative pleas (chapter 66) give Jaekyung the words his father could not say. Where the father’s unconscious leaked out in aggression, Dan’s unconscious offers gentleness and honesty. Both men speak from a place deeper than reason; one chained Jaekyung to guilt, the other opens the possibility of release. In Dan’s trembling body, Jaekyung sees the tender reflection of his father’s hidden plea (chapter 66) — the same hands that once strangled him in nightmares now return as arms clutching him in desperation, not to kill him, but to keep him alive. Doc Dan’s whispers revealed that deep down, he desired to be saved and even taken. The father and the physical therapist both fear abandonment. That’s how it dawned on me why Joo Jaewoong chose to hide his vulnerability and resorted to violence and insult to mask his suffering and low self-esteem. Where are his parents in this story? Why was he obsessed to leave the place? (chapter 73) Why does the champion have no grand-parents?

If Joo Jaewoong was himself an orphan — or had effectively lived as one — then his life would have been marked by the same wounds that later haunted his son: abandonment, lack of recognition, and a hunger for belonging. But unlike Jaekyung, he never found a way to sublimate that pain into something lasting. His only outlet was boxing, a fragile refuge that collapsed once his career failed. (chapter 74) With no parents, no siblings, and eventually no wife, he had nothing to fall back on and saw in the criminal world another form of “family”. The family he created became his one fragile shelter — and when that shelter cracked, there was nothing left to hold him.

This also explains why betrayal cut so deeply. If he had been orphaned once already, his worst nightmare was to be abandoned again. When his wife left, the nightmare returned in full force. (chapter 72) His violence expressed his powerlessness. And when his son shouted his desire to leave the “dump of a house,” (chapter 73) he heard the same wound echoing. His response — calling his son a loser — was not really about boxing. It was about himself. In Jaekyung’s words he recognized his own instinct: the same drive to escape, to sever ties, to search for life elsewhere. His insult was not only an attack, but also a mirror, reflecting back the failure and desertion he had never overcome.

The tragedy is that he had no language for vulnerability. Where Kim Dan trembles and pleads openly, (chapter 66), the father could not. He had never been taught how to ask for help, how to voice fear, how to admit despair. Keep in mind how the little “hamster” was treated at school: (chapter 57) Violence and insult became his only idiom. “Loser” was not simply an accusation, but the displaced confession of his own defeat: I was abandoned. I failed. I have nothing.

This is why he resented his son. Jaekyung mirrored him too closely. (chapter 73) The boy’s boxing talent was a source of pride — proof of strength — but also a threat. Strength meant escape. Escape meant abandonment. The father, who had already lost his wife and his dignity, projected onto his son the terror of losing everything once again. His resentment was not born of disappointment alone but of recognition (unconsciously): you are me, and you will leave me too.

From a narrative standpoint, this also clarifies why Jinx never shows Jaekyung’s grandparents, while Dan’s halmoni plays such a visible role. (chapter 65) The absence is not an oversight but a theme. Jaekyung comes from severed roots: no grandparents, no siblings, no extended family to lean on. Hence he was alone at the funeral. (chapter 74) His father may have been an orphan, just like his mother too. Therefore the latter was emotionally unavailable, and so he inherited not only trauma but also silence. By contrast, Dan has at least one surviving figure — flawed as she is — who keeps the family thread intact. That contrast makes Jaekyung’s bond with Dan all the more significant: it is not just romance, but an attempt to build a family line that never existed before him.

This also explains why the story deliberately exposed the “mother” of Hwang Byungchul (chapter 73), while keeping Jaewoong’s own origins shrouded. Hwang had someone by his side — gentle, quiet, but present — while Jaewoong had no one, as according to me, the mother was counting on her “husband”‘s success and dream. The director’s stability, however fragile, was rooted in that maternal figure. Jaewoong had no such guide, and without it, he simply made the wrong choice.

If the father cursed him with words, the mother wounded him with silence. When news of her husband’s death reached her (chapter 74), she never once spoke to her son about it, never asked what he felt. She did not grieve with him, nor allow him to grieve. Besides, the main lead’s words were ambiguous: Was the father dead or had he abandoned his son too? The fact that she never asked exposes that it didn’t matter to her. She was not interested in the truth, her only concern was herself — her new life, her fear of losing it. Where the father left him branded, the mother left him erased. (chapter 75) One condemned him, the other abandoned him, and between them Jaekyung was left with neither recognition nor belonging.

Worse still, she used time itself against him. To her, his pain was invalid because he had “grown up”; childhood had expired, and with it any claim to comfort. If the father’s death left him no time to undo his last words, the mother’s detachment told him he was already too late. One parent departed too soon, the other dismissed him as already finished. Between them, Jaekyung was trapped in a cruel paradox of time. This explicates why he rushed his career. Every victory carried the urgency of being “not too late,” yet every memory reminded him that it already was.

This fusion of insult and betrayal created the paradox that would dominate his adult life. Every victory was haunted by loss (chapter 73); every triumph, by the echo of rejection (chapter 73). To win was to prove his father wrong, but to stand alone in victory was to prove his mother right. Success and emptiness became inseparable.

And yet, this is precisely why Kim Dan’s presence destabilizes him. The quiet therapist mirrors the mother: bound to the domestic, offering care in silence (chapter 56), seemingly fragile and dependent. But unlike her, he stays. Where the mother left, Dan endures. He only left because of the champion’s final words: (chapter 51)

By choosing Dan, Jaekyung faces the chance to rewrite the past on both fronts. To hear in the tears of another man what his father could not say. To receive in daily presence what his mother could not give. Dan is the mirror — but also the key. Through him, the curse of that night can finally be undone. The insult “loser” can be answered not with endless victories but with loyalty and responsibility. The suffocating grip of the nightmare can be released not by outrunning it, but by choosing someone who will not disappear when the fight is over. Finally, because his fated partner’s fate resembles to his own father, he can grasp Joo Jaewoong’s words from that night much better. That moment where Jaewoong shouts, (chapter 73) mirrors what the director later whispers to Jaekyung: (chapter 75) Both men — the broken father and the regretful coach — carry the same hidden insight: that fighting cannot be the whole of life, and that reducing yourself to fists and violence only leads to ruin.

But where Jaewoong voiced it as rage (a curse disguised as a lesson), the director voiced it as wisdom (a confession born of hindsight). Both were trying, in their own ways, to warn the boy. And yet, Jaekyung could not hear it until he had this vision of doc Dan waiting for him! (chapter 75) This is the wolf’s ritual in front of the tender mirror: the fighter who lived by curses and silence finally meeting their reflection transformed into gentleness and endurance.

To conclude, Dan is not just a partner but the tender mirror of the champion. He reflects both parents back to Jaekyung: the father’s unspoken vulnerability, the mother’s missing presence. To accept Dan is to answer both wounds at once — to refuse to be defined by the word “loser,” and to refuse the emptiness that haunted every victory.

The Bible Fighter Encounter

At his lowest point, after the five humiliating defeats and the sleepless nights where his father’s shadow clawed at his throat, Jaekyung stumbled across another fighter whose stability was almost alien. (chapter 75) This man’s jinx was startlingly simple: he read the Bible before every match. One book, one ritual, one anchor. To outsiders, it may have seemed quaint, even laughable, but to Jaekyung it was enviable.

Here was a man who had condensed all the chaos of combat into a single act of faith. His jinx was not a patchwork of compulsions but a covenant: a relationship to something larger than himself, a story that gave meaning to the brutality of the cage. (chapter 75) When he prayed, it was not only for victory, but for coherence. Win or lose, the ritual bound him to a sense of belonging that Jaekyung had never tasted.

For Jaekyung, the encounter did not plant faith, but it did plant envy. (chapter 75) If ritual could bend fate, he would build his own. But where the Bible fighter had a single, unifying story — scripture, God, fellowship — Jaekyung had nothing to draw on. No faith to lean on, no parental blessing to inherit, no safe home to return to. Instead, he began to stitch together a mosaic of rituals, each one disguising a different childhood wound. To outsiders it looked obsessive, neurotic, almost superstitious. To him, it was survival. Each gesture was both repression and remembrance, a scar disguised as armor. And this is the paradox: the rituals made him strong enough to survive, but too broken to live.

  • Sex was not intimacy but anesthesia. (chapter 75) By using another body, he cleared his head, numbed the loneliness, and convinced himself he was in control. But it was also a grim reenactment of abandonment: he could take without being left, dominate rather than risk being deserted. At the same time, he considered his sex partners as toys in order to avoid guilt. A toy can not die, it can be “thrown away”.
  • Milk seemed trivial — a glass before the day began. (chapter 75) But in truth it was a disguised memory of hunger (chapter 72), of nights when there was nothing to eat, of shame attached to poverty. (chapter 75) To drink milk was to rewrite the past: I will not go hungry again. Yet the act was also a reminder that he once had.
  • Perfume transformed bullying into ritual. Once shamed for smell and sweat (chapter 75), he turned fragrance into armor. (chapter 75) The bottle on his shelf was less cosmetic than talismanic, proof that no one could call him dirty again. But the ritual did not erase the insult; it replayed it daily.
  • Tattoos etched pain into permanence. To endure the needle was to reenact overtraining (chapter 27) , self-punishment, the willingness to suffer endlessly for the cage. He didn’t fear pain. Their sudden appearance (chapter 75) remains shrouded in silence — who drew them onto his body, and under what conditions? Why are they absent in his youth, only to surface fully formed as he steps onto the international stage? This silence is telling. The tattoos are both declaration and wound: marks of pride, but also scars he chose to carry in plain sight.

Together, these rituals formed a raft — not to carry him forward, but to keep him from drowning. They gave him the illusion of escape, while chaining him to the very traumas he sought to forget. He imagined he was moving on, outpacing the ghosts of his father’s insult and his mother’s abandonment. Yet each gesture pulled the past back into the present. The Bible fighter’s ritual was a prayer; Jaekyung’s were bargains. The more he clung to them, the clearer it became that he was not free. He was frozen, an adult in body but still the boy (chapter 75) who had been abandoned, when he was 6 years old. In fact, on the day, he shouted to his father he would leave this “dump of the house”, he didn’t anticipate that he would relive the day, when he was abandoned as a child. That’s why he has imagined of himself as a little boy and not a teenager. He had the heart of a little boy: wounded, scared and abandoned. Thus he could never grow emotionally. His jinx was not transcendence but entrapment. He was bargaining with memory: don’t let me fall back into the night where I was branded a loser. Don’t let me taste abandonment again.

In this way, the Bible fighter’s simplicity only underscored Jaekyung’s fracture. What was singular faith for one man became a shattered mosaic for another. The jinx did not make him whole; it reminded him every day of how broken he already was.

The Rush to the Top and his predestined Fall

What made this fragile system even more dangerous was the brutal pace at which his career was structured. Between the ages of twenty and twenty-six, Jaekyung was hurled from obscurity into the international spotlight. His first MFC fight was already the 220th bout (chapter 75), a reminder that he had entered a machine in motion, a system that swallowed fighters whole and spat out statistics. From that point, the acceleration was merciless: by April, he was in the 272nd bout against Randy Booker (chapter 14); by June, the 293rd against Dominic Hill (chapter 40); and by July, the 298th against Baek Junmin. (chapter 50)

In less than two years, there were merely eighty fights, and he participated quite often: 4 within 5 months (I am including the one in episode 5) The pace was staggering — inhuman. In the span of six years (chapter 75), he had not merely “built” a career, he had been consumed by one. There was no time to recover from injuries, no space to process victory, no room to integrate defeat. No wonder why his shoulders were in bad shape. (chapter 27) And even before entering MFC, he had to win the champion title for KO-FC! Here he had to face many opponents. (chapter 75) Every fight blurred into the next, every opponent older, stronger, more experienced. And yet Jaekyung fought them all with the same desperate, survival-driven ferocity.

Commentators marveled at his intensity, describing him as if he were “fighting for his life.” (chapter 75) They meant it metaphorically, but for Jaekyung it was literal. The cage was his childhood all over again — a dump he needed to escape, fists and rage the only tools at hand. He fought not to win titles but to silence ghosts. Every opponent became his father’s shadow, every victory a plea to his absent mother: see me, recognize me, don’t abandon me.

This was not a steady ascent, not the careful shaping of an “athlete.” It was exploitation disguised as opportunity. Moderators described his ferocity as spectacle, but the deeper betrayal was in the language used to frame him. The director (chapter 71) and Dr. Lee (chapter 27) still called him an athlete — someone whose body required balance, protection, recovery. But MFC and KO-FC never did. For them, the main lead or his colleagues were addressed as (chapter 14) “The Emperor”, “a crazy bastard” (chapter 40), “my boy”, (chapter 74) “fresh meat,” (chapter 14) “ Randy Booker the butcher,” or (chapter 47) “a potential star.” Not a person, not even a professional, but branding material — a body to be consumed by audiences and discarded once spent. The absence of the word athlete marks what he lost: recognition as a human being. And guess what? (chapter 41) Only doc Dan at the gym saw the fighters as athletes!

Here, the personal and the professional fused in a toxic loop. The wolf’s private jinx gave him the illusion of control — sex, milk, perfume, tattoos — while the organizations fed on those compulsions, scheduling fight after fight, using his rituals as fuel for their machine. The more he fought, the more he relied on the jinx. The more he relied on the jinx, the more exploitable he became. What looked like discipline was really desperation; what looked like destiny was really a trap.

The tattoos mark this stage with brutal clarity. They appear suddenly (chapter 75), without narrative explanation of when or by whom they were inked — as if stamped onto him by the very system he served. In South Korea, tattoos long carried a stigma, associated with gangs and the underworld; Baek Junmin’s body displays this openly (chapter 47). Thus only doctors are allowed to do them officially. But Jaekyung’s rise shifted that meaning. As “The Emperor,” he normalized tattoos for the new generation of fighters, transforming what once marked marginality into a badge of visibility. This is why even Oh Daehyun, one of his admirers and members of Team Black, now carries one: (chapter 8) The celebrity’s suffering literally redefined the aesthetic of the sport. His body, turned billboard, became part of the league’s branding.

Is it a coincidence that Jaekyung’s fall began almost as soon as Dan entered his orbit? At first glance, one might think the therapist’s presence destabilized him, but the timing reveals something darker. The moment Jaekyung began to show humanity, the system pounced — using his deepest wounds as leverage to strip him down.

Every challenge he faced after Dan’s arrival carried the sharp edge of his private pain. Randy Booker taunted him as a “baby,” (chapter 14) ripping open the scar of his father’s “loser” and his mother’s absence and silent parentification. Not long after, an article exposed his shoulder injury (chapter 35), reducing years of discipline to a liability on the page. Later came the suspension narrative (chapter 54), his temper framed not as the product of exploitation and scheme but as proof of unfitness, as if his rage were a crime instead of a symptom. (chapter 54) Even the match with Baek Junmin was twisted against him — accepted under pressure, then reframed as recklessness. To the system, his crown had been too secure, his presence too dominant. He had been champion for “too long.”

The logic was brutally simple: a fighter is valuable until he earns too much , (chapter 41) until he threatens the balance of spectacle and profit. Then the very traits that made him marketable — ferocity, endurance, defiance — are turned into weapons against him. The same press that glorified his titles was quick to call him a liability. What the commentators once celebrated as survival was reframed as instability. Did you notice that all the events quoted above are linked to the number 5! (chapter 5) the name Seo Gichan appeared here for the first time… a faceless name!

The panel of the gym makes this logic stark. (chapter 41) His match fee doubled, and the athletes around him cheered, basking in the reflected glory of his win. Yet the same scene exposes the truth: behind him stand rows of “fresh meat”, ready to replace him the moment his body breaks or his aura fades. Fighters were not nurtured as athletes or honored as artists; they were consumed like rations in a machine that never stops feeding. His career, far from proof of fate or talent alone, was a treadmill built by others — one that guaranteed collapse. That is why his “invitation” from the CEO was less an opportunity than a pitfall. (chapter 69) The danger lay in the very identity of his next challenger. If they pitted him against a newcomer who had rocketed through the ranks as quickly as Baek Junmin once did (chapter 47), the outcome was already poisoned.

Should Jaekyung win, the victory would be dismissed: he had chosen an easy opponent, feeding the narrative that he no longer belonged at the top. Should he be paired with a strong opponent, they expect him to lose, for he has just been surged. So should he lose, the humiliation would be absolute — proof that his era was over, his downfall sealed. And even a tie would work against him, just as before: no one would call it resilience; they would call it weakness, the inability to dominate. In every possible outcome, his worth would be diminished.

This is why Potato’s skepticism back in chapter 47 (chapter 47), questioning the selection of Baek Junmin, is so crucial. It shows that the manipulation of opponents was no accident — it was systemic. Matches were not about fair combat but about narrative management: making sure the emperor’s story served the company’s balance sheet.

The system leaves Jaekyung with only one real option: to step out of the spotlight. Every path inside the cage leads to diminishment — win, lose, or tie, the outcome is already poisoned. To remain would be to keep running on the treadmill until his body breaks, his title stripped, his name forgotten.

But there is another path, one the system cannot script: (chapter 75) to follow Dan into a different kind of life. For Jaekyung, this does not mean abandoning fighting altogether, but detaching it from the machinery of survival and spectacle. To fight not to silence ghosts or to feed companies, but because he chooses to. To discover that strength can exist outside the ring.

This is where the tender mirror matters. In Dan’s steady presence, Jaekyung catches a glimpse of the self he has never allowed himself to become: not just wolf, not just champion, but a man capable of rest, of connection, of living beyond ritual. Where the system shows him only exploitation, the mirror reflects possibility. He will discover the advantages of “vulnerability and childhood”: fun and enjoy the present.

The system can strip him of titles, twist his image, discard his body. But what it cannot erase is the possibility of choosing a different path, like for example fight for fun and act as a real director of a gym!

The Empty Champion

The façade cracked with the tie against Baek Junmin. (chapter 51) On paper, it was a draw. In practice, it was soon reframed as a loss (chapter 57). By late August, Jaekyung had slipped to third place. (chapter 69) And strikingly, no one questioned it. Not Park Namwook, not the officials, not even Joo Jaekyung or the commentators who had once praised his streak. The silence was louder than any insult.

The title of “champion” — the very identity he had staked his survival on — was revealed as hollow. (chapter 75) Here, it looks like a mirror, but naturally it is a fake one. It was not earned with fists alone; it could be stripped, reassigned, reshaped at will. One tie, one whisper, one adjustment in the rankings, and the Night Emperor was dethroned without ceremony.

For Jaekyung, this revelation was more than professional disillusionment. It tore open the paradox of his childhood. Just as his mother’s absence had turned victory into rejection, the system now proved that even championships carried no safety. He could win endlessly and still be discarded. He could bleed, sweat, endure, and still be branded as replaceable.

The belt was supposed to erase the insult “loser.” Instead, it exposed how fragile identity remained when it depended on others’ recognition. He had built a kingdom on rituals, and the first storm revealed it was sand.

The Cry of Exhaustion

When Jaekyung finally mutters, “I can’t take it anymore” (chapter 69), the choice of words is crucial. He does not say “I can’t do it anymore” — as though it were a matter of strength or skill — but take. This single verb reveals the deeper structure of his life. He has lived not by creating or belonging, but by enduring and consuming.

To take meant many things for him:

  • to take blows in the ring, as though punishment were the measure of his worth;
  • to take orders from coaches and managers, their words absorbed as commands rather than care;
  • to take the belt, the money, the fame, without ever finding nourishment in them;
  • to take on guilt and abandonment, carrying weights that were never his to bear.

Even his jinx rituals repeat this same pattern. Each is an act of taking:

  • Milk — taking liquid into his body (chapter 75), ritualizing hunger that had once been real deprivation.
  • Sex — taking another’s body as a vessel (chapter 75), not for intimacy but to clear his head and stave off loneliness, emptiness and his abandonment issues.
  • Perfume — taking a scent (chapter 75), masking shame by cloaking himself in armor.
  • Tattoos — taking pain into his skin, as if engraving scars could grant permanence.

None of these rituals is about giving, sharing, or being. They are substitutions, attempts to fill a void. He consumes and endures, but he never rests. Survival by taking is not the same as living.

That is why the sentence “I can’t take it anymore” is more than a cry of exhaustion. It is a refusal of the very economy that has defined him: the endless cycle of taking, absorbing, enduring. The belt, the fights, the rituals — they have all lost their power to silence the ghosts. His body cracks under the weight, and his soul confesses what his will has long denied: that survival without belonging is hollow.

Here begins the possibility of a new mode of existence. Not taking, but being. Not absorbing endlessly, but inhabiting presence. And this is what Dan embodies. Where Jaekyung has lived by taking, Dan offers constancy — a presence that does not vanish, a tenderness that does not demand. The mirror he holds up makes Jaekyung’s cry not merely one of collapse, but of awakening. It signals a desire to step out of the hollow cycle of taking, and toward the possibility of being — not a “champion,” not a “loser,” but simply himself. (chapter 75) The problem is that in his dream of belonging, the champion is not present yet. He hovers at the edges of his own life, like a ghost, repeating rituals that anchor him to absence rather than connection. He exists in fragments — as fighter, as brand, as body — but not yet as a whole person. To become present, he must learn not only to abandon the logic of taking, but to enter the world of giving and receiving, where presence is shared rather than consumed. His later vow (chapter 75) must be read in this light. It is not a relapse into the system’s treadmill, nor a blind return to the pitfall laid before him. Notice that he does not say he will fight in the fall, nor does he mention the upcoming match that everyone else is waiting for. (chapter 71) Instead, he frames his goal with a word that changes everything: reclaim.

Reclaiming is not the same as taking. It implies agency, choice, and even memory — an effort to retrieve something that was stolen or hollowed out, and to give it new meaning. Here, Jaekyung is no longer the body endlessly used by the system, nor the boy who clung to rituals of survival. He is beginning to define his own ground. The belt may still be the symbol, but what he seeks is not its material shine; it is the authority to say: this is mine because I chose it, not because it was forced on me.

This subtle shift is the fruit of the tender mirror. Through Dan’s presence, Jaekyung glimpses that fighting can be more than compulsion, more than survival — it can be chosen, and it can be shared. His declaration to “reclaim” is thus less about the system’s title than about carving a new relation to himself: no longer the orphan boy trapped in taking, but the man who begins to act, even falteringly, from his own will.

The Tie as Inverted Trauma

And yet, within the Baek Junmin fight lies a paradoxical seed of transformation. The tie (chapter 51) repeats the structure of his childhood trauma but in inverted form.

Then he won the match (chapter 73), but he lost his father and his mother abandoned him. (chapter 74) He lost his hope of a “home” for good.
Now: he tied the match, but he is the one who criticized the doctor. Though he didn’t lose his gym, he pushed doc Dan away and the latter chose to quit.

Then: he was silenced, (chapter 73) branded a loser without reply. His words — “I’ll leave this dump” — were thrown back at him as “loser.” The insult froze him in place. He could not defend himself, could not reply, could not demand to be understood. His father’s judgment became law, sealed by death. To speak further would have meant betraying him, to stay silent meant carrying the curse. The boy’s voice was extinguished before it ever found strength.

In the locker room with Dan, Jaekyung is no longer mute. (chapter 51) When his world threatened to collapse again — the tie with Baek Junmin, the looming humiliation — he erupted in rage. He screamed at Dan, he let the words spill out violently, breaking the silence that had once shackled him. It was an act of defiance against the curse: if he could not silence the nightmare, he would shout it down.

But here lies the decisive contrast: unlike his father, Dan does not reply with insult. He does not brand him, erase him, or abandon him. Instead, he disarms him with a single, piercing question: “Don’t you trust me?” (chapter 54) That moment reverses the old script entirely. Where his father’s last word was condemnation, Dan’s is invitation. Where his father’s voice ended the dialogue forever, Dan opens one. Where his father made trust impossible, Dan asks for it. Besides, the latter encouraged him to reflect on himself.

The locker room clash thus marks more than anger — it is the birth of a new possibility. Jaekyung is no longer the boy silenced by judgment, but the man whose rage meets not insult, but a chance at trust. (chapter 51) The mirror is clear: the cycle can be broken, but only if he dares to answer the question that was never asked of him before. Therefore it is not surprising that the physical therapist’s question appeared in the champion’s vision: (chapter 54) His unconscious was telling him to have faith in his “doctor”. Thus later, the champion told the director of the hospital this: (chapter 61) He was acknowledging the main lead as a real physical therapist.

The tie created a strange neutral space, neither victory nor defeat, where change became possible. Losing the belt was not only humiliation; it was a disruption of the old cycle. A chance to redefine what fighting could mean.If the first trauma bound him forever to the word “loser,” the second pointed toward another possibility: to lose a title, but to gain, at last, a home and even a partner!

The Mirror Clouded By Silence

Like mentioned above, readers may think that by chapter 75 the mystery of the jinx is solved. The protagonist finally names it, recounts his five losses, confesses the nightmares of his father, and admits to the strange bargain of sex as ritual (chapter 75). The wolf speaks — and the silence seems broken. But this is only the surface. The confession gives the illusion of truth while concealing how much remains unspoken. How so? It is because this confession changes everything. It reframes the past.

For in reality, Jaekyung has never revealed the whole architecture of his jinx to anyone. To the outside world, (chapter 62)— and even to those closest to his body — it looks like nothing more than sex. That was all the uke from chapter 2 saw, and it was enough for him to sneer: (chapter 2) The insult landed with devastating familiarity, not as a new wound but as an echo of his father’s curse: “loser.” Both words reduced Jaekyung to nothing — not a man, not an athlete, just a fraud kept alive by crutches.

This is why Jaekyung’s violent outburst was so extreme. (chapter 2) In slamming his former partner against the wall, he was not merely silencing a lover’s cruelty. He was fighting the ghost of his father, the voice that had branded him weak, cursed, unworthy. The jinx that kept him alive was being twisted into proof of his failure, and he could not bear it. (chapter 2)

But Dan, too, repeats this misrecognition, though with none of the malice. In chapter 62, when Jaekyung asked to return to their routine and another aspect of the jinx (chapter 62), Dan recoiled. (chapter 62) To him, “jinx” meant objectification, a reduction of their bond to sex. (chapter 62) He could not know that behind the word was an entire architecture of rituals — milk, perfume, tattoos, scars — all the desperate scaffolding Jaekyung had built to survive. Like mentioned above, by the time of chapter 62, Jaekyung already valued Kim Dan not just as a body to “use” (chapter 62) but as a therapist he trusted. His words about wanting to return to the “usual pre-match routine” (chapter 62) were, in his mind, a way of saying: I need you to bring back wholeness, to help me steady myself again. But because Dan only knew fragments of the jinx, the message landed with devastating distortion.

To Dan, “pre-match routine” meant sex. He knew about that ritual, maybe also the glass of milk — (chapter 41) but not the others. He had never seen how layered and fragmented Jaekyung’s survival system truly was: the shower and perfume, the milk, the tattoos, the obsessive fight schedule. Thus, when Jaekyung invoked the jinx, Dan heard only objectification: you want me for my body. However, this is not what the “wolf” meant. Thus he got surprised by such a statement. (chapter 62) For Jaekyung, the plea was about coherence; for Dan, it sounded like reduction.

This is why Dan recoils, saying bitterly that he should have known Jaekyung “only wanted my body.” Both men were speaking from wounds — but past each other. Jaekyung was reaching for stability, Dan was defending his dignity. The gulf between them was not lack of care but lack of shared knowledge.

Food as Silent Ritual

This gap becomes especially poignant when we look at the food scenes. Because Dan doesn’t know the full set of rituals, he instinctively replaces them. (chapter 22) He cooks breakfast for Jaekyung, offering something warm, homemade, human — a substitute for the cold, industrial glass of milk. (chapter 75) Naturally, he must have noticed the glass of milk each morning, but the physical therapist thought that this beverage was just the expression of the champion’s taste. He never saw it as a part of the ritual. In cooking so, he unconsciously takes over not only the role of the nutritionist, but also of the “family”. That’s the reason why Joo Jaekyung got so moved, though he did not smile (chapter 22) or cry out of joy.

We see the contrast after the doctor’s vanishing: Jaekyung, alone, eats food mechanically, (chapter 54) throws the plate away (chapter 54), or sits at a vast table in silence. (chapter 54) But when Dan cooks, Jaekyung is surprised, even touched. For once, nourishment is not consumption but connection. The milk was always a disguised memory of deprivation; Dan’s meal becomes the antidote — food as presence. So for him, the prematch-routine was also referring to the meals prepared by his fated partner. And I feel the need to bring another aspect. Since there was no “family” in the athlete’s life, he never got the chance to discover the joy of the table. (chapter 22) Hence it is not surprising that he looked at his phone, while the others were eating and discussing. He never had a real conversation with a family member around the table.

The Hidden Scent

Another layer is scent. (chapter 40) Perfume was one of Jaekyung’s protective rituals — masking shame, creating an armor against the memory of bullying and ridicule. Yet Dan shows that none of this is necessary. The panel where he clings to the bedsheets after their Summer Night’s Dream together (chapter 45), whispering that he misses Jaekyung’s warmth, reveals that the champion’s natural scent is already enough. He never gets to see this — Jaekyung doesn’t know how deeply Dan treasures his smell.

This is critical: Dan unconsciously redeems the rituals. He replaces milk with food, perfume with genuine warmth, mechanical sex with an act that stirs tenderness. But because Jaekyung doesn’t articulate his system, Dan cannot recognize what he is undoing. The mirror is already working, but the reflection is clouded. And this leads me to another observation. His rituals had already been affected by doc Dan’s presence, but the latter never realized it! Joo Jaekyung returned to his lover’s side after the shower and perfume! (chapter 40) Here he turned around and placed his lover in the middle of the bed. He even let him rest.

Why Only Mention Sex?

A lingering question remains: why does Jaekyung mention only sex in this conversation (chapter 2), and not the other rituals? Because to admit the rest would be to expose the origin of the jinx: the father’s insult, the mother’s abandonment, the hunger, the bullying. Sex was the only ritual that could be spoken without directly dragging the past into the room. It was the “safe” shorthand — though tragically, it became the most dangerous. Homosexuality is definitely a stigma among boxers and MMA fighters.

By limiting his words to sex, Jaekyung avoided revisiting trauma, but in doing so, he doomed the conversation to collapse. He reached for the mirror, but without naming his scars, the reflection became distorted.

A Mirror of Wounds

Chapter 62 therefore stages one of the most painful paradoxes in Jinx: Dan is already healing Jaekyung’s rituals without realizing it. But because he doesn’t know the full picture, he interprets the champion’s plea as exploitation. Interesting is that in this confrontation, something crucial happens. (chapter 62) Dan’s reproach is not framed in the language of the ring. He does not call Jaekyung weak, a loser, or unfit — the very vocabulary that had haunted the champion since his father’s curse and that others (uke, press, rivals) recycled against him. Instead, Dan’s words land on an entirely different plane: “I should’ve known… that you only wanted me for my body.”

This is not an insult to the protagonist as a fighter. It is a wound as a man. The complaint does not echo his father’s verdict but indicts his coldness, his selfishness, his inability to show care. Where the old trauma was about being branded unworthy of victory, Dan’s reproach is about being unworthy of intimacy.

That difference matters. For the first time, the athlete is not being told he cannot fight; he is being told he cannot love. He doesn’t care! The battlefield shifts. What once was survival inside the cage is now survival outside of it — the fight to be recognized, not as “Emperor,” but as a partner capable of connection. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why the champion tried to take care of his fated partner! (chapter 68) In his own way, he was showing him that he did care! He was more than just a body… or even a physical therapist!!

Here the mirror metaphor sharpens: Jaekyung sees himself through Dan, but Dan only sees part of him due to his “secrecy” and silence. Until both fragments meet — the rituals revealed, the care recognized — the mirror cannot reflect the whole.

The Tender Mirror: Dan’s Role

If the jinx was born in silence — the father’s insult, the mother’s disappearance, the system’s exploitation — then its undoing begins in silence as well. But this time, the silence is not absence. It is observation and presence. (chapter 35) It is the steady mirror of Kim Dan.

From the very beginning, their dynamic was framed in asymmetry. In Season 1, Jaekyung appeared as the unshakable adult, even the father-figure: towering, dominant, controlling every space he entered. Dan, in contrast, was cast as the child (chapter 13) — helpless, cornered, often pleading. Thus the champion taught the doctor to overcome his fear and fight back: (chapter 26) This imbalance was no accident. It replayed Jaekyung’s own childhood roles: he became what his father had been to him (the better version naturally, for he is the mirror of truth), and forced Dan into the position he had once held himself. Through Dan, Jaekyung unconsciously re-enacted his trauma, reversing their positions as if to master what had once mastered him. That way, he was pushed to mature emotionally! That’s why he could connect with the main lead unconsciously. His trembling words in Chapter 51 (chapter 51) were the expression of a desire for recognition and acceptance. Thus the request from the champion (chapter 51) should be seen as the separation between a “father” and “son”.

But Season 2 begins to fracture this arrangement. Slowly, Dan ceases to be the terrified child. Instead, he resembles more to the adolescent. He can not grasp his own behavior. (chapter 71) He believes to know the truth, while he is ignorant. He is insecure, extreme in his behavior (drinking) (chapter 71), but also selfish and questioning, still fragile yet capable of protest. He is struggling with his own emotions and thoughts. (chapter 71) How can he trust the athlete, when he doubts himself so much? From my point of view, he is on the verge of become “mature mentally” and as such “responsible”. At the same time, Jaekyung is revealed as the adult in crisis. His exhaustion (Chapter 69) strips away the illusion of invulnerability. The wolf, once a figure of brute survival, begins to look more like a cornered animal, uncertain whether to fight or collapse. And observe that now the champion is having a cold, like a small “child”! (chapter 70)

Gradually, their roles shift again. Thus I deduce that Dan is about to take care of Jaekyung. But not as his “father”… but as his hyung! (chapter 74) It is because thanks to the director’s confession, the “hamster” is able to see the champion as a “a kindred spirit“, an orphan and as such as the younger “boy”.

This is why the possibility of “hyung” is so radical. The word collapses categories that Jaekyung has always kept apart: dependence and respect, family and intimacy, protection and confession. To call Dan “hyung” would be to admit need without shame, to claim family without fear of betrayal. He would become now a part of “Joo Jaekyung’s team”. It would be, in essence, the reversal of the father’s insult “loser.” Where “loser” condemned him to isolation, “hyung” would admit him into belonging. Through this single word, the curse could be undone. At the same time, it would announce the end of Park Namwook’s ruling. Finally, let’s not forget that in episode 7, the physical therapist was introduced as “hyung” to the other fighters. (chapter 7)

Toward Redefinition: Fighting as Fun

When the director whispered to Jaekyung to “find a new purpose,” it was not only advice — it was prophecy. (chapter The purpose he had clung to until now had already rotted. Victory no longer silenced his ghosts. Belts no longer secured belonging. Titles could be stripped at will. Even his rituals had begun to betray him, his body collapsing into illness (headache, insomnia) after Doc Dan left his side. What remained was emptiness.

But emptiness is also possibility.

For Jaekyung, the redefinition of fighting begins with a shift from having to being. Until now, his life was driven by the mode of having: having titles, having opponents, having sex, having rituals to take the edge off. Even his exhausted cry in Chapter 69 — “I can’t take it anymore” — reveals this logic. What he can no longer endure are the burdens of having: the blows, the obligations, the belt that weighs more than it rewards. His rituals, too, were all about taking — taking milk, taking a body, taking perfume, taking tattoos. They filled emptiness for a moment but never answered it.

To become present, he must enter another mode: not having, but being. Being in the fight, being in connection, being in the moment. Fighting not to silence ghosts or to feed a machine, but because it is fun (chapter 26), because it is play, because it is chosen.

This redefinition is not foreign to combat. At its root, martial arts were always more than survival. They were practice, discipline, sometimes even dance. But Jaekyung had never been allowed to experience them that way. For him, the cage was always a replay of childhood — fists against ghosts, survival against abandonment. To rediscover fighting as fun is not regression but liberation: a way of reclaiming what was stolen from him, the joy of movement, the thrill of competition without the terror of loss. That way, the rituals lose their meanings.

The hug in Chapter 69 marks the pivot. Here Jaekyung embraces Dan not as therapist or tool, but as man to man. (chapter 69) It is not about treatment or jinx, but about presence. This hug reframes the meaning of strength. True strength is not the ability to fight endlessly, but the ability to hold and be held, to mirror” is like touching oneself! Let’s not forget that the mirror represents the reflection of a person. Respecting the physical therapist signifies respecting oneself!

And this is where the future possibility of “hyung” matters. To call Dan hyung would mean accepting him not as ritual but as family. It would mean that fighting is no longer about proving oneself against ghosts but about sharing life with another. To fight as fun is to fight with nothing to prove, no curse to outrun, no insult to erase. It is to enter the ring not for survival, but for joy.

Conclusion – From Loser to Hyung

The arc of Jaekyung’s life can now be seen in its full sweep:

  • Seed: the father’s insult, the mother’s abandonment. He views himself as a loser deep down! Thus we should see this as a self-deception. (chapter 75) He was confronted with reality after the match with Baek Junmin. The manager slapped him, Potato criticized him, the medias portrayed him as reckless! His wealth or his fame could never erase his self-loathing.
  • Growth: the system’s exploitation, the rush to the top.
  • Mask: the rituals of the jinx — sex, milk, perfume, tattoos.
  • Crisis: collapse in Chapter 75 — the 5 losses, insomnia, nightmares, tie, illness.
  • Counterforce: Dan’s presence as tender mirror.
  • Redefinition: fighting as joy, family instead of fresh meat.

In this arc, the wolf is transformed. The boy branded a loser, who built armor out of rituals and clawed his way to titles, now stands before the tender mirror. There, at last, he sees a reflection not of ghosts but of life. (chapter 75) He discovers that strength does not mean enduring forever alone, but allowing oneself to need, to ask, to belong. Besides, having a partner implies that the latter has his back!

The final reversal is simple yet profound. Once, Jaekyung believed survival meant taking: blows, titles, bodies, rituals. Now he begins to see that life means giving and receiving. The wolf’s true victory will not be another belt but another word: hyung.

In that word, everything is reversed. The father’s insult “loser” is silenced. The mother’s abandonment is answered. The system’s exploitation is refused. And the wolf, no longer a cursed emperor, becomes simply a man — fighting not for survival, but for life. And that’s how he can escape the trap from the schemers, for the latter only knows one form of the jinx: sex! Besides,thanks to his loved one, he is able to gain peace of mind. From that moment on, no one can provoke him like in the past. (chapter 36) He can remain indifferent to their “provocations”, as he has long matured emotionally. (chapter 36) He can retaliate differently. With his money and power, he can prove to them, he is no loser!

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: I Love You 💗📞

Introduction The First “I Love You” He Sees

Why isn’t the first champion’s “I love you” spoken, but seen? (chapter 75) – similar to doc Dan’s reaction in the States: (chapter 40) (chapter 53)

At dawn in ch. 75, Jaekyung first sees a vision: Kim Dan bathed in sunlight, turning back as if to wait for him. The image radiates warmth, inclusion, and patience. (chapter 75) It stands not only for Dan, but for something Jaekyung has never allowed himself: a dream, a future. This makes it the direct opposite of his nightmares. (chapter 75) Where his father’s curses bound him to guilt and the past, Dan’s glow opens the possibility of release (chapter 75), a life that points forward rather than backward.

Then he jolts awake. (chapter 75) His eyes open after the dream, and they open to the same light. It’s the opposite of every earlier awakening (chapter 54) —no gasp for air, no clutching his throat (chapter 75), no father’s voice strangling him. This sudden awakening embodies enlightenment. (chapter 75) This is the first time he escapes his inner prison: no strangling, no mockery, no gasping for breath. The sequence is everything: the vision symbolizes true awakening. First comes the dream of the future, then the breath of life.

And what does that light reveal? Not a tidy word, but a re‑ordered world: Dan matters more than winning. (chapter 75) Why? It is because the physical therapist embodies warmth and the present, while the shining championship belt is in reality cold. The Emperor who once fought to silence curses realizes, before he can name it, that the man in that sunlight outranks every belt and roar. (chapter 75)

And here the director’s advice echoes: (chapter 75) On the surface, it sounds like a call for balance. In truth, it is a suggestion to find another meaning for his life. And look at the director’s facial expression, when he is talking to his former student: “ (chapter 75) He is smiling, a sign that the director is enjoying this moment with the “wolf”. He becomes the first person to speak to Jaekyung not about titles, not about survival, but about happiness.

Yet one might wonder: why does Hwang Byungchul not mention Dan directly? It is clear that he has already sensed that both have a deeper relationship than one between a physical therapist and a VIP client. (chapter 70) He knows the athlete from the past. The latter was attached to people and not to places. Why does he speak of “something” rather than “someone”, if he knows? The lesson is not about fixing a new goal or object to chase, but about discovering how to live differently — how to live happily. (chapter 75) The word something points beyond possession. True fulfillment is not about having a purpose but about sharing a path. Secondly, by remaining vague, he respects his former pupil’s privacy. A parent would never try to pry into the relationship of their child. (chapter 65)

This is why the dream immediately answers the advice: (chapter 75) in it, Dan stands not beside the champion but in front of him, waiting. The director spoke of something, but Jaekyung sees someone. Dan becomes the embodiment of a life that could be lived otherwise: a future not chained to victory or guilt, but grounded in companionship, in love.

Yet Jaekyung cannot name it. His reaction trails into ellipses (chapter 75). Even before, he could only mutter to himself this: (chapter 70) The negation indicates denial, but observe that he couldn’t even use a noun. He cannot yet translate this vision into words, because he has never heard “I love you” himself (chapter 39). The only one he heard was diminished to a mistake (chapter 41), and doc Dan claims to have no recollection of it. His father left him with mockery, his mother with resignation, his coach in the past with discipline, the grandmother-figures with burdens (honor, debt, favor). (chapter 74) No one ever taught him how to say I love you. And so, when Dan appears in his dream, it is not the words that free him but the gaze. (chapter 75) Dan’s expression is neutral, non-judgmental, steady — the exact opposite of the father’s disdain (chapter 75) or the mother’s withdrawal. (chapter 73) It does not condemn, it does not demand; it simply waits. The gaze says this: I see you and accept you.

That neutrality is powerful because it creates hope. (chapter 75) For the first time, Jaekyung can imagine stepping toward someone without ridicule or rejection. The dream shows him the path: he doesn’t have to keep running, fighting, or proving — he only has to take a step toward the figure already turned back to include him.

And this is precisely where the director’s wisdom lies. His line (chapter 75) is not prescriptive. He doesn’t dictate what Jaekyung should do, or who he should live for. He gives no ready-made solution, no “perfect answer.” Instead, he hands the responsibility back to him, urging him to search within himself. (chapter 75) The openness is what makes it love — it is respect.

This stands in direct opposition to the grandmother’s stance, who knew exactly how to “treat” doc Dan. (chapter 65) (chapter 65) Halmoni believed she already knew the solution to Dan’s suffering: sacrifice yourself, work hard, pay the debts or make money, endure. She closed off alternatives by imposing her narrative on him. Her love was distorted into certainty. The director, by contrast, recognizes the limit of his role. He has learned (belatedly) that he cannot dictate meaning for someone else. Instead, he tells Jaekyung: (chapter 75) His love is expressed through humility — through not knowing. At the same time, his words and facial expression ooze trust and confidence. (chapter 75) In other words, the director becomes not just a critic of Jaekyung’s path, but his first true encourager. He acknowledges that the boy he once failed to guide has grown into a man capable of guiding himself.

The vision is striking for another reason: it is silent. Dan does not speak in the dream; his gaze offers no command, no reassurance, no demand. It simply waits. The silence is not emptiness but invitation — a space Jaekyung must learn to fill. Yet how can he do so? How can a man who has only ever known curses, discipline, or burdens step closer to someone whose presence asks for words he has never spoken?

This is the paradox that chapter 75 exposes. (chapter 75) The dream reveals that Dan matters more than winning, but it also confronts Jaekyung with his greatest weakness: he does not know how to name what he feels, nor how to reach across that silence. To understand why, we must look back — to the voices that shaped him, and to the words that were withheld.

The Language He Never Learned

The vision of Kim Dan in chapter 75 is powerful not only for what it shows, but for what it withholds: it is silent. Dan does not speak, and yet the silence does not feel empty. His gaze is calm, patient, steady — waiting for Jaekyung to make a move. But this is precisely what paralyzes him. (chapter 75) The silence of the dream is an invitation, a space Jaekyung must fill. Yet what words can he offer? How can he step closer, when his whole life has taught him that love is something either cursed, withdrawn, or conditional?

The truth is that Jaekyung never learned the language of love. He never heard the words “I love you” — not from father, not from mother, not from any adult in his orbit. What he inherited instead were fragments of distorted speech: mockery, resignation, silence, punches or fake admiration. Each left him with a gap where affirmation should have been, forcing him to seek recognition through victories, money, and survival.

The Father’s Curse: Mockery Instead of Affirmation

From his father he learned scorn. The drunken insults — (chapter 73) “You’re a loser”, You’re your mother’s son after all” (chapter 73) did not simply belittle him; they reshaped his very self-image into a curse. To resemble his mother meant weakness, failure, abandonment. He was nothing except “trash” or a “moron”. Each word struck like a blow, leaving Jaekyung gasping in his nightmares, hearing the taunts repeat like an incantation. His father’s language was not the speech of love but of annihilation, convincing him that he was destined to lose, destined to suffocate, destined to be nothing.

This is why victory became his obsession. (chapter 75) Each title, each belt, each triumph was a rebuttal to his father’s words. He was not worthless, not doomed. Yet the irony is cruel: in fighting to silence those curses (chapter 75), he bound himself ever more tightly to them. Winning never brought peace; it only bought him momentary quiet from the voices in his head. This confession from the main lead confirmed my previous interpretations. First, the main lead had been constantly hearing voices in his head. Secondly, the hamster embodies “sound”, but a different kind: true communication linked to honesty and affection. This explicates why after the couch confession (chapter 29), Joo Jaekyung opened up a little to doc Dan! Thus the next morning, he visited the bathroom where doc Dan was! (chapter 30) It was just an excuse to spend more time with his fated partner.

The Mother’s Silence: Love as Need, Not Being

If the father wounded with curses, the mother wounded with silence. (chapter 73) In the father’s recollection, she is shown turned away, holding the child not in tenderness but as a shield against her husband. She does not speak. There is no tap (chapter 74), no “dear,” no “I love you.” In the father’s memory, she used the child as an excuse to distance herself from her spouse. In that moment, Jaekyung is not a son to be cherished but a barrier in an adult quarrel.

Her last words to him before abandoning him (chapter 75) carry the same cold logic. On the surface, they sound like recognition, even encouragement. But their true meaning is dismissal: you no longer need me. For her, love equaled dependency. Once her role as provider was no longer necessary, she withdrew.

Later, with her remarriage, we see her repeat the same pattern. (chapter 74) With her new child, she suddenly has gentle taps, toys, and the affectionate “dear.” But these are not signs of transformation — they are repetitions. Her “love” remains bound to function. This child is valuable because he secures her place, her role, her new family. He is an anchor of stability, not a being affirmed in his own right. According to me, she lives through others.

Here Erich Fromm’s distinction between having and being illuminates her behavior. [For more read the essay “The Art Of Loving”– locked] She cannot love by being present with another; she can only love by having something to hold onto — a husband, a child, a household. For Jaekyung, this meant that his very existence was never affirmed. When he outgrew dependency, he ceased to “count.” He embodied a failure in her life, something she wanted to erase. Under this light, it becomes comprehensible why Kim Dan challenged the champion in the hotel room: (chapter 67) His question is really an appeal for recognition. If Jaekyung answered yes, Dan could interpret it as proof of love, because in his own distorted framework being worried about equals being cared for. But Jaekyung answered with silence. (chapter 67) Not because he felt nothing, but because he lacked the language to connect worry with love. In his conscious mind, conception of care was still bound to usefulness — Dan mattered because he was needed for training, not because he was loved as himself, while deep down, he had already moved beyond this aspect. He was just in denial in this scene,

This silence is therefore not just personal, but inherited. Just as his mother’s withdrawal taught him that once a child stops needing, they stop being loved, Jaekyung reenacts the same absence with Dan. He cannot yet affirm him as more than useful, even though his presence unsettles him precisely because it is more than that. Dan’s question names the void: he asks Jaekyung to translate provision into affection, and Jaekyung cannot. That ellipsis is the echo of a life raised without “I love you”.

The Phone Call: “Who Are You?”

Nothing illustrates this more starkly than the phone call. When Jaekyung reaches out as a teenager, his mother responds: (chapter 74) On one level, she does not recognize his voice. But on a deeper level, her words ring as truth: she does not know her son. She has no idea who he has become, what defines him, what characterizes him beyond money and survival.

And tragically, Jaekyung falls into the same trap. He offers her money (chapter 74), promising to provide for her if she returns home. He unconsciously appeals to the only logic he has ever known: that love equals provision, that affection is secured by usefulness.

But beneath this maternal echo lies another inheritance: the patriarchal mindset of his father. (chapter 73) From him, Jaekyung absorbed the conviction that a man must be the provider, the protector, the one who works and sacrifices while the partner silently follows. This explains why, in his relationship with his mother (chapter 72) and Kim Dan, he instinctively assumed he had to “do it all”: earn, fight, shield, control. (chapter 42) His father’s voice was violent and scornful, but its framework remained lodged in him.

This dynamic also recalls the director’s mother, who devoted herself unconditionally to her son. (chapter 74) She has no name, because she is simply reduced to a role: mother. She offered food and care, but never voiced her own wishes. She silently bore the weight of her choice, just as Jaekyung’s mother once shielded herself with her child instead of speaking. Both figures embody the same pattern: women reduced to roles, never permitted desire. However, there is a huge difference between these two mother figures; the champion’s mother chose to leave, the moment her husband did not meet her expectation. And Jaekyung, internalizing this pattern, grew into a man who could only imagine love as one-sided duty — he provides, the other depends. But now, doc Dan is no longer willing to be treated that way. That’s why he chose to adopt the role of a prostitute after their reunion. (chapter 62) That way, he can still be “free”.

But this exchange also marks a threshold. (chapter 74) The moment Jaekyung begins to discover being with Dan — joy, play, presence, companionship — (chapter 75) the mother’s entire system collapses. He cannot live in both worlds. To live in being means to abandon her for good, because her form of love will never change. Besides, they have long gone separate ways. Thus I see the vision of doc Dan as a future partner, where both characters will walk side by side! This announces the arrival of equity and real communication.

Trash as Metaphor: The Child Discarded

Her abandoned home, strewn with garbage, (chapter 72) becomes the perfect metaphor for her treatment of him. Once she no longer needed him, he was discarded like refuse. Just as trash cannot be reclaimed by sentimental value, she will not be able to reclaim him later through appeals to blood ties or belated need. It is impossible because he has learned — painfully — that true love is not about what you have, but about who you are.

Her tragedy is repetition. The remarriage, the second child, the affectionate taps and “dears” — all of it looks like growth on the surface (chapter 74), but in truth it reveals her imprisonment in the same mindset. She has not changed. She still defines herself by being needed, by having. She lives through others. And Jaekyung, by recognizing this, gains his first real emancipation. That’s why he destroyed the cellphone. (chapter 74) He understood that the words he longed for as a child were never simply withheld — they never existed. Since we saw her back and heard her voice, I don’t think, she truly cut off ties with Joo Jaekyung. Why? It is because she had no intention to change her phone number again. (chapter 74) She expected him to follow her request. I can definitely imagine her trying to reconnect with Joo Jaekyung, the moment he became a celebrity. (chapter 75) Keep in mind that we have these mysterious phone calls: (chapter 37) (chapter 43) (chapter 49)

Park Namwook: I’ll help you

Into this pattern steps Park Namwook, who initially cloaked his ambition in the language of encouragement. (chapter 75) (chapter 75) On the surface, these sound like support. He smiles, his tone is warm, his words echo the vocabulary of friendship. Yet this false promise had lasting consequences: it reinforced a pattern already planted by the champion’s mother. Since childhood, Jaekyung had equated helping with caring (chapter 72), because silence at home had taught him that the only way to hold on to love was to provide, protect, and prove his usefulness. Under Namwook, this belief hardened into a rule: in his world, attachment became synonymous with utility.

This distortion explains much of Jaekyung’s later behavior. If someone claims to love, they must prove it through tangible action. Affection that doesn’t translate into help feels like a lie. Because Heesung mentioned “loving” Dan (chapter 34), Jaekyung assumed later that the actor would have helped doc Dan to hide. (chapter 58) His violent intrusion into the actor’s home was the natural outgrowth of Namwook’s teaching: if love is real, it must show itself as service.

The tragedy is double. First, Namwook’s corrupted version of “help” left Jaekyung vulnerable to exploitation. Second, it blinded him to other languages of love — words, presence, patience — so that when Dan tries to love him differently (chapter 45), Jaekyung struggled to even recognize it. Giving him a gift and expressing gratitude was not “helping the fighter”.

But beneath the illusion lies self-interest. Namwook’s “help” was contingent upon Jaekyung’s usefulness — his talent, his earning power, his ability to bring fame. Just as the mother’s affection was tied to need, and the father’s recognition bound to victory, Namwook’s loyalty was tethered to what Jaekyung could provide. He did not love the man; he loved the champion’s potential, the profit and prestige attached to his fists.

This makes Namwook part of the same lineage of distorted caregivers:

  • Father: curses that turned into chains.
  • Mother: silence disguised as maturity (“you’re grown-up now”).
  • Halmoni (Dan’s): burdens disguised as devotion (debts, sacrifice, favor).
  • Namwook: exploitation disguised as encouragement (“I’ll help you”).

All promised some version of care, but none delivered unconditional love. All instrumentalized him — whether as proof, shield, provider, or weapon.

And here the contrast with the director becomes stark. The director does not say I’ll help you” or “let’s make history together.” He does not tie Jaekyung’s value to his strength and his own ambition. Instead, he says: (chapter 75) There’s a life outside the ring and the spotlight. (chapter 75) He does not attach himself to Jaekyung’s victories but releases him into freedom. His love, belated as it is, is non-possessive. It is because he has learned his “lessons”. He realized that his dream (chapter 72) was quite futile, for at the end, he ended up alone and felt lonely.

At this point, one must ask: why didn’t the director, Hwang Byungchul, say those words either? The answer is not that he feels nothing, but first he fears exposing his vulnerability and emotions. Therefore he yelled and challenged the champion. (chapter 71) Yet, deep down, he was happy that Joo Jaekyung had visited him and even spent the whole day with him. Secondly, for him, too, love has always been expressed through responsibility, advice, and correction rather than direct declaration. When he tells Jaekyung to “look around” and “think hard,” or warns Dan to “ (chapter 70) “stay sharp,” he is not being cold — he is speaking from the only framework of love he knows: respect, knowledge, care, and responsibility, the very dimensions Erich Fromm outlines. He realized too late that he missed Joo Jaekyung very much. His love is embedded in actions and words of guidance, not in sentimental speech. To suddenly say “I love you” would, in his own register, feel shallow and false. He actually embodies the “real parent” IMO, because contrary to all the others adults, he learned from his mistakes. No parent is perfect, but they need to reflect on their words and actions. Learning through experiences is lifelong learning. It stops with death. The director did his best according to the circumstances and tried to correct his wrongdoings. And we can see his influence in the champion’s life. When it comes to doc Dan, he also makes mistakes: (chapter 68) (chapter 69) (chapter 69) And that’s what makes him so human.

In this sense, the director and Jaekyung are alike: both have never learned the language of love as affirmation. They can only circle it through substitution — advice, provision, worry, discipline, help. (chapter 71) Hence doc Dan didn’t resent the champion for his harsh treatment. But unlike the mother, who equated love with possession, Hwang Byungchul has begun to correct himself. He respects Jaekyung’s privacy, he encourages instead of dictating, he models a love that is belated but still real. This opens the possibility that Jaekyung, too, may learn to fill his silences differently — not with dominance or provision, but with genuine presence. He truly embodies the philosophy from Erich Fromm: it is never too late to become happy! Hence he smiled on the rooftop! (chapter 75) No wonder why he asked for doc Dan’s company. (chapter 71) This means that he lives now in the present. It looks like the “old coot” has been tamed by the “gentle hamster or duck”.

The Silence He Must Fill

This is why the vision of Dan is so striking. (chapter 75) Dan does not speak, but his gaze does not condemn or demand. It simply waits. It offers inclusion without conditions, presence without burden. The silence is not a void but an invitation. For the first time, Jaekyung is faced not with curses, not with resignation, not with demands, but with the possibility of acceptance. He just needs to be himself.

And yet, this makes the challenge greater: he must now learn to fill that silence. He cannot rely on victory, or money, or survival. He must discover a language that has never been spoken to him: the language of I love you.

The Language Kim Dan Cannot Speak

If Jaekyung’s tragedy is that he never learned to say I love you, he also needs to love himself first. He can not imagine how someone could ever say to him: “I love you”. This explicates why the athlete asked the doctor if he remembered that night in the States. (chapter 41) He didn’t know how to judge such a confession. Hence these words were reduced to a mistake! (chapter 41) To conclude, he couldn’t accept the confession, because he doesn’t love himself. He has never heard I love you in his childhood. Thus I believe that Dan’s tragedy is the mirror opposite: he did hear it once (chapter 19), and has been unable to say it since.

Dan already whispered the words — (chapter 39) — but it was under the haze of the drug. His instincts and body spoke first, bypassing the rational mind that usually silences him. In that moment, the words were pure, perhaps the most honest thing he has ever said. And yet, their context corrupted them. Spoken in a fog, they became easy to erase. Later, when Jaekyung pressed him about that night (chapter 41), Dan claimed he didn’t remember. But is it true? In doing so, he turned his own confession into what Jaekyung dismissed as “a mistake.” The first I love you in Jinx was thus swallowed twice: once by chemicals, and once by shame and fear. The physical therapist associates “I love you” with abandonment and rejection.

Why such negative emotions? My hypothesis is that for Dan, I love you does not mean reassurance or joy, rather it is strongly linked to the destruction of a world. It carries the echo of absence, of people who once said those words but then vanished. It is bound to guilt, because the boy left behind always wonders if he could have noticed the signs, if he could have done something. To confess love, for him, is to summon catastrophe, to risk repeating the ultimate loss. Better to stay silent than to relive that moment.

My reading is that Dan’s parents died suddenly, perhaps by suicide, and with them he lost not only family but also home. (chapter 65) We know he once had toys (teddy bear,car) (chapter 21) , little signs of comfort that suggest he grew up in relative security, even if his parents were often absent for work. For me, his childhood was not defined only by poverty but by rupture: love was present, then violently cut short. To a child, such a disappearance feels like betrayal, even if it was no one’s fault. Dan would have been left with a terrible contradiction — that “I love you” was true, and yet those who said it abandoned him forever.

He never had the chance to answer back. (chapter 19) His silence froze into permanence, leaving him with the haunting sense that love was unfinished, that his part of the dialogue was missing. This explains his adult paralysis. To say “I love you” now is not just about risking loss; it is about confronting the memory of the reply he never gave. In this way, the words carry a double weight — love as death, and love as guilt.

Chapter 66 dramatizes this curse in full force. In his sleep, Dan clings to Jaekyung’s shirt (chapter 66), whispers through tears (chapter 66) and then breaks down with (chapter 66) These are not declarations of love, but desperate substitutes — fragments of the words he could never utter in childhood. They expose the precise gap: he never managed to say back what had once been said to him. He had lost his parents too soon. Instead of “I love you too,” what emerges is fear of abandonment. Instead of reciprocity, there is only pleading. His grip on Jaekyung’s shirt is the physical translation of what he could not verbalize: the child’s attempt to hold onto someone who is already vanishing. (chapter 66) He regrets his passivity and silence. He has not been able to mourn them.

This is why he associates love with death. The words became for him not a gift, but a curse: a death sentence, a debt he could never repay. To say I love you would be to invite catastrophe, to repeat the moment of unbearable loss, as loving means missing. His survival mechanism was silence. He chose to endure, to repay debts, to serve others, to substitute actions for words.

Here another distinction is crucial: the difference between quantity of time and quality of time. In Germany, working mothers were long stigmatized as “Rabenmutter” (raven mothers), accused of selfishly neglecting their children if they pursued careers. Yet modern research has shown that a fulfilled, working mother often gives more genuine love than a depressed housewife who sacrifices everything. What matters is not constant presence but authentic connection.

Dan’s grandmother never understood this. She assumed that because she spent all her time with him (chapter 65), the boy had not developed such a deep attachment to his parents. Thus she imagined, she could erase their absence. She conflated sacrifice with love, debt with affection. Yet what he received from her was not the warmth of a parent, but the burden of endurance. She patted (chapter 57) and caressed him with her hand, but the kiss in chapter 44 reveals something different: (chapter 44) Dan once received love of a different kind — playful and tender. A kiss cannot have come from the grandmother, who expressed affection only in gestures of care, never of intimacy. That kiss belongs to his mother.

That’s why my theory is that Dan’s suffering is not rooted in never having been loved, but in being too much loved — and then losing it. He tasted true love as a child, only to have it ripped away. The grandmother, in her endless presence, could not replace it. Quantity could not make up for quality. The boy grew up knowing exactly what love felt like — and therefore knowing exactly what he had lost.

This is why Mingwa draws both boys with phones as children. (chapter 74) Each is tied to a parent’s voice. For Jaekyung, the mother’s words amounted to rejection and withdrawal: “You’re grown up, I don’t need you.” For Dan, the unseen parent almost certainly said the opposite: (chapter 19) “I love you.” But because death or disappearance followed, those words became unbearable. One parent wounds by refusing to speak, the other by speaking for the last time. This explicates his hesitation in the penthouse: (chapter 45) Both strands converge in the present: Jaekyung cannot hear love, Dan cannot voice it. Both are cursed.

If his mother’s last words were “I love you” tied to death and guilt, then money, gifts, and even friendship all became tainted for Dan:

  • Never saved money. Because deep down, money symbolized the burden that crushed his parents. To him, money is linked with guilt and loss, not freedom. Why save what only brings ruin? Every coin tucked away echoes the debts that swallowed his family.
  • Not interested in friends. Friendships mean attachment, and attachment means risk of loss. If “I love you” from his mother ended in abandonment, then investing emotionally in others would feel too dangerous. Better to stay isolated, to keep the pain at bay. Besides, he experienced bullying, reinforcing his isolation.
  • Accepted grandmother’s passivity. Her silence mirrored his own coping strategy: if you don’t hope, you can’t be hurt. He didn’t rebel because her inertia fit his trauma — a life stripped of dreams is safer than a dream that can collapse. At the same time, it explains why he attached himself to her, did everything for her… it is because he knows what love is. (chapter 65)
  • Couldn’t accept presents. Because gifts symbolize care and generosity (chapter 31)— which he associates with unbearable debt. His mother’s final “gift” of love was one he could never repay. Any present risks reopening that wound: “What if I can’t repay this? What if I lose them too?”

Even his hesitation in love reflects this same scar. To confess is to risk repeating the curse: to say I love you is to say I miss you, to pre-empt the loss he believes must inevitably follow attachment. That is why his every gesture translates into repayment rather than confession: paying debts, working endless jobs, offering loyalty. For Dan, love must always be balanced, or else it feels like a dangerous imbalance that the universe will punish.

This is why his whispered confession was both utterly true and utterly tragic. (chapter 39) It broke free of his usual silence, but only in a context that allowed it to be denied, laughed off, reduced to error. The boy who once heard I love you as the final word of life has never dared to speak it again with full consciousness. For him, the words are not magical yet. They are still poisoned.

The End Of The Curse

But after hearing Jaekyung’s tragic story, he must have realized that they share the same fate: both grew up without parents, both were robbed of a proper childhood. One was abandoned, the other bereaved. Both learned to survive through silence.

This is why the dream in chapter 75 matters so deeply. (chapter 75) In the dream, Dan does not speak. He simply turns back, bathed in sunlight, as if to wait. That single gesture contains everything Jaekyung has been starved of: inclusion, patience, recognition. It stands in absolute contrast to the voice of his father, who at dawn once spat the cruelest curse a child can hear: (chapter 73) You are not special wounded Jaekyung more deeply than fists ever could. It condemned him to a life of proof, to an endless treadmill of victories meant to silence that voice. But here, in this vision, the curse is answered without words. For Dan to wait for him, to turn his face toward him, is to say what no one else ever did: you matter. You are precious. You are worth waiting for. In fairy-tale terms, the jinx is not lifted by triumph in battle, but by recognition — by being seen. (chapter 75) He doesn’t need to prove his worth or his strength. He doesn’t need to do anything, he just needs to look at doc Dan! Through the gaze, they both express that they are valuable.

The physical therapist’s vision with Shin Okja (ch. 47) throws this into sharper relief. There, Dan imagined taking her on a trip after the hospital, walking side by side, giving her what she never had: rest, companionship. The problem is that this image was still mixed with repayment, nevertheless doc Dan was gradually realizing that spending time together was important. This vision displays the importance of walking together. When Jaekyung dreams of Dan waiting in the sunlight, (chapter 75) it is the same metaphor renewed. Dan has replaced the grandmother in this vision — he has become the one who walks ahead yet turns back, including him in the journey. The implication is clear: Jaekyung no longer has to march forward alone. The future he never dared to imagine now opens as a shared path.

The structure itself echoes the fairy-tale pattern. I have already made connection between the Korean Manhwa and Sleeping Beauty , Belle and The Beast, and finally The Little Mermaid. In Sleeping Beauty, the kingdom lies trapped in silence until a kiss awakens not only the girl but the world. In The Little Mermaid, dawn means death because her love remains unspoken. In Beauty and the Beast, the curse is shattered only when the words “I love you” are spoken — not as possession but as recognition. Mingwa draws from this reservoir of cultural memory. Jaekyung’s dream is a kind of spell: silence redefined, from abandonment into hope. Where once silence meant rejection — the mother who turned her back, the father whose silence was mockery, the empty nights of waiting — now it becomes a promise: Dan will not walk away. He waits, silently, until Jaekyung steps forward. (chapter 75)

Notice the timing. When Jaekyung jolts awake, (chapter 75) the room is still dark. Yet in a previous chapter, we heard birds singing at dawn (chapter 74) — the quiet sign that the sun is about to rise. Dawn is not just a natural detail in Jinx; it is a symbolic hinge. It is the moment when night meets day, when moon and sun overlap, when endings bleed into beginnings. In myth and fairy tale, dawn often marks metamorphosis: the Little Mermaid turns to foam, the enchanted sleepers awaken, the beast becomes a prince. For Jaekyung, too, dawn is the threshold. His father cursed him at dawn (chapter 73), stripping him of worth, tying the rising sun to shame. But in this new dawn, another voice will have to intervene. Only Dan can replace the curse with a blessing. Only “I love you” can undo “you are not special.” And if it is not “I love You”, then it could be a kiss, the symbol of “affection”.

Thus both men stand before a silence heavy with history. For Jaekyung, silence meant abandonment; for Dan, silence meant survival. And yet in the dream, silence shifts its meaning. It becomes the waiting space in which words can finally emerge. (chapter 75) Dan’s figure in the sunlight does not reproach, does not demand. It simply invites. The silence of the dream is not the silence of loss but the silence that precedes a confession.

This is why the fairy-tale logic is so essential. In every story, the curse holds until someone dares to speak or act from love. In Jaekyung’s case, brute force has failed. No title, no victory, no belt has lifted the weight of his father’s curse. In Dan’s case, endurance has failed. No debt repaid, no day survived, no burden carried has erased the wound of his parents’ disappearance. The spell will not break by repetition of the old methods. It will break only when Dan speaks the words he most fears: I love you.

When that happens, the dawn scene will finally be complete. The birds already sing. The light already glimmers. The dream has already shown the way. What remains is for Dan’s voice to enter the silence, to transform waiting into presence, vision into reality. When those words are spoken — not poisoned by guilt, not dismissed as a mistake, but confessed freely — Jaekyung will no longer be his father’s son. He will be someone else’s beloved. The jinx will shatter (chapter 75), not with noise but with a whisper while looking at each other.

And if the curse is broken, the athlete no longer needs to fight and accept the “invitation” from the CEO and the manager. This is where Mingwa’s subtle use of sound and silence becomes crucial.

Think back to the restaurant in chapter 69, (chapter 69) when Park Namwook leaned across the table and whispered to the champion about his slipping rank, his lost title, his third place. The setting is dim, the words hushed, the tone heavy with shadow. That whisper was not meant to soothe — it was meant to undermine. Namwook’s closeness is false intimacy: a confidentiality designed to manipulate, to remind Jaekyung of his dependence, to keep him chained to the cycle of fighting. The whisper here is the voice of fear, lack, and scarcity.

Now contrast this with the whisper we anticipate from Dan. His silence in the dream (chapter 75) is not oppressive like Namwook’s — it is open, steady, waiting to be filled. When Dan eventually breaks it with an “I love you,” the whisper will not chain Jaekyung to debt or failure, but free him from the curse. Both Namwook and Dan occupy positions of proximity, both bend close to him in moments of vulnerability — but one weaponizes the whisper, the other redeems it.

This brings us back to my point about quantity versus quality. Namwook has been by Jaekyung’s side for years. (chapter 75) He was always there — arranging his matches, covering his problems, whispering about his “future.” Yet the quality of his presence was hollow. He never once guided Jaekyung beyond his father’s curse, never helped him imagine a life beyond titles. Thus he never discovered that the “monster” was suffering from insomnia. (chapter 75) His companionship was measured in duration, not depth.

By contrast, Dan has been present for only a fraction of that time (4 months). Yet in those brief encounters, he has done what Namwook never could: he has listened, waited, cared. He has offered no manipulation, no bargain, no shadowed whisper — only a quiet inclusion (chapter 41), an invitation to walk together. Namwook’s long presence embodies the trap of quantity without substance. Dan’s brief but luminous presence reveals the power of quality: the kind of attention that transforms.

In fairy tales, this contrast is often dramatized as the distinction between the false helper and the true helper. The false helper stays close, makes promises (The prince in The Little Mermaid), whispers encouragement, but secretly feeds on the hero’s struggle. The true helper might appear suddenly, even briefly, but offers the one thing that matters: the key to breaking the spell.

And that is exactly what chapter 75 foreshadows. The false whispers of Namwook will fade into irrelevance, while the true whisper — Dan’s future confession of love — will carry the power to break Jaekyung’s curse once and for all.

The breaking of the curse will not only free Jaekyung from his father’s voice — it will also free him from the tyranny of time. (chapter 29) Under the curse, his whole life has been a frantic race: prove himself, fight again, silence the noise in his head. (chapter 75) Namwook’s whispers, too, keep him chained to that rhythm of urgency — rankings, titles, deadlines. But once Dan’s whisper replaces Namwook’s, time itself shifts. The future is no longer a debt to repay but a horizon to approach slowly, hand in hand.

That change means he can finally rest. And when one rests, the present opens up. The little things, so long ignored, become sources of joy. This is exactly what we glimpsed in chapter 27: the rare day off. For once, Jaekyung did not fight, did not perform. He smiled (chapter 27), joked (chapter 27), even rediscovered his love for swimming. Water, his true element, was reclaimed as play rather than punishment. (chapter 27) That single day was a seed — a foreshadowing of what life might look like once the curse is broken for good.

In this sense, the breaking of the jinx is not just about escaping the past; it is about re-entering the present. True happiness will not come from another belt or victory, but from the ability to enjoy simple, shared moments: jokes by the pool, laughter, warmth, rest. (chapter 75) But there’s a difference to the past. The vision of Kim Dan is strongly intertwined with nature, we are here seeing sunlight and not the light from cameras! (chapter 53) What did the director tell the star? The latter should look at his surroundings: the ocean, the sky, the trees… (chapter 75) This means that Joo Jaekyung is on his way to discover nature and as such animals! So far, he hasn’t paid too much attention to Boksoon and her puppies. And now, you comprehend my illustration for the essay. The champion is on his way to discover a whole new world. Doc Dan embodies nature: the sun, the trees, the sky. (chapter 75) Nature is the symbol of life. I LOVE YOU, LIFE!

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: After All, Before It’s Too Late 🕚 📞

My avid readers might have been wondering why I haven’t released any new analysis yet. The reason is simple. I am back at school, and preparing lessons for my students had to come first. But when episode 74 was released, one detail immediately caught my attention. It was small, almost easy to overlook, yet the more I thought about it, the more it seemed to hold the key to understanding not only this chapter, but Joo Jaekyung’s entire story. 😮

So let me turn the question over to you. What is the common denominator between these three panels?

(chapter 73) (chapter 74) (chapter 74) What do they share? You might already have noticed it. At first glance, the answer seems obvious: each sentence turns around the word after. But if we pay closer attention, it is not just after that repeats, but after all. And here, the “all” quietly carries the weight of everything. A slight shift, but one that feels significant. But why this expression, and why here? Why does it resurface precisely in the context of Jaekyung’s family and past?

At first glance, after is nothing more than a temporal marker, a word of sequence. But in these sentences it feels heavier, almost final. It does not look forward — it looks backward. In other words, it doesn’t open a path; it shuts a door. And in episode 74 especially, it echoes like a refrain that has been defining the champion’s life. His world has always been framed in terms of after all. And this immediately raises another question: why did these people, so different in role and attitude, all use this idiom when addressing or describing the young champion?

But then—observe the contrast. When Joo Jaekyung embraced his fated partner, the words that rose within him were not about “after” but about “before.” (chapter 70) For the first time, the flow of time shifted. Besides, no explanation, no certainty—just an admission that something happened beyond his planning or reasoning. Where the earlier lines spoke with closure, this one arrived without a verdict. But what does this “confession” signify for the athlete now?

This is the mystery I want to unravel. What does “after all” truly embody in his life? Why has it shaped him so deeply, and why is the “before” so revolutionary when it finally appears? To answer these questions, I will proceed step by step: first examining the parents’ words, and finally the director’s cold repetition in episode 74. From there, I will turn to the symbolic role of the phone and its destruction, before concluding with the comparison between the manager and the grandmother—two figures who, each in their own way, perpetuate or challenge the cycle of “after.” And at the very end, I will return to the sentence that changes everything: (chapter 70)

The Parents’ After All

Joo Jaewoong’s Verdict

The first “after all” comes from the father: (ch. 73) At first glance, this might sound like a simple insult, a way to degrade the boy by comparing him to the woman who abandoned him. Yes, I wrote “him” and not them on purpose. Joo Jaewoong brought her up in direct response to his son, because the teenager had voiced his first wish in front of his “legal guardian”: (chapter 73) He was announcing his desire to leave this place, as if he wanted to abandon his father. Nevertheless, he just said it out of anger and frustration. Yet, those words pierced Joo Jaewoong, for they reminded him of his wife’s betrayal. Unable to face his own failures, he retaliated by thrusting her image back onto the boy. (chapter 73)

The staging is crucial. Father and son stand facing each other, (chapter 73) locked in confrontation, while in the past, the woman had already shown her back — a gesture of refusal that foreshadowed her desertion. She had withdrawn in silence; the man, however, lashed out in noise. Both abandon, but in different registers: hers in silence and absence, his in noise and abuse. But the father’s gaze was selective. (chapter 73) While he saw a mother holding a boy, he overlooked that the protagonist was actually clinching onto his own mother, who had already distanced herself from the child. In other words, he mistook rejection for embrace. What he perceived as proof of her influence was in fact the trace of her withdrawal.

Thus the father’s “after all” is more than a mere insult. It is an erasure. By shifting all blame to the absent mother, he buried his own wrongdoings. The bruises, the insults, the nights of terror (chapter 73) — all were rewritten into a story where the woman was the sole traitor, and the child nothing more than her extension. In this way, the boy was denied recognition as a victim in his own right. He had been abandoned too. He had been abused either. He became instead a mirror in which his father projects the wound of being left behind.

The tragedy is that this was Jaekyung’s first attempt at self-assertion in front of his father, his first voiced wish as a child. (chapter 73) And yet it was met not with listening and understanding, but with condemnation and mockery! (chapter 73) Why? It is because the father didn’t trust him, as he didn’t trust himself either! Because the father attacked him verbally, the boy replied in kind — escalating words he would later regret. (chapter 73) The cycle of reproach was sealed. From that moment on, he understood the danger and the destructive weight of words. (chapter 73) To speak was to wound, to be wounded in return. Besides, the boy could never speak of this truth. He carried the memory of that last conversation in silence, crushed by the belief that he bore guilt for his father’s death. Shame and responsibility bound his tongue. That is how words, once used against him as weapons, became impossible for him to wield in his own defense. However, this was only the beginning of his withdrawal into silence. His fists would become his language, his body the only safe instrument of reply.

In the end, the father was betrayed — not only by his wife, but by himself. (chapter 73) For in his world, there was no place for we, no place for a family. By reducing every bond to reproach and violence, he erased the very possibility of belonging. His after all thus becomes the verdict on his own life: a man left alone, responsible for his own misery. He complained the absence of gratitude from his son, while he had done nothing for him. (chapter 73) The betrayal he lamented was nothing more than the logical outcome of his own principle. There had never been a we — only a man clinging to his pride, a woman turning her back, and a child caught in between. His after all (chapter 73) exposes this rupture: instead of binding father and son, it isolates them, placing Jaekyung outside of any shared identity. By calling him “your mother’s son”, he does not recognize the boy as his own. The word becomes a substitute for “we,” a marker of distance rather than union. He also denies the very identity of his son: the boy is reduced to a reflection of the mother, and nothing more. In this moment, the child is stripped of individuality, framed only as an echo of the parent who had already left. For years afterward, this wound silenced him — until much later, when a reversal finally emerged. When Jaekyung embraced his fated partner, the words that rose within him began not with after all but with before I (chapter 70). Only then did he speak again as a person in his own right, expressing a wish unshaped by the verdicts of adults or the weight of guardianship. Thus he expressed his thoughts and emotions through the body.

The Mother’s Excuse

And it is precisely here that the mother enters the stage. If the father used after all to erase his own guilt and deny the possibility of togetherness, the mother confirms that distance with a final gesture (chapter 74) — not by facing her son, but by cutting him off, hiding behind a phone call and a single merciless click. (chapter 74)

The scene is loaded with irony. (chapter 74) In the past, the boy had dialed her number from the same public booth (chapter 72), clinging to the hope that she might answer one day. Eventually, those attempts ceased — but not the attachment. What remained was the number itself, saved under “Mom” on his phone (chapter 74) Here, he was old and rich enough to buy his own cellphone. The phone number was no longer a channel of communication, only a relic: a fragile thread he could not sever, because the fact that she never changed her number sustained the illusion that reunion was still possible. That dormant hope was shattered only when she finally picked up — not out of recognition, but by mistake, assuming the unfamiliar call must be important. (chapter 74) And so, after years of silence, his voice reached her at last.

What followed crushed him. She did not yell like the father; instead, she cloaked her rejection in polite detachment: (chapter 74) repeating “please” twice — not out of kindness, but because he had become a source of threat to her new life. (chapter 74) Her words, “please never call me again,” sealed the door he had long believed ajar.

What once seemed like a lifeline is revealed as evidence of her selfishness and cowardice (something I had already outlined before in The Loser’s  Mother: Fragments of a Mother), and the unchanged number, which kept him hoping, now exposes her duplicity. This is why remembering his past will not only free the champion, but also help him to move on. At the same time, it also set in motions a quiet karmic reckoning for the “mother,” whose very act of leaving the number unchanged betrays her. Interesting is that Joo Jaekyung is exactly like his mother: he has not changed his damaged cellphone and number either!! (chapter 66)

Her words presented abandonment as if it were a mutual choice (chapter 74), an agreement between equals. Yet, nothing could be further from the truth: the child had no choice, no power. Worse still, she used his own earlier words against him — the part-time jobs, the savings he had scraped together in order to welcome her back. Since he had money, he could keep living on his own. What for him had been a desperate declaration of love, for her became justification to let go: he was, in her eyes, already independent, already “grown-up.” (chapter 74) Only then comes her final blow: “After all, you’re all grown up now.” The position of after all here is crucial. (chapter 73) Unlike the father, who spat it at the end of his sentence as a weapon, the mother puts it first, as if it were the very foundation of her reasoning. Placed at the front, it functions like a gatekeeper — a barrier the son cannot pass through, because everything that matters has already happened before him.

In other words, she uses time itself as her excuse. (chapter 74) By saying after all, she makes his age and the passing years the justification for her betrayal. She turns maturity — the result of neglect and abandonment — into a pretext to abandon him further. In her mouth, time is not a healer but an alibi. For him, however, time is the enemy. Every night of waiting, every unanswered call accumulates into a debt that cannot be repaid. This is why, years later, Joo Jaekyung has been racing against time — as if by moving fast enough, by piling victory upon victory, he could undo the stillness of those years when nothing came back to him. His obsession with routine, with never stopping, mirrors the silent cruelty of her after all: if she made time the reason to let go, he would make time the proof that he never let go.

Here, the phrase does not simply refer to his age. All encompasses the totality of what she has built without him: her remarriage, her new family (her second child whom she calls “dear”), her wealth, (chapter 74) her present comfort. He stands after all of this — chronologically, emotionally, socially. In her reordered life, the child who once clung to her is relegated to the back of the line, behind every new bond she has chosen to recognize.

And yet, before uttering after all, she cloaks her rejection in seemingly gentle words: “Please understand… let’s just go our separate ways.” (chapter 74) At first glance, the sentence suggests civility, as if both parties had been walking the same road until now. But this is the deception. In truth, she had abandoned him long ago. This “family” (“our”) only existed in the boy’s mind, a dream born from her lies. For the mother, this “family” was already dismantled and replaced; for him, it was the one thing keeping hope alive. By phrasing it this way, she rewrites history, disguising her betrayal as a fresh, mutual decision rather than an old wound that never healed. The implication is that nothing was broken before — that only now, as adults, they might choose to part.

In doing so, she not only denies the rupture of the past, she also erases the promise that once tethered him to her. Why else would he plead, (chapter 74) unless she had once suggested that possibility? His words reveal that he had been clinging to a seed she planted long ago, a future she quietly abandoned while building a new life elsewhere. And what was that seed? Not just her vague suggestion that “once they have money”, or (chapter 72) “the father no longer represents a menace to her” but the very fact that she gave him her phone number. To a child, that number was more than digits on a page — it was proof of connection, a lifeline, an assurance that she could be reached, that she might one day answer.

But in reality, the number was a cruel illusion. She never changed it, which prolonged the fantasy that she still cared, that reunion was only a call away. Yet when the call was finally answered, it revealed not hope but finality. The “click” of her rejection was as violent as any blow from his father — the sound of a door closing forever.

Thus, her rejection is doubly violent: it crushes his final hope, that’s why the boy cried for the last time. (chapter 74) Furthermore, it gaslights him into believing that the abandonment never occurred — that the break is only beginning now. (chapter 74) The repeated please underlines her fear: he is not a son to welcome back, but a threat to the fragile world she has constructed without him. She has a lot to lose!

The irony (chapter 73) (chapter 74) is merciless: in just three letters, all hides the immensity of his suffering — (chapter 72) neglect, starvation, abuse, loneliness, betrayal — and yet the parents invoke it not to acknowledge his pain, but to hide their wrongdoings (justify their betrayal) and as such their failure! By placing after all at the front of her sentence, (chapter 74) the mother tries to turn the page unilaterally, as though this single phrase could close the chapter for good. It is not dialogue but dismissal, a way of shutting down the past before her son can reopen it. In other words, it’s a verdict too disguised as an excuse!

Placed at the end of the father’s sentence (chapter 73), after all erupted in the heat of reproach — spontaneous, yes, but no less destructive. It was triggered by his wounds, by the memory of betrayal he could not bear. Yet even in its impulsiveness, it carried no apology, no trace of self-reflection. Like the mother, he used the phrase as a verdict, not an opening — a way to wound, not to reconcile.

By contrast, the mother’s after all sits at the beginning of her sentence, cloaked in calm reasoning, stripped of any trace of spontaneity. Where the father lashed out, she closes off. Joo Jaekyung is now trapped between these two “after all”: one erupting in rage, the other draped in reason. Together they form a prison of words where apology has no place and the child’s voice is nowhere to be found. No wonder why the celebrity has never apologized to doc Dan in the end. At the same time, it explains why after this phone call, Joo Jaekyung had nothing to “lose”. The adults had destroyed the child’s soul and heart.

For Joo Jaekyung, there is no way back from this sentence. With ‘after all, you’re all grown-up now,’ his mother denies him the right to still be a child in need of care. ”After all”, he can also not deny his ties to her. His origins and even time itself become his enemies — he can never rewind, never reclaim the place of the baby who once clung to her. Her words brand him as someone beyond help, beyond nurture, beyond belonging. What she frames as maturity is, in fact, abandonment dressed as inevitability. The problem is that she is still alive. Unlike the father (dead) or the director (dying), she cannot escape judgment — not from her son, nor from others. By keeping the same phone number for years, she left behind proof of her continued existence. She could have fetched the boy at any moment, but she never did. Her responsibility doesn’t end simply because she decided to draw a line. (Chapter 74) Motherhood is not dissolved by a polite “please” or by a remarriage. She cannot erase this fact, however much she hides behind a new family or a change of circumstances. In this sense, the father’s words return as a curse for her: the truth of origin cannot be undone. The author is already implying this notion through narrative details.

The story itself shows us how enduring such responsibility is. (chapter 74) When the boy once caused trouble, the police looked for Joo Jaekyung’s guardian. In the cutthroat town, they reached out to Hwang Byungchul — not because he was legally responsible, but because everyone knew the boy was close to him (“we”). Guardianship, then, is never erased by silence. Even if you abandon the child, others will still hold you accountable.

And here lies the deeper irony: once Joo Jaekyung left for Seoul, he knew no one there. (chapter 74) In a city of anonymity, hearsay cannot replace documents. She left a paper trail — a legal identity that binds them together. Should the champion cause trouble in Seoul, or even become the victim of a crime, the police would have to turn to his legal guardian. And that can only be her.

The narrative already dramatizes this irony through the arcade incident (chapter 26). Oh Daehyun mentions that the young fighter broke the punching machine so many times he was blacklisted. Such destruction could easily have brought police intervention — and if it had, they would have been forced to search for his legal guardian. That guardian is none other than the mother who abandoned him and her new family. In other words, her erasure was never complete: every act of the boy risked pulling her shadow back into the open. Furthermore, this is what Kim Changmin revealed to his friend and colleague: (chapter 26) But Joo Jaekyung had long discovered sports and MMA, when he arrived in Seoul and met Park Namwook for the first time. (chapter 74) He had left his hometown because of the director’s suggestion.

Chapter 74 exposes the cracks in the narrative first built in episode 26. Back then, Kim Changmin and Oh Daehyun repeated what they had heard: that Joo Jaekyung had once been a troublemaker, a rich, spoiled brat who smashed arcade machines and got into fights — but that in the end, he was “saved” by sports, and especially by MMA and MFC. That’s why he didn’t recognize himself in the introduction: (chapter 26) This story clearly originates with Park Namwook, the manager, who positioned himself and the sport as Jaekyung’s saviors.

But episode 74 reveals the reality behind the myth. The boy wasn’t saved by MFC, nor by Namwook. It was the director, Hwang Byungchul, who intervened, who sent him to Seoul, (chapter 74) who redirected him before he was swallowed by the wrong path. The discrepancy between these accounts exposes more than just the manager’s manipulation: it points to the shadow of another intervention. How could he afford to destroy machine after machine without consequence? The only plausible answer is the “mother” and her new family, whose money and silence allowed him to pass as the “self-made” Emperor while erasing their own responsibility from the tale. And now, you comprehend why The Emperor was made voiceless. [For more read The Night-Cursed Emperor] Both MFC and the mother had a vested interest in silencing his true origins. For MFC, the myth of the “self-made champion” polished their image, free from any stain of thuggery — no whispers of money laundering, drugs, illegal gambling, or rigged games. For the mother, erasing the child meant erasing her own betrayal. The champion’s past was not only a personal wound but also a liability for others — a truth that had to be buried so that the façade of the Emperor could stand unchallenged. His silence, then, was never a choice; it was imposed, enforced by all those who profited from keeping his story untold. Should he ever speak up, he would expose not only the mother, but also MFC!

Because of episode 74, I came to resent the mother even more than before. She not only abandoned him twice, but toyed with his feelings. By answering once, she allowed his hope to flare up — only to extinguish it immediately. The phone that symbolized connection became the very tool of execution, its click as violent as the father’s punch. And just like her husband, she deceives herself. She imagines she can cut off ties completely with a single sentence, but until her death she remains legally and symbolically his mother.

The two after alls function like iron bars: one forged in the father’s rage, the other in the mother’s reason. Together, they create what you called a prison of words — a place where the boy cannot speak, cannot be heard, cannot be recognized. From that moment, he is not only abandoned but linguistically erased. His origins are denied, his childhood revoked, his future disowned.

And so, after the phone call, it is no wonder that Joo Jaekyung believed he had nothing left to lose. The boy’s heart had already been gutted; the rest of his path was merely survival. If he “went the wrong way,” it was because the adults had already led him there, sealing off every other route. They had destroyed the child before the teenager even had a chance to build himself.

This prepares the ground for the transition to the director: if his parents’ after alls built the prison, then Hwang Byungchul is the figure who becomes the witness of that imprisonment. Unlike them, he doesn’t openly wound with words — but his silence, his blindness, and his refusal to protect the boy make him complicit. He becomes the guard outside the prison walls.

The Director’s After Everything

When Hwang Byungchul says (chapter 74), the breadth of everything seems, on the surface, to acknowledge the sheer weight of Joo Jaekyung’s suffering. The word is heavy, expansive, suggesting years of accumulated pain, betrayal, and neglect. Yet, paradoxically, this very expansiveness is also a way of avoiding precision. By collapsing starvation, countless humiliations, abandonments, and traumas into a vague everything, the director sidesteps naming the concrete betrayals he himself witnessed. His silence here is telling: he cannot bring himself to articulate the parents’ cruelty, nor his own passivity in letting it happen. In front of the doctor, he had admitted himself that he had not raised him: (chapter 74) For doc Dan who embodies the present, such a statement can only become the ultimate truth: the star had been an orphan like him.

Moreover, his next word probably — betrays another form of distance. If he truly knew how the boy felt, if he had ever asked or listened, there would be no need for such hedging. Probably admits that he never entered the boy’s inner world, never gave him the space to voice his despair. It is the language of a bystander, not of a guardian. In fact, this hesitation exposes his complicity: Joo Jaekyung “went down the wrong path” not only because of the parents’ abandonment, but also because the one adult who remained nearby chose observation over intervention. (chapter 74) At the moment when Joo Jaekyung shattered the cellphone, Hwang Byungchul was not by his side but standing at a distance, directly in front of him. This means he must have seen the boy’s face — the tears, (chapter 74) the trembling hands, the rage that barely concealed heartbreak. He did not need to overhear the mother’s words; the child’s body language told the story with brutal clarity. (chapter 74) In that instant, the director could have stepped closer, offered consolation, or simply acknowledged the wound he was witnessing. Instead, he kept his distance, both physically and emotionally. He refused to assume a role as legal guardian.

The same pattern repeats at the father’s funeral. (chapter 74) Once again, the director was there — but his presence was mute. He placed a hand on the boy’s shoulder, yet he never lent him an ear. He never invited the boy to speak, never created a space where grief, anger, or longing could be put into words. In other words, he was present in body but absent in voice and heart. Thus the director’s pat was a gesture of pity. It was a substitute for words, a way of saying “poor boy” while protecting himself from deeper involvement. But precisely because he withheld speech and listening, it denied Jaekyung the chance to articulate his own grief. It comforted without connecting.

This silence is not neutral. By withholding words, he deprived Jaekyung of language at the very moment he most needed it. A child learns to process suffering by speaking it into existence and having someone else respond. Denied this, Jaekyung internalized the pain wordlessly — forced to embody it through his fists, through destruction (chapter 74), through fighting. Thus the director’s quietness, his refusal to engage, became a formative wound in itself. He chose the safety of distance over the risk of involvement, and in doing so, left the boy’s cries unanswered.

Thus, the director’s after everything is double-edged: it gestures at recognition, but functions as concealment. He names the boy’s burden while sidestepping his own. What sounds like empathy is, in truth, pity — a way of acknowledging suffering without engaging it. It allows him to speak about Jaekyung’s pain while avoiding both the betrayal he witnessed and the silence he himself maintained. In this sense, after everything is less an opening than a shield: a phrase that distances him from responsibility under the guise of compassion.

And because the boy had no one by his side that night, he concluded he had nothing to lose. Stripped of home, voice, and care, he stood in a void where even those who should have protected him kept their distance. The director’s silence, his refusal to step in or give the boy an ear, reinforced the sense of abandonment. Far from steering him away, this absence of guidance nudged him toward the wrong path. In this way, the man who might have been a safeguard became instead a silent accomplice to the boy’s fall. Hence he put the blame on the main lead. (chapter 74)

Hwang Byungchul was called to the police station in order to correct his past wrongdoing. (chapter 74) He was given a chance to step in, to finally become the guardian he had failed to be on the night of the boy’s deepest collapse. Therefore it is no coincidence that he claims to have raised him, while the readers are well aware of the truth. (chapter 74) Yet the way he handled the moment revealed the full extent of his contradictions.

The director was never one to turn his back on Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 74) He always faced him, (chapter 74) or sometimes stood beside him, kept him in sight. On the surface, this could seem like loyalty, but in truth it was another form of failure. Facing him head-on meant constant confrontation, constant judgment. His presence was physical, but never protective; it was discipline, surveillance, not refuge. He never had his back!!

Instead of offering himself as support, he wielded the parents as weapons. (chapter 74) The father was dragged into memory as a warning: “Do you want to end up like him?” The mother, already gone, was turned into a conditional model: “Would she even want to live with you if she could see you now?” In both cases, the boy was denied his right to grieve. His parents were not mourned, but transformed into instruments of discipline. He was forced to run from one shadow and to chase another, leaving him no space to simply exist. The director maintained the future champion trapped in the chains of the past.

This strategy erased the present. Jaekyung’s worth was always defined against the dead or the vanished, never in who he was here and now. It was never about him!! Happiness, stillness, or pride in the moment were impossible; only punishment and striving remained.

When the director invoked the mother again that night, it exposed his blindness. (chapter 74) For him, she was a symbol — fuel for perseverance, as he was projecting his own mother onto the boy’s! For the teenager, the mother was the deepest wound. By naming her, the director imagined he was motivating; in reality, he was tearing it open once more. But how could Jaekyung reveal the truth — that his own mother had rejected him, not just once, but twice? To admit this would have been to confess that the hope she dangled before him, the dream of reunion, had been nothing but a cruel game. His silence was not pride but a shield, for voicing it would mean exposing that even his mother’s love had been counterfeit. (chapter 74) Thus his silence was not indifference but defense: he was protecting her name, even when it burned him to do so. In shielding her, he also buried himself.

And the director used this hesitation to his own advantage. This shows that Hwang Byungchuld had no intention to listen. He answered with his fist right away. The punch to the chest crystallized his stance: discipline over empathy, control over dialogue. What he offered was not guidance but force, unwittingly echoing the very violence of the father he condemned. (chapter 74) That is how another pattern emerges: every exchange the boy endured was never true conversation, but always structured as an argument or a challenge. Even here: (chapter 72) At home, his father turned dialogue into a bet — a contest of strength where affection was absent and only victory mattered. Later, in front of the police station, the director reproduced the same pattern: invoking the mother not to console, but to provoke, to test, to challenge. In both cases, words became weapons. They did not open space for Jaekyung to speak; they cornered him, forcing him either to resist or to submit. This explains why in season 1, the two protagonists had similar interactions.

Thus when the boy lashed out and the director struck him, the failure was complete. He had been given a chance to correct the past — to be a guardian rather than a spectator — but instead he repeated the cycle. His discipline came without empathy, his presence without listening. In the end, he did not save the boy from the wrong path; he helped push him further along it, for MFC is strongly intertwined with crimes.

However, the argument followed by the punch seems to have functioned as a wake-up call for the director as well. (chapter 74) For the first time, he shifted ground and no longer invoked Jaekyung’s parents as warnings; instead, he summoned the memory of his own mother. After everything she had done for him, he insisted, the boy should repay her sacrifice by leading a better life. Yet here again the same logic returns: time weaponized, gratitude demanded, obligation imposed. What might have been a tender remembrance of maternal care was turned into a debt-ledger pressed onto Jaekyung’s shoulders. (chapter 74) For him, discipline was always bound to her presence, her food, her care, her silent labor that sustained the gym. By invoking “the mother” as a motivator, he was, in truth, repeating the only model of loyalty and endurance he had ever known. But this was borrowed authority, not Jaekyung’s. What may have given the boy a flicker of purpose in the moment — to endure, to fight “for her sake” — (chapter 74) could not last. It was never his voice, never his wound being acknowledged. It was an external script imposed upon him. And so, over time, that imposed motivation faded, eclipsed by the title and the money. (chapter 54) The director’s form of guidance could not sustain him; it was external, borrowed, conditional. Therefore, it is not surprising that he was never contacted after the main lead’s departure for Seoul. By then, the director had already become like his own mother — reduced to a memory (chapter 70) and nothing more. He neither possessed the boy’s number nor showed the desire to stay connected; worse, he had told him explicitly never to return. (chapter 74) Through both words and attitude, he conveyed that their paths were to diverge for good. Yet, this was never truly his intentions. In cutting him off so decisively, he enacted the very separation he condemned later. The boy had taken his words too seriously.

Park Namwook’s Lately

If Hwang Byungchul cloaked his failure under the phrase after everything, Park Namwook disguises his own negligence in the word lately. (chapter 56) (chapter 66) His care always comes after, never before. The word itself reveals his stance: he notices change, but belatedly, when damage is already done. The main lead is now escaping his control. And now, you comprehend why PArk Namwook blamed Joo Jaekyung and slapped him at the hospital. (chapter 52) That way, he could divert attention from the “before and circumstances”. And in season 2, the man hasn’t changed at all. Instead of asking what caused Jaekyung’s crisis, he chides him for straying from the routine — for not showing up at the gym, for being absent.

This exposes the essence of Namwook’s guardianship: reactive, not proactive. He does not anticipate storms; he waits until they break and then demands the champion hold himself together. In this way, his “lately” becomes the twin of “after everything.” Both phrases externalize responsibility. Both erase the speaker’s complicity in the boy’s suffering and downfall. Both subtly suggest that the fault lies with Jaekyung himself (chapter 52), either for not rising above (after everything) or for drifting from his prescribed path (lately).

But the crucial difference is that the boy no longer remains silent. With Namwook, for the first time, Jaekyung voiced his emotions. (chapter 52) The slap at the hospital was more than a physical outburst; it was the eruption of long-repressed truth. Where he once swallowed pain in silence for his mother, and later endured fists in silence for his coach, here he answers back. Lately thus marks not only Namwook’s delay but also Jaekyung’s refusal to bear the weight alone anymore. (chapter 52)

The paradox is sharp: Namwook embodies all three guardians at once — the father’s abuse (chapter 73), the mother’s silence through the cellphone (chapter 74), the director’s passivity. He is their synthesis, a distorted heir to their failures. Like the mother, he has his own family on the side, (chapter 45) his true life hidden elsewhere. Like her, he conceals his absence behind a phone call, creating the illusion of presence without truly standing by the boy. (chapter 45)

Hwang Byungchul and Park Namwook echo the same blind pattern: they fault the fighter for straying (chapter 52) , (chapter 70), while remaining oblivious to the rot within their own world and the medical world. The director accused Joo Jaewoong of “choosing the wrong path,” (chapter 74) never admitting that boxing itself was already entangled with the underworld. Likewise, Park Namwook reproached Joo Jaekyung for the mess, while in reality he had been a victim. The incident with the switched spray was reduced to two people: doc Dan and Joo Jaekyung. Funny is that by invoking lately and after all , they have the impression that delayed blame could substitute for real support. Both stand as authorities who issue reprimands only once the harm is irreversible—always too late, always at a remove. In doing so, they preserve the illusion of responsibility while avoiding the real corruption at the core of their institutions. They deny the existence of “victims”. By doing so, both Hwang Byungchul and Park Namwook sustain the illusion that the system itself is clean, and that all fault lies with the individual fighter. In their eyes, there is no exploitation, only bad choices. This explains why the CEO’s fabricated apology disturbed Namwook (chapter 69): for the first time, a figure of authority assumed responsibility, however insincerely. What to others looked like shallow PR, to Namwook appeared as a dangerous break with the rule of denial. It highlighted the emptiness of his own guardianship, where reproach replaces protection and victims are erased from the narrative.

This is why the expression lately becomes so important. With it, the manager pretends to care but really reveals distance. He notices changes but reacts belatedly, hoping the boy will revert to the old champion who endured everything. “Lately” is less concern than crisis delayed, a signal of his failure to respond in time. Instead of seeing the broader corruption of MFC, the scheming of rivals, or the weight of past trauma, Namwook shifts the blame onto the champion himself. The reproach he delivered in the hospital — his version of a slap — confirms this change. For the first time, Joo Jaekyung answered back, voicing emotions rather than swallowing them.Yet unlike them, he faces a Jaekyung who has begun to change. The boy he could once manipulate through reproach and delay now resists, signaling that the cycle of belated guardianship may finally fracture. This means that the very first meeting between Joo Jaekyung and Park Namwook in episode 74 is already announcing the end of their “collaboration.” 8chapter 74) His first words expose his true nature: ruthless and blindness. For him, Joo Jaekyung was just a fresh meat. The latter is not recognized as an individual and human. And if he remained by the manager’s side for many years, by recollecting their past, the main lead should recognize how the “wrestler” started distancing himself from the “boy”. At some point, he got married and got three kids…

Moreover, from the beginning, the manager could never be more than a placeholder, because Jaekyung would not remain his “boy” forever. By recalling their past interaction, the champion can now recognize that Namwook was never truly part of his life. Why? Because after all — the language of the “guardians/adults”— is tied to the night, the moment of deepest loneliness and loss. (chapter 73) (chapter 74) (chapter 74) The night represents what Jaekyung has always been missing: not training, not discipline, but a home where warmth endures after dark. A place where he can expose his vulnerability and be himself! (chapter 74) Honestly, it would be funny, if the champion used the same words than his own mother against the manager (chapter 74) and this would take place because of a cold!! Another possibility is blocking his number. It would close the circle of abandonment, but this time he would be the one in control. The irony is sharp: what once marked him as powerless and discarded becomes a tool of emancipation. Instead of being silenced, Jaekyung would be the one drawing the boundary, declaring that the “family” Namwook pretended to provide was nothing but an illusion.

And if this scene were triggered by something as simple as a cold, the irony deepens. A cold is usually dismissed as trivial, but for Jaekyung it would symbolize care denied. Nobody in his childhood noticed his fevers or his wounds — and Namwook, too, is too far away to notice that he is sick. He has always treated sickness as weakness to be hidden or endured, not as a moment to express love and care. (chapter 70) Thus the manager is confident that the star can return to the ring. By cutting the manager off in such a moment, Jaekyung would be affirming that he no longer accepts neglect disguised as toughness. Both “directors” are trapping the champion in the chains of the past and the future. For them, there’s no present and as such no happiness or fulfillment. Hence Hwang Byungchul is even bored, when he watched the MFC match. (chapter 71) Deep down, he has been longing for company too. Now, he is finally talking…. (chapter 70) As you can see, it is never too late… Thus we saw this on the roof of the hospital: a real and intimate conversation between the “guardian” and his pupil: (chapter 71) The director has changed!

Shin Okja’s before

And now, you are wondering how the halmoni has been affecting the champion’s life, for the former met the celebrity rather late in her life. If the director’s vocabulary circled around “after everything” and the manager’s around “lately”, the halmoni’s word is “before.” It is the most deceptive of the three, because it does not point to a rupture or a change, but instead dissolves them. Keep in mind what she confided to the main lead on the beach: She presented her grandson as an orphan, right from the start. (chapter 65) So for someone like Joo JAekyung who suffered from constant betrayals and abandonment, his lover’s childhood must have sounded like a “blessing”. She tells the story of Dan’s life as if he had simply always been without parents. When she recalls, “He grew up without a mom and dad… my heart just breaks for him,” the formulation makes it sound as though nothing was ever lost, nothing was ever taken away — it was simply his condition from the start. Doc Dan didn’t get hurt by his parents through their words or actions.

This is the function of her “before”: to erase abandonment itself. Instead of admitting there was a moment after which Dan was alone, she rewrites the narrative so that he never had parents at all. By doing so, she transforms tragedy into fate. The parents vanish not as agents of betrayal, but as if they never existed. This absolves not only them but also herself: there is no wound to confront, no injustice to name.

This is why her “before” is so insidious. In her version of events, Kim Dan was never abandoned — he was “lucky” to always have her. She erased the loss of his parents by rewriting the story: no trauma, no wound, no victim. Just a boy who had someone by his side. And contrary to Joo JAewoong, the champion’s mother and Hwang Byungchul, she had been gentle and attentive. She had seen him drinking, smoking… she had nagged, but the physical therapist had never listened to her. (chapter 65) She can appear as the perfect role model in the athlete’s eyes. No wonder why he listened to her and brought doc Dan to a huge hospital in Seoul. But here is the thing…. (chapter 65) The grandmother’s narrative culminates in a deceptively simple phrase: “And then, one day, he just grew up.” Unlike after all, which implies endurance, patience, and a long lapse of time, her then one day compresses everything into a brief, almost casual instant. In her telling, there is no slow accumulation of wounds, no process of wear, no history of pain to be endured. The transformation is presented as sudden and natural, as if nothing of significance had preceded it.

This brevity is precisely what makes her before so insidious. She denies the child the depth of his suffering by reducing the entire loss of his parents, his struggles (bullying) (chapter 57), and his forced maturity to a single, fleeting day. No trauma, no endurance — just inevitability. By collapsing years of hardship into a harmless “day,” she erases both the past and the victim. And now, you can understand why doc Dan is trapped in the present! By erasing the “before” (abandonment, trauma) and trivializing the process of “becoming an adult,” she collapses time into a single, static present. Kim Dan is not allowed a past that hurts (because she erased it), nor a future that could unfold differently (because “he just grew up” is presented as inevitable).

All that remains for him is the present moment of survival — working, enduring, fulfilling duties, without a sense of continuity. He cannot look back with clarity (since the story of his childhood has been rewritten), nor forward with hope (since his adulthood was framed as an instant fait accompli).

That’s why, compared to Joo Jaekyung — who is bound to the past (after all, memory, endurance) — Kim Dan is bound to the present: caught in an eternal now, where nothing really changes. Under this new light, my avid readers can grasp why doc Dan has not confided to his halmoni about the incident with the switched spray. First, the grandmother would remain passive and secondly, this would be erased and even diminished to a single and insignificant moment.

Before I knew it, I was…

With this simple phrase, (chapter 70) Joo Jaekyung crosses the invisible threshold that has defined his entire life. For years, he had existed only under others’ names and authorities: the son of a failed boxer, the mother’s son, the pupil of a coach, the protégé of a manager, the champion of a league. His identity was always tethered to someone else’s frame of reference, never to his own. But this line signals the birth of the I—a voice no longer spoken for, but speaking.

What makes this moment decisive is its anchoring in the present. In the past, the present was unbearable: nights of insomnia, rooms filled with silence, the sense of living only for the next fight or the next insult. The after all had become a synonym for “painful nights”. The guardians around him distorted time itself—“after all” became an endless call for endurance, “then one day” reduced years of suffering into nothing but a passing moment. In reclaiming the present, Jaekyung finally escapes those distortions. The present no longer equals absence, fear, or punishment; it becomes the ground of tenderness, heartbeat, and authentic feeling.

Yet feelings, as Kim Dan reminded him before (ch. 62)— (chapter 62) cannot, by themselves, sustain love. Emotions flare and fade, tied to the immediacy of the present. Thus the mother could break her promise and even lie to him later. What endures is not emotion alone, but the principles that Fromm identified as the essence of love: care, responsibility, knowledge, and respect. These qualities stabilize the fleeting nature of feeling and transform the present into something continuous, something that can grow. In this sense, the teddy bear bridges the gap between “present” and “future”: (chapter 65) it transforms the fleeting moment of emotion into a promise of constancy. After all, before it’s too late, what both men longed for was never glory or escape, but a home where they could rest — not alone, but in each other’s arms. By discovering emotions and learning to live in the present, the champion also rediscovers his inner child. His line — “Is this a joke?” — marks that shift, since jokes, like emotions, only exist in the immediacy of the moment. It is only a matter of time, until he laughs because of a joke. By embracing doc Dan like a teddy bear, he allows himself to cling and regress, no longer the wolf or the Emperor but simply a boy seeking warmth. Even his cold becomes symbolic: (chapter 70) illness forces him to slow down, to be vulnerable, and to receive care — something denied to him in childhood. In this way, love turns the regression into healing, transforming weakness into the possibility of renewal.

Thus Jaekyung’s story closes the circle: once trapped in the timelines of others, he now inhabits his own time. The “I” he has found is not just the voice of desire, but of choice. Love is no longer an illusion or a prison—no longer tied to debt, silence, or obligation—but a deliberate act that carries him into the future.

PS: I am suspecting that the mother is hiding behind this name: Seo Gichan, (chapter 5) and if it’s true, then this person would be the second husband.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Night🌒-Cursed Emperor 🫅

For my avid readers, the title and illustration give the impression that I will focus on Joo Jaewoong’s death and its signification in the protagonist’s life. They are not wrong, yet it covers only one aspect of this analysis. Jinx-philes have already sensed that this moment was not only the night that ended a life, but the one that birthed a weight Joo Jaekyung would carry forward: guilt that refused to fade, and a self-loathing that no victory could silence. If these are the roots of the curse, then “Emperor” names the crown — a crown whose origin is far murkier than the public believes. However, people shouldn’t forget that in that moment, the main lead was just a teenager, who belonged to a boxing studio. He was not a MMA fighter, he was not the Emperor either.

Like readers who thought they knew the main lead (a psychopath, a jerk…), fans in Jinx believe they know their idol. (chapter 26) They have watched his fights (chapter 23), memorized his moves and titles, and repeated the anecdotes told in gyms and on TV. They’ve heard how he was “saved” by sports from a darker path, and cheered for him as the “Emperor” — the handsomest fighter, the man who broke the arcade’s punching machine (chapter 26), the champion who stands above the rest. But if the champion’s life is already an open book, why did Mingwa wait so long to reveal his childhood and family? The answer is simple. It is because Joo Jaekyung has been called the Emperor till his fight against Baek Junmin! These public portraits — the friendly banter in the gym, the theatrical ring intros — show us the merchandise, not the man. They are the carefully polished surface presented to fans and fellow fighters alike, repeated so often that even those closest to him believe them. Yet behind this image (chapter 30) lies a past left unspoken, a silence so complete that his own history became an empty space others could fill as they wished. This essay brings these two “stories” together — the Emperor and the boy. And now, you may be wondering how I came to connect the champion’s trauma to his future career as an MMA fighter. The answer lies in Joo Jaekyung’s own voice. 😮

The Emperor in The News

When the news broke in chapter 70, (chapter 70), Hwang Byungchul’s anger fell squarely on the champion. (chapter 70) To him, it looked as though Jaekyung had made the reckless choice to return to the ring so soon. That was the trap: the headline and phrasing were designed to make it appear that the decision was the fighter’s own. The opening line alone (Chapter 70) created the illusion that this break had been perceived as a punishment, and that Jaekyung was eager to prove himself once again. No wonder the director assumed he had given his consent.

The visuals reinforced the illusion. The entertainment agency recycled old images not just because they lacked recent photos, but because they wanted to tap into the nostalgia of his earlier popularity, before the match against the Shotgun. It was as if someone wanted to overwrite the present and rewrite his history, packaging him in the glow of past victories. Even within the same news segment, there were two distinct “voices”: the official announcer highlighting his return, and an unseen voice quietly bringing up the suspension again — a reminder meant to frame his comeback as a personal mission rather than a corporate decision. In truth, the match was arranged by “Joo Jaekyung’s team” and MFC — a convenient shield for those actually pulling the strings. (chapter 70) Thus I conclude that the first comment (chapter 70) was to divert attention from the other persons involved in the decision for the next fight.

Notice what the journalist does not say. The CEO’s name is absent. There is no mention of the closed-door meeting between Park Namwook, Jaekyung, and the CEO where the fight was proposed. (chapter 69) By erasing these details, the public sees only two players: the Emperor and his anonymous “team.” (chapter 69) It was as if the main lead, backed by his team, had personally approached MFC to request the match — an illusion strengthened by the opening line, “MFC’s former champion Joo Jaekyung will be returning to the ring this fall after serving his suspension.” This way, if the decision draws criticism, the CEO can retreat behind the fighter and his team, like they did in the past. (Chapter 54) Back then, the champion had not reacted to this comment. Even in the worst case, the CEO can hide behind one of the MFC match managers or doctors. (chapter 41) But that excuse would be a fiction: Jaekyung hasn’t even met those doctors or talked to the MFC match manager (chapter 05). He has been chasing after his fated partner. Finally, he hasn’t even signed any paper or agreed at the meeting. In fact, he remained silent for the most part of the time and the reason for this urgent meeting was his request for proper investigation concerning the switched spray: (chapter 67) That’s the reason why this suggestion from the CEO appeared the very next day. (chapter 69)

When the orthopedic surgeon Park Junmin cleared him to remove the cast in chapter 61 (chapter 61), it was paired with a recommendation for rehabilitation — not an immediate return to competition. This was actually a condition for his total recovery. On the other hand, the doctor imagined or suggested that his patient wished to return to the ring so soon. No medical professional ever signed off on an autumn fight. Yet the date is already set, and the headlines frames it as a confident comeback without any medical backup. The Emperor’s name is splashed everywhere, but none of the words belong to him.

And this is not the first time we’ve seen this sleight of hand. Back in chapter 57, a television broadcast featured an “exclusive interview” (chapter 57) with one of his close associates — a man whose face was hidden, speaking as though he were the athlete’s voice. That interview was accompanied by a familiar victory image (chapter 57), a stock photo already used in other press pieces. This picture comes from after the fight in the States: (chapter 41), while the image released with the fall match announcement was the one from when he first won his champion title. (chapter 70) Since MFC and the journalist are recycling old images, they unwittingly revealed their own deception — dressing up the present in the clothes of the past. LOL!

The message is the same in every case: Jaekyung “speaks,” but only through others. His former stage name mirrored his situation, as he owned the champion belt for quite some time. The title “Emperor” (chapter 14) seems to radiate absolute power — the kind of authority that commands armies, bends laws, and answers to no one. It is meant to ooze charisma and control, a name that suggests the bearer acts on his own will. Yet, in truth, emperors have rarely ruled alone. Behind every throne stand ministers, advisors, generals, and family factions, each shaping decisions from the shadows. An emperor who ignores these forces risks losing his crown.

In Joo Jaekyung’s case, the irony is sharper still. Far from being the all-powerful figure his stage name implies, the “Emperor” is a role built and sustained by others — MFC executives, Park Namwook, the entertainment agency — each serving as both his court and his cage. They decide when he fights, how he is presented, and even the tone of the stories told in his name. Once he tried to complain about his tight schedule, this is what he got to hear: (chapter 17) He was blamed for his popularity. The man inside the crown does not act or speak freely; his words are filtered, scripted, or replaced entirely.

This makes the title “Emperor” less a badge of sovereignty and more a mask for dependence. Like a ruler hemmed in by court protocol and political intrigue, Jaekyung’s every public move is mediated by the hands of others. The grandeur of the title hides the quiet truth: the Emperor is voiceless, and the crown he wears is one that demands obedience rather than granting freedom. That’s his curse. His identity is filtered, packaged, and sold by those who stand in his shadow – so much so that people send him bottles of alcohol because that’s what one offers a champion, (chapter 12), never mind that he hardly drinks. The gesture fits the fantasy they’ve built around him, not the reality of a man who rejects alcohol due to his addicted father, a reminder that even the tokens of admiration are shaped by the image, not the truth. So who is this so-called close associate or “Joo Jaekyung’s team” exactly that decides for him, speaks for him, and hides behind his title? Besides, why did the journalist change from “one of his close associates” to “Joo Jaekyung’s team”?

The Voice Behind the Crown

In chapter 57, the television broadcast introduced “one of his close associates” — (chapter 57) a figure whose face and name were hidden, speaking on behalf of the Emperor. In the essay Craving Mama’s  Shine – part 1 (locked) I had presented different possibilities about the identity of this “close associate”. But with the new announcement, it becomes clear that figure can only be Park Namwook. He is the only one who arranged the meeting between the CEO and Joo Jaekyung. The anonymity was not a courtesy; it was a shield. By keeping his face and identity off the record, he could shape the narrative without owning it, avoiding any direct responsibility for the words attributed to him. Yet the choice of “close associate” was deliberate — it positioned him as the man closest to Jaekyung, someone with privileged access and authority to speak for him. It was a claim of proximity and influence, the sort of title that sells the image of a trusted confidant, even as it erases the fighter’s own voice.

The broadcast itself set the tone even before his segment began. Just prior to the “interview,” the anchor announced: (chapter 57) The nickname, played for entertainment value, was another way of turning the champion into a caricature — a marketable, amusing persona instead of a man with a past and agency. It is quite telling that Park Namwook’s interview aired immediately after the anchor referred to Jaekyung as “Mama Joo Jaekyung Fighter.” This was not the lofty “Emperor” title repeated in gyms and ring intros — it was more a mocking nickname, a deliberate jab meant to provoke. In that moment, the Emperor was verbally pulled down from his pedestal, yet the images shown alongside the segment told a different story: carefully chosen shots of him as a champion, a visual echo of his marketable persona. The dissonance was striking.

Equally telling is that the “Emperor” title had already vanished from the conversation. Its disappearance suggests that Jaekyung was never the one who chose it — it was a label assigned to him by others, to be used or dropped at their convenience. Park Namwook made no attempt to restore it or defend his fighter’s dignity, like mentioning the drug incident in the States or the spray incident in Seoul. The cause for his “silence” is simple: he doesn’t want to admit his failures and responsibility. He prefers the champion taking the blame. Hence this interview was not brought up by the manager: . (chapter 54) In my opinion, the man is trying to return to the past, thinking that his “popularity” can come back, not realizing that he is being manipulated himself. On the contrary, he stepped into the role of spokesperson without hesitation, speaking as if he were Jaekyung’s voice while keeping his own face and name hidden. He only speaks, when he feels safe. He can not be responsible for the champion’s recovery. (chapter 57) The message was clear: he had no issue with his fighter being framed this way (“Mama Fighter Joo Jaekyung”), so long as the interview served its purpose. Park Namwook may not be a cynical manipulator, but his silence in the face of mockery speaks volumes. In his mind, any coverage is better than none; to vanish from the public eye is worse than being nicknamed “Mama Fighter.” By stepping into the media slot, he believes he’s keeping Jaekyung alive in the public consciousness. Yet in doing so, he stands shoulder to shoulder with another, unseen voice — the one that coined the nickname in the first place. In both chapter 57 and chapter 70, this pairing repeats itself: Namwook’s loyalty becomes indistinguishable from complicity. Whether he realizes it or not, he’s lending his presence to a narrative that diminishes the man he claims to represent.

By chapter 70, the personal title “close associate” had shifted to the more generic “Joo Jaekyung’s team.” On the surface, the word “team” suggests equity, collaboration, and shared responsibility. But in Park Namwook’s vocabulary, “team” has never meant equality. His idea of a team mirrors the hierarchy he operates in — a boss who directs, and subordinates who follow without question, like we could observe at the hospital. (Chapter 52) This framing lets him claim the prestige of leadership while leaving himself room to withdraw if things go wrong. Yosep was the one notifying MFC and reporting the incident to the police, Potato explaining his discovery to Joo Jaekyung and blaming the star.

And yet, the choice of this term also reveals a subtle shift. By saying “Joo Jaekyung’s team,” he is placing the athlete’s name in front — not his own, not MFC’s. That way, he believes that he can avoid accountability behind the team. However, he is not grasping that gradually, he is stepping down from his self-proclaimed ownership of the gym. Whether intentionally or not, the manager is acknowledging that the gym’s growing identity will eventually crystallize around the fighter himself. The name “Team Black” hasn’t appeared yet, but its logic is already here: a team that exists for the athlete and with the athlete’s consent, not a faceless collective that speaks over him. When that name finally surfaces, it will function as a boundary—an institutional “enough”—marking the end of treating the man like merchandise.

Here, the article You Don’t Have to Put Up With Everything” offers a revealing lens. The article warns against confusing empathy with passive tolerance. While it’s important to understand that people may have difficult histories or traumas, compassion should not be used as a justification for allowing someone to mistreat or disrespect you. Understanding someone’s struggles does not mean accepting harmful gestures, words, or behaviors. Setting limits is not selfish or arrogant, but an act of self-respect and emotional protection. Boundaries are not rejection — they are self-care, a way to protect one’s well-being without guilt. This is exactly what the manager expected from Kim Dan. (Chapter 36) He should tolerate the celebrity’s moods and put up with everything. The manager didn’t mind, as long as he didn’t get affected. But what is the consequence of such a passive tolerance? An individual’s self-esteem can slowly erode, leading to a gradual loss of their sense of self. They may stop recognizing their own desires, needs, and rights, often without even realizing this is happening. This is because emotional exhaustion often develops subtly over time, rather than appearing as a sudden, dramatic event.

As you can see, it can lead to depression. That has been Jaekyung’s position for years as well— enduring decisions made without his real consent, swallowing public criticism and badmouthing, and staying silent (chapter 31) when punished. In this light, Park Namwook embodies the very dynamic the article warns against: a figure who benefits from another’s compliance, maintaining control not through open dialogue, but through unspoken rules and the threat of exclusion.

The First Curse of the Manufactured Emperor

And now, you may be wondering why I am focusing so much on the absence of voice from Joo Jaekyung — the Emperor and the man. It is because he has been used as a tool, more precisely as an ATM machine for MFC. According to the teacher in Jinx (chapter 73), by becoming a boxer, the champion wouldn’t make a lot of money. With this comment, he implied that boxing in South Korea had been losing popularity 10 years ago. This explicates why gradually, the members from Hwang Byungchul left the studio. And it was likely the same in the illegal fighting circuit. (chapter 73) The popularity of MMA in the States gave them the opportunity to revive fighting sports, a figure who could draw crowds and sponsors, making such events fashionable again.

For me, the Emperor was created for that reason. His public image was rewritten — he was called a “genius” (chapter 72) instead of “hard-working,” a man who “chose sports over a dark path.” Yet if you look closely, this celebrated “ascension” (chapter 72) isn’t tied to the director’s boxing studio at all — it’s linked to the arcade’s punching machine incident. (chapter 26) This moment, trivial in reality, became the origin story of the Emperor, as though the broken machines had revealed a prodigy destined for greatness. That’s the reason the star rejects this intro. In fact, this incident contributed to create the champion as a spoiled brat. In truth, the director had suggested that Jaekyung enter the sport professionally so that he could feed himself, but his reasoning had nothing to do with arcade games or instant legend. That pragmatic nudge was later overwritten with a glamorous tale that erased the long hours in a run-down boxing studio (chapter 72), the scars of his family history, and the years of survival before the cage. This is history rewritten, his boxing past and family erased. Why? His origins could expose the ugly verity: the link between criminality and boxing (as such fighting sports). Secondly, because his real story, though moving, lacked the glamorous allure needed to market him. His real story would have revealed that to rise to the top, you need relentless work, not a miraculous moment. That version was never going to sell as well as the “genius” myth.

With his success, his “gym” soon attracted members from different martial arts — judo, jiu-jitsu — all chasing the dream of becoming rich and famous like him. (chapter 46) Most of them thought that by staying close to him, they could benefit from his popularity. To conclude, for many of them proximity to the Emperor wasn’t about learning discipline or technique; it was about absorbing his fame by osmosis. Hence they complained and accepted the gifts and money so easily. (chapter 41) Observe how the manager is acting here. He is speaking, touching the star like his prize and possession. The Emperor became the merchandise, the illusion, the bait to draw both viewers and fighters. However, being “labeled as genius” can only push desperate fighters to take a short-cut: bribes and drugs. Hence Seonho couldn’t last a whole round. (chapter 46) And, like any product, once it was seen as damaged, its value plummeted. The moment he “lost” his title and suffered injury (chapter 52), the dream began to unravel. (chapter 52) This panel captures this shift perfectly: two fighters casually dismiss him over dinner. In those words, the Emperor isn’t a mentor, a champion, or even a man — he’s a broken commodity, no longer worth the investment. The same people who once fed off his popularity are the first to abandon him when the promise of easy gain disappears.

This served more than publicity. Through him, they could obscure their crimes and build a parallel market in the underground fighting world. And here, the lesson from “You Don’t Have to Put Up With Everything” becomes vital: understanding Jaekyung’s difficult past or the pressures on the industry should not excuse the way his dignity and history have been trampled. His compassion for the system that raised him has been turned into passive tolerance — exactly the dynamic the article warns against.

And now, you see why I chose to postpone the second part of The Birth of the Shotgun. Without Baek Junmin — his shadow in the ring — Joo Jaekyung would never have been made to shine so brightly. No wonder why he was so jealous. He believed that his victories were rigged too.

Yet the irony is that Park Namwook is no mastermind. As we’ve seen time and again, he follows the lead of others — the CEO, the entertainment agency, perhaps even unseen backers — rather than setting the agenda himself. He is the mouthpiece, not the brain. The “close associate” title flattered him with the appearance of authority; the “team” label protects him when that authority becomes risky. Both are masks, worn depending on the circumstances, to keep himself valuable to the system. On the other hand, he is gradually revealing his real position: he is not the owner of the gym! (chapter 22) He is even disposable. He is gradually giving more rights to his “boy”, the real director of Team Black. And the moment you perceive the manager as the main lead’s voice, you can grasp the true significance of the slap at the hospital: (chapter 52) For the first time, the main lead had voiced his own thoughts and emotions. He had used his real “voice”, revealed his unwell-being: (chapter 52) To this outburst, Park Namwook slapped Jaekyung in front of others (chapter 52). (chapter 52) That was not the act of a coach correcting an athlete — it was the gesture of an owner disciplining a pet or a possession, a reminder of who controlled the narrative. In that moment, the Emperor did not protest. (chapter 52) He chose silence, and later avoidance, staying away from the gym. That silence was not weakness, but choice: he would listen less and less to his hyung.

From then on, the champion’s public image — whether filtered through the “close associate” or the “team” — was not his own. Park Namwook treated him less like an athlete (chapter 70) and more like a product: something to be displayed, sold, and, when necessary, handled roughly to keep in line. The shift in labels is just another layer of that merchandising process — a packaging change to suit the current market, not a recognition of the man inside. To conclude, the champion has always been voiceless all this time, even here: (chapter 36) All he needed to do was to fight: (chapter 36)

And yet, if you compare the Emperor in the present with the teenager in the past, you’ll see a stark reversal. The Joo Jaekyung of today has his voice mediated, silenced, or replaced by others; the boy of yesterday dared to speak for himself. In the confrontation with his father, he voiced his own desires and defiance directly (chapter 73) — unfiltered, unmarketed, unprotected. It was raw, dangerous honesty, and it came at a cost: the loss of his voice!

The Night That Stole His Voice

If you compare the Emperor to the boy he once was, the contrast is striking. As a teenager confronting his father, Joo Jaekyung still voiced his own desires. (chapter 73) Six years earlier, however, his voice had already been battered by silence. After his mother’s abandonment at age six, the only connection he retained with her was a phone number — (chapter 72) We don’t know how many times he called, but each time we see him do it, his face is injured. (chapter 72) The phone calls are therefore intertwined with the boxing studio, as though pain itself pushed him toward her. At ten, he picked up the receiver and let it ring only a few times before hanging up. The next time, in the dead of winter, he finally spoke, promising that if she returned, he would protect her from his father and make enough money to keep her safe. (chapter 72) Each time what answered him was not her voice, but a machine: (chapter 72) His words met a recording, his promise suspended in a vacuum. Whether she listened to his words or not, the outcome was the same — she never came back. No reply, no echo. Her silence told him the truth: his wish would never be heard. From that point on, she vanished not only from his life but from his speech; he no longer mentioned her. That silence became his default — speaking desires aloud was pointless if no one would answer.

By the time of the morning argument with his father at sixteen, we can conclude that the nightly calls had long stopped. The boy had given up on being heard. (chapter 73) Six years later, at sixteen, he finally raised his voice again — this time to his father. He wouldn’t give up on boxing. Unlike the mother, the father answered. But his “reply” came in the form of insults, blows, and a dark prophecy: that Jaekyung would never amount to anything, (chapter 73) that he was born a loser, that his dream was a joke. Here, the voice met not silence but resistance, mockery, and humiliation. And unlike with his mother, Jaekyung did not retreat — he cursed back. (chapter 73) He swore he would prove the man wrong, that he would win, and spat the most dangerous line of all: “If I win, you can keel over and die for all I care.” That evening, he saw his father’s corpse — (chapter 73) and with it, another layer of his voice disappeared. He had the impression, he had killed his father. His words had been more dangerous than his punches. Hence he could only come to resent his own voice and words. And now, you comprehend why the Emperor allowed the hyung to become his voice. To conclude, the silence of those nights became the silence of the man. As you can see, the curse did not fall on Joo Jaekyung’s voice in one night — it was built, in stages, over years. But the death of his father linked to the argument represented the final straw that broke the camel’s back.

This is the pivotal difference: with the mother, voicing a wish had no consequence because it dissolved into nothingness. With the father, voicing a wish carried weight — it provoked, it struck back, and, in Jaekyung’s eyes, it cursed. When his father died that same evening, the boy was left to carry the unbearable suspicion that his words had somehow brought it about. That night became the night his voice was poisoned: one parent had taught him that speaking was useless; the other had taught him that speaking could kill. From then on, his voice retreated into the ring, where the only “speaking” he did was with his fists. And now, you comprehend why he is using his sex partners as surrogate fighters, why he treats them as toys. (chapter 55)

The Birth of the Jinx

The two formative wounds — his mother’s unanswered call and his father’s cursed reply — shaped the way Joo Jaekyung would handle intimacy for years to come. With his mother, speaking led to nothing; his voice dissolved into silence. With his father, speaking led to too much; his words became a curse, followed by guilt and grief. From these experiences, he learned that words in close relationships were unpredictable weapons. They could vanish, leaving him abandoned, or strike deep, leaving him ashamed.

Sex became his remedy to fight against loneliness and his refuge from this danger (chapter 2) — a space where he could act without having to speak. In the bedroom, as in the ring, the body could carry the conversation. Here, he could dominate, control, and release tension without the risk of verbal damage. His partners became surrogate opponents: sparring substitutes in a non-lethal match. Treating them as “toys” wasn’t only objectification; it was a form of control that, in his mind, protected both sides. Toys don’t demand answers, don’t talk back, and don’t leave you cursed with regret. They remain safely outside the territory where his voice had once done harm.

But this logic, built to keep others safe from his voice and himself safe from their silence, begins to falter with Kim Dan. The latter embodies not only the mother (abandonment, silence- I believe that he resembles her too) and father (argument, drinking), but also the child. Dan cries, shows his vulnerability and admits his mistakes. (chapter 1) He embodies innocence and as such lack of experiences. Moreover, he talks, makes suggestions for the champion’s sake (chapter 27), spent time with him, asks questions, confronts, and refuses to be reduced to a body in the room. He breaks the rule of silence. With him, Jaekyung can no longer hide behind the physical alone; he is forced to speak, to explain, to voice desires and fears. He pushes Jaekyung to engage in ways he’s spent years avoiding. In this way, Kim Dan becomes the first real threat to the system the champion built after those two curses — and possibly the first person who could prove that words can be safe again. And now, you comprehend why Joo Jaekyung was moved by the birthday card (chapter 62) To most, it might look like a simple gesture, but for him, it was a rare and precious thing — a voice that had taken the time to shape itself into words just for him. (chapter 55) After years of associating speech with either silence or harm, receiving a long-winded, carefully written message felt almost unreal. He saw the effort behind it, the deliberate choice to put thoughts and emotions into language instead of letting them fade away or turn into weapons. In that card, Kim Dan offered something neither of his parents had managed: a voice that reached him without wounding. No silence, no insult. For the champion, it wasn’t just a card — it was proof that words could be built into a gift, not a curse. The latter expressed his dreams and gratitude. Thus I deduce that the Emperor’s curse will be broken by a spell: words! (chapter 55) The “spell” to break it is not some grand external event, but the simple, sustained act of honest communication — something that has been denied to him since childhood.

By linking this to Kim Dan, it becomes obvious that the Emperor’s liberation won’t come from winning another fight or reclaiming a title, but from restoring his own voice in a relationship where speaking is safe, heard, and reciprocated. Boxing was the only language he ever learned from his parents (chapter 72) — a vocabulary of fists, jabs, and physical dominance as a way to earn money and recognition— but with Dan, the champion is slowly acquiring a new language. His hands, once trained only for striking and defending, begin to communicate through gentle gestures: an embrace (chapter 68), a kiss, a pat, a caress or by simply holding hands. In this way, the curse that began when his voice was silenced and his hands were weaponized will only be broken when those same hands learn to speak tenderness. Look how doc Dan reacted to his public embrace: (chapter 71) He saw affection in the hug, but he still doubted the champion’s action.

The Prison of the Boy

And now, you are probably wondering why I selected a tree for the background illustration of The Night-Cursed Emperor. Until now, the design’s images have played a secondary role, yet the answer lies in a single scene from chapter 41. (chapter 41) Under the bright sunlight, Kim Dan reached out toward the leaves, his hand open and unguarded, as he silently thought of the man he loved. This gesture, so simple yet so revealing, became the unspoken confession that marked the start of a different kind of freedom—the freedom to feel.

In my earlier analysis Prison of Glass , Key  Of Time , I had argued that Joo Jaekyung’s habit of meditating before the expansive glass window in his penthouse was more than a moment of calm — it was a ritual of self-confinement. (chapter 53) The glass was an invisible barrier, offering the illusion of freedom while keeping him trapped in the moment of his unresolved trauma. The closer he stood to it, the further he was from true release, his gaze fixed outward to avoid looking inward. That’s why he had no eye in that scene: (chapter 55)

This new scene (chapter 73) reveals why that reading was correct: the penthouse window is not just a symbolic device of the present — it is the direct heir of a far older image burned into his memory. Here, as a teenager, he stands before a small barred window in the room where his father’s corpse lies. The resemblance is not visual coincidence but emotional continuity. Both windows let in light without granting escape; both present the outside world as something visible yet forever out of reach.

In this panel, the confinement is literal. The bars fragment the daylight, reducing it to slivers, making the outside world seem even more inaccessible. He is facing the window and he corpse, his eyes fixed on the narrow frame of light, as if distance could make the reality behind him vanish. But the truth is locked in place — the body on the floor, the night’s events, the words exchanged. This is the night that froze him.

From that point on, every window in his life — no matter how large, modern, or luxurious — became a reenactment of that first prison. (chapter 55) The penthouse’s vast glass wall is just a polished version of this barred opening, a reminder that while his circumstances changed, the barrier never truly fell. The trauma stayed intact, shaping the way he saw the world and himself. The boy who stared through those bars never left that room; the man still carries that gaze. But there’s more to it.

Observe how he is standing in front of the window: (chapter 73) he is not only frozen, but also silent! Not only he lost his voice that night, but also he could never talk about it to anyone! He was forced to carry this huge burden alone. Who would feel empathy or attachment to such a man, when he was famous for his bad behavior? But deep down, the boy had come to love his father despite his flaws. This is his deepest secret which is coming to the surface: his love and guilt!

Even the window denies him solace. He could never see the moon behind that small window, just as he failed to notice the snow falling, when he attempted to contact his mother: (chapter 72) Nature was invisible to him; his world was defined by conflict, neglect, and survival, not by moments of beauty. He was never taught to enjoy the present moment.

Chapter 73 signals a shift. Like in chapter 71, where he shields his gaze, his “third eye” — the inner sight that perceives emotional truth — is beginning to open and recall his “sins”. His fever is not just physical; it’s the body’s acknowledgment of pain long repressed. He is starting to allow himself to feel, to admit vulnerability. (chapter 71)

And this is where the night changes meaning. Until now, darkness for him was bound to abandonment and death. But in chapter 70, the owl’s call pierces the silence — (chapter 70) the night can also be alive, communicative, protective. In that moment, the moon becomes more than a distant light in the sky: it is a patient witness, a calm listener in the stillness, reflecting the truth he has yet to voice. (chapter 70) Its soft glow contrasts with the blinding glare of the cage lights, suggesting that under the moon, there is space for gentleness, for hearing one’s own heartbeat and another’s words. Just as the moon guides travelers through darkness, it can guide him toward a night that does not suffocate him with loss, but offers orientation and connection.

This reframes his past behavior: his repeated night rescues of Kim Dan were not merely impulsive heroics; (chapter 60) they were his own form of therapy. In saving someone else in the night, (chapter 65) he could prove to himself he was not powerless, he was valuable, capable of protecting what mattered. (chapter 69) He was not too late either. And the moment doc Dan discovers what the silent hero has done for him so many times, the former will realize that he has always been special to the Emperor. Moreover, the latter had never abandoned him in the end.

The curse of the Night-Cursed Emperor — the depression, the insomnia, the silence — will only break when he can walk through the night not as a rescuer masking his own wounds, but as a man who voices his emotions to the one person who has truly shared those nights with him. And now, Jinx-philes can grasp my illustration. The moment Joo Jaekyung starts confiding to doc Dan about his inner world, he will not only regain his voice, but also his life! He will be free and no longer the merchandise “Joo Jaekyung the fighter”. He will become a man with a history that is finally his to tell. And if his mother is still alive… she can be criticized for her actions. How so? It is because she was not by his side. She believed the “myth”. She probably imagined that he was “happy”. With his regained voice, the schemers will lose their hold over him; they will no longer be able to manipulate the silence that once kept him bound. Park Namwook has thrived in the shadow of his trauma — reframing the scars of that night as “mania”, (chapter 9) as if the champion’s volatility were a quirk (the actions of a spoiled child) to be managed rather than a wound to be healed. It is because he never talked to the champion or investigated his past. It was only about money and glory. The manufactured image of the erratic, temperamental fighter served Namwook well; it excused rough handling, justified bad press, and kept Joo Jaekyung dependent. Once the Emperor can name the truth of that night, the fiction collapses — and with it, Namwook’s control. He can only be judged as a liar and even a traitor, but we know that Joo Jaekyung has a big heart. He could love his father despite the abuse. Now, the missing link is Cheolmin! (chapter 13) Observe that this name is a combination between Hwang Byungchul and Baek Junmin! Under this light, my avid readers can grasp why the athlete kept his existence in the dark for so long! It is because the latter belongs to his past and knows the truth behind the Emperor! He was aware of his suffering. For him, he is not just a fighter, but someone who needed FUN in his life!

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Birth of the Shotgun 🔫🪨 (part 1)

Reading a Life Through Glimpses

Baek Junmin is not a character the story introduces directly, yet his presence has cast a long and invisible shadow over Joo Jaekyung’s life. Though he appears in only a handful of chapters—47, 49, 51, 52, and 73 [I am excluding the match]—his role is far from minor. He is, in fact, one of the main invisible architects of the champion’s trauma and jinx, the one who once stood across from him on a night that would shape the course of both their lives. Long before he was known as the Shotgun, Baek Junmin might have pulled the trigger on something else entirely: the last remnant of Jaekyung’s innocence. (chapter 73) Their violent encounter may have led to the vanishing of the young boy’s smile, replacing it with the hardened scowl of the Emperor, the tyrant in the ring. (chapter 1) If Hwang Byungchul gave Jaekyung the tools to fight, Baek Junmin gave him the reason to fight like a bloodthirsty tyrant. He did not simply scar the soul — he engraved rage into the champion’s core. The tragedy is that Joo Jaekyung never even learned his name. Thus he didn’t react to his name, only to his face and his smile. (chapter 47) And yet, Baek Junmin reappears, not as a stranger, but as the remnant of a past that refuses to stay buried. Additionally, he appears only through the narration of others (fighter) (chapter 47) or in flashes (chapter 73) — a gesture here, a line there (chapter 73) — before vanishing again. To understand him, we have to read between the panels, compare the boy we meet in episode 73 (chapter 73) to the man who resurfaces much later. (chapter 47) This is how we catch glimpses of him — by holding the present up against the past, by noticing what has changed and what has stayed the same.

The clues are scattered like pieces of a puzzle: a way of standing, the choice of clothing, how he hides among others or suddenly steps forward, the company he keeps. Each fragment feels small on its own, but when placed side by side, they begin to sketch an evolution — not told directly, but implied.

And like any puzzle, the final picture depends on how the pieces are arranged. What follows is the story that emerges when I fit these fragments together — a version that exists only because I chose to see the connections this way.

The Ears: Traces of Unspoken Fights

Though his hoodie and shadowed posture attempt to conceal him, Baek Junmin’s body betrays traces of a buried past. (chapter 73) A careful look at his face in chapter 73 reveals the early signs of cauliflower ear, particularly on the right side—a subtle swelling, the deformed curvature of the cartilage. These are not the ears of a novice. They speak of blows taken in silence, of matches fought outside the spotlight. (chapter 73) Such an injury is not congenital, nor cosmetic. It is the ear’s irreversible memory of repeated trauma, often earned through unregulated or unsupervised fighting.

This visual clue confirms what his words and clothes only hint at: (chapter 73) Baek Junmin was already an illegal fighter before becoming The Shotgun. And yet, unlike Joo Jaekyung—whose cauliflower ears are far more pronounced (chapter 47) than Junmin’s ears (chapter 49) Jaekyung’s ears mark him as a champion who faced real opponents in real matches, many of them brutal. His injuries are the price of transparency, visibility, and legitimacy. They are scars earned in the light, while Baek Junmin is supposed to be a novice. (chapter 47)

This contrast exposes the truth. Not only Baek Junmin’s ears were the evidence of a long career in the ring (illegal fights), yet they feel more secretive—a residue of unsanctioned violence and criminality. If Jaekyung’s ears are a badge of honesty and legality, Junmin’s are a whisper of something illicit. They suggest that while the fights may have been real (death), the stage was hidden. (chapter 47) His damage was earned in the shadows and in staged fights manipulated by higher powers. (chapter 47)

The Face – From Full to Hollow

The first thing that changes is his face. (chapter 73)

As a teenager, Baek Junmin has fuller cheeks and healthy skin—a face still marked by youth and perhaps untouched by prolonged hardship. But years later, his skin adult face is hollowed out. (chapter 49) His cheeks have sunk, his jaw stands out more sharply, and his features seem carved by something deeper than age. This is not the look of someone forced to cut weight for competition, (chapter 37), for the new rising star is already much smaller and thinner than the protagonist. (chapter 49) It’s more likely the result of long-term stress, emotional corrosion, or drug use.

But it’s not just the face that speaks—it’s the context in which these bodies live.

In chapter 73, Park Juho casually offers drugs to Joo Jaekyung, claiming (chapter 73) This line is telling. It reveals not only the normalization of drug use among these teenagers, but also how intimately it’s tied to fighting. Juho isn’t offering an escape—he’s offering a tool. For him, drugs aren’t about rebellion or recreation; they are a performance enhancer. They’re marketed as part of the fighter’s toolkit.

This moment confirms that in the environment where Baek Junmin came of age, violence and substance use are not only linked—they are institutionalized. The discipline of the gym has been replaced by street rules, where the edge you gain doesn’t come from technique, but from chemical courage. And Park Juho is no outsider: he was once a member of the gym. His descent—and his promotion of drugs under the guise of athletic benefit—reflects the rot that spreads when survival replaces structure and true care.

In contrast, Joo Jaekyung—despite the violence of his career—has retained a kind of “babyfaced” youthfulness. (chapter 44) His skin is clearer, his features softer, and his face shows fewer signs of internal collapse. This is the effect of healthy food, structured discipline, clean training, and perhaps even emotional restraint. While Junmin’s face has been thinned by chaos, Jaekyung’s has been preserved by control. Under this light, it becomes comprehensible why the athlete fell in love with doc Dan at first sight. Despite being older, (chapter 7) the “hamster” still carries a baby face: a visual marker of youth, innocence, and gentleness. He embodies everything the Shotgun does not: vulnerability without corruption, softness without vice. If Baek Junmin stands for a corrupted adulthood — weapons (The Shotgun), shadows, and counterfeit gold — then Kim Dan, by contrast, becomes the sanctuary of all that was lost: the child, the smile, the safe bed.

Even before the gloves go on, the face tells the story: Baek Junmin’s path diverged long ago. He didn’t just take hits—he absorbed a life that ate away at him from the inside.

The Boy in the Hoodie

The first time we see the young Baek Junmin, he is not framed as a fighter. There are no gloves on his hands, no stance that invites a challenge. He is simply there — standing off to the side, wrapped in a black hoodie whose shadow swallows his shoulders and the line of his jaw. The garment is loose enough to blur the contours of his body, turning him into a shape rather than a figure.

His appearance captures the essence of what English calls “keeping a low profile.” But in French, the idiom garder un profil bas unfolds with even greater nuance—each of its synonyms revealing a different facet of his behavior and circumstances. Se faire discret (to make oneself discreet), être modeste (“to be modest”), rester dans l’ombre (to stay in the shadows), and ne pas attirer l’attention (to avoid attracting attention) all resonate with how he moves through this scene. The hoodie conceals his expression, his posture erases his presence, and his silence blends him into the background (“fade into the background“). He appears modest (être modeste), even passive —yet this modesty is not a personality trait, but a form of self-erasure taught by danger. He has become so invisible that he has succeeded in being forgotten (se faire oublier = to keep a low profile). Years later, when he finally stands before the protagonist again, the champion doesn’t recognize him. But Baek Junmin remembers. His question in chapter 49 (chapter 49) reveals that anonymity was never his desire. It was his sentence.

Why was he hiding? The answer lies in the world he came from. As hinted in chapter 18, (chapter 18) criminals don’t want attention. They avoid the law. They train their subordinates to vanish, to move through shadows, to speak only when spoken to. Baek Junmin wasn’t just playing a role —he was surviving a system that required him to erase himself. His hoodie was not simply clothing; it was a muzzle, a shadow he had to wear. That’s why the protagonist has not made a connection between his nemesis Baek Junmin and a Korean gang yet. (chapter 69) How is this possible, when it is clear that the antagonist is already a thug? It is because Joo Jaekyung has no idea about his true identity. He only knows him as a cheater and liar!! (chapter 51) In the past, he bought someone… but let’s return our attention to the past.

In a scene where others choose to stand out — one boy in white, another in red — (chapter 73) he blends in by choice. Black is not a neutral here; it is a decision to recede, to be part of the backdrop. The fabric pools around his hands, hiding the skin, while the hood hangs like an unspoken “no comment.” Even when he speaks, it is without volume or force. (chapter 73) His role in the exchange is that of a conduit — not the source, not the decision-maker, but the man in between. Striking is that another French synonym for “to keep a low profil” is “staying quiet” (se tenir coi) or “making himself small” (se faire tout petit) which totally reflects this scene.

And yet, he is not one of the low-tier errand boys either because he knows a higher-up (“his hyung”) (chapter 73) His positioning in the group is telling: physically closer to the speaker of authority, not lumped with the ones who will later be sent to do the dirty work. He is high enough to be trusted, low enough to avoid exposure. The hierarchy is implicit, mapped not by dialogue but by body placement. However, let us not get deceived. Despite Park Juho’s seemingly confident address—“Your hyung”—a closer look at the actual power dynamics reveals something far more fragile and unstable. (chapter 73) In the panel where Park Juho seeks verbal confirmation (“Right, Junmin?”), Baek Junmin’s response is subdued and minimal: “Yeah, that’s right.” He can just confirm what the other said. In fact, he is merely echoing the boy’s words—repeating them rather than asserting his own. This is not the confident affirmation of someone in control, nor the proud acknowledgment of a respected enforcer. It is the submissive response of someone complying with expectations, playing a role assigned to him—one he does not command.

Moreover, the fact that Baek Junmin physically removes his hood at that moment (chapter 73) —exposing his face—feels less like a gesture of confidence and more like a necessary performance to project even a semblance of authority. But that display only reveals how hollow his authority truly is. The power rests elsewhere: with the unnamed hyung behind the scenes.

This moment shatters any illusion that Baek Junmin has standing in the criminal underworld. He is no legend—just a middleman, entirely expendable. His presence, reduced to compliance and posturing, contrasts sharply with that of Park Juho. Though younger, Park Juho is no longer passive. He is making decisions, initiating conversation, and trying to recruit a new member. His behavior signals an emerging agency. In fact, Juho is gradually stepping into the very role Baek Junmin once tried to fill—but failed to claim. (chapter 73) The balance of power is shifting in real time, and Junmin seems to be on the verge of being silently replaced. This explains his intervention at the end. He doesn’t want a new recruit because he fears in him a rival.

There is another subtle but telling detail in this scene: the antagonist is introduced simply by his first name—Junmin. On the surface, this might suggest familiarity or equality. Yet this lack of a full name also reveals something deeper. It speaks to the absence of legacy, the absence of recognition. Junmin already has the ears of a fighter (chapter 73), this means that he is already fighting in the illegal underground ring, but he has no name that echoes his “success”. He is not the legend in the Gwanwon Province yet. (chapter 47) He is a man without renown, without lineage, this explicates why he is involved in drug dealing. This anonymity stands in sharp contrast to Joo Jaekyung, whose name will soon be attached to his first tournament win, marking the beginning of a visible, documented ascent, though I don’t think, the main lead will ever come to enjoy his victory… Not only because of his father’s death… but because of the Shotgun! My theory is that The Shotgun will make him lose his “trophy”, his victory! I will explain it further below!

Anyway, Junmin’s namelessness foreshadows his descent into the shadows, while Jaekyung’s path points toward visibility, acclaim, and transformation into a symbol: fame and success. He will be able to live out his father’s dream. (chapter 73) And notice that the legend is trapped to a province, indicating that he could never make it out of there like the champion! Therefore it already implies that the future “Shotgun”‘s association with the hyung is not based on loyalty or mutual respect—it is circumstantial, even transactional. It is about money and usefulness. And now, you comprehend why Baek Junmin’s position in this gang is quite precarious.

In this light, Junmin’s silence and brief confirmation expose his true position: subordinate, replaceable, and dispensable. He is not the king of this realm, but already a shadow… almost like a ghost! He’s lingering on the margins of both the law and the underworld, hovering between anonymity and infamy. After his painful encounter with Joo Jaekyung, he was told to keep a low profile. And he succeeded. He disappeared so thoroughly that not even Joo Jaekyung, whose life he once upended, could remember him. He ghosted himself (another synonym for keep a low profile) into oblivion—until the day he was reloaded.

Years later, he emerges again—but this time as a tool. Yet, I have the feeling that this man has always been a device, yet he failed to grasp his true position, as he has always faded into the background and copied others. Though he was never prosecuted for the deaths mentioned in chapter 47, (chapter 47), the five tattooed lines above his eye silently proclaim his kill count: 5 people. (chapter 73) That’s the same number of persons in the dark alley, when you exclude Joo Jaekyung and Baek Junmin (chapter 73) He has crossed the line: he entered the criminal world for good. Now he is no longer just a ghost, but a weapon with a body count. And this is precisely why his transformation into the Shotgun carries such grim symbolic weight. (chapter 49) A shotgun isn’t a subtle weapon—but it can be precise. It is powerful, direct, and designed for maximum impact at close range. In that sense, Baek Junmin isn’t just any tool—he is a weapon that must be pointed by someone else. His value doesn’t lie in legacy or longevity. It lies in the force he delivers when fired. He doesn’t aim; he is aimed. And like any tool of destruction, he can be reused, discarded, or silenced as needed. His body may carry tattoos and scars, but he has no voice in the system that uses him. Thus I deduce that this nickname was not entirely chosen by Baek Junmin, he was definitely influenced by his surrounding and he agreed to it, not realizing the true symbolism behind this name. Note that his nickname was only revealed, when he faced his nemesis. The target was the Emperor.

What makes this image linger is not just the hoodie (chapter 73), but what lies at its hemline: garbage bags. Stacked casually against the wall, their plastic skins catch stray glints of light. They are not the clean, tied-off kind; their surfaces are rumpled, slack in places, suggesting that some are only half full. It is a setting that smells — even if the page is silent — of neglect.

Garbage is not a neutral backdrop either. In visual storytelling, it speaks of disposability, of things used and discarded, of value extracted and then abandoned. And here, it frames Baek Junmin as much as the hoodie does. He is in this environment, not passing through it. Thus this motive appears once again: The refuse mirrors his role: useful for a time, easy to replace, meant to be kept out of sight until needed. It foreshadows what will happen to him years later, when he too will be treated as disposable by the very people who profited from him. (chapter 52) Note that Director Choi Gilseok doesn’t express concern for Baek Junmin, his attention is on the Emperor!

If we look carefully, the hoodie and the garbage share a function: both conceal. The hoodie hides the individual; the garbage hides the traces of past actions. Together, they create a space where identity and accountability dissolve. It also exposes his moral corruption.

This is the Baek Junmin we meet first — not the legend of the underground fighting circuit, not The Shotgun. He is almost anti-spectacle. And that is precisely why the contrast with his future self (chapter 47) — gold chains glinting, tattoos displayed, chin raised — feels so stark. To move from this shadow into the spotlight means something happened in between, something that flipped his calculation about visibility.

But for now, in this first glimpse, he is a boy learning the rules of survival: keep close to the powerful, keep your profile low, and never draw attention to yourself unless you can win the moment you do.

He doesn’t even enter the scene until the champion is gone. Joo Jaekyung has already brushed off the offer of drugs, already walked away into the dark, by the time Baek Junmin makes his approach. (chapter 73) This timing matters. It means the two men share a street that night but not a glance — the main lead never sees him, never knows they have crossed paths. And now, you know why the Shotgun could never forget him: a source of threat. This contrast exposes the truth: Not only the future Shotgun was already a thug, who kept his true nature well hidden, but also Joo JAekyung was totally misjudged: he is far from being a thug! He is totally honest (chapter 47),he doesn’t take pride in killing someone.

And yet, from Baek Junmin’s perspective, the scene in episode 73 is their first meeting. So he was never part of the “Hwang Buyngchul’s boxing studio”. For Joo Jaekyung, it is nothing — an evening that passes without incident. But this imbalance changes everything. When we later see them square off in the present-day hallway, it becomes clear that Baek Junmin is fighting a private, unfinished battle. (chapter 49)

The scene in chapter 73 becomes the prologue to a hidden chronology. Since the champion’s nemesis implied in the hallway that they had met personally before (chapter 49) and there was no direct interaction between them in the street, I come to the conclusion that their past must have crossed a second time between these two meetings. If we take the hallway encounter as their third meeting (chapter 49), there must have been at least a second — brief, sharp, and wounding enough to carve itself into Baek Junmin’s memory while leaving no conscious trace in Joo Jaekyung’s. The difference is telling: what the champion repressed, the Shotgun carried it like a scar. It means Baek Junmin knows more about him than the reverse, and every glare, every barb he throws later is sharpened by a history Joo Jaekyung couldn’t anticipate they share

The street itself is dim, (chapter 73) lit only in patches, with more shadow than clarity. In this kind of setting, the black hoodie becomes something more than clothing — it is camouflage. He is not merely wearing the dark; he is using it, letting the folds of fabric and the absence of light blur his edges. It is as if he intends to merge with the scenery, to be just another shadow leaning against the wall. This double concealment — in time and in space — ensures that, for now, he remains invisible to the one person whose attention he will one day crave. He began in the shadows not just by circumstance but by mandate. Yet as the boy in the hoodie fades into memory, a new figure will eventually emerge from those shadows—not to hide, but to strike. And he will no longer wear a hood. He will wear scars.

The Scar and the Tattoos: Carved Memory and Symbolic Death

In his youth, Baek Junmin bore no huge visible tattoos. (chapter 73) He only has a small one under the eye in the shape of a cross, an ambiguous symbol that could suggest death, a target or “devotion” (for the mafia). It was modest, even fearful. He seemed reluctant to mark his body, as though he feared being publicly identified as a thug or linked too closely to the criminal underworld. This caution contrasts starkly with his present appearance. (chapter 47) Now, his skin is heavily inked: an Oni demon slashes across his throat, a clear invocation of Japanese yakuza imagery and underground death culture. [For more read the essay Angels of Death: Shadows versus Serenity] So his transformation tells a story.

When Baek Junmin reappears in the present timeline (chapter 49), the change in his face is immediate and inescapable (chapter 73) — but only if we hold his past up against his present. The teenager in the black hoodie had smooth skin and no visible tattoos beyond a small mark under one eye, a calculated restraint that kept him from looking fully “claimed” by the underworld he moved in. His portray contrasts so much to the other teenager whose legs are covered by huge tattoos. (chapter 73) Now, Junmin’s face carries something far less deliberate: a scar running across his forehead above his right eye, a permanent reminder of an encounter that went violently wrong.

This is where the knife enters the story. Not as a vague metaphor for danger, but as an object with a history. We know Baek Junmin favors blades (chapter 47) — the demon tattoo on his throat clutches a knife between its teeth, a design too precise to be coincidence. In woodcarving, strokes are often carved with blades; in Baek Junmin’s case, the scar is a carving on flesh, an unwanted engraving that cannot be sanded smooth. The placement of the tattoo directly on his throat is almost poetic: the story of that scar is something he cannot speak, lodged like the blade between the demon’s teeth.

But the knife in Jinx carries an even sharper meaning. Hwang Byungchul once described the city as a cutthroat place — (chapter 72) and in this context, “cutthroat” is more than an idiom. It hints at the lurking threat of blades, at encounters in alleys and side streets where victory is stolen through speed and treachery. Joo Jaekyung has walked those streets without incident (chapter 72) (chapter 73) in the present timeline, but an assault there can happen any time.

And now, let me ask you where a knife was used before in the Manhwa? Naturally when the hero faced Heo Manwook (chapter 17) And what did the loan shark tell him before provoking him? (chapter 17) Based on the champion’s facial expression after hearing Heo Manwook’s questions, it becomes clear that Joo Jaekyung experienced in the past a scene where he faced a knife and his head was smashed with a bottle of soju. The criminals are recognizable due to their tattoos and their weapons, the knife! And the logic of the knife in this world is telling: as Heo Manwook showed (chapter 17), it appears when a fight is already lost. It is not a weapon of open combat, but of pride and desperation — a way to cheat fate when skill is not enough. Moreover, he was particularly vicious here. He attacked the champion from behind, a treacherous move. As you can see, the knife is strongly intertwined with the underworld, deception and cowardice.

You can actually detect many parallels between the argument with the champion’s father and the fight at doc Dan’s humble house: the twilight, the smashing of a bottle of soju on the head, (chapter 73) (chapter 17), a head injury (chapter 73), insults and provocations (chapter 73), (chapter 17) and finally an allusion to the “maker”, god versus father. (chapter 17) and finally DEATH!! (chapter 73) The loan shark was diminishing the young man’s skills and that his success was FAKE! Why? It is because the outcome was predicted. The winner and loser would already be determined.

And here the past/present contrast becomes more than physical. In his youth, he avoided conspicuous tattoos, perhaps to maintain a veneer of respectability and legitimacy — to pass under the radar, even as he acted as a middleman for his hyung. The black hoodie, the sparse ink, the way he let others handle the dirty work of selling drugs — all of it kept him in the gray zone, unremarkable to outsiders, even to Joo Jaekyung. But the scar changes that. A face without scars can blend in; a face with one becomes a story waiting to be told.

The most visible shift in his face is the scar on his forehead—a wound likely inflicted by Joo Jaekyung during their violent, knife-laced fight. Junmin must have decided to use it, when he felt threatened… but it backfired on him. This scar became a permanent reminder of his defeat, carved into flesh like a shameful birthmark. Its position on the forehead makes it impossible to ignore. It not only mars his appearance, but becomes an emblem of inferiority: a symbol that the world (and Baek Junmin himself) can see.

The connection between scar and the tattoo is more than symbolic—it’s thematic. Both involve penetration, cutting, and permanence. In Korean and Japanese culture, many traditional tattoos were made by hand, with needles or even small blades. (chapter 47) The Oni tattoo on Baek Junmin’s throat, where the demon wields a knife, is thus a mirror to his own scar: an acknowledgment of pain and an attempt to reclaim it as power. But there’s a paradox here. The tattoo shouts violence, but the original wound whispered shame. One was chosen; the other was inflicted. The thug is damned to keep this “humiliation” secret.

But his facial transformation doesn’t stop at the scar and the demon ink. Look closer, and you’ll see two small black dots beneath his right eye (chapter 49) —subtle, easily overlooked, yet loaded with meaning. These dots form a quiet counterpoint to the earlier cross tattoo under his left eye. They mirror each other, as if Junmin were trying to impose a kind of symmetry on his face—like a man seeking order through symbols after chaos has marred him. Their placement, right next to the scar, suggests something more: a visual strategy. Perhaps they are meant to divert attention from the wound, reframing the narrative of the face so the scar becomes part of a larger aesthetic rather than a standalone blemish.

Tattoo culture often loads such markings with coded meaning. In some circles, dots under the eye mimic teardrop tattoos, carrying associations of vengeance, mourning, or lived violence. It was, as if the criminal wanted to hide his “tears” and suffering. But Baek Junmin’s dots stop at two, not three—a gesture that resists completion. It’s as though he’s gesturing toward a story without finishing it, marking himself as wounded yet unfinished: they indicate his revenge. If the cross once stood for death or sacrifice, these dots represent his attempt to balance or bury that meaning, even as they draw the viewer’s eye to the very place he was disfigured. His body, and especially his face, has become a site of symbolic warfare—a battlefield of meaning, where shame, defiance, and imitation collide.

Contrast this with Joo Jaekyung, who also bore no tattoos in his youth. (chapter 73) Over time, the champion chose protective symbols— clouds and a dragon-like mask—tattoos designed not to intimidate but to shield. (chapter 1) (chapter 17) They represent protection, not aggression. Where Baek Junmin’s tattoos speak of death and destruction, Jaekyung’s express escape, survival and resilience. Even in their body art, the two boys tell opposing stories: one driven by resentment and darkness, the other by endurance and self-preservation.

But there is more. Baek Junmin’s body itself has become the evidence of a crime—his tattoos and scars forming a visual confession of his descent and his affiliations. Unwittingly, those who empowered him also helped preserve these signs. The very schemers who turned him into a weapon ensured he would one day become proof of their own corruption. In that sense, Baek Junmin truly is a shotgun—not just a tool of violence, but a loaded narrative, ready to backfire on those who pulled the trigger. Moreover, let’s not forget that the CEO vouched for Baek Junmin. (chapter 47) That’s the reason why the lady in red had to defend the Shotgun’s reputation and honor. (chapter 69) Nevertheless, they are here buying time. How so? If the champion were to fight again and even lose, they could bury the investigations. They were also biding time in order to stop investigations and the involvement of the media.

The shift in Baek Junmin’s appearance—from a cautious, hoodie-wearing boy to a tattoo-covered, self-styled villain—maps a descent into self-loathing and performative masculinity. He mimicked the criminal codes around him, but it was a copy without conviction. Hence years later, he is seen wearing a counterfeit Gucci t-shirt and fake jewels. (chapter 47) Is it a coincidence that back then one of the minions was wearing a fake Gucci t-shirt either? (chapter 73) No… he is copying others and in particular Joo Jaekyung whom he resents. Thus their attitude in the ring is similar (ruthless), yet both act that way for different reasons: pain and seriousness (chapter 15) versus fun and schadenfreude (chapter 47). His new persona feels exaggerated, theatrical, hollow. He wanted to become unforgettable, but ended up being another disposable fighter in a system that only remembers champions. Now, his face is ruined: he lost teeth and has a broken nose. (chapter 52) He can never look attractive again, hence he lost his value as MMA fighter for good. Despite the incident, Joo Jaekyung is still popular because he looks so young: (chapter 57) Hence the nurse felt sympathy for him. At the health center, he received his long due punishment. Baek Junmin learned through the hard way what it means fighting without rules. He got deceived himself, thinking that his “hyung” would have his back.

The irony is that the origin of his scar is one Baek Junmin cannot tell without exposing a deeper connection to his past and his criminal ties. And that would be “rigging a game”, making Joo Jaekyung lose his trophy! That’s why the ghost said this: (chapter 54) These words imply that the outcome was predicted… That’s the reason why Joo Jaekyung needs to remember the past. There lies the truth: they are “rigging the games because of bets!

And if our earlier deduction is correct — that the scar was the result of their unrecorded second meeting — then this is not just a wound, but the physical trace of their asymmetrical history. For Joo Jaekyung, that meeting was so brief, so quickly buried, that it left no visible mark. Yet don’t think, he was not traumatized. This changed the athlete forever. For Baek Junmin, it was formative, humiliating, unforgettable. The scar becomes both a reminder of his defeat and a motive for his revenge. (chapter 49) Imagine that the man has to see this scar on his face each day… the symbol of his defeat.

In this light, the knife and the scar are not separate symbols but intertwined: the weapon that failed him, the mark that betrays him, and the silence that binds them together. And now, you comprehend why he selected the Shotgun as stage name. It was to end his “curse”, living in the shadow of the celebrity.

The Shadow Trio: Joo Jaewoong, Baek Junmin, and the Ghost

Baek Junmin’s story becomes even more compelling (chapter 47) when set against two spectral figures in Jinx: the ghost (chapter 54) and Joo Jaekyung’s father, Joo Jaewoong. (chapter 73) These three form a symbolic trio—each marked by violence, marginalization, and a desire to escape the suffocating grip of their environment. Their most immediate shared trait? A smile that feels wrong. A grin not born of joy, but of cruelty, mockery, or powerlessness. Furthermore, all three are associated with trash and garbage: (chapter 47) (chapter 54) (chapter 72) Their words or flat reflect their mindset and role. They are waste, once used, they can be discarded. For me, it becomes obvious that the ghost from the champion’s nightmare is a combination of Joo Jaewoong and The Shotgun. Besides, observe how the father’s corpse (chapter 73) resembles to the “Shotgun” after receiving his “karma”: (chapter 52) Thus I deduce that Baek Junmin’s destiny was to go down the same path of Joo Jaewoong, unless he realizes the real root of his misery!

But let’s return our attention to the grins. The latter are paired with insults—bitter, scornful language that aims not only to hurt but also to humiliate. In all three, we detect a mix of resentment and impotence. And it’s no coincidence that all three are linked to the boxing world: (chapter 54), the father with his fading trophy, Baek Junmin with his own unspoken history in the underground ring and the ghost’s words linked to the champion’s hands. Together, they symbolize the toxic underbelly of combat sports, the place where dreams are sold and consumed.

But this trio isn’t a perfect mirror. There are divergences. Joo Jaewoong, though broken and addicted, had once been a professional athlete. (chapter 73) He had a past worth remembering—something he even clung to in his ruined apartment, preserving his medal and document like a relic. Baek Junmin, by contrast, never belonged to the gym. He wasn’t trained. He never received formal recognition. He fought in shadows, kept to the margins, and remained a “legend” only in the backrooms of Gangwon’s illegal rings because he trusted his “hyung”.

Joo Jaewoong also carried a paradox. He warned his son against the very path he had taken. He knew where it led—through the hands of people toward the underworld. (chapter 73) And yet he couldn’t resist gambling, drinking, or slipping further into that decay. He never kept a low profile. Baek Junmin, too, sought a way out. He almost wore no tattoos back then. His hoodie was black. He preferred to remain invisible. Unlike the younger thugs around him, he wasn’t flaunting power. He was navigating survival. His strategy was to stay hidden long enough to escape. Yet, deep down, (chapter 49). he desired to have a real title and admiration. (chapter 47)

But then something happened. He encountered Joo Jaekyung. And from that moment on, the fantasy of neutrality—the ability to remain on the fence—was destroyed. That’s why he approached Park Juho and questioned his actions afterwards. My avid readers will certainly recall my essay: Facing The Shotgun: Embracing Change The blond haired fighter embodies Change! Their fight which ended with a wound changed everything. Baek Junmin was defeated, scarred, exposed. And the shadows no longer provided cover.

That encounter became the turning point. While Joo Jaewoong gave up on boxing and rotted quietly, Baek Junmin doubled down on resentment and descent. If he couldn’t rise as a legitimate athlete, then he would find power elsewhere—on his own terms. (chapter 47) He wouldn’t become a better fighter; he would become a cheater. His new arena would be modeled after the streets: no rules, no weight classes, no referees. (chapter 47) His ring resembled the very fight that had marked his downfall—the alley, the knife, the shame. Yet here, surrounded by darkness and silence, he could finally rewrite the story. The violence felt earned now. People even died in these fights. To him, this was proof that his victories were real. Hence he smirked. (chapter 47) He couldn’t see that he had merely traded structure for spectacle, skill for savagery. He had confused bloodshed with honor. He was not an athlete, simply a thug.

He remained trapped in the same province, unable to leave (chapter 47)—but now he carried his own name. Baek Junmin! He is no longer Junmin, a teenager who tried to stay in the gray zone! But when he was televised, when the mobsters decided to polish his image and set him against the Emperor, he was reborn: The Shotgun. The stage name marks a shift—not just in visibility, but in function. He was no longer hiding. He could be seen, and therefore used. But by using his real name, he never realized that he could now be prosecuted. (chapter 47) He started dirtying his hands for the high-rollers.

From Junmin to Baek Junmin to The Shotgun—his very name charts a descent. He lost not only his identity, but his humanity. And perhaps most tragically, he never realized the extent of his manipulation. The high rollers never intended to hand him the champion belt. Their goal had been a tie (chapter 51) all along—a spectacle, not a coronation. Hence director Choi was overjoyed when he heard the verdict.(chapter 52) That’s why he earned a lot of money. They used this fight to remove the Emperor from the stage quietly. It was time for him to give up on his throne. If they had let Baek Junmin win the fight, people would have questioned the referees. The Shotgun was there to prepare the coup d’Etat, hence the new champion is someone else. Joo Jaekyung wouldn’t remain so calm hearing this: (chapter 69) They knew the Shotgun wasn’t strong enough. But he didn’t. He mistook cheating for skill. He mistook chaos for greatness. He believed he had earned what was scripted all along.

The Shotgun, the Ghost, and the Father—each longed to be seen. Each was eclipsed by Joo Jaekyung. And all three tried, in their own way, to mark or damage him. They resented him for his “talent, dream and happiness”. But the irony is bitter: none of them succeeded in shaping the Emperor. They only reflected what he overcame.

Hence he became the legend (chapter 47) in the illegal fighting ring, located in Gangwon

This very trait—keeping a low profile— was what initially distinguished him from Joo Jaewoong. The latter imagined that through admiration and recognition, he would get rich. That way, he would leave the place. (chapter 73) However, the opposite happened. Why? Through boxing, he came in touch with the criminal world. Striking is that in the beginning, Joo Jaewoong did the exact opposite to the Shotgun. He became famous because of his self-destructive behavior: (chapter 72) This explicates why Hwang Byungchul condemned the man and sided with the mother. But while Joo Jaewoong and Baek Junmin tried to escape through the sport, they both ended up in the criminal network. And neither made it out.

What unites all three—ghost, boxer, and Shotgun—is their resent towards the main lead. None of them intended to grow old in the same town, under the same weight of poverty, violence, and anonymity. Yet none succeeded. Baek Junmin never made it past the provincial legend status, until he was called to Seoul and brought to MFC. He may have become infamous, but he was never international. Hence the last match took place in Thailand… they were hoping that the new champion would get famous internationally. In the end, their stories are fragments of the same fate: young men crushed by the very world they hoped to transcend.

Conclusion to Part 1: The Puzzle

If Baek Junmin’s character feels complex, it is because he is built like a puzzle—fragmented, hidden, and deeply contradictory. Some pieces lie in the past; others only emerge in his present incarnation. We found signs in his tattoos, in the black hoodie, in the garbage-strewn street, and even in his silence. Each glimpse offered a new facet, and every comparison with Joo Jaekyung and Joo JAewoong cast another shadow into view.

But in the end, the puzzle you’ve read was not just Mingwa’s doing. It was also mine. This is only one way of assembling the fragments.

In the second part, I will try to bring the pieces closer together—to lay out what I believe truly happened between Baek Junmin and the Emperor, and how the Shotgun was born not in glory, but in humiliation.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Following The Teddy Bear 🧸🧸- part 1

The Shirt with the Bear—A Child Marked for Longing

In Jinx, the story of two men begins not in the ring, but in childhood (chapter 72) —and not with fists, but with fabric. (chapter 11) Each boy is introduced wearing a shirt adorned with a teddy bear, a symbol that quietly carries the emotional weight of the entire narrative. (chapter 11) [For more read The Missing Teddy Bear] These bears do not speak, but they tell us everything: about love received and love lost, about betrayal and comfort twisted into burden, and about two boys growing up in the absence of safe arms. (chapter 72)

The first bear appears on Joo Jaekyung’s summer tank top, worn by a small child peeking out from behind a wall. It’s a soft image against a harsh backdrop. (chapter 72) But look closely: the teddy bear wears a blue beanie, a casual hat suited for the outside world—not rest, but readiness. It also has a pair of glasses, a symbol of alertness, self-control, and forced maturity. Most strikingly, its right arm is wrapped in a white bandage. [I can’t recognize the writing below] This is no untouched toy. The bear, like the boy, is already injured. Even comfort is expected to survive harm. To wear such a design is to walk into the world marked not only by childhood, but by pain, exposure, and abandonment.

The second bear belongs to Kim Dan, who wears it not on a summer shirt but on winter pajamas, as he sings joyfully with his grandmother on his birthday. His teddy bear is unadorned, uninjured, and suited for rest. The night setting, the blanket, and the candlelight create a small cocoon of warmth. Yet this moment, too, is fleeting. The very love that nurtures him will later trap him—hoarded, isolated, and turned into duty.

What connects these two images is more than coincidence. Both boys wear gray and blue. While the first color indicates the loss of innocence and depression, the other stands for trust, responsibility, care and tenderness. One is dressed by a mother who vanished too soon. The other is dressed by a grandmother who seems so gentle and caring. Yet, the reality is that doc Dan has also been abandoned. One bear is already broken, the other seems to be still whole. One is worn in daylight, the other in the dark. But both children are being slowly stripped of the right to be protected. Their teddy bears will vanish—replaced by fear, control, and survival.

And yet, this is not just a story of loss. It is also a story of return. By meeting each other, Jaekyung and Dan begin to recover what was buried or better said repressed. The teddy bear reappears—not on fabric, but in gestures of touch, presence, and care. (chapter 68) In time, each man will become the other’s bear (chapter 66): a source of comfort, loyalty, and belonging. To follow the teddy bear is to trace this emotional path—from abandonment to connection, from injury to intimacy, from being held once to being held again.

(chapter 11) [For more read The Missing Teddy Bear] He too was once held (chapter 47), and then claimed, just like his teddy bear. The fate of doc Dan’s toy bear reflects the boy’s. The former was pushed outside the embrace and bed before disappearing. (chapter 21) That’s how the toy bear vanished from the little boy’s life. Thus I deduce that the teddy bear on the pajamas was the last traces of his “childhood”.

Across seasons and silences, both boys are linked by this shared emblem of care—care that was once given, then distorted, lost and finally rediscovered. They are united by the same experience and pain: a phone call linked to a missing mother. To follow the teddy bear is to trace this journey back to tenderness: the long path from abandonment to being held again.

But the presence of the teddy bear, even in symbolic form, does not last. (chapter 72) The shirts are not only outgrown (chapter 72) but also replaced with t-shirts without any design alluding to the vanishing of their identity and forced maturity. (chapter 57) For Jaekyung, the beanie-wearing bear with its wounded arm and wise glasses is the last trace of comfort before reality hardens. What remains is not the child, but the instinct to survive. From the moment the bear vanishes, a new figure begins to emerge—not one held, but one who fights. The boy with the teddy bear becomes the man who can’t rest, who equates existence with usefulness, and usefulness with victory.

The Vanishing of the Teddy Bear: The Birth of a Self-Made Man

In episode 72, readers are finally granted a glimpse into the long-obscured past of the champion. Some of my earlier hypotheses are confirmed—most notably, that Jaekyung’s father was an abusive alcoholic. Others, like the assumption that Joo Jaekyung belonged to a wealthy chaebol family or that the director’s name was Park Jinchul, are clearly disproven. (Though I’m not entirely ready to give up on the rich family theory just yet.) Interestingly, the name of the former coach appears indirectly, displayed on a sign outside the boxing studio: Hwang Byungchul. (Chapter 72) This subtle insertion suggests that the gym wasn’t just his workplace—it was his whole life, his identity, and even his home. Therefore it is not surprising that his name was not mentioned by doc Dan or the other patients. His stay at the Light of Hope implies the loss of his “home”, the gym and as such his identity. At the same time, this image reveals that Jinx-philes should examine each panel very closely, that there’s more than meets the eye.

What the chapter made unmistakably clear is that Jaekyung grew up in poverty and was abandoned at a very young age. His early life was marked not by privilege or education, but by neglect, hunger, and silence. (Chapter 72) This episode doesn’t just show how Jaekyung became a self-made man (chapter 72) (chapter 72) —it makes one thing heartbreakingly clear: he wasn’t raised by a pack of wolves; he raised himself. (chapter 7) The cliché used by Park Namwook in chapter 7 is revealed to be not only ignorant, but cruel. Jaekyung had no home, no real guardian, no one to defend or guide him. He didn’t grow up in the wild—he grew up alone, navigating between violence (abuse and bullying), hunger, and neglect without true protection. This reframes the champion’s identity: not as someone untamable, but as someone who was never tamed because no one cared enough to try. What we witness is not savagery, but simple survival. Thus he had no friend.

That’s how I realized that in such a barren emotional landscape, the “Teddy Bear” learned by mimicking others. With no safe adult figure to model affection or emotional intelligence, he absorbed what was available: the yelling or silent toughness of Hwang Byungchul (chapter 71), performative masculinity and high expectations of Park Namwook, and the explosive violence of his father. (chapter 72) (chapter 5) His behaviors—his hot temper, cold demeanor, blunt speech, and instrumental approach to others—were not innate traits. They were learned strategies, adapted from men who had likewise buried their vulnerability beneath strength or stoicism or brutality. Hence he brought no present to the patient at the hospice. (chapter 71) He became a wolf because he was surrounded by wolves—but deep down, his true nature is closer to a cat’s. This contrast becomes visible in Chapter 72, where his external persona appears as a shy, quiet, more sensitive self. (Chapter 72) Much earlier, in the summer night’s dream (Chapter 44), Kim Dan sensed that hidden nature: not the predator, but the man longing to be held. (Chapter 44) Doc Dan had sensed the real person behind the legend.

But this pattern began to change the moment Kim Dan entered his life.

Unlike the men of his past, Kim Dan shows his emotions (chapter 1), as he treats them as valid, not shameful. He cries, trembles, runs away, he apologizes… He asks questions rather than issuing orders. He names feelings (chapter 45) and respects boundaries. He listens. (chapter 29) And so, like a child learning a new language, Jaekyung begins to mimic him too. (chapter 62) The change is gradual but visible: helping the townspeople, accepting rest, asking to stay close, even touching and speaking more gently. (chapter 71) With Kim Dan, the fighter who once only mirrored power begins to echo tenderness.

The transformation is not only behavioral—it is linguistic. His vocabulary evolves. Once dominated by words like “fight,” “win,” “useful,” and “fuck,” his speech begins to include softer terms: (chapter 62) (chapter 68). These are not just words—they’re the building blocks of intimacy, borrowed from the only person who ever saw through his armor. From mimicking strength, Jaekyung has begun to mimic care. (chapter 71) Jaekyung is not just echoing concern—he is taking gradually responsibility for someone fragile, someone he once overlooked: the “hamster.”

And this is why Chapter 72 strikes with such force. It takes us back—not to his ambition, but to his origin, where the myth of the self-made man begins. We see now that his athletic mindset was not forged in aspiration but in desperation. His worldview was shaped not by hunger for greatness, but by starvation in all its forms.

(Chapter 72) The tragedy is that Hwang Byungchul misread that hunger. When he first met the boy, he saw dirty feet, an empty stomach—literal poverty. (chapter 72) So he fed him. But he never saw the deeper hunger: the absence of love, of being wanted. The coach assumed the problem was solved with food—because he had never gone without care. (chapter 72) He lived with his mother. He was never truly alone. And so he projected stability onto the boy’s silence.

What he thought was grit was grief. What looked like strength was only ever survival. We finally understand why he treats his own body with such brutality, (Chapter 27) because the body, from the very start, was only a tool for survival.

In chapter 72, the young Jaekyung is offered boxing not as sport, but as salvation. The former coach doesn’t comfort the bruised boy or confront the abusive father. (Chapter 72) Instead, he redirects the situation: (Chapter 72) Fighting, from the very beginning, is not about glory—it is about survival. What replaced the teddy bear was not another form of care—it was a system. Cold, brutal, and inescapable. In Jaekyung’s world, money means food, and food means strength. Fighting becomes synonymous with feeding himself. But this isn’t nourishment—it’s maintenance. Thus a nutritionist was hired later. (chapter 22) There is no joy in eating, no comfort at the table. His body becomes a tool, and pain becomes the currency he pays to keep it running.

It’s a vicious circle: he fights to eat, and he eats to fight. Every gesture is bent toward usefulness. His wounds are not treated for healing, but for returning to combat. That’s how he lived all this time. His body is not loved, only weaponized. Even food—the most basic form of comfort—is absorbed into the logic of performance. The equation is cruel but clear: to be seen, you must be useful. And to be useful, you must win. This means that the director’s suggestion and principle was pushed to the extreme. That’s the reason why I come to the following conclusion: there’s someone else involved in the birth of Joo Jaekyung, the Emperor. The evidence for this hypothesis is the champion’s belief: his jinx which is strongly intertwined with sex. Back then, the little boy was too young for sex.

This is the emotional core of the episode: Jaekyung internalizes the idea that his worth is conditional. He is not loved simply because he exists—he is noticed because he punches. (Chapter 26) This is how he enters adulthood, though he was still a child: not through love, but through function. The moment he steps into the ring, he’s no longer a child. He becomes, in the eyes of the adults around him, a product. (Chapter 72) This explicates why Hwang Byungchul never confronted the father or called the cops or the social services. The fact that he asked the little boy (chapter 72) indicates that he was not scared and was envisaging to intervene, until he changed his mind. He hoped to have found a “gem”, a future star. (Chapter 72) This interpretation gets reinforced in the following panel: (chapter 72) The expression (“But reality was like a punch to the gut”) suggests that even the coach himself was struck by how wrong or harsh the outcome turned out to be, but that realization came too late. Yet he blamed the young boy instead of convincing the young boy to postpone the fight. This scene shows that the man’s form of “help” was not rooted in empathy or protection—it was rooted in opportunity and perhaps even short-sighted hope for glory through the boy’s talent. He turned pain into performance.

But there’s a deeper, more insidious lesson embedded in this worldview—one the coach failed to recognize. (Chapter 72) By instilling in the young athlete the belief that survival depends solely on usefulness and performance, he unwittingly fostered a radical sense of self-reliance. The champion learned not only to fight, but to survive alone. If he became rich or succeeded, it wasn’t because of guidance or teamwork, but because of his own strength, talent, and determination. Thus he only employs the personal pronoun “you” and not “we”. In this cold logic, there is no room for mutual dependency, emotional support, or even loyalty. The coach, unconsciously, excluded himself from the athlete’s inner world. He trained a boxer, not a partner. And in doing so, he guaranteed his own eventual irrelevance.

Therefore it is not surprising that he was not contacted after the protagonist moved to Seoul, (chapter 71) why Joo Jaekyung never visited him or expressed his gratitude towards the boxing coach more openly. (Chapter 71) He became successful thanks to his own hard work. It was, as if he had followed the advice to the letter—make it on your own. I am suspecting that the charity event is linked to poor neighborhoods and children, so he didn’t totally erase the man from his memory, he just repressed him. However, it is not astonishing why the director is resentful and even bitter towards Joo Jaekyung. It was, as if he had never helped him. While he blames the man, the coach never recognized his own shortcomings. He didn’t see that his assistance was actually conditional. (Chapter 72) His goal was to create boxers and promote his gym. (Chapter 72) This explicates the absence of real support among the little kids in the end. (chapter 72) They are all rivals. But from my perspective, there exists another reason why the main lead didn’t keep in touch with Hwang Byungchul exposing the director’s blindness. The adult Joo Jaekyung admits that seeing the director’s face brings back “old memories”—not of comfort, but of trauma. (Chapter 71) The implication is unmistakable: Hwang Byungchul reminds him of his father and the abuse. And the latter is strongly intertwined with the mother’s abandonment.

That’s why I believe that going to Seoul wasn’t just about chasing success and looking for the mother—it was an act of escape, a way to break free from the past and its shadows. Joo Jaekyung needed distance not only from his hometown but from everything linked to his father, including boxing. The coach, in offering boxing as salvation, unknowingly tethered the boy to his abuser. (Chapter 72) The coach believed he was giving him a lifeline—but what he gave was a continuation, not a release. This could only increase Joo Jaewoong’s resent and jealousy towards his own son, if the latter became more successful.

Under this new light, we would have an explanation why Jaekyung ultimately chose MMA over boxing. MMA became his attempt to reclaim his body and forge a path not dictated by paternal legacy or the coach’s limitations. It was a way to fight, yes—but differently. On his own terms. This is the bitter irony: Hwang Byungchul believed he had rescued the child, when in reality, he kept him imprisoned in the very logic of pain and survival that was nearly destroying him. He didn’t free him—he simply refined the chains. On the one hand, the father got constantly reminded of his own failure, which could only poison the relationship between father and son, it created a common denominator between them.

This leads to a structural insight: episode 72 actually features two parallel narrators. One is Hwang Byungchul, whose commentary frames most of the memory sequence. (chapter 72) The other is Jaekyung himself. How can we tell? Because the scene of the phone call contains no narration, no framing voice. (Chapter 72) It’s a raw memory—silent and personal—untouched by the coach’s perspective. . (chapter 72) Thus I deduce that the other scenes are a combination of the champion and director’s memories. This would explain such scenes, where Hwang Bung-Chul is not present. (chapter 72)

Besides, Hwang Byungchul believed food and discipline were enough. He never noticed the emotional void beneath Jaekyung’s fighting spirit. What he interpreted as drive (ruthlessness/hunger) was, in truth, longing. He was hoping to have a true home again, to live with his mother. (chapter 72) The contrast between these two memories outlines how the coach misunderstood the athlete. Interesting is that doc Dan assumed that Joo Jaekyung had cut off ties with the former coach due to a quarrel. (Chapter 71) But here, doc Dan was making a huge mistake: he was just projecting his own feelings and relationship with him onto theirs. But he was behaving exactly like the former director: simplification.

Simplification as the Real Barrier to Care

Once again an article from Jennifer Delgado caught my attention: You don’t need to simplify your life: you need to eliminate the useless – and it’s not the same. The article warns us about the danger of simplification. In a turbulent world, we long for a sense of order. To achieve this, we construct simple narratives that comfort our self-image, ease our emotional stress, and help us sidestep ambiguity. However, this approach has a downside. By oversimplifying, we sidestep genuine engagement with complex issues. We overlook inconsistencies, reduce individuals to stereotypes, and avoid the demanding work of truly understanding others.

Instead of asking why, we label. (chapter 9) Instead of listening, we assume. We choose clear lines—strong or weak, good or bad, useful or useless—over the tangled, uncomfortable truth that everyone is both hurting and trying. This refusal to reflect doesn’t just distort reality—it perpetuates it. When we simplify, we don’t heal; we reenact.

In Jinx, all the major characters fall into the trap described in the article on simplification. But here, we’ll focus on four: Park Namwook, Hwang Byungchul, Shin Okja, and Kim Dan. Each, in their own way, simplifies Joo Jaekyung. They misread his strength as certainty, his body as armor, his silence as consent, and his volatility as mere rudeness. They reduce complexity into caricature—and in doing so, they fail to see the man behind the myth.

The manager and the brain scanner

Let’s begin with the manager, Park Namwook. In Chapter 52, (chapter 52),

he blamed Jaekyung for the entire “fiasco” with the post-fight scandal—even though he knew full well that the spray had been tampered with and that a conspiracy was in play. Why blame the victim? Because that’s what simplification offers: a way to avoid moral discomfort and responsibility. Namwook projects his own spoiled, self-centered logic onto Jaekyung, interpreting his athlete’s breakdown as immature drama, rather than what it actually was: the collapse of someone who had been manipulated and betrayed.

This moment reflects exactly what the article warns about: in the face of complexity, people seek easy answers. Instead of facing the multicausal reality—schemes, mistakes, exploitation, emotional exhaustion—Namwook reduces the problem to one person, one reaction, one scapegoat. That’s why the scene from Chapter 61 is so revealing. (chapter 61) In the panel where he sighs, “Haa… I have no idea what’s going on in that guy’s head,” he unintentionally exposes the shallowness of his approach. He imagines that by looking at Jaekyung’s brain—by cracking his psychology—he’ll “understand” him. That way, he can regain control. But this isn’t curiosity. It’s a veiled form of control-seeking. Namwook doesn’t want to know Jaekyung as a person—he wants him to be predictable, manageable, marketable. That line doesn’t reflect concern. It reflects frustration that the human being in front of him refuses to fit the role he’s been assigned. Hence it is logical that his solution to force Joo Jaekyung to return to the gym is to accept a new match. (chapter 69) Namwook’s failure is a professional one, but it’s also deeply emotional: he simplified Jaekyung into a product or spoiled child. And when the product malfunctioned—when pain erupted from silence—he didn’t ask why, he suggested how to make it stop. This is simplification in its most insidious form: not out of malice, but out of discomfort with emotional reality.

Shin Okja: One Problem, One Person, One Solution

If Park Namwook reduces Joo Jaekyung to a tool of success, Shin Okja turns him into a quick fix. (chapter 65) Her mindset follows a consistent logic: one problem, one person, one solution. Kim Dan is overworked and sick? (chapter 65) Then someone stronger should carry him. That “someone” becomes Jaekyung. The doctor should take pills and that’s it.

In Chapter 65, she urges the champion to take Dan back to Seoul. (chapter 65) Her logic is deeply utilitarian—Jaekyung is rich, strong, and dependable. Therefore, he must be fine. She does not consider whether he is emotionally stable, available, or even willing to carry such a weight. The haunted look in his eyes that Hwang Byungchul noticed in Chapter 72 (chapter 72) is invisible to her. She sees a man who has succeeded—and assumes that means he is thriving.

But her pattern is older. If doc Dan had parents, he wouldn’t be suffering so much. Her presence could never replace the parents. (chapter 65) This is totally naive, because certain parents like Joo Jaewoong are not capable of offering love and support. In Chapter 57, when Kim Dan was a child, bullied and humiliated, she told him: “They don’t know what they’re talking about. You still have me.” (chapter 57) This line, though comforting on the surface, is an act of simplification. She makes herself the sole solution to Dan’s complex emotional wounds. Her message: You don’t need justice, friends, or understanding. You need me. That’s how doc Dan was taught not to argue and not to fight back. He just needed to accept the situation.

In doing so, she creates a binary world: safe vs unsafe, solution vs threat. There is no room for nuance, community, or uncertainty. And this has long-lasting consequences. Dan grows up believing that support must come from one person, that relationships must be compensatory and binary. When the grandmother sends him away again—this time to Jaekyung—it mirrors the same pattern. “You need help? You’re sad? Then go with him.” That’s the reason why she is treating him as a “child”.

Like the article on simplification warns, such narratives are comforting but misleading. They prevent people from seeing the full scope of reality. Shin Okja never asks Dan about his friendships, his boundaries, his career goals. As she admitted herself in Chapter 65, (chapter 65) she doesn’t know anything about his life. That’s the price of simplification: you get a clean answer, but not the truth.

Gloves Instead of Grace: Hwang Byungchul’s Simplified Salvation

The “old coot”, too, clings to the myth of the invincible fighter—hungry, gritty, unstoppable. He fondly remembers the wounds, the sweat (chapter 72), the hunger, as if these alone forged greatness. But he fails to see how the very system he created helped drain the boy of more than just his tears—it emptied him of safety, of rest, of care. He only addressed the visible wounds and stomach pangs. (chapter 72) The gym’s director gave food and gloves, but not love. This was relegated to his “mother”. (chapter 72) He never addressed emotional starvation because he never recognized it; he himself was never truly alone—he always had his mother. And his misjudgment started from the very first encounter: seeing Jaekyung as a fierce cub (chapter 72) or as Joo Jaewoong’s heir rather than a hurt child.

Even in the present, the former director continues this pattern of simplification. He blames the champion for returning to the ring (chapter 70), as though he chose freely, overlooking how coercion and image control operate in their world. He accuses him of ruining his career with the suspension, even though it was orchestrated by others. (chapter 70) He judges him without knowing the circumstances. This projection is not new. In the past, he blamed the father, (chapter 72) Joo Jaewoong, for becoming a thug—but when another former wrestler also ends up as a loan shark’s lackey (chapter 17), it becomes clear that there exists a recurring link between athletic decline and criminal paths. The man fails to notice this connection. He sees these outcomes as individual moral failings, not systemic failures.

That’s why he never judged the mother for abandoning her child. (chapter 72) In his eyes, her departure was understandable (“of course”), even rational—because the father was “rotten.” But by justifying her decision, he erases the damage it caused: a bleeding, unconscious boy left to fend for himself. (chapter 72) In his worldview, offering a meal and a pair of boxing gloves should suffice to compensate for parental abandonment and violence. As if a jab and a protein shake could replace a mother’s embrace. This reveals the core of his failure: he confused intervention with salvation, and survival with healing.

So in the end, Hwang Byungchul didn’t just witness the system—he upheld it. (chapter 72) He became its idealistic defender, blind to its contradictions. He believed the gym could cure what society broke, but all he taught was how to endure, not how to recover. I would even add that when the boxers didn’t succeed in their career, they could end up using their skills for the mafia. This worldview is a product of his own simplification, his refusal to examine the deeper rot within the system he served. He didn’t suggest school and titles in order to escape poverty. And this is why he never truly saw the boy disappear. He missed the moment the light faded from Joo Jaekyung’s eyes, because he was never watching for it. In chasing strength, he forgot to safeguard the soul.

The tragedy is this: while he wanted to save the child (chapter 72), he trained the champion instead. That’s why the previous panel resembles a lot to this one. (chapter 40) Kim Dan saw the result and got fascinated. And what we’re left with now is a man whose pain and exhaustion are almost unseen (chapter 72) —until Hwang Byungchul notices the change and confided it to doc Dan. Someone should start listening to the silence after the spotlight vanishes.

This is where simplification becomes most tragic—not only because it hides pain, but because it reinforces it. It keeps people locked in roles, acting out silent scripts they never chose. To truly follow the teddy bear—to return to care, to softness, to a place where people are held and not used—each character must confront the simplifications they relied on. They must admit what they refused to see.

Kim Dan: The simple complexity

And then there is Kim Dan, who utters the most painful truth. In a moment of illness and exhaustion, he says, (chapter 64) He reproached him about being used and abandoned. But he was forgetting his own actions. He had also used the athlete, he had also left the bed in a hurry the next morning. Yes, he, too, simplified Jaekyung. That night, he said nothing. And in doing so, he confirmed the belief Jaekyung had internalized: I’m not someone who gets cared for. I’m someone who is tolerated, used, replaced. Like mentioned above, his mind-set was strongly influenced by Shin Okja. On the other hand, I noticed that the protagonist embodies complexity. How so? On the surface, he appears simple: obedient, quiet, weak, submissive, passive. (chapter 70) But beneath that surface lies a dense emotional world— love, grief, guilt, exhaustion, intelligence, empathy and moral clarity — that few characters in Jinx truly perceive. He stands for the heart! And everyone knows that “the heart has its reasons, of which reason knows nothing.” (Blaise Pascal) Because he acts from a place that defies the cold logic of power, hierarchy, and survival, he operates on emotional intelligence (chapter 71) —unspoken understanding, silent resistance, instinctive empathy. It’s no coincidence that his presence disrupts every system he enters: the gym, the hospital, the champion’s life.

By following his heart (even when that heart is heavy, broken, or exhausted), he becomes the very element that exposes the inadequacy of every simplified explanation—whether it’s Park Namwook’s control, Shin Okja’s projection, or even Jaekyung’s own self-image.

In short: Kim Dan is the counter-force to simplification because he lives in the in-between—where care and contradiction, pain and tenderness, duty and desire coexist. And now, you comprehend why Joo Jaekyung needs to realize the existence of his heart and as such his love for doc Dan. Only then, both will be able to understand each other’s pain and heart.

Healing can only begin, when Jaekyung stops being a performance (chapter 70), and starts being a person. The racing heart… which has already happened. And this observation leads me to this scene: (chapter 58) Kim Dan was erasing this memory, he wanted to forget the star The Emperor. This act of forgetting wasn’t an escape from pain; it’s an active rejection of a myth that was keeping him emotionally paralyzed. As long as Jaekyung remained “The Emperor,” he could not be touched, questioned, or truly known. By forcing himself to forget that image, Kim Dan was making space for something more vulnerable and human to emerge. To conclude, thanks to this painful decision, he was able to perceive Joo Jaekyung the man. That’s why he acted so fiercely in front of him later. So by meeting the director, doc Dan is now able to see the child or the “cat” in his fated partner. That’s how it dawned on me why Mingwa let doc Dan suffer from addiction, depression and insomnia. Because these afflictions defy simplification. They resist instant solutions (pills). They demand patience, presence, and a refusal to look away.

Kim Dan, in a sense, becomes the embodiment of complexity. While others in Jaekyung’s life simplified him—manager, coach, fans—Kim Dan’s own struggle becomes the key to unlocking the champion’s inner contradictions. He doesn’t just offer pills; he becomes someone who stays through the night. That’s the true antidote to trauma: not fixes, but presence. But he is sick now too. (chapter 71)

Hwang Byungchul and the spotlight

Since the start of Jinx, I have been examining names, as the author made it clear that they carry symbolic weight and the former coach’s full name—Hwang Byungchul (황병철) is no exception. He encapsulates both his past role and his evolving narrative function.

Hwang (황) means yellow, a color tied to imperial symbolism but also to artificial light, visibility, and performance which is reflected in his offer: (chapter 72) Fittingly, Hwang Byungchul believed that survival came through being useful and seen. His guiding principle was clear: become a champion to put food on the table. Fighting was a mean to escape poverty, and success was measured by status, not inner healing.

But the given name Byungchul (병철) reveals even more.

  • Byung (병) includes the meanings:
    • Soldier → He encouraged Jaekyung to train with military-style rigidity, enforcing a code of strength over vulnerability.
    • Jar/container → He emotionally bottled things up, never showing weakness or affection.
    • Disease → A symbol of his terminal condition, but also the philosophical “illness” he passed on—survival at the cost of love and life. Joo Jaekyung was never taught how to enjoy life.
    • long, hunger → Perhaps the most revealing meaning. He is a man of long hunger—not necessarily for food, which he did provide to the children in the neighborhood, but for recognition, belonging, and emotional acknowledgment. He hoped to create a talent. He stood in the background, feeding mouths but staying unnamed, invisible. This hunger lives on in his relationship with Joo Jaekyung. He could never claim the boy as “his” athlete—not publicly, not even privately. Hence the picture remained in his notebook hidden. Because Jaekyung never spoke of his past, never acknowledged the gym, never looked back. It looked like the boy who was fed did not remember the man who fed him. The silence wasn’t just about pride—it was about pain. In a way, both of them were waiting for the other to speak first. Thus, Hwang Byungchul’s name becomes a silent confession: he symbolizes the emotional and symbolic hunger that surrounded Jaekyung’s early life—one that was addressed physically but never emotionally. The coach’s spotlight was always directed outward, toward performance, visibility, survival—but what he longed for most was to be seen by the one he helped raise.
    • To scold or punish → A reflection of the discipline and shame-based teaching he used.
    • To end or exterminate → This meaning could refer to his imminent passing, but it could allude to something else. Once a guardian of the system, he may unwittingly become its undoer. While he never openly questioned the structures of boxing or the MFC, he long dismissed corruption as the fighters’ personal failing—not a systemic flaw. He maintained a clear-cut divide between the “glamorous” fighting world and the criminal underworld, but reality has proven more entangled. In his final days, by being confronted with the truth and with Kim Dan’s care, he might symbolically put an end to the illusion that sustained his lifelong simplifications.
  • 철 (Chul / Cheol) was already examined before (see Park Jinchul)
    • Iron → Symbol of cold strength, discipline and inflexibility.
    • Philosophy → He lived by a code, but one that lacked space for human frailty.
    • To pierce → He trained the champion to break through his limits, but also inflicted wounds he never tended to.
    • Season/time → A fading era. His presence now marks the end of one ideological “season” and the start of something else—perhaps more human.

Together, Hwang Byungchul stands for a legacy of rigid survivalism under the spotlight, but also for the potential to expose its limits. His name doesn’t just mirror what he was—it foreshadows what he might help undo. His final lesson may be the most important: that the system he clung to was always built on a false binary. Striking is that when the director interacted with the main lead in the beginning, he didn’t pay attention to the boy’s clothes and as such to the teddy bear. He only looked at the boy’s body (the gaze (chapter 72), the size (chapter 72), his bruises (chapter 72) and asked for his name. This exposes his priorities and his blindness. He didn’t truly perceive the child in him, he was seeing him through the lenses of a boxer and director. Hence he underestimated the absence and abandonment of the mother.

The Absent Embrace: Of Bears, Mothers, and Fathers

If the teddy bear symbolizes maternal protection and warmth, then its absence in Joo Jaekyung’s childhood flat speaks volumes. (chapter 72) The boy didn’t have a blanket. He slept beside garbage. His father lay drunk and sprawled out, blind to his child’s needs. There was no teddy bear, no shared bed, no real cover. (chapter 21) Unlike Kim Dan, who grew up falling asleep next to his grandmother, accustomed to someone sharing his blanket, Jaekyung was emotionally and physically on his own from the start. Moreover, observe that the little boy had toys (chapter 21) contrary to Joo Jaekyung.

And yet, there was that one telling detail: the young Jaekyung once wore a shirt with a bandaged teddy bear on it. (chapter 72) Far from offering comfort, it mirrored his own battered condition. The implication? Someone saw—and chose not to act. That shirt represents the mother’s only trace. She was likely the one who picked out his clothes; an abusive man like Joo Jaewoong wouldn’t bother with childish designs. Which means the mother did witness his suffering or anticipated his fate, but chose to simply walk away without leaving a letter. IMO she didn’t leave an explication for her departure, hence the little boy came to imagine that she had left because of his addicted and violent father. (chapter 72) However, it is clear that here the protagonist was simplifying his mother’s decision, just like Hwang Byungchul. If she had truly cared for him, she would have taken him, but she did not.

She didn’t take her books either. (chapter 72) We see them wrapped up, left behind in the trash-littered apartment. This suggests she had been educated, possibly a nurse or a doctor. How did I come to this hypothesis? It is because this image reminded me of doc Dan’s departure from the penthouse. (chapter 53) He is a physical therapist. He had also arranged his books together: (chapter 53) And what did the hamster think while gathering his belongings? (chapter 53) So I deduce that the woman left them behind because she didn’t need them, she had enough or she no longer cared. But there is more to it!

Among the garbage (chapter 72), there are parcels stacked on the commode and table—some of them are wrapped and seemingly untouched. Their presence is striking. Unlike the strewn bottles and plastic bags, these boxes don’t speak of decay, but of intention. They hint at a moment when someone had plans—however fleeting. And yet, their sealed state raises unsettling questions: Who were these parcels for? And why were they never opened?

Two possibilities emerge.

First, the parcels might have belonged to Jaekyung’s mother. She came into that apartment with books and packages, suggesting she was educated and had once imagined a different life. But she never unpacked. The fact that the books remained sealed indicates she was already preparing to leave or they had moved recently. These were not signs of building a home, but of biding time. If she made purchases, they were not for her son. (chapter 27) There are no toys, no supplies for a child—just quiet evidence of a woman focused on herself, her escape perhaps already underway.

The second possibility is darker still: that even while living there, she bought things—but not for Jaekyung. She may have tried to create comfort for herself, or imagined she could still pursue personal goals, all while ignoring the battered child in the room. This would explain the absence of affection and the lack of a maternal trace. The teddy bear on his shirt, with its bandage, might have been an unconscious projection of his condition—but it was never followed by comfort or care. In contrast, when Kim Dan orders board games for the adult champion in episode 27, it is the first time we see a parcel meant for joy, connection, and healing. What the mother withheld, the doctor finally provides.

Remember how I connected the two teddy bears together! (chapter 72) (chapter 11) Is it a coincidence that we have age and a birthday together? And what had doc Dan left in that house? (chapter 53) The jacket… Because of these parallels, I come to develop the following theory. Joo Jaekyung knew his age, because he had just celebrated his birthday. This scene definitely took place in the summer. (chapter 72) And in my opinion, she must have offered him this t-shirt before her betrayal and abandonment. And she had definitely planned it. That’s why I believe that doc Dan’s departure (chapter 53) must have triggered the champion’s abandonment issues. He had the impression to relive the past. The mother had left him behind in the dark unexpectedly. (chapter 53) Thus Joo Jaekyung started drinking and recalling his repressed traumas. This explains why he didn’t look for doc Dan at first and why he hates his birthday and presents. (chapter 45) And now, you comprehend why I wrote above that I was not giving up on the idea that the champion could belong to a different world too. She was not accustomed to take care of a household. She wasn’t used to cook either. She would order food, hence we have the empty bowls. (chapter 72) Remember how the champion reacted, when he tasted his cooking for the first time? (chapter 22) He feared deception here, a sign that he must have experienced such a lie before. For me, everything is pointing out that this woman was incapable of becoming responsible for her own child. She left quietly and early enough that even Hwang Byungchul, who knew of her departure, didn’t recognize the boy (chapter 72). In other words, the mother was already emotionally absent long before she physically vanished. The bandaged bear thus becomes a silent accusation: you saw, and you left. Therefore it is not astonishing that Joo Jaekyung made such a mistake: (chapter 68) His mistakes concerning doc Dan are the evidences that he was not taught how to take care of someone. His errors indicates his innocence and purity.

This motherlessness is the defining wound of Jaekyung’s early life. No pictures, no memories, no bedtime rituals. In contrast, Kim Dan’s early childhood, while also marked by loss, retained traces of maternal love. His duck-print shirt, the framed photo with his grandmother, and the teddy bear he once held—all speak of touch, affection, and care. Dan was kissed (chapter 44) before he was abandoned. Jaekyung was never treated properly before. He was not claimed at all. It is important because the champion mentioned the word “home” (chapter 43) for the first time shortly after receiving a mysterious phone call. (chapter 43) And it is linked to his birthday. This resembles a lot to this scene: (chapter 72) That’s the reason why I am coming to the following hypothesis. The mysterious caller must be related to the “sulky cat” or “wolf”. (chapter 37) (chapter 49) Is it the mother or someone acting as an invisible guardian who knows the champion’s past? What do you think?

Now let’s turn our attention to the father. (chapter 72) Joo Jaewoong—whose name literally evokes the bear (웅, 雄 or 熊)—was not a gentle protector, but a violent alcoholic and drug addicted, a man who “strayed from the straight and narrow” (chapter 72). (chapter 72) A fallen boxer whose strength devolved into brutality. He started working for the mafia, but became entangled in their web. (chapter 72) The bear here is not a comforting toy but a dangerous beast. He loomed large over the child’s life not as a shield, but as a shadow. It is important because doc Dan is hearing for the second time that fighting has connections to the underworld. (chapter 47)

Even the name of the gym (chapter 54) —Team Black—bears symbolic weight. Unlike other athletes who proudly attach their names to their legacy, Joo Jaekyung avoids personal branding. He doesn’t call it “Jaekyung’s Gym” or “Joo Athletics.” Instead, he opts for anonymity, for darkness. It’s as if he’s building a fortress rather than a legacy, a space that offers power and protection, but no trace of where he came from.

This choice could reflect a deep desire to erase or hide his family history, especially from his father. The name “Joo Jaewoong” still echoes in the neighborhood (chapter 72), tied to shame, alcoholism, and downfall. Naming the gym after himself might invite that past back into the spotlight. Worse—it might give his father, or others like him, an opening to claim a share in his success.

Moreover, we should not overlook the emotional contradiction: Jaekyung’s former coach and his coach’s mother once formed a kind of surrogate household. They cooked for the boys, gave them structure, and in doing so gave Jaekyung a place to belong. But that environment was also where the champion was “trained,” not truly raised. The tenderness was limited to the mother, who is now dead and Joo Jaekyung knows it. Hence he didn’t ask about her. (chapter 71) I am quite certain that her vanishing must have pained him. She embodies the only good motherly role model in his life which explains why Joo JAekyung has a soft heart for Shin Okja. He knew to speak prettily and gently because of her. It is clear that the director influenced his dream, creating a gym where his mother would be part of it. (chapter 72) By not naming the gym after his mentor, Jaekyung draws a clear line: this is mine, but not a home—not for children, not for mothers, and not for fathers. Thus I came to deduce that Joo Jaekyung must have experienced something related to his mother, which Baek Junmin must know. But after the release of chapter 73, it becomes evident that their short but painful encounter took place shortly after the father’s death.

In this light, Team Black isn’t just a gym. It’s a sealed space—unbranded, unsentimental, and deliberately impersonal. A hidden monument to the self-made man who refuses to be claimed. The irony is that this name helped Park Namwook to claim the gym as his own. (chapter 22)

Thus, Joo Jaekyung’s story becomes one of inverted symbols. Where a bear should offer comfort, it signals danger and suffering. Where a shirt should offer warmth, it marks injury. Where a home should provide shelter, it holds darkness, silence and hunger. No wonder why the man fears the night! And this is why the champion had to become a bear himself—not the soft kind, but the feared kind. His “taming” by Kim Dan is not just romantic; it’s reparative. The man who never had a teddy bear may yet become one. I would even say, he is on the verge of becoming a mother bear defending her “curb”.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Director 🐺 🦉 and Me 🪶 🦆 (part 2)

In the two most recent chapters of Jinx, Kim Dan finds himself caught between two “directors.”: one from the hospice where he works (chapter 70), the other a former “boxing” coach and Jaekyung’s ghostly mentor figure, now terminally ill and confined to a shared room. (chapter 71)These two older men mirror different systems of power: the current director, a seemingly kind authority figure who represents institutional control masked as care; and the former coach, a fallen patriarch whose past decisions shaped Jaekyung’s identity and pain. This part of the essay focuses first on the hospice director, and how his interaction with Kim Dan reveals the young man’s invisible burden and social isolation. In the final section, we will turn to the old coach, now reduced to a ghost in his own story, and explore how the symbolism of owls, coots, and crickets illuminates his emerging relationship with Kim Dan.

A Sick Day or a Day Off?

The hospice director’s words to Kim Dan may seem caring at first glance. He comments on his exhaustion— (chapter 70) his dark circles, his nodding off—and suggests him to take a day off. (Chapter 70) But look closely: he notes that Dan has never used a sick day, and yet deliberately avoids recommending one now. Instead, he offers the less costly alternative: a personal day off, unpaid.

This language shift is strategic. A formal sick day would require the hospice to compensate Dan for rest. By subtly placing the burden back on him—“Why don’t you take better care of yourself?”—the director protects the institution’s budget while maintaining a façade of concern. His framing pathologizes Dan’s exhaustion as a personal failure (chapter 70), not a consequence of institutional neglect or overwork.

The very conversation betrays that Dan’s employment terms are different from those of the full-time staff. Unlike the nurses, who are likely on standard contracts with structured shifts, Dan is spoken to as someone expected to self-manage his workload and well-being. He’s the one deciding when he picks up a shift. (Chapter 70) The director doesn’t say, “We’ll adjust your schedule,” or, “Let me talk to HR.” He simply tells Dan to take a day off (chapter 70), as if the responsibility for that decision—both logistically and financially—rests solely on him. This means that he is working exactly like he did in the past as a waiter or courier: paid by the hour. (Chapter 59) This reinforces the idea that Dan is not covered by the same protections, and that he operates outside the stable framework of regular employment.

Ironically, the director’s comment comes after Kim Dan has already taken a first step toward recovery. (Chapter 70) In episode 66, Jaekyung dragged Dan to Seoul over the weekend (chapter 66) to visit a sleep specialist, where Dan received a diagnosis and first treatment for his “sleepwalking” condition. The two spent the night in Seoul. Upon returning to the seaside town, Jaekyung received a call (chapter 69) and left again the next morning for Seoul in order to meet the CEO, marking a separation between the two after their return.

During this gap, Kim Dan must have returned to work, most likely resuming his afternoon shift. In episode 71, his presence is later noted during both afternoon (chapter 71) and night hours (chapter 71), suggesting his ongoing pattern of overworking. In episode 71, Kim Dan is seen walking alone through the hospice hallway—unaccompanied, unnoticed. This quiet image stands in stark contrast to the earlier scene when, after nearly drowning, he was carried in by Joo Jaekyung and immediately met by a nurse and the hospice director, both actively working together that night. (chapter 60) Back then, his suffering was visible, his crisis institutionalized. Striking is that after that night, the hospital director never asked doc Dan to take a sick leave or to a day off. In fact, it took some time before making such a suggestion. Moreover, as if a single day off would make a huge difference. But now, despite his clear exhaustion and illness, doc Dan moves through the same space in silence (chapter 71) Nothing has changed: no one beside him, no one monitoring him. This comparison exposes the hospice director’s hypocrisy and superficial care.

His loneliness has been institutionalized. That he is left to walk alone, reflects how thoroughly his pain has been folded into the daily background noise of the hospice—a place that is supposed to care, yet chooses to remain passive. Finally, don’t forget that the nurse 1 blamed doc Dan for not taking care of himself properly, because (Chapter 57) his grandmother would worry about him. Yet, during that night, Shin Okja doesn’t seem to be plagued by worries for her own grandson’s health. She sleeps peacefully.

But let’s return our attention to the conversation between the physical therapist and his boss. When did this recommendation take place? The timeline becomes crucial here. We learn that Kim Dan told his landlord he was taking the day off (chapter 70) only after the Seoul trip. This must mean that his conversation with the hospice director—where he was urged to rest—took place between his return from Seoul and the announced day off. We also know that (chapter 69) the champion came back from Seoul in the evening and found footprints near the house, suspecting Dan had wandered to the ocean while drunk. These prints were left that same day (chapter 70), when Kim Dan chased the puppies that had stolen the shoes. Based on the shadows and the position of the sun (chapter 70), I am deducing that this scene took place during the afternoon. I used these images as a contrast, where the author made it clear that these scenes took place in the morning. (Chapter 65) (chapter 57) We can determine the time based on the position of the sun and the shadows.

Thus, it is clear: the director judged Dan as neglectful after he had met the sleep specialist and as such sought medical treatment. (Chapter 70) Thus his reproach is not entirely correct.

Furthermore, observe the vocabulary the man employed in front of his employee. They are all revolving around visual symptoms (dark circles, nodding off) but he does not ask questions. His response is based entirely on appearances—looking instead of examining, noticing instead of investigating. I also noticed that he is using the same expressions than his own staff. (Chapter 57) My idea is that the staff are his eyes and ears. Hence he doesn’t examine the physical therapist closely. He never offers a health check or having him tested. (Chapter 13) But when Kim Dan drops a patient Dan by mistake (chapter 59), the director acts immediately—not because of concern for the elderly man, (chapter 59) but because he fears that the patient’s family might sue the hospice. The elderly man’s condition was formally assessed, documented, and protected. This scene exposes that they can act in an emergency (taking tests). In contrast, Kim Dan—who is visibly unwell—is not offered even a basic check-up. His illness is reduced to tired eyes and missed sleep, framed as personal negligence rather than systemic failure. He is looked at, not truly seen. While the patient is treated as a legal liability, Dan is treated as disposable labor—an expendable worker whose wellbeing doesn’t justify institutional resources. Thus in my opinion, the director of the hospice suggested that doc Dan took a day off in order to ensure that he had done his duty, taking care of his employee.

Another striking detail appears when we notice that the elderly patient (chapter 59) who fell due to Kim Dan’s dissociative state in episode 59 seems to reappear in episodes 70 and 71. (Chapter 70) His distinct appearance—bald with tufts of grey hair—makes him easily recognizable. What stands out this time is not the accident, but the aftermath of it. (Chapter 70) When Kim Dan, again lost in thought, almost bypasses his room, it is this very patient who gently brings him back to reality with the teasing words, “Earth to Doc Dan.” His tone is not accusatory. On the contrary, it’s forgiving—light-hearted even.

This interaction subtly reshapes the narrative of the earlier fall. Rather than harboring resentment, the patient acknowledges Kim Dan’s humanity and affirms his worth with humor and patience. He doesn’t define the physical therapist by his mistakes. This response contrasts sharply with the institutional culture around Dan, where overwork and exhaustion are framed as incompetence and emotional suffering is ignored.

The recurrence of this particular patient also bridges episode 59 with the present, suggesting that we are circling back—this time not just to repeat the past, but to re-examine it. The closer we get to this patient, the closer we move to the emotional core of the narrative: that dignity and recognition are often found not in the powerful, but in those who share space quietly and see clearly. Moreover, this elderly man, like the old coach, becomes another unexpected mirror—reminding both Dan and the viewer that grace can come from unexpected places, and that sometimes, even in a failing system, individuals choose not to perpetuate its cruelty.

2. The Reality of Double Shifts and a Different Contract

Dan’s return to work was not just symbolic—it was physically demanding. Clues throughout the chapters suggest that Dan has been working double shifts. In episode 62, the champion came to the hospice thinking that his morning shift had ended. : (chapter 62) However, the main lead was still working, thus the athlete concluded that he had made a mistake. He probably assumed that he had the afternoon shift. Hence Joo Jaekyung only returned to the landlord’s house at sunset! So during that day, he must have worked for the morning and afternoon shift. Even here, the doctor was suggested to give a special treatment to the star. (Chapter 62) Then in episode 71, we see him working in both afternoon (chapter 71) and night scenes, (chapter 71) always present, never resting. This points to a likely hourly contract with minimal protection. He is not integrated into the regular team of nurses. (Chapter 71) Therefore we see him in company of different nurses. (Chapter 57) He moves between teams, unanchored and isolated. This also explicates why the nurses still have no name. To conclude, his contract implies that Dan is paid by the hour or per shift, without salary-based benefits. I am suspecting, the regular nurses likely operate under different contracts, which could include fixed shifts, team integration, and better protections.

This difference is subtly confirmed in the way the director speaks to him—not as a protected employee, but as a freelancer or temp worker who must self-regulate. The fact that the director doesn’t mention adjusting his workload or seeking support through institutional channels reinforces this. Dan is expected to disappear and reappear without institutional backup, like a shadow on call.

How could this happen? For me, there exist different causes. First, we shouldn’t forget the impact of the incident with the switched spray, doc Dan definitely blamed himself. Thus it undermined his confidence to ask for a higher salary. In addition, in the locker room, the celebrity had made the following reproach. He was obsessed with money, he was greedy. (Chapter 51) Then the main lead was thinking that he was only staying there temporarily. (Chapter 57) Finally, we shouldn’t overlook that his job is strongly intertwined with his grandmother’s situation. He needed to get a job there, hence he couldn’t negotiate his contract. As long as he had a job as physical therapist, he could only be “happy”.

And crucially, he is funding someone else’s comfort.

His grandmother, Shin Okja, lives alone (Chapter 71) in a room designed for six patients—indicated by the six plastic protections outside the door. (Chapter 71) She has her own care taker (chapter 65), while the former coach shares a room with three others and lacks personal care. (Chapter 71) Shin Okja lives like a VIP. Yes, the new version of this situation: (chapter 52) That’s the reason why Mingwa made another allusion to this particular scene (chapter 52) in episode 71: (chapter 71) The members from Team Black visited him not only empty-handed, but didn’t try to cheer him up at all. This shows the rudeness from Park Namwook and the others. But let’s return our attention to the gentle grandmother.

This kind of arrangement requires money—and Kim Dan is paying for it with his body. The overwork, the lack of sleep, the burnout—it all goes to ensure that she is kept comfortable, while he is silently collapsing.

And yet, when the director lectures him about self-care (chapter 70), overlooking the burden doc Dan is going through. No one is asking him about his finances. 

Dan, in contrast, has no one yelling for him. Not even his grandmother advocates on his behalf. Instead, she goes around him and asks Joo Jaekyung for help—ignoring the staff and the institution altogether. (Chapter 65) She even portrays the hospital in a rather negative light. The irony is that she asked someone who was in recovery (chapter 65), and he has now a cold. (Chapter 70) If something were to happen to the physical therapist, who is responsible? This means, there’s no one at the Light of Hope paying attention to doc Dan. It is, as if Dan has no family, and within the hospice structure, no voice. Yet, I saw a change in the following panel. (Chapter 70) For the first time, someone spoke on the physical therapist’s behalf. He should make sure not to be taken advantage of. Secondly, when he pointed out (chapter 70) that the star was staying there because of him, he was already implying that doc Dan had power over the athlete. He should voice his own opinion and thoughts to ensure to protect his own interests. From my point of view, this “former fighter” will definitely side with the young man and protect him.

The conversation between Kim Dan and the hospice director might, at first glance, read as kind-hearted concern. The reality is that the day off allows the institution to appear humane while avoiding any financial or legal responsibility for Dan’s well-being. At the same time, this situation appears to confront Shin Okja with a bitter truth: that even though her grandson became a physical therapist—a role associated with education, skill, and respectability—his social standing hasn’t changed. He still works long hours, earns little, and lives on the margins of the system. His body is as exploited as when she sold vegetables on the street. (Chapter 47) The uniform may be different, but the precarity remains the same. (Chapter 65) This revelation may fuel her decision to send him back to Seoul—not just out of care, but as a reflection of her lifelong obsession with money and upward mobility. Crushed by the burden of the loan and haunted by her own failures, she sees Seoul not only as a place of opportunity but as the only terrain where financial survival is possible. In her logic, professional success is meaningless without wealth, and in the seaside town, doc Dan’s work brings neither. So she urges him to leave—not because she doesn’t care, but because she has equated worth with earning power. Her mindset, forged by debt and despair, blinds her to the emotional and physical toll this cycle continues to take on her grandson.

Blamed for His Own Collapse

In this way, Dan becomes the perfect target for blame. (Chapter 70) Everyone—from the director to the celebrity (chapter 71) to even the grandmother—assumes he is responsible for his condition. They blame him for drinking, for being tired, for looking unwell. But no one looks beyond the surface and investigates the causes. No one is wondering about the financial burden, the trigger for his fears (chapter 71), the emotional isolation, or the systemic overwork that drive him there. Let’s not forget that the young man drank again after hearing that Joo Jaekyung would return to the ring soon. This shows that the incident with the switched spray and its consequences left deep wounds in his heart and soul.

This is the core injustice: Dan is punished for the symptoms of a system that depends on his silence. He is structurally invisible, morally judged, and emotionally abandoned. And he accepts it—because he believes he has no right to ask for more.

A Misread Life: Misinterpretation from All Sides

The tragedy is that no one fully understands Dan’s emotional or physical condition:

  • The hospice director, while not malicious, interprets Dan’s exhaustion as neglect rather than the result of a crushing schedule, sickness and unresolved traumas
  • Joo Jaekyung, still unaware of Dan’s grueling double shifts, wrongly assumes that Dan returns home at the end of the day. (Chapter 71) This explains why, after returning sick, he told Dan not to share the bed that night—he thought Dan was coming home to rest. In reality, Dan was remaining at the hospice for his second shift.
  • Even the former athlete, now living at the hospice, overlooks Dan completely (chapter 71) when his former student takes him to the rooftop, too focused to nagging to Joo Jaekyung. Dan, standing in the hallway, is ignored—another ghost drifting through an institution that doesn’t truly see him. He doesn’t wonder why this young man is working during the night later. (Chapter 71) He even asks him to stay by his side, not noticing his dark circles and paleness.

This lack of recognition is not incidental. It stems from Kim Dan’s quiet, damaging belief that love must be earned through sacrifice. His philosophy confuses devotion with self-erasure, service with affection. 

But being constantly available—emotionally, physically, professionally—without acknowledgment carries a cost. As the article “Being Unconditional Makes You Invisible” explains, this kind of unreciprocated availability leads to silent emotional fatigue, internalized resentment, and, most painfully, a growing disconnection from the self. Dan is always the one listening, giving, enduring. But in doing so, he becomes invisible in the very systems he sustains. His self-esteem quietly erodes under the weight of one-sided expectations. His relationships, especially with the hospice and his grandmother (chapter 53), become lopsided forms of dependency. And his unspoken needs—his own exhaustion, grief, and longing—are never tended to, not even by himself. He is present for everyone, yet no one is truly present for him. That’s the reason why Shin Okja knows nothing about her own grandson’s interests and dreams. (Chapter 65)

The hospice director’s mistake is not his tone, but his timing and framing. He tells Dan to rest after Dan has already taken responsibility for his condition—after he has gone to Seoul, received a diagnosis, and returned to work. The true mistake lies not in what the director says, but in what he doesn’t offer:

  • No formal sick leave
  • No referral to an in-house physician
  • No acknowledgment of Dan’s effort to heal
  • And most importantly, no long-term security—no shift to a better contract or stable position

Instead, Dan receives a moral correction disguised as care. And that is perhaps the most painful form of erasure—when a system offers you compassion only after it has ensured your exhaustion was cost-free.

An Old Coot, a Cricket, and an Owl

In the first part, I had compared the nameless coach to a wolf and ibex. Strangely, in translation, the former coach is called an “old coot” (in English), (chapter 71) or a cricket (in Japanese). (Chapter 71) In German, he would be an “alter Kauz—an eccentric owl. But this metaphor reaches deeper than mere strangeness or aging.

The owl is a nocturnal bird, often linked to solitude, silent observation, and hidden knowledge. In chapter 71, an owl is heard in the seaside town next to the champion’s hostel—an eerie presence that coincides with Kim Dan’s visible exhaustion and isolation. (Chapter 71) The constant appearance of the owl connected with the champion’s house implies that Joo Jaekyung is now connected to this nightbird, as if the latter was his guardian of the night. In addition, in chapter 65, (chapter 65) Dan was found wandering the night in his sleep, pulled by unconscious fears. (Chapter 65) These moments mirror the owl’s behavior: navigating darkness, moving alone, and being misunderstood. Thus, the owl becomes a powerful symbol not only of the former coach but of Kim Dan himself—both are creatures of the night, shaped by what they see and endure in silence. In contrast to the chattering coot, the owl watches and remembers. And perhaps, the presence of both birds suggests that the coach, once a loud and reckless coot, is beginning to see with the quiet eyes of the owl—finally noticing the suffering he once overlooked. Their shared nocturnality ties them together: one hoots and curses, the other drifts wordlessly—but both are left behind by the daylight world.Doc Dan’s nightly behavior made me think of an owl. (Chapter 65) during that night, Joo Jaekyung caught him wandering in sleep outside. In addition, Moreover, I interpret the presence of the owl as an allusion to the presence of the former director in the couple’s life. As you can see, I have already made a parallel between the physical therapist and the nameless coach. These metaphors evoke not only eccentricity but specific traits tied to nocturnal birds and fragile aging.

The coot, (quoted from https://www.oiseaux.net/birds/eurasian.coot.html) though a water bird like the duck, is a poor flyer, often flapping frantically just above the water’s surface. It tends to migrate or travel by night, preferring the cover of darkness to avoid predators. The coot is socially awkward yet persistent—an outsider among graceful birds. In this sense, the coach mirrors the coot: once active, now awkwardly grounded, watching from the margins, no longer able to soar.

Yet the coach’s resemblance to the Eurasian coot extends beyond his weakened condition. This bird stands for versatility, adaptability, or hidden talents, attributes similar to the ibex because of their long slender toes with round lobes of skin on them.

 Coots are noisy and socially awkward birds—notorious for their harsh, repetitive calls that sound more like chiding than song. Unlike the poetic silence often associated with owls, the coot communicates through blunt, raspy cries. This parallels the coach’s incessant chatter and verbal outbursts. Kim Dan even refers to him as a “chatterbox,” a man who yells, curses, and grumbles without reserve. And yet, strangely, Dan is not repulsed. On the contrary—he appears comforted by the company. For perhaps the first time, someone talks to him without judgment or restraint. (Chapter 71) The coach, in asking Dan to stay and keep him company, reveals a loneliness behind the noise—a need for genuine presence, not just a match on TV. And Dan, who so often listens in silence, responds and is interested in his past..

The Eurasian coot, with its stark black plumage and distinctive white frontal shield, is not merely an odd, noisy water bird—it carries deep symbolic resonance. Visually, it evokes the image of yin within Taoist philosophy: the dark feathered body representing shadow, receptivity, and introspection, while the bright beak and forehead suggest presence, guidance, and emergent clarity. This interplay of black and white echoes the taijitu, the yin-yang symbol, where opposing forces coexist, define, and balance each other. In this metaphorical framework, Kim Dan has long embodied yin: passive in appearance, enduring in silence, emotionally responsive, and often eclipsed by the assertive, solar force of Jaekyung—his yang counterpart. The coot, then, becomes an avatar of Kim Dan’s latent feminine principle, one often neglected or undervalued in the harsh masculine domains of fighting, survival, and ambition.

But the coot is not merely passive. Across several Native American traditions, it plays the mythic role of the “earth-diver”—the humble, overlooked creature who succeeds where stronger animals fail. Diving to the bottom of primordial waters, the coot resurfaces with the vital clump of mud that births new land. This act of grounding creation through immersion in emotional depths positions the coot—and by extension, the coach—as a quiet redeemer. If we follow this myth, then the coach, once the yelling coot who flapped at the surface of a hypermasculine world, now dives inward through his illness and regret. And by getting acquainted with Kim Dan, he begins to recover something essential: the knowledge that nurturing, not domination, is what builds real legacy. A side that he has all this time neglected.

Just as the coot in myth brings forth land from formless water, the coach now nudges Kim Dan to settle—to plant roots, recognize his own value, and reimagine his path. This is the deeper function of their encounter: not only to pass on knowledge, but to give Dan permission to claim space, stop drifting, and become whole.

This raw vocality—the coot’s instinct to call out, the coach’s refusal to quiet down— (chapter 71) suggests that communication doesn’t always have to be soft to be sincere. It is precisely the coach’s lack of elegance that makes him relatable to Dan. (Chapter 71) This dynamic becomes especially meaningful when we recall that Kim Dan’s symbolic animal is the duck—a creature often seen as passive or domesticated, gliding over water while paddling furiously underneath. As discussed above, the duck stands for Dan’s silent endurance, his ability to move between unstable emotional terrains without ever making a splash.

In contrast, the coot is noisy and awkward, incapable of flight yet unwilling to be silent. In a world that expects the duck to swim gracefully through silence, the coot becomes a strange, stuttering guide—blunt, awkward, but unmistakably alive.

This is especially interesting because, as previously argued, Kim Dan’s symbolic animal is the duck (chapter 65) a creature that moves between water, land, and air. While he is still learning to navigate the spaces between systems, he too lacks institutional power. If the former coach is a coot, then his narrative function may be to pass on his remaining knowledge to the duck—turning his interactions with the coach and his use of the notebook into an unofficial MMA trainer seminar he once wished to attend (chapter 22).

Like the ibex metaphor used in Part I—creatures tied to rocky isolation and dangerous heights—the coot further enriches the theme of aged survivors perched on the margins of community. But unlike the ibex, the coot may still transmit wisdom before its final flight.

The cricket, (chapter 71) on the other hand, introduces a different symbolic register. Crickets are night creatures, associated with melancholy songs and liminal moments—summer nights, silence interrupted by delicate rhythm. In literature, the cricket is often the last to speak when others fall silent. Beyond eccentricity or noise, this insect also evokes themes of temporality and mortality. It is a creature of the twilight—its song a reminder of fleeting seasons, of warmth that will pass. In many cultures, the cricket’s chirping signals the passage of time, each note a marker of transience. Its presence in literature often accompanies deathbeds, soliloquies, or irreversible turning points. If the coach is a cricket, then he is not merely a grumbler—he is a living metronome, ticking down the last hours of his own life, while reminding those around him—like Kim Dan—that time is limited. And perhaps this is why he talks so much: not to annoy, but to assert his presence before the silence swallows him.

In this light, the coach becomes a kind of dying bell—a cracked oracle whose purpose is not clarity but urgency. His role is to remind Dan that life cannot be deferred forever. Settling down, speaking up, asking for more—these are not things to postpone. The cricket’s metaphor, then, marks the threshold between invisibility and emergence, between survival and meaning. Though overlooked, its chirping suggests persistence and a strange form of endurance. To conclude, if the coach is a cricket, then his voice—grating, unwanted, but steady—becomes a metaphor for what remains when relevance fades. Crickets continue to sing even when ignored, echoing the idea that the coach, however diminished, still has something to say. His grumbling is the residue of meaning in a life otherwise stripped of its stage. And for Kim Dan, who has been rendered voiceless by respectability, the cricket’s harsh cadence may sound like truth.

These metaphors evoke age, eccentricity, and irrelevance. A coot is a harmless, grumpy old man. A cricket sings into the void, unheard. An owl is wise, but solitary and ignored.

These metaphors tell us how others see him: a relic, a burden (chapter 71), a joke. But there’s another side to the owl—the side that watches the night, that sees what others do not. And in this hospice, maybe for the first time, the former coach becomes something more: a witness who is no longer silent. An old man who still has eyes.

And perhaps, in seeing Dan, he finally sees what was lost when he failed to protect Jaekyung. (Chapter 71) The latter didn’t receive proper treatment for his woundsAnd this brings me to my final interpretation, the absence of a physical therapist or doctor in the director’s world and life! His body got broken so many times, indicating that he never had a doctor by his side! . (Chapter 70)He never had a companion or friend in his life, which is also mirrored in the picture.

Together, these two owls—the worker and the watcher—form a quiet alliance of the unseen. One carries the weight of silence. (Chapter 71) The other carries bitterness and the guilt of watching too long without speaking. In this dim hallway of illness and endurance, their connection becomes a muted call for dignity.

And maybe, this time, someone will hear it.


Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Other, Hidden Door 🚪 to the Past 🏛️

The composition opens with a visual puzzle: a collage of doors, house numbers, and figures caught mid-motion. At first glance, the images appear disconnected, yet the arrangement and title invite my avid readers to look again. What connects the blue gate in the seaside town, a young man hesitating before a door, and two house number plaques: 7-12 and 33-3? One Jinx-phile on X, @Jaedan4ever, insightfully noted that “7-12” (chapter 65) corresponds to the release of Jinx Chapter 70, which marked the series’ return after a three-month hiatus. This observation is more than clever numerology—it mirrors the manhwa’s deeper message: the past always haunts the present, and at times, it even foreshadows the future. And that’s exactly what I will do in this essay. I propose that the key to understanding the protagonists and characters’ evolving identities lies in the overlooked architectural and administrative details—especially the house numbers, door placements, and legal ownership of space. These seemingly minor visual cues are in fact loaded with meaning, offering insight into how home, memory, and identity are fragmented and reassigned across time and place.

A Mysterious Numbering System: 7-12 vs. 33-3

While the reader focused on 7-12 and the publication of episode 70, something else caught my attention. (chapter 57) The landlord’s house has the number 33-3. Why do two neighboring houses bear such disconnected numbers: 7-12 and 33-3? (chapter 61) For readers unfamiliar with Korea, this looks quite bizarre. In most European and American countries, street addresses follow a linear order; house number 12 would typically be located between 10 and 14. But in Korea, especially in rural areas, many towns use the older jibeon (지번) land-lot numbering system. Here, numbers are based not on street sequence but on the chronological order of land registration and subsequent subdivisions.

At first glance, parcel 7 appears to be registered earlier than parcel 33. Yet there is a twist: the subdivision number attached to 7—namely 12—implies that this plot has been split far more frequently than 33, which is only on its third subdivision. In rural Korea, early subdivisions often indicate inherited land, long-term residency, or family continuity. Later, higher subdivisions tend to signal commercial fragmentation, detachment from familial lineage, and transient habitation—often reflecting rental properties (chapter 62), newer developments, or administrative restructuring rather than deep-rooted inheritance. In this context, a higher subdivision number implies not only later division, but also the erosion of legacy and the weakening of kinship-based territorial claims—an erosion especially poignant in the context of Confucian traditions that once emphasized multi-generational cohabitation and patrilineal inheritance. In classical Korean society, a home was not merely a shelter but a physical emblem of familial continuity, with ancestral rites often performed within the same household across generations. As addresses fragment and land parcels divide, so too does the symbolic structure of the family unit. The once-cohesive ideal of the extended household dissolves into isolated, rented spaces, reflecting not only economic realities but also the fraying of intergenerational bonds and filial authority.

This contrast is reflected in both setting and narrative. Kim Dan lives in house 33-3 with the elderly landlord—a man who is not just a neighbor but likely an old local landholder. (chapter 57) In contrast, the house numbered 7-12, which Jaekyung rents, (chapter 61) has been transformed into a tourist hostel. (chapter 61) Though Jaekyung is a wealthy celebrity, he inhabits a parcel of land that speaks to impermanence and anonymity. Meanwhile, Dan shares space with someone who quietly represents legacy and transparency.

The Blue Gate 7-12

The spatial layout reinforces this: the landlord’s house opens directly onto the street—there is no gate. (chapter 57) This openness reflects a traditional mindset rooted in hospitality and community. By contrast, 7-12 is sealed by a blue metal gate, a clear symbol of privacy, control, and urban values. (chapter 65) But here’s the irony: the gate does not protect the landlord’s legacy from encroachment—it shields the outsider from the town. The presence of the blue gate enclosing 7-12 speaks volumes. In contrast to the landlord’s open home, this barrier reflects the mindset of its builder—the town chief (chapter 62) —who likely anticipated that visitors from the city would prefer privacy. But in attempting to accommodate their expectations, he inadvertently created a symbolic divide. The gate does not just offer seclusion; it enforces a boundary between the guests and the local community. This spatial arrangement, then, subtly underscored the champion’s outsider status. Despite his wealth and fame, he remained separated—literally and figuratively—from the rootedness and communal life that defines the town. This explicates why his direct neighbor didn’t reach out to him right away. He was the last to ask for a favor. (chapter 62) However, this “dynamic” (distinction) began to shift the moment Jaekyung started working for the local residents. (chapter 62) No longer just a “guest” or a “tourist,” he earned their recognition and acceptance through acts of service and humility. (chapter 62) As he helped them with manual tasks—such as lifting goods or assisting the elderly—they started seeing him not as an outsider, but as one of their own. However, it is important to note that these gestures of inclusion occurred while Jaekyung was outside the blue gate (chapter 62) —beyond the formal boundary of the rental property. (chapter 62) In this way, the gate truly functioned as a symbolic threshold: only once he crossed it through action and humility, the community began to approach him. This change in perception was symbolized, when he received vegetables from the townspeople, a traditional gesture of inclusion and local acknowledgment. (chapter 62) Nevertheless, the best sign that he has been accepted by the community is when he received traditional welcome gifts: the toilet paper and detergent. (chapter 69) [For more read Unseen 👀 Savior🦸🏼‍♂️ : The Birth Of Jaegeng (locked)] His physical strength, once used for spectacle and entertainment, now becomes a bridge into the fabric of rural life, exposing his true personality: he is generous and modest. The closed blue gate of the hostel might have marked him as a city dweller at first, (chapter 65) but his actions gradually dissolved that boundary. Therefore it is no coincidence that after the wolf took care of doc Dan during that night (chapter 65), the elderly neighbor chose to open the blue gate shortly after: (chapter 69) Thus I deduce that the blue gate lost its purpose. The champion definitely saw the advantages of the absence of a gate by his neighbor. He could arrive there at any moment (chapter 62) and the landlord never rejected him. In fact, he was always welcome. (chapter 66)

But let’s return to the house numbers and its signification. In this way, 33-3 stands at the crossroads of tradition and change: it is old, but not untouched by rupture. It represents a home that has endured change while maintaining its emotional and social value. This makes it an apt setting for the star and the physical therapist, two individuals who themselves come from fractured emotional lineages—both wounded by broken familial bonds, yet gradually learning to rebuild a form of kinship. That number becomes a silent metaphor for their coexistence: the wolf and the hamster, sharing not blood but space, trust, and now roots.

Father, Son and Ancestor: 33-3

Numerologically, “33” itself can evoke multiple layers of meaning. In some interpretations, 33 is a master number, associated with healing, altruism, and emotional growth. It is also a number of spiritual maturity—hinting at a kind of “final trial” before enlightenment. That fits the evolution of both characters. And the number 3, repeated, might subtly allude to the Christianism (Father, Son and Holy Spirit) or Confucian triad—father, son, and ancestor—or more abstractly, to harmony among heaven, earth, and humanity. With Jaekyung and Dan forming a new domestic unit under the benevolent yet quiet watch of the elderly landlord, we can almost see 33-3 as a broken but reassembled version of the traditional multigenerational household—one not bound by blood, but by mutual recognition and earned care.

Thus, 33-3 becomes more than an address. It’s a compact expression of the characters’ trajectory: from scattered and rootless to housed and healing—not in a perfect family, but in a fragile, evolving one. The wolf’s integration is not based on lineage or history, but on community and contribution.

Another layer to the contrast is the identity of the landlord. While the owner of 7-12 is the town chief—someone with institutional power—he is not necessarily the town’s patriarch. His propriety, 7-12, suggests his roots are more administrative than ancestral. He is in charge, but he does not represent continuity. On the other hand, the landlord of 33-3 is mistaken by Choi Heesung for Dan’s grandfather (chapter 59), and townspeople instinctively report Dan’s behavior to him. (chapter 69) I would like to point out that the kind man said “villagers” and not “villager”, a sign that he was contacted by many people. Such recognition is reserved for those woven into the community’s long memory.

This dynamic becomes even more intriguing when we consider how the wolf might have ended up in house 7-12 in the first place. (chapter 61) Given that the rural address system is based on the older jibeon model—and most GPS systems now rely on the newer road-based address format— it is unlikely that Jaekyung could have located Dan’s home through navigation alone. (chapter 61) That’s the reason why the author included this scene. Even if someone had disclosed Dan’s address, the GPS in Jaekyung’s luxury car would not have been able to guide him there. Like mentioned above, the streets have no names, and the numbering lacks logical sequence. Thus, we have to envision how the Emperor followed Dan on foot, observing where he went. In doing so, he not only located the general vicinity. Afterwards, he must have contacted a local and requested for a vacant house close to 33-3. That’s how he found the “hostel” right next door. (chapter 62) No wonder why the athlete stopped his training for his benefactor, the town chief. His act of renting that space was not just about proximity—it was a quiet, determined form of emotional pursuit, bypassing digital maps in favor of personal presence. Once again, this mirrors the emotional structure of the story: Jaekyung could only find the hamster by leaving behind his car (the older version of episode 69 – chapter 69) and walking through the confusion himself.

Finally, this rural numbering system is placed in relief by an urban counterpart. In episode 1, (chapter 1) we see Dan walking under a blue plaque labeled “24”—the newer, street-based system introduced after 2013. This number, part of Seoul’s revised address format, contrasts sharply with the rural jibeon model. Where 7-12 and 33-3 reflect layered histories and family division, “24” is precise, administrative, and arguably impersonal. The place is no longer connected to family and traditions, rather to migration and anonymity. The juxtaposition between systems emphasizes not only physical distance but emotional dislocation.

Shin Okja’s Childhood Town and Numbers

Yet among all these numbered spaces, one person remains strangely untethered: Shin Okja. (chapter 65) Though she insists this seaside town is where she “grew up,” she never identifies a lot number, street, or ancestral parcel. In a rural system where numbers are more than logistical—they are signs of rootedness and intergenerational presence—her vagueness stands out. Everyone else is connected to a numbered gate, a registry, or a mailbox. She alone floats in narrative space, clinging to emotional claims without material proof: no concrete location is brought up. (chapter 57) The contrast becomes sharper when she refers to Seoul only in generic terms. She never mentions a district, (chapter 65), a person (chapter 56), a neighborhood, or specific location. This lack of detail, especially when juxtaposed with the specificity of the rural jibeon system (where even a subdivision number implies lineage and ownership), exposes her rootlessness. It reinforces the idea that her ties to place are performative rather than grounded. Even her nostalgia for Seoul is flattened (chapter 65) into a symbol of urban superiority—money, prestige, modernity—without anchoring it to a real “home.” In short, she idealizes Seoul the way she romanticizes the countryside—selectively, superficially. At the same time, she is giving the impression that she is erasing her stay in Seoul, as if her past there, too, is unmoored. Because of this observation, I realized why the nurse never questioned the senior’s statement. (chapter 56), though she expressed some doubt. By asking for more details, she imagined that she could touch a sensitive topic, like for example loss of her home etc. Shin Okja‘s inability—or refusal—to locate herself within a concrete building and specific numbered system of belonging hints at a deeper truth: Shin Okja may perform the role of native and guardian (chapter 57), but the land does not affirm her story. In Jinx, numbers are roots, and she is rootless. The more she talks about places, the less we see of her in them. She becomes a woman suspended between two worlds, belonging to neither.

Finally, the narrative suggests with the Emperor’s example, rootedness is not determined by a map or a deed, but by how much responsibility and memory one carries. And so far, the halmoni is not contributing much to the little town. She remains in the confines of the hospice. Hence no one among the inhabitants noticed her so-called return to her hometown.

A Numbered Home in Seoul: Whose Name, Whose Burden?

But since the new system is used in Seoul, I wondered about her address and house number. So what was the house number of Shin Okja`s home in the capital? (chapter 17) As Jinx-lovers can detect, next to the entrance of her apartment, there is no blue house number plate or street name. How is that possible in a metropolis where every residence should be digitally registered? And now, pay attention to the house where the “goddess” and her “puppy” lived. (chapter 1) The building had not only two doors, but also the plaque is placed next to the other door. It is also partially visible in this image: (chapter 1)

This raises a series of subtle but important questions. When we see Kim Dan standing in front of the darker, metal-framed door in episode 11 (chapter 11), we naturally assume he is returning home—entering the same shared space he and his grandmother inhabit. But is that actually the case? A closer look reveals he is using the other entrance. On his right side, we see the electricity meter, the mailbox, and the window—the signs of an inhabited and administratively recognized unit. This suggests that Kim Dan’s official residence is behind this second door. Once again, I am showing the view of the same building from a different perspective, (chapter 57) where the mail box and the electricity meter are. But I have another evidence for this observation. During that night, the hamster got assaulted by Heo Manwook and his minions. (chapter 11) And keep in mind that after getting beaten by the Emperor, anyone could recognize the grandmother’s place from outside due to the broken window. (chapter 19) The moment I made this discovery, I couldn’t help myself wondering why doc Dan would go to the other door and not to the halmoni’s room.

And this thought led me to the following deduction. He had been triggered to go to that place because of the phone call from the redevelopment association. (chapter 11) The voice on the phone reveals something legally crucial (chapter 11): Kim Dan is the last remaining resident in that building. That one line reframes everything. This suggests that Kim Dan’s official residence is behind this second door. 😮 In fact, the building features (chapter 57) only one house number plaque, one mailbox, and one electricity meter. These markers aren’t decorative—they are infrastructural indicators tied to administrative systems. In a city like Seoul, this configuration implies a single legally registered unit. So despite there being two entrances, only one household is formally recognized by the system. And since the resident registration system restricts each individual to a single verifiable address, this means only Kim Dan is recorded as the building’s legitimate occupant. The other door—the one associated with Shin Okja—exists outside the scope of legal recognition. She may live there physically (her belongings are still there), but bureaucratically, she doesn’t exist in that space.

Under the Korean Resident Registration System, every citizen must register their place of residence with the local government. Since 1994, this data has been digitized, allowing all state institutions to access and verify a person’s registered address electronically. This information is not symbolic—it is legally binding. Your registered address determines where you pay taxes, vote, access services, and claim benefits. Moreover, because so many government processes now rely on digital access to this central database, only one person can be officially tied to any residential unit at a time. Crucially, it is also a prerequisite for accessing financial credit. One cannot take out a bank loan or act as a legal guardian without a valid, registered place of residence.

This means that in the past, Shin Okja must have been officially registered at the address. (chapter 5) When the loan shark came to collect the interest of the debts during Kim Dan’s childhood, he went straight to her door (chapter 5) —the door that, at the time, likely bore the blue house number plaque.

However, attentive readers will notice a striking detail: the door seen during this childhood memory opens outward toward the viewer and is positioned closed to the left corner, (chapter 5) the door associated with Kim Dan in later episodes—particularly the one through which the champion entered during the confrontation with the thugs —opens inward and is placed in the corner of the right wall. The interior layouts and door directions don’t match, though the furniture is similar. This strongly suggests that these are two different units within the same building, exactly like I had observed before. The “goddess” and the hamster’s house had two doors and as such two units. (chapter 1)

These architectural clues support a subtle but significant shift: Shin Okja once resided in the main unit, the one connected to the official registration and legal address, in other words her initial flat was there. (chapter 11) At that time, Kim Dan, as a child, must have lived in the other unit, the one without number. She was probably taking care of him. However, at some point, she must have switched the place and moved to the other unit. This would explain why doc Dan (chapter 19) had a recollection of this moment, when he was about to leave this humble dwelling. (chapter 19) His move to the penthouse triggered another “move” from the past. Consequently, I am deducing that this souvenir represents the moment of the grandmother’s arrival and the departure of the hamster’s parent(s) from the other unit. But there’s more to it.

Since people are obliged to get a residency number with 17, I am assuming that the halmoni ceded legal registration to him, once he reached his 17th year. Kim Dan took over the smaller, neighboring room officially, and with it, the burden of formal residency. When she relinquished her official role, the system would have required a transfer of household headship and residency—most likely to Kim Dan. In my opinion, she became listed as household members (세대원, saedaewon). They are fully registered, just not as the head. It is important, because in front of the champion, she acts, as if she is still the head of the household (chapter 65) and Kim Dan the immature child, whereas according to my observations, she is legally dependent on the “hamster”. She is just a household member. As you can see, I detected a contradiction between her words and “hidden actions”, all this triggered because of the closed door. By transferring the address and registration to the physical therapist, she made it possible for him to inherit not just the space, but also the liability. That’s why he’s now the only registered person.

Thus, by the time we see Kim Dan revisiting the building (chapter 11), the name tied to the legal system, to the loan, and to the state’s digital records, is his—not hers. This administrative shift allowed Shin Okja to become legally invisible while Dan remained trapped in a place that was once hers, yet bore no official acknowledgment of her presence.

In short, the building’s physical structure masks a deeper displacement. (chapter 1) What appears to be a modest shared home conceals a painful history of passed-down burdens and reallocated responsibilities. The grandmother’s true door is off to the side, connected physically but separated in symbolic meaning. It has no number, no mailbox, no markers of legal presence. This hidden door is a perfect trompe-l’oeil: it masquerades as the heart of the home, but it’s actually a legally invisible annex. The framing invites the viewer to overlook it, just as the narrative invites us to overlook the grandmother’s evasions. And ironically, the one who stayed—the “last resident”—is also the one who was slowly pushed into the background, into the unnumbered space, into silence. And now, you comprehend why the grandmother asked from him this: (chapter 11) When he says “home,” he is referring not just to a physical place, but also to a legal and emotional placeholder—a registration number that ties him to bureaucratic existence, familial duty, and emotional manipulation. With her promise to return in that home, Shin Okja is essentially demanding he remains the legal anchor—the one who stays behind, the one who remains registered, the one who continues to carry the official burdens, even as she herself fades into invisibility. That’s how she became a “carefree” ghost in the end. It wasn’t just a promise of care, but a submission to being tethered—not to belonging, but to obligation masked as love. The irony is that by remaining legally “present,” Dan was emotionally erased.

To conclude, Kim Dan was not just the last physical inhabitant—he is the last legal one. His mailbox, his electricity meter, his official records—all point to the metal-framed door. (chapter 11) That’s where his address was, until he moved to the penthouse. But that’s where the loan is linked. That’s where the city saw him. And because the resident registration is necessary for work and taxes, Kim Dan had to change his resident number, when he moved to the penthouse or to the seaside town. That’s how I came to the following conclusion: Shin Okja must have known about his stay with the champion in the end.The Korean Resident Registration System is the evidence. This shows how important this scene was in season 1. (chapter 11) (chapter 65) In this panel, her words in English were ambiguous, while in the Korean version, the grandmother exposes that she was well aware that her grandson and the emperor would live together.

Still, he gave Dan a place to live, and even a salary…”
“I’m truly sorry and thankful—what can I say.”

This means that the halmoni must be well aware where her grandson is staying in her “hometown” in the end!!

Don’t forget that in South Korea, when a person enters a hospice or hospital, they must provide a valid registered address for several reasons: Health insurance eligibility (National Health Insurance Service); Billing purposes; Coordination of long-term care or welfare benefits; Resident registration confirmation (especially in hospice care, where end-of-life planning intersects with legal identity). She is legally totally dependent on him, and not just financially. So when she suggests to doc Dan to return to Seoul, she is actually denying the existence of a relationship between the physical therapist (chapter 57) and the landlord from 33-3. In fact, she was indirectly expressing a lack of gratitude toward the elderly man.

This realization, the existence of two units within the same building, subtly destabilizes the commonly accepted idea that Shin Okja is his grandmother. I have to admit that while reading episode 57, doubts (chapter 57) about their parentage came to my mind, especially when she claimed that doc Dan had different roots as hers. However, so far, I could never find an evidence for such a theory and imagined that my mind was simply too creative. Yet, with this new insight her role begins to look less like that of a familial guardian, and more like that of a caretaker, a nanny, or even an intruder—someone who moved in but was never truly rooted in Dan’s legal or emotional household. This theory would explain why the grandmother is not talking about doc Dan’s parents, why she remained passive, when he got stigmatized as orphan. She had every reason to suggest that she was enough for him, he just needed her. (chapter 57) That way, he became attached to her. It’s a startling reversal: the woman who claims maternal authority is (chapter 65), in the eyes of the system, merely lodging in his shadow. She is indeed a ghost. (chapter 22) This architectural division is deeply symbolic. Despite being the dependent, Dan is the one bearing responsibility—both financially and administratively. Shin Okja, on the other hand, manages to live without accountability.

And perhaps it’s no coincidence that the Seoul house (chapter 1) resembles the configuration in the small town. (chapter 57) In both cases, the boy lives next to someone who is older, legally distinct, and spatially close yet administratively separate. However, in the capital, the room with the second door is much smaller, as if doc Dan was the “servant”, though he was the main resident and the household head. In the countryside, this creates a healing bond with a benevolent elder. In the city, it sharpens a sense of entrapment. The echo between the two homes becomes a subtle commentary on the difference between chosen family and imposed family, between true guardianship and the performance of care.

And what did Shin Okja say to the Emperor? (chapter 65) Joo Jaekyung is almost her grandson!! It was, as if she was about to adopt him. Let’s not forget that he embodies all her ideals and dreams: strong, healthy, rich, famous, generous, polite and gentle! And according to my observations, she knows that the athlete owns a flat in Seoul, big enough to take a room mate.

The invisible chain between the door and the sharks

The silent yet stark detail about the two units (chapter 1) also reshapes our perception of Shin Okja. This singular registration setup does more than highlight Dan’s bureaucratic burden—it reframes the nature of the doctor’s relationship with Shin Okja. (chapter 11) But why did she ask him to become the household of this unit in the past? For me, the answer is quite simple. She had already planned that the young boy would take over her debts. One might argue that the debts might have been related to the hamster’s family. Yet I can refute this point. How so?

First, according to my previous observation, Shin Okja was living in the other unit, and the thugs went straight to her flat, the one with the sign on the wall. (chapter 5) They were looking for her and not “doc Dan” or his family. Unfortunately, the little boy was present. Because they were seen together, people assumed that they were together, a family. But like mentioned before, there was a move within the same building. Moreover, as a child, Dan was exposed to violence from the loan sharks. He couldn’t have signed any documents at the time, for a resident registration number is required and the other place is not registered; the grandmother was the official borrower. But later, Heo Manwook declared that Kim Dan is the named debtor. (chapter 16) He even showed the amount Kim Dan owned with his cellphone to the Emperor (chapter 17) That’s how the champion internalized that the hamster was the one with debts. This theory explicates why doc Dan is not blaming his grandmother for the debts in the end, as he signed himself loans. And now, you can imagine what happened in the past. Once he became 17 years old, she asked him to get a resident registration number. With this, he could apply for a loan in order to reimburse the grandmother’s debts. This must be one of her favors from the past: (chapter 53) So far, in season 1, she had made only one (chapter 41) before her request to visit the West Coast. The most plausible explanation is that Shin Okja persuaded him to take over the loan. She likely presented it as a necessary sacrifice, something he could manage given his income as a physical therapist. This explains why the elderly woman is no longer asking about the debts or loan. It is no longer her main concern, she is not the household head either. And don’t forget what the physical therapist thought, when he heard from Kim Miseon the bad prognostic about his grandma. (chapter 5) His words imply that he had done something in the past for her. And that would be to become her guardian and take her debts. This hypothesis explicates why only in episode 11, Doc Dan was comparing the progression of the interests with a snowball system, something unstoppable. (chapter 11) His thoughts reflect a rather late realization that he is trapped in a system and he can not get out of it. In other words, this image oozes a certain innocence. This also explained why Joo Jaekyung had to confront him with reality in front of the hospital. (chapter 18) The location is not random: for the halmoni, such a work place symbolizes respectability, power and money. The problem is that in the hospice, Doc Dan is not well-paid. (chapter 56)

And so, when he returns to that door after the triggering phone call (chapter 11), it isn’t just a physical movement—it’s a re-entry into responsibility and also past. The metal door doesn’t lead into a shared home, but into a legal burden. It is the entrance not to comfort or care, but to debt, disrepair, and abandonment. No wonder why during that night, the hamster had to face Heo Manwook and his minions. (chapter 11) And now, it is time to return our attention to my illustration for the essay: As my avid readers can observe, the panel with the champion facing the blue door comes from episode 69, while the one with doc Dan comes from chapter 11. These scenes are mirroring each other. It is about concern and danger! While in episode 69, the athlete got worried, as he imagined that doc Dan’s life was in danger, in episode 11, the hamster was about to face an old threat: Heo Manwook and his minions! (chapter 11) But back then, he was on his own and no one paid attention to his health. Not even Shin Okja… He was truly abandoned, while the episode 69 exposes the opposite. Society in this little town takes care of people in general.

Striking is that Heo Manwook does not even know about Dan’s profession. When he sees the influx of money (chapter 11), he jumped to the conclusion that Dan was either prostituting himself or laundering funds. Why? It is because he had taken odd jobs, until he got hired by the dragon, Joo Jaekyung, and had such a huge income. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why Heo Manwook knew how to use the old lady in order to threaten doc Dan. (chapter 16) Like I wrote in a different analysis, I doubt that the grandma would have signed a loan by Heo Manwook. This reveals how Dan entered the contract in obscurity, without recognition or protection. He did it for Shin Okja’s sake to repay her for her support and “love”. (chapter 65) No wonder why Shin Okja never mentions the loans when speaking to Joo Jaekyung, thus erasing her responsibility. And imagine this: Doc Dan is now living with an elderly man who is a farmer. She might suspect that the senior is trying to take advantage from her “grandsons”. If this is true, then she would just be projecting her own thoughts and fears onto the landlord. Since she connects the city to success and money, I am quite certain that she doesn’t judge farmers in a positive light. For her, doctors or celebrities are much more recommendable persons.

In the following article, the paper’s data underline a social reality: farming in Korea is struggling, and its practitioners—despite their essential role—are economically marginalized. In 2022, average agricultural income per household dropped to just KRW 9.49 million (~US $7,300)—under the 10-million-won mark for the first time in 30 years. Farming households earn only about 20–27% of what they once made, a steep decline from over 50% in the 1990s. Structural issues—aging farmers, small-scale plots, high material costs, and price volatility—have trapped many in long-term economic strain. Far from being a supplement, farming is often no longer a primary income source, pushing many rural households into poverty, with younger generations fleeing to cities. This evolution is reflected in the Korean manhwa. The room of Doc Dan contains traces of a teenager who left the house. (chapter 57) Therefore I am expecting an argument between the halmoni and the inhabitants of 33-3. The landlord embodies the opposite values of Shin Okja.

The Cabinet’s Silence: Misattributed Memory

This layered confusion about the flats extends to the objects within the home, especially the massive mother-of-pearl bridal wardrobe. (chapter 16) Dan repeatedly calls it his grandmother’s and even dreamed of finding a new place that could house it—a gesture that underscores how much he believed she treasured the object, even though she herself never mentions it. But she never once references it, not even when returning from the hospital. The absence of interest is striking. What if the cabinet didn’t belong to her at all? Its size suggests that it predates the division of the house. Besides, according to my observation, she used to live in the other unit and I can not imagine, the halmeoni moving this furniture from one unit to the other. Perhaps it once belonged to Dan’s mother—a remnant of the original household, now misattributed to the woman who unofficially took over.

Dan’s reverence for the cabinet mirrors his longing for stable familial identity. He projects value (chapter 19) onto the object just as he projects loyalty and gratitude onto his guardian. But the silence around the cabinet speaks volumes: it is not treasured by Shin Okja, only by Dan. Much like his name on the loan, or the house number on the door, it could be a misplaced inheritance. At the same time, such an item could serve to identify doc Dan’s true origins, if the Wedding Cabinet belonged to his true family.

The Wolf’s residence: 7-12

In contrast, Jaekyung’s initial intention was to stay in the seaside town only temporarily. (chapter 61) He claimed the move was for recovery and recuperation—a short break from his life in Seoul. Yet Korean law requires anyone staying in a location longer than a month to officially change their resident registration. If he were to do so, this would not just signal a change of address but a severing of administrative ties with Seoul—and by extension, Park Namwook and MFC. (chapter 66) Changing his registration would mean stepping outside of the institution’s control and surveillance.

However, I doubt that the star has ever officially registered his stay. Like Kim Dan before him, he exists in a limited legal space—present but not formally tied. This ambiguity mirrors his emotional state. His real return to Seoul was always conditional—it depended on Dan’s willingness to follow him. (chapter 62) Without Dan, Seoul held no meaning. But if he remains in the town past the statutory threshold, it would imply that he is ready to leave behind the world of contracts and competitions. It would mean he is now rooted—not by career, but by choice. Not by obligation, but by emotional truth.

In this way, the law becomes a mirror: resident registration, typically viewed as bureaucratic red tape, becomes a metaphor for chosen identity. The champion’s choice to return straight to the seaside town displays his psychological transition. He is no longer the man who moved through cities on training schedules. He is beginning to act like someone who stays—and stays for someone. And that someone is Kim Dan.

Conclusion: Opening the Right Door

The titular “hidden door to the past” is not just a visual motif—it is the emotional architecture of Jinx. By attending to overlooked details—address numbers, cabinet placement, financial responsibility, and architectural sleight-of-hand—we can trace the emotional fault lines that run beneath Dan’s quiet suffering and the champion’s slow awakening. The question is no longer just where they live, but who gets to call it home. The essay began with an image collage, but what it truly offers is a blueprint: not of real estate, but of memory, grief, and quiet resilience.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: What about The Wolf’s 🐺First Kiss ? 💋

The Couple’s First Kiss

In episode 14, Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan kissed each other for the first time. (chapter 14) For the physical therapist, this moment would later be confirmed. (chapter 16) —haltingly and with a trace of disbelief visible thanks to the points of suspension —as his first kiss ever. His stunned reaction and eventual admission offer a compelling lens through which to explore the symbolism of kissing in Jinx, but also the emotional landscape the two men must navigate.

Yet, the title of this essay refers not to Kim Dan, the hamster, but to the wolf. Could this have been the champion’s first kiss, too? The story never provides a definitive answer. While Jaekyung has had many sexual partners, he treated them as disposable— as toys and not as individuals. (chapter 55) Still, some readers have theorized the existence of a “special lover” in his past (chapter 2), someone who might have earned a different kind of intimacy. One cause for this hypothesis is that in the champion’s first memory, he was facing his partner, which contrasts so much to the way he had sex with his partners (from behind). This possibility casts the locker room kiss in a new light. (chapter 14) If it was his first, the gesture carries a far deeper meaning than either man realizes in the moment. And if it wasn’t, then why does this kiss—with Kim Dan—resonate so differently?

Under this lens, the significance of a first kiss expands. It becomes a tool not only to uncover Jaekyung’s emotional history and his past, but to explore the shifting dynamics between the protagonists. The following analysis begins with Dan’s reaction, then gradually shifts its focus to Jaekyung—tracing how the act of kissing reveals hidden fears, prior wounds, and the potential for genuine transformation.

The Hamster’s First Kiss

When Mingwa proposed a different perspective of the doctor’s first kiss in episode 15, (chapter 15) she showed more than the physical therapist’s confusion with the interrogation marks, she added his inner thoughts. This question (“What’s this?”) already hinted that he had never experienced a kiss before. The ambiguity of his reaction suggested that the moment was unfamiliar, and not immediately recognizable as a kiss at all. (chapter 16) It was only later, while brushing his teeth in front of a mirror, that he consciously identified the event as his “first kiss.” Why didn’t he recognize it immediately? After all, a kiss—mouth-to-mouth contact—is common knowledge, even for someone emotionally inexperienced. I have different explanations for his confusion.

First, Dan’s delayed recognition reveals that this was no ordinary kiss: it was his first moment of unfiltered intimacy, so foreign to him that it couldn’t be labeled until later. (chapter 15) The emotional dissonance overwhelmed his ability to process what had just happened. His belated realization doesn’t just reveal how strange closeness is to him, but also how deeply isolated he is from ordinary social and cultural cues—whether through meaningful relationships or exposure to romantic norms in media. The fact that he did not immediately identify the kiss, despite its widely understood definition, underscores the emotional detachment and deprivation he has lived with. How could this happen?

To answer this question, we must consider more than just Dan’s personal trauma (the loss of his parents) —we have to examine his cultural upbringing and environment, especially his exposure to intimacy through media. This interpretive thread was triggered by a seemingly benign interaction in chapter 30, when Kim Dan meets actor Choi Heesung for the first time. (chapter 30) Recognizing his face, Dan mentions that his grandmother used to watch the drama A Fine Line, and that he had seen it with her. (chapter 30) The author even includes a framed shot from the fictional show, depicting Heesung as the smiling son-in-law in a multigenerational family. This visual insert is subtle, but telling: it wasn’t the story that stayed with Dan, but the faces—the aesthetics of family structure and polite emotional decorum.

This detail matters. Korean weekend dramas, particularly those aimed at older or more conservative audiences, are known for avoiding overt depictions of romance or physical affection. Instead of kissing scenes or deep emotional vulnerability, these shows focus on family values, social respectability, and moral perseverance. Romantic affection is implied through service, duty, and self-sacrifice, while physical intimacy is portrayed sparingly—if at all. “Skinship,” as physical affection is commonly referred to in Korean culture, tends to be awkward and limited even in media (like for example grabbing the wrist instead of the hand). Public displays of affection are discouraged in real life, and this cultural restraint echoes onscreen. K-drama couples often struggle to express love openly; when they do kiss, it’s usually stylized, fleeting, or emotionally stilted.

When you realize that Dan’s only exposure to fictional romance came through watching these conservative shows with his grandmother, the implications grow clearer. His understanding of love was shaped by media that prized emotional self-control, emphasized propriety, and framed romance as something that only happens within marriage or bloodline ties. And more importantly, his access to even this narrow vision of love was filtered through Shin Okja, a woman whose own values prioritized appearances, self-reliance, and emotional suppression. Under her roof, affection was functional. Emotional expression was rather ignored.

This means that Dan grew up with no safe or meaningful model of romantic love—neither in life nor in fiction. He didn’t learn how to interpret touch, kisses, or expressions of desire. He may know intellectually what a kiss is—mouth-to-mouth contact—but that knowledge carries no emotional anchor. His surprised thought (“What’s this?”)(episode 15) in episode 15 reveals just how disconnected he is from the symbolic meaning of affection. Later, brushing his teeth and reflecting, he finally realizes: That was my first kiss. But even then, the memory doesn’t register as something tender or beautiful. Instead, it haunts him because (chapter 16) it frightened him. The kiss broke an invisible boundary—one his upbringing had silently enforced. That’s the reason why he wasn’t sure if he could do it again.

From this, we can draw a larger conclusion: Shin Okja didn’t just isolate Dan emotionally. She installed in him a framework that made affection seem inaccessible—something reserved for “real” families or television characters, not for someone like him. Without a nuclear family of his own, he wasn’t allowed to love—only to obey, endure, and work. The media he consumed (he likes TV K-dramas) mirrored this unspoken rule. The love stories weren’t his to emulate, but to passively observe as if from behind glass. In fact, it was likely his grandmother who chose those dramas, reinforcing a narrow script: love was something that happened to others, while he remained the background figure—responsible, silent, useful.

This disconnect becomes even more apparent in chapter 30, when Dan observes Joo Jaekyung and Choi Heesung posing together. (chapter 30) He blushes and wonders why. (chapter 30) It’s a telling moment: Dan isn’t used to feeling attraction and desire, let alone recognizing it. He never bought posters of celebrities, never fantasized. That world—the glamorous world of affection, attention, and beauty—was never his. (chapter 30) His grandmother may have been a fan of Heesung, but I doubt that Dan never allowed himself that luxury. So his reaction is a rupture: he is suddenly pulled out from behind the glass, facing emotions he was never taught to hold. But there’s more to it. Dan’s extreme shyness around nudity (chapter 30) —despite already having been seen naked by Jaekyung (chapter 30) —suggests something deeper than modesty. When he rushes to hide his underwear and blushes merely at brushing his teeth next to someone (chapter 30), it becomes evident: Dan is not accustomed to physical closeness or shared domestic spaces. These are not reactions of a man with just sexual trauma—they point to someone raised without the warmth of daily intimacy.

Thus I couldn’t help myself thinking that it is unlikely Shin Okja ever bathed him or dressed him as a child. Their emotional distance is reflected in the boundaries Dan maintains even in private. In this light, the scene where Dan wears a shirt with a visible clothing tag on his back takes on symbolic weight: (chapter 5) He had to take care of himself, dressed on his own. He had to act like an adult, as his role was to assist his grandmother: (chapter 65) This raises the possibility that someone else—most likely his mother—was his primary caregiver in early childhood. She would have changed his diapers, held him close, and kissed him gently. (chapter 65) This hypothesis and interpretation gets reinforced with the champion’s first kiss on his cheek (chapter 44) and ear (chapter 44) For me, without realizing it, Dan reproduced those gestures. These actions can not come from Shin Okja, as we only see her caressing or patting her grandson. The progression is striking. It moves away from eroticism (kiss from the lips) (chapter 44) and toward something far more intimate and protective. These are not the kisses of seduction, but of affection—almost maternal in their tone. Hence the MMA fighter got patted later: (chapter 44) They suggest care, comfort, and emotional presence. This is crucial, because it reveals that for Dan, a kiss is not about arousal or conquest. It is a language of love. They carry the flavor of instinct. These are the kinds of kisses a child might have once received, or given, in moments of safety and connection.

The way Dan moves through these kisses suggests something primal, tender, and exploratory. His gestures resemble those of animals—like a mother expressing affection to her cub. Such an attitude could only encourage his partner to reciprocate such closeness, like a cub seeking warmth. As noted in earlier analysis [For more read this essay], nuzzling (chapter 44) is a behavior shared by felines and wolves alike: a subtle act of comfort, trust, and bonding. Wolves nuzzle to soothe and reassure. Leopards nudge to display affection without threatening dominance. Dan’s pecks (chapter 44) reflect this balance of caution and care, power and softness.

These gestures are not shaped by media, romance tropes, or societal expectations. They are shaped by something older than words—a kind of emotional muscle memory. His body remembers how to love, even if his mind has forgotten. And in that moment, Dan is free from the grandmother’s world of rules and repression. Shin Okja represents structure, duty, and emotional withholding—society. But Dan’s kisses are a return to nature. They are unmediated, sincere, and free from transactional logic. Think of how Boksoon treated her puppies (chapter 57) (chapter 57)—licking them not out of instinct alone, but to reassure and bond. (chapter 57) During that summer night’s dream, Dan’s body mirrored this wordless care. That’s why he could laugh so genuinely like a child after witnessing his “pet’s reaction”. (chapter 44)

This contrast reveals why Shin Okja’s narrative of him being an orphan “from birth” is not just inaccurate (chapter 65) —it is ideological. She has never kissed him that way so far. It is her attempt to erase the past and shame. Therefore she removes whatever freedom or natural affection Dan once experienced, and to replace it with a world where love must be earned through sacrifice, duty and obedience, not given freely. The kiss becomes a reclaiming not just of emotional intimacy, but of a self that existed before control. His instincts speak louder than memory—and in that, Dan tells a truth that cannot be overwritten. And now, you comprehend why the doctor couldn’t identify the champion’s action as a kiss (chapter 15) It was not because he didn’t know what a kiss was, but because it didn’t align with what he unconsciously believed a kiss should be. In other words, the champion’s gesture triggered his memory which mirrors what the athlete was experiencing in the locker room. (chapter 14) Therefore the physical therapist astonishment, “What’s this?” was not naïve; it was disoriented. Somewhere deep within, Dan had internalized a different model of kissing: one that reflected comfort, not conquest; affection, not arousal. The kiss he received was too strange, too fierce—it violated a definition he didn’t even know he had. His body knew how to kiss, but it remembered a different type of kiss altogether. The latter stands for love and as such emotions. Under this new light, my avid readers can comprehend why the physical therapist made the following request from his fated partner: (chapter 15) He needed to be “warned” in order to control his “heart”. As you can see, doc Dan had an innocent definition of the kiss. Therefore it is not astonishing that the wolf’s first kiss confused him so deeply: it shattered the only blueprint he had for intimacy.

This adds a tragic dimension to Dan’s unfamiliarity with touch. It’s not that he never had it—he once did. But it was taken from him, and what followed was not nurturing, but restriction through silence, erasure,money and work. His discomfort with nudity and closeness (chapter 65) is not just about sexual shame. It’s about lost comfort, severed memory, and the long silence of a child never told the truth, the vanishing of his parents. Under this new light, Jinx-philes can understand why the main lead could never discover sexuality and as such never went through puberty.

In this light, Shin Okja’s praise of hard work and her obsession (chapter 65) with success and fortune take on a new, darker meaning. Her restraint around love and sexuality wasn’t only generational—it was strategic. She reinforced a worldview in which success, debt repayment, and self-denial were Dan’s only legitimate currencies. For her, love, on the other hand, was frivolous, indulgent, even dangerous. She only treasures the relationship between the protagonists, as such a friendship is useful. It serves her interests, that way she can still control doc Dan’s fate. In other words, she only views relationship as transactional. The smiling family in A Fine Line (chapter 30) becomes a cruel illusion: a representation of the affection he was trained to uphold but never to receive. On the other hand, the kiss in the penthouse becomes testimony—not of desire, but of a forgotten lineage of tenderness. (chapter 44) It was not Dan’s first kiss with Jaekyung; it is his reclaiming of emotional truth.

Kisses without consent

And here, another crucial dimension enters the stage: consent. The kiss in the locker room was not only unexpected—it was uninvited. Note that in the locker room, the champion used his hand to touch his lover’s lips. (chapter 14) Jaekyung repeated such a gesture, as seen in chapters 24 (chapter 24), and again in 64 (chapter 64). These gestures were not expressions of tenderness, but acts of dominance, mirroring how the celebrity was taught to treat intimacy: not as an exchange, but as an imposition. His behavior echoes Cheolmin’s earlier suggestion (chapter 13) where a little touch was functional. On the other hand, the suggestion framed “affection” as a form of fun and entertainment, meant to soften the experience and shift the focus toward the partner. While Cheolmin’s comment was not malicious—in fact, it encouraged Jaekyung to become gentler and more attentive—it still fell short of true emotional connection. Why? It was a medical suggestion, meant to protect Dan’s fragile state. The kisses in episodes 14 were to protect the physical therapist. They were initially functional, a mean to achieve a goal before becoming a habit.

This misunderstanding also illuminates Jaekyung’s mindset. The champion had never seen a kiss as something requiring consent, care, or emotional meaning. He had likely never received such a kiss himself—especially not from a maternal figure. The implication was that in his mind, kisses are tools for relaxation, not intimacy; strategies for pleasure, not signs of affection. Thus he asked doc Dan at the hostel: (chapter 63) Fun is not the same as love, and this distinction matters deeply for someone like Kim Dan, who associates kissing with emotional safety and love, not performance or play. This explicates why he refused to be kissed in episode 63: (chapter 63)

And such actions (grabbing the doctor’s face for a kiss) shaped Dan’s reaction. During the “magical night” in chapter 44, the physical therapist copied Jaekyung’s earlier gesture —he grabs his partner’s face, too. (chapter 44) Yet, the intention behind this gesture is fundamentally different. While the wolf’s kisses were abrupt and consuming (chapter 44), Dan’s were soft, exploratory, almost reverent. His lips touched not just his lover’s mouth, but his cheek and ear—tender sites that bypass eroticism in favor of emotional intimacy. These weren’t prolonged, devouring kisses. They were pecks, small and deliberate. They mirrored affection, not possession.

This mirrored gesture reveals something powerful: that Dan’s body had internalized the champion’s movement, but his heart translated it into a new language—one of consensual, innocent affection. Through this contrast, Jinx subtly rewrites the significance of a kiss: not as something to be taken, but something to be offered. It is precisely through Dan’s innocent and instinctive response that the reader is guided toward understanding the importance of consent, of emotional resonance, and of redefining touch as something more than just a prelude to sex. So should Jaekyung later discover that Dan had never kissed anyone before, the realization doesn’t just reveal a lie (chapter 3) —it forces the wolf to ponder on the meaning of a kiss and his relationship with the physical therapist.

Klimt’s The Kiss and the Denial of the Mouth

The cheek and the ear, (chapter 44) often overlooked in romantic tropes, Yet here, they become sacred sites of intimacy, echoing the symbolic restraint found in Gustav Klimt’s painting The Kiss. It is the painting in the middle of the illustration. In that iconic artwork, the man does not kiss the woman on the mouth, the traditional locus of erotic desire. Instead, his lips are placed upon her cheek—a gesture that suggests reverence, not possession; vulnerability, not domination.

This parallel is not incidental. Klimt’s composition, saturated in gold and enveloping the lovers in a cocoon of ornament, gives the moment a sense of timelessness and sanctity. Likewise, in Jinx, Dan’s kiss bypasses lust and aims straight for emotional resonance. His kiss is not a prelude to sex; it is the articulation of emotional trust, maternal memory, and innocent longing. In this light, the cheek and ear become hallowed spaces where intimacy is not consumed, but offered. The problem is that during that night Joo Jaekyung was drunk, hence he couldn’t understand the meaning of such actions.

This moment reveals a stark contrast with the world that Jaekyung has known. For most of his life, touch was functional, performative, or controlling—something done to achieve a goal, to assert dominance, or to maintain emotional distance. (chapter 44) But Dan’s kiss disrupts that entire framework. It is small, almost imperceptible, but seismic in meaning. It asks nothing. It takes nothing. It simply is—and in that stillness, it unsettles the champion more than any act of aggression could. (chapter 44)

The symbolism deepens when we reflect on Jaekyung’s own evolution. He begins the story believing that conquest lies in performance—through physical power, sexual prowess, and unrelenting dominance. But as he stands before this soft, reverent kind of love, he encounters something far more disarming: gentleness. Vulnerability. A kiss that does not inflame the body (chapter 44) but stirs the soul. Therefore it is not surprising that later doc Dan is covered with bite marks. (chapter 45)

The purer the kiss becomes, the more threatening it feels—because it exposes him. It demands no proof, no role, no mask. And that is perhaps why Jaekyung, despite all his experience with bodies, remains a novice when it comes to the heart. In bypassing the mouth, Dan bypasses Jaekyung’s defenses. He offers not seduction, but sacred contact. And for a man raised in conquest, that is the most intimate violation of all.

Has the Champion Ever Been Kissed Before?

Like mentioned above, I could determine that the athlete had never been kissed before, especially by a “mother”. He didn’t even know that his ears were sensitive to the touch. (chapter 44) Moreover, I have already outlined that the athlete associates kissing to protection and pleasure which were suggested by his hyung Cheolmin. Therefore my avid readers can understand why I come to the following conclusion. It was indeed the champion’s first kiss in the locker room.

However, my theory is based on other points as well. One of the other reasons is related to his nightmare with the unknown ghost. (chapter 54) When he was young, he had to face an abuser. Notice that the man’s face was very close to the champion’s (chapter 54). Thus I interpret that for the champion, the face represents not only his vulnerability, but also a source of danger. That’s the reason why he couldn’t hide his displeasure and frustration, when he faced this “lover”. (chapter 2) Thus I am assuming that in his eyes, a kiss could only be perceived as a threat. Besides, the anonymous abuser was even laughing in front of his face (chapter 54) , which means that the champion must have internalized “laugh” as mockery and contempt. That’s why he was so upset, when he was provoked by Randy Booker: the fighter’s words and actions had triggered his repressed memories. (chapter 14) Thus I interpret that for the main lead, the mouth is not a site of tenderness but a battlefield—one linked to mockery, humiliation, and violation. It evokes the memory of confrontations like the one with Randy Booker, which reignited repressed trauma rather than surface-level anger. This is why it’s so difficult for him to associate a kiss with affection or love. The gesture, meant to signify intimacy for most, is for him an unconscious echo of danger.”

And what did the doctor do during that wonderful night? (chapter 44) He couldn’t hide his joy by the champion’s funny reaction and laughed. And how did the protagonist react to this? Not only his face expressed his dissatisfaction, but also he silenced his partner with a kiss right away: (chapter 44) This signifies that unconsciously, the athlete has long associated fun and laugh with humiliation, exposure, and powerlessness. Laughter—especially in close physical proximity—did not signal joy or affection in his past; it echoed mockery from a position of dominance. Thus, when Dan laughed innocently during their intimate moment, Jaekyung’s body reacted as if to shut down a threat. His abrupt kiss was not a romantic gesture but a reflex: a way to regain control, to interrupt the emergence of vulnerability, and to erase the echo of past humiliation. And now pay attention to the continuation of this sudden kiss: (chapter 44) Joo Jaekyung is leading the kiss, he is regaining control over their relationship. It reinforces the idea that the wolf’s kiss was not merely about passion, but about reclaiming dominance and halting a shift in power. Just moments earlier, Kim Dan’s laughter had opened a space of emotional intimacy and lightness, which the champion was not prepared to face. The kiss, now prolonged and intensified, becomes the sportsman’s way of reasserting control over a situation that was slipping into unfamiliar emotional territory.

Notice how Dan’s eyes remain open, gazing at Jaekyung. This contrast is striking: while the kiss is physically intimate, there’s a clear emotional imbalance. Dan is present and aware, while Jaekyung is almost consuming—driven by instinct and buried fear. The intensity of the kiss, paired with the previous silencing gesture, marks a moment where physical closeness masks emotional retreat. It’s not yet an act of mutual trust—it’s still shaped by Jaekyung’s attempt to neutralize discomfort, to steer the interaction back into territory he understands: dominance, silence, and physicality. Under this new light, it dawned on me why the champion could only reject this magical night the next morning. (chapter 45) The marks on the doctor’s body were evidence that he was no longer in control. They weren’t just signs of a physical encounter—they were witnesses to something far more threatening: vulnerability, softness, and reciprocity. In the night, swept up by instinct and unspoken longing, the wolf had allowed himself to be touched—not just physically, but emotionally. But by morning, the spell was broken. His gaze didn’t linger on Kim Dan with affection—it darted instead to the bruises and scratches as though they were accusations.

What horrified him (chapter 45) wasn’t just the pain he might have inflicted—it was the realization that the balance of power had subtly shifted. The man who had always dictated the terms of their relationship had surrendered to something unfamiliar: tenderness, emotional closeness, and shared desire. The fact that Kim Dan initiated affection, even kissed him voluntarily, shattered Jaekyung’s script. For someone who conflated feelings with threat, and dominance with safety, this reversal was unbearable.

And so, the rejection wasn’t cold—it was defensive. He had to reclaim his distance before the emotional reality could catch up with him. Because to accept the night as mutual would be to recognize that he had been wanted, not used (chapter 45) —and that he, in turn, had wanted Dan back. This terrified him more than any bruise ever could.

But let’s return our attention to episode 44. (chapter 44) In this context, the kiss becomes a complex act of both silencing and self-protection. It was a mixture of unconscious attachment and learned defense—an attempt to rewrite a script that his body remembered all too vividly. This continuation corroborates my earlier observation—Jaekyung unconsciously connects laughter and joy with vulnerability and mockery (chapter 37), and kissing becomes his emotional brake pedal. It’s not simply an act of love, but a means to regulate, or even drown out, what he cannot yet name or accept: that he is being loved. It is not random that I included the scene from episode 37: he heard laughs from the other room. For him, such a noise must have sounded like a disrespect and mockery, triggering his past trauma. And he was not entirely wrong in the sense that they were eating behind his back (chapter 37) It was, as if they were mocking him because of his forced “diet”. No wonder why the champion is barely seen laughing and prefers seriousness. At the same time, I can grasp why the athlete feels close to Park Namwook, as the latter stands for these exact notions: work, money and seriousness. Fun is not part of his world and vocabulary, therefore he punished Joo Jaekyung for sparring with doc Dan.

Another clue for this hypothesis is how the green-haired tried to “seduce” the athlete. (chapter 2) Though his face was close to the star’s, he didn’t attempt to kiss him. In fact, he proposed him a fellatio, a sign that the champion had never allowed anyone to get close to his “face”. Finally, observe how he reacted, when the uke in episode 55 attempted to kiss him: (chapter 55) Not only he rejected him, but also he pushed him violently so that the latter was on the floor. (chapter 55) The celebrity even ran away: a sign that the allowing someone approaching his face is perceived as something uncomfortable and threatening. At the same time, that moment exposes the kiss as something sacred—one that cannot be duplicated without emotional violation. This shows that for the champion, the meaning of a smooch has evolved. It is no longer perceived as a source of fun and a mean to gain something.

There exists another evidence for this interpretation. Once Joo Jaekyung returned home, he had a recollection of the night in the States. (chapter 55) He couldn’t forget doc Dan’s face, the latter excited him, a sign that for the champion, the face in general has been a source of pain, yet thanks to doc Dan, the latter has become a source of “comfort and joy”. (chapter 66) When he saw his face for the first time, he didn’t realize that he was already under the hamster’s spell. Striking is that he even focused on his chin and lips, a sign that he desired to kiss them. One thing is sure. The champion treasured the doctor’s face. After their separation, it is not surprising that the wolf felt the need to see his face.

That’s how I realized why the athlete initially rejected the doctor’s advances in the States(chapter 39) before requesting a fellatio: (chapter 39) The main lead’s head was very close to the champion’s face, thus he must have felt uncomfortable. Secondly by acting this way, the doctor was gradually gaining power over their relationship. For the wolf, dominance is everything, an indication that in his past he felt defenseless and weak. His “opponent”, the mysterious ghost, had the upper hand. Moreover, the fellatio created a distance between them, where the fighter could expose his superiority. And note how doc Dan behaved under the influence of the drug: (chapter 39) He caught his fated partner by surprise, when he suddenly kissed him, mirroring the champion’s past behavior. This panel corroborates that for the doctor, a kiss is the symbol of love. The champion was not happy with this kiss too, for the latter meant that he was no longer controlling their relationship. Yet, after hearing the doctor’s confession during that night, the athlete no longer resisted his partner’s kisses. (chapter 39) For the first time, he accepted Dan’s initiative—both physically and emotionally. Compare it to his attitude before: (chapter 39) here, he still has his eyes wide open, a sign of vigilance. These kisses from doc Dan (chapter 39) mark a turning point in Jaekyung’s arc: he begins to lower his defenses, allowing Dan not only into his personal space but also into a position of gentle agency within their relationship. The kiss no longer represents a threat; it becomes an opening and a sign of trust.

However, it occurred to me that the star didn’t recollect those kisses from doc Dan, rather their intercourse in the States (chapter 55) and in the penthouse (chapter 55) These memories represent the moment where the athlete felt strong and had the upper hand in their relationship. These images reveal that Joo Jaekyung hasn’t realized the signification of the kiss yet. For him, they don’t seem important. This exposes that the athlete has not associated kiss with love and affection yet. At the same time, we have to envision that a smooch is strongly intertwined with equity and trust. (chapter 28) And in episode 14, it was clear that the star still felt superior to his companion, therefore the kiss had no special meaning. As you can see, everything is pointing out that Joo Jaekyung had never been kissed before. And what does a kiss symbolize? Not only attachment, but also purity and innocence.

Finally, I would like Jinx-philes to recall the reminder from the green-haired uke: (chapter 42) According to him, doc Dan was not different from him. However, he was wrong. It is because the champion had kissed him!! Moreover, the celebrity had allowed doc Dan to kiss him as well. Besides, how did the champion name his past lovers? They were toys… normally people don’t kiss playthings. And now, imagine that doc Dan were to discover that Joo Jaekyung had his first kiss with him. This revelation would not only make him realize that Joo Jaekyung loves him, but also he could be wondering why the athlete had never done such a thing before, though he had past lovers. YES, the “first kiss” could be the trigger for both characters to question their respective past and perceive their fated partner correctly.

To conclude, the absence of kissing reveals that those relationships were purely transactional. They could not be dating. In contrast, Dan is the only one Jaekyung ever kisses. Later, when Jaekyung tries to replicate that kiss with the new “uke”, he recoils. (chapter 55) He cannot bring himself to kiss someone else. That moment exposes the kiss as something sacred—one that cannot be duplicated without emotional violation. In other words, he was one step closer to the truth: the kiss is strongly intertwined with attachment and feelings.

So for me, the abuser is the reason why the champion kept people at arms length. He felt insecure and threatened…. He had not only be cornered, but also silenced and ridiculed which seems to reinforce my other hypothesis that the star was abused sexually by an adult in the past. [For more read Guilty Truth ⚖ Or Dare 🤥🤡- part 2 ( locked)]

From my perspective, it was his first kiss, yes, but it came tangled in past fear and trauma. (chapter 54) This nightmare reflecting his childhood imply the absence of kiss, but more importantly intimacy is strongly connected with dominance, bullying and destruction. No wonder why the champion rejected intimacy later. Only with time—and Dan’s persistent tenderness—can the wolf begin to untangle touch from threat, and laughter from scorn. Hence I conclude that for the champion, face to face was a very uncomfortable position. This would explain why he felt the need to punch people… unconsciously, the punch is directed at his past abuser. And each time, he was insulted and provoked by his opponents, look how he reacted later: he targeted their face, the eyes and mouth. (chapter 15) (chapter 52) In that context, a kiss could never be affection, but vulnerability. A risk.

Virginity, Secrecy, and Misunderstanding

Both characters are wrapped in illusions about each other. Jaekyung likely assumes Dan has kissed others (chapter 3), based on Dan’s vague claim of prior partners. Yet Dan has never kissed anyone before. The kiss becomes his true moment of loss, a quiet confession through action. Conversely, Jaekyung’s own discomfort shows that he, too, is untouched in this particular way. When Dan tries to kiss Jaekyung again, and he instinctively rejects it, it reveals just how unprepared he is for affection. They are both unaware that the other is emotionally “pure” in this regard, and that makes the kiss a shared revelation.

Redefining Seduction: From Transaction to Intimacy

Since Kim Dan internalized sex as a form of debt repayment and professional obligation (chapter 67), Jaekyung must reinvent his approach. He cannot rely on dominance, strength, or sexual performance to win Dan’s heart. If he wants true connection, he must learn a new language—one built on gestures of affection, softness, and presence. This process also involves separating his public persona from his private longing. Joo Jaekyung, the champion, cannot seduce with spectacle. But Jaegeng, the man, might learn to express love through a simple touch, or a well-timed kiss. The redefinition of seduction is not just about Dan’s healing; it is about the wolf’s reclaiming his own right to feel and give love. And in my opinion, that process has already started: (chapter 69) That moment was devoid of lust, stripped of performance, and free from power dynamics. Jaekyung didn’t lean in for a kiss; he didn’t touch Dan’s lips or body with any sexual intent. Instead, he wrapped his arms around the physical therapist in silent reassurance, tucking his face against Dan’s shoulder as though hiding from the world. This was not a champion claiming a prize—it was a man expressing affection. The embrace exposes that doc Dan belongs to his “world” and he trusts him. In this light, the embrace becomes a prelude to a kiss—not a literal one, but an emotional kiss: a meeting place of vulnerability and longing.

The dock, surrounded by water, reinforces this symbolism. Water is traditionally associated with emotions, the unconscious, and transformation. By choosing this setting, the narrative invites us to see the wolf stepping into unfamiliar emotional territory—not with fists clenched, but arms open. Unlike the brutal kisses of season 1, this gesture is wordless but intimate. It communicates what he cannot yet articulate: “You matter. You’re safe with me. And I want to stay.”

In that stillness, without a single word or erotic touch, Jaekyung begins to kiss Dan in the truest sense—by offering presence, by being real. It is not seduction, but invitation. Not a test of loyalty, but a revelation of it.

Where Will He Learn the Meaning?

Since neither Shin Okja (chapter 65) nor his past partners provided him with genuine and affectionate touch, Jaekyung must look elsewhere. (chapter 57) Boksoon and her puppies may become his new mirror. Boksoon leaks affection without condition. Her dogs kiss as instinct, not strategy. Here, Jaekyung might discover what he missed: that kisses are not weapons, nor rewards, but a language of trust. He will not mimic affection from film. (chapter 29: note that he did not select this scene to rekindle with the doctor, but the other scene) He will learn it from life, from watching how the innocent express care without shame or purpose.

Jaekyung is not a man trained to love with softness, and yet this is exactly what Dan demands. Through subtle, non-erotic kisses, Dan teaches the wolf that it is not brute force that binds people, but longing and happiness. Not noise, but quiet. Not climax, but the pause. In parallel, Dan also begins to reshape another deeply ingrained association: laughter. (chapter 27) In Jaekyung’s past, laughter had been a weapon—an expression of ridicule and cruelty from an abuser. (chapter 54) It echoed through his memory as a sound of danger, not joy. But Dan’s laughter is different. It is light, sincere, and warm. (chapter 44) Just as his kisses invite connection rather than conquest, his joy opens a new possibility: that laughter can be shared rather than endured. In learning to receive these signs of affection—and perhaps one day to return them—Jaekyung is not just falling in love. He is healing. He is discovering that love is not shown through domination or performance, but through trust, gentleness, and the courage to be vulnerable.

Conclusion: A Kiss Is Never Just a Kiss

In Jinx, the first kiss is not just a threshold of romance—it is a psychological rupture. Jaekyung’s inability to process it, and Dan’s unconscious channeling of maternal tenderness, reveal how much has been buried under silence, shame, and trauma. The kiss destabilizes old roles: fighter, caretaker, orphan, predator. It marks the beginning of truth. Not just between two men, but within each of them. And that is why it matters who kissed whom, and why, and whether it has ever happened before.

PS: And now, you know why only the readers laughed, when they saw Jaegeng dressed like that. (chapter 62) If someone had laughed in front of him and made fun of him, this would have reopened his old wounds.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.